Hyundai 2019 Tucson User Manual

OOWWNNEERR''SS MMAANNUUAALL

OOppeerraattiioonn

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

SSppeecciiffiiccaattiioonnss

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of pub-

lication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at

any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be

carried out.

This manual applies to all HYUNDAI models and includes descrip-

tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.

As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply

to your specific vehicle.

Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way.

Such modifications may adversely affect the per-

formance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI

and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limit-

ed warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifi-

cations may also be in violation of regulations

established by the U.S. Department of

Transportation and other federal or state agencies.

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injec-

tion and other electronic components. It is possible

for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio

or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic

systems. For this reason, we recommend that you

carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-

tions or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precau-

tionary measures or special instructions if you

choose to install one of these devices.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO

YOUR HYUNDAI

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR

TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

This manual includes information titled as DAN-

GER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.

These titles indicate the following:

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE

WARNING

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation

which, if not avoided, will result in death or

serious injury.

DANGER

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation

which, if not avoided, could result in death

or serious injury.

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation

which, if not avoided, could result in minor or

moderate injury.

CAUTION

NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not

avoided, could result in vehicle damage.

NOTICE

WARNING

Your Hyundai vehicle may be equipped with technologies and services that use information collected,

generated, recorded or stored by the vehicle. Hyundai has created a Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy to explain

how these technologies and services collect use and share this information.

You may read our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy on the Hyundaiusa.com website at:

https://www.hyundaiusa.com/owner-privacy-policy.aspx

If you would like to receive a hard copy of our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy, please contact our Customer

Connect Center at:

Hyundai Customer Care

P.O. Box 20850

Fountain Valley, CA 92728

800-633-5151

consumeraff[email protected]

Hyundai's Customer Connect Center representatives are available Monday through Friday,

between the hours of 5:00 AM and 7:00 PM PST and Saturday and Sunday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM

PST (English).

For Customer Connect Center assistance in Spanish or Korean, representatives are available Monday

through Friday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM PST.

HYUNDAI VEHICLE OWNER PRIVACY POLICY

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations, and thank you for choosing HYUNDAI. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of

discerning people who drive a HYUNDAI vehicle. We are very proud of the advanced engineering and high-quality

construction of each HYUNDAI we build.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. To become familiar with

your new HYUNDAI, so that you can fully enjoy it, read this Owner's Manual carefully before driving your new vehicle.

This manual contains important safety information and instructions intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's con-

trols and safety features so you can safely operate your vehicle.

This manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance safe operation of the vehicle. It is recom-

mended that all service and maintenance on your vehicle be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. HYUNDAI

dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.

This Owner's Manual should be considered a permanent part of your vehicle, and should be kept in the vehicle so you

can refer to it at any time. The manual should stay with the vehicle if you sell it to provide the next owner with impor-

tant operating, safety and maintenance information.

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA

in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI

Motor America.

Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that

do not meet HYUNDAI specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the

specifications listed on Page 8-8 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.

CAUTION

1. What are HYUNDAI Genuine

Parts?

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are the

same parts used by HYUNDAI

Motor Company to manufacture

vehicles. They are designed and

tested for the optimum safety, per-

formance, and reliability for our

customers.

2. Why should you use genuine

parts?

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are engi-

neered and built to meet rigid man-

ufacturing requirements. Damage

caused by using imitation, counter-

feit or used salvage parts is not

covered under the HYUNDAI New

Vehicle Limited Warranty or any

other HYUNDAI warranty.

In addition, any damage to or fail-

ure of HYUNDAI Genuine Parts

caused by the installation or failure

of an imitation, counterfeit or used

salvage part is not covered by any

HYUNDAI Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are pur-

chasing HYUNDAI Genuine

Parts?

Look for the HYUNDAI Genuine

Parts Logo on the package (see

below).

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts exported

to the U.S. are packaged with

labels written only in English.

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are only

sold through authorized HYUNDAI

Dealerships.

GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS

Introduction

We want to help you get the greatest

possible driving pleasure from your

vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can

assist you in many ways. To gain an

overview of the contents of your

Owner’s Manual, use the Table of

Contents in the front of the manual.

The first page of each Chapter

includes a detailed Table of Contents

of the Topics in that Chapter.

To quickly locate information about

your vehicle, use the Index in the

back of the manual. It is an alphabet-

ical list of what is in this manual and

the page number where it can be

found.

For your convenience, we have

incorporated tabs on the right-hand

page edges. These tabs are coded

with the Chapter titles to assist you

with navigating through the manual.

Your safety, and the safety of others,

is very important. This Owner’s

Manual provides you with many safe-

ty precautions and operating proce-

dures. This information alerts you to

potential hazards that may hurt you

or others, as well as damage to your

vehicle.

Safety messages found on vehicle

labels and in this manual describe

these hazards and what to do to

avoid or reduce the risks.

Warnings and instructions contained

in this manual are for your safety.

Failure to follow safety warnings and

instructions can lead to serious injury

or death.

Throughout this manual DANGER,

WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and

the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL will

be used.

This is the safety alert sym-

bol. It is used to alert you to

potential physical injury haz-

ards. Obey all safety mes-

sages that follow this symbol

to avoid possible injury or

death. The safety alert sym-

bol precedes the signal words

DANGER, WARNING and

CAUTION.

HHOOWW TTOO UUSSEE TTHHIISS MMAANNUUAALL

DANGER indicates a hazardous

situation which, if not avoided,

will result in death or serious

injury.

DANGER

WARNING indicates a hazardous

situation which, if not avoided,

could result in death or serious

injury.

WARNING

SSAAFFEETTYY MMEESSSSAAGGEESS

Introduction

FFUUEELL RREEQQUUIIRREEMMEENNTTSS

NOTICE indicates a situation

which, if not avoided, could result

in vehicle damage.

Your new vehicle is designed to

obtain maximum performance with

UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-

mize exhaust emissions and spark

plug fouling.

Your new vehicle is designed to use

only unleaded fuel having an octane

number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research

Octane Number 91) or higher. (Do not

use methanol blended fuels)

To prevent damage to the engine

and engine components, never

add any fuel system cleaning

agents to the fuel tank other than

what has been specified.

Consult an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer for additional information.

Gasoline containing alcohol or

methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and

ethanol (also known as grain alco-

hol) are being marketed along with or

instead of leaded or unleaded gaso-

line. For example, "E15" is a gasohol

comprised of 15% ethanol and 85%

gasoline.

Do not use gasohol containing more

than 15% ethanol, and do not use

gasoline or gasohol containing any

methanol. Either of these fuels may

cause drivability problems and dam-

age to the fuel system, engine control

system and emission control system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any

kind if drivability problems occur.

NOTICE

CAUTION indicates a hazardous

situation which, if not avoided,

could result in minor or moder-

ate injury.

CAUTION

• Do not "top off" after the noz-

zle automatically shuts off

when refueling.

• Always check that the fuel cap

is installed securely to pre-

vent fuel spillage in the event

of an accident.

WARNING

Introduction

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-

prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15

percent gasoline, and is manufac-

tured exclusively for use in Flexible

Fuel Vehicles. "E85" is not compati-

ble with your vehicle. Use of "E85"

may result in poor engine perform-

ance and damage to your vehicle's

engine and fuel system. HYUNDAI

recommends that customers do not

use fuel with an ethanol content

exceeding 15 percent.

To prevent damage to your vehicle’s

engine and fuel system:

• Never use gasohol which con-

tains methanol.

• Never use gasohol containing

more than 15% ethanol.

• Never use leaded fuel or leaded

gasohol.

• Never use "E85" fuel.

Your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty does not cover damage

to the fuel system or any perform-

ance problems caused by the use

of "E85" fuel.

Using Fuel Additives (except

Detergent Fuel Additives)

Using fuel additives such as:

- Silicone fuel additive

- Ferrocene (iron-based) fuel additive

- Other metallic-based fuel additives

may result in cylinder misfire, poor

acceleration, engine stalling, dam-

age to the catalyst, or abnormal cor-

rosion, and may cause damage to

the engine resulting in a reduction in

the overall life of the powertrain.

- The Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(MIL) may illuminate.

Damage to the fuel system or per-

formance problem caused by the

use of these fuels or fuel additives

may not be covered by your New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains harmful

manganese-based fuel additives

such as

MMT (

Methylcyclopentadienyl

Manganese Tricarbonyl

)

HYUNDAI does not recommend the

use of gasoline containing MMT.

This type of fuel can reduce vehicle

performance and affect your emis-

sion control system.

The malfunction indicator lamp on

the cluster may come on.

Detergent Fuel Additives

HYUNDAI recommends that you use

good quality gasolines treated with

detergent additives such as TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline, which help pre-

vent deposit formation in the engine.

These gasolines will help the engine

run cleaner and enhance performance

of the Emission Control System. For

more information on TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline, please go to the

website (www.toptiergas.com).

NOTICE

Introduction

For customers who do not use TOP

Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly,

and have problems starting or the

engine does not run smoothly, deter-

gent-based fuel additives that you

can purchase separately may be

added to the gasoline. If TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline is not available,

one bottle of additive added to the

fuel tank according to the mainte-

nance schedule is recommended

(refer to the Maintenance Schedule

in chapter 7).

Additives are available from your

authorized HYUNDAI dealer along

with information on how to use them.

Do not mix other additives.

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle

in another country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding

registration and insurance.

• Determine that acceptable fuel is

available.

No special break-in period is needed.

By following a few simple precautions

for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you

may add to the performance, econo-

my and life of your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.

• While driving, keep your engine

speed (rpm, or revolutions per

minute) between 2,000 rpm and

4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed for

long periods of time, either fast or

slow. Varying engine speed is need-

ed to properly break-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-

gencies, to allow the brakes to seat

properly.

VVEEHHIICCLLEE BBRREEAAKK--IINN PPRROOCCEESSSS

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Items contained in motor vehi-

cles or emitted from them are

known to the State of California

to cause cancer and birth

defects or reproductive harm.

These include:

• Gasoline and its vapors

• Engine exhaust

• Used engine oil

• Interior passenger compart-

ment components and materi-

als

• Component parts which are

subject to heat and wear

In addition, battery posts, termi-

nals and related accessories

contain lead, lead compounds

and other chemicals known to

the State of California to cause

cancer and reproductive harm.

WARNING

F10

Introduction

This vehicle is equipped with an

event data recorder (EDR). The

main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an

air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist

in understanding how a vehicle’s

systems performed. The EDR is

designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety sys-

tems for a short period of time,

typically 30 seconds or less. The

EDR in this vehicle is designed to

record such data as:

• How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts were

buckled/ fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator

and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was travel-

ing.

These data can help provide a bet-

ter understanding of the circum-

stances in which crashes and

injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data

are recorded by your vehicle only

if a non-trivial crash situation

occurs; no data are recorded by

the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data

(e.g., name, gender, age, and

crash location) are recorded.

However, other parties, such as

law enforcement, could combine

the EDR data with the type of per-

sonally identifying data routinely

acquired during a crash investiga-

tion.

To read data recorded by an EDR,

special equipment is required, and

access to the vehicle or the EDR is

needed. In addition to the vehicle

manufacturer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the

special equipment, can read the

information if they have access to

the vehicle or the EDR.

VVEEHHIICCLLEE DDAATTAA CCOOLLLLEECCTTIIOONN AANNDD EEVVEENNTT DDAATTAA RREECCOORRDDEERRSS

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Safety System of Your Vehicle

Convenient Features of Your Vehicle

Multimedia System

Driving Your Vehicle

What to Do in an Emergency

Maintenance

Specifications, Consumer Information and

Reporting Safety Defects

Index

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior overview ..................................................1-2

Interior overview....................................................1-4

Instrument panel overview...................................1-5

Engine compartment .............................................1-6

1-2

EEXXTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW

Your vehicle at a glance

1. Panoramic sunroof ..............................3-43

2. Wiper blades ............................3-122, 7-30

3. Side view mirror ..................................3-36

4. Door ....................................................3-15

5. Headlamps ..............................3-107, 7-65

6. DRL (Daytime Running Light) ..3-107, 7-65

7. Front fog lamp* ........................3-114, 7-65

8. Hood....................................................3-47

9. Tires and wheels ................................7-36

* : if equipped

OTL018001N

■■

Front view

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-3

Your vehicle at a glance

1. Antenna ................................................4-2

2. Rear window wiper blade ........3-123, 7-32

3. Fuel filler door ....................................3-48

4. Towing hook ........................................6-23

5. Rear lamp............................................7-70

6. Liftgate ................................................3-52

7. High mounted stop lamp ....................7-73

8. Rear View Monitor ............................3-124

OTL018002N

■■

Rear view

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-4

Your vehicle at a glance

IINNTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW

1. Door lock/unlock button ........................3-16

2. Power window switches*........................3-39

3. Central door lock switch* ......................3-17

4. Power window lock switch* ....................3-42

5. Side view mirror control switch* ............3-37

6. Instrument panel illumination control

switch*....................................................3-66

7. Blind-spot Collision Warning (BCW)

system* ..................................................5-52

8. Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system* ......5-87

9. ESC OFF button* ..................................5-35

10. AWD LOCK button* ............................5-43

11. Power liftgate button* ..........................3-54

12. Fuse box ..............................................7-52

13. Steering wheel ....................................3-21

14. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever* ......3-22

15. Seat........................................................2-4

16. Hood release lever ..............................3-47

* : if equipped

OTL018003N

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-5

Your vehicle at a glance

1. Light control/Turn signals..................3-107

2. Steering wheel audio controls* ............4-3

3. Instrument cluster ..............................3-65

4. Horn ....................................................3-23

5. Driver's front air bag ..........................2-50

6. Wiper/Washer ..................................3-120

7. Cruise Control Switches* ......5-100, 5-105

8. Engine Start/Stop button* ....................5-9

9. Key ignition switch ................................5-6

10. Audio system/Navigation system* ......4-4

11. Hazard warning flasher switch ............6-2

12. Manual climate control system/........3-127

Automatic climate control system*

..3-137

13. Power outlet ....................................3-161

14. Aux, USB and iPod

..........................4-2

15. Wireless cellular phone charging

system* ..........................................3-162

16. Shift lever ..........................................5-14

17. Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)* ......5-24

18. Drive mode button* ..........................5-51

19. Auto hold button* ..............................5-30

20. Downhill Brake Control (DBC)* ........5-40

21. Surround View Monitor* ..................3-125

22. Cup holder* ....................................3-159

23. Console box ....................................3-157

24. Passenger's front air bag..................2-50

25. Glove box........................................3-157

26. USB charger ..................................3-162

* : if equipped

OTL018004N

1-6

EENNGGIINNEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

Your vehicle at a glance

OTLA075001

■■

Nu 2.0 GDI

1. Engine coolant reservoir/

Radiator cap .....................................7-19

2. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-23

3. Air cleaner.........................................7-25

4. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-17

5. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-18

6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-24

7. Fuse box ...........................................7-53

8. Battery terminal [+] ...........................7-33

9. Battery terminal [-] ............................7-33

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1-7

Your vehicle at a glance

OTLE075104

■■

Theta II 2.4 GDI

1. Engine coolant reservoir/

Radiator cap .....................................7-19

2. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-23

3. Air cleaner.........................................7-25

4. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-17

5. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-18

6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-24

7. Fuse box ...........................................7-53

8. Battery terminal [+] ...........................7-33

9. Battery terminal [-] ............................7-33

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Safety system of your vehicle

Important Safety Precautions..............................2-2

Always Wear Your Seat Belt ..........................................2-2

Restrain All Children.........................................................2-2

Air Bag Hazards.................................................................2-2

Driver Distraction ..............................................................2-2

Control Your Speed...........................................................2-3

Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition............................2-3

Seats ........................................................................2-4

Safety Precautions ...........................................................2-5

Front Seats .........................................................................2-6

Rear Seats.........................................................................2-12

Head restraints ................................................................2-15

Heated Seats and Ventilated Seats ............................2-20

Seat Belts..............................................................2-24

Seat Belt Safety Precautions.......................................2-24

Seat Belt Warning Light ................................................2-25

Seat Belt Restraint System...........................................2-26

Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions...................2-34

Care of Seat Belts...........................................................2-37

Child Restraint System (CRS).............................2-38

Children Always in the Rear.........................................2-38

Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) .................2-39

Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-41

Air Bag - Advanced Supplemental Restraint

System ...................................................................2-48

Where Are the Air Bags?..............................................2-50

How Does the Air Bag System Operate?..................2-54

What to Expect After an Air Bag Inflates................2-58

Occupant Classification System (OCS).......................2-59

Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision? ........2-65

SRS Care............................................................................2-71

Additional Safety Precautions .....................................2-72

Air Bag Warning Labels.................................................2-73

This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers.

It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work.

Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.

2-2

You will find many safety precautions

and recommendations throughout

this section, and throughout this man-

ual.The safety precautions in this sec-

tion are among the most important.

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

A seat belt is your best protection in

all types of accidents. Air bags are

designed to supplement seat belts,

not replace them. So even though

your vehicle is equipped with air bags,

ALWAYS make sure you and your

passengers wear your seat belts, and

wear them properly.

Restrain All Children

All children under age 13 should ride

in your vehicle properly restrained in

a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants

and small children should be

restrained in an appropriate child

restraint. Larger children should use

a booster seat with the lap/shoulder

belt until they can use the seat belt

properly without a booster seat.

Air Bag Hazards

While air bags can save lives, they

can also cause serious or fatal

injuries to occupants who sit too

close to them, or who are not prop-

erly restrained. Infants, young chil-

dren, and shorter adults are at the

greatest risk of being injured by an

inflating air bag. Follow all instruc-

tions and warnings in this manual.

Driver Distraction

Driver distraction presents a serious

and potentially deadly danger, espe-

cially for inexperienced drivers. Safety

should be the first concern when

behind the wheel and drivers need to

be aware of the wide array of potential

distractions, such as drowsiness,

reaching for objects, eating, personal

grooming, other passengers, and

using cellular phones.

Drivers can become distracted when

they take their eyes and attention off

the road or their hands off the wheel

to focus on activities other than driv-

ing. To reduce your risk of distraction

or getting into an accident:

IIMMPPOORRTTAANNTT SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS

Safety system of your vehicle

2-3

Safety system of your vehicle

• ALWAYS set up your mobile devices

(i.e., MP3 players, phones, naviga-

tion units, etc.) when your vehicle is

parked or safely stopped.

• ONLY use your mobile device when

allowed by laws and when conditions

permit safe use. NEVER text or

email while driving. Most states have

laws prohibiting drivers from texting.

Some states and cities also prohibit

drivers from using handheld phones.

• NEVER let the use of a mobile

device distract you from driving. You

have a responsibility to your passen-

gers and others on the road to

always drive safely, with your hands

on the wheel as well as your eyes

and attention on the road.

Control Your Speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in

crash injuries and deaths. Generally,

the higher the speed, the greater the

risk, but serious injuries can also

occur at lower speeds. Never drive

faster than is safe for current condi-

tions, regardless of the maximum

speed posted.

Keep Your Vehicle in Safe

Condition

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical

failure can be extremely hazardous. To

reduce the possibility of such prob-

lems, check your tire pressures and

condition frequently, and perform all

regularly scheduled maintenance.

2-4

SSEEAATTSS

Safety system of your vehicle

OTL035001L

Front seats

(1) Forward and backward

(2) Seatback angle

(3) Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)

(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*

(5) Seat warmer*

(6) Air ventilation seat*

(7) Head restraint

Rear seats

(8) Seatback angle and folding

(9) Head restraint

(10) Armrest

(11) Seat warmer*

* : if equipped

Safety Precautions

Adjusting the seats so that you are sit-

ting in a safe, comfortable position

plays an important role in driver and

passenger safety together with the

seat belts and air bags in an accident.

Air bags

You can take steps to reduce the risk

of being injured by an inflating air

bag. Sitting too close to an air bag

greatly increases the risk of injury in

the event the air bag inflates.

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) recommends

that drivers allow at least 10 inches

(25 cm) between the center of the

steering wheel and their chest.

Seat belts

Always fasten your seat belt before

starting any trip.

At all times, passengers should sit

upright and be properly restrained.

Infants and small children must be

restrained in appropriate child

restraint systems. Adults and chil-

dren who have outgrown a booster

seat must be restrained using the

seat belts.

Do not use a cushion that

reduces friction between the seat

and the passenger. The passen-

ger’s hips may slide under the

lap portion of the seat belt during

an accident or a sudden stop.

Serious or fatal internal injuries

could result because the seat

belt cannot operate properly.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from an inflating

air bag, take the following pre-

cautions:

• Adjust the driver's seat as far

to the rear as possible while

maintaining the ability to

maintain full control of the

vehicle.

• Adjust the front passenger

seat as far to the rear as pos-

sible.

• Hold the steering wheel by the

rim with hands at the 9 o'clock

and 3 o'clock positions to

minimize the risk of injuries to

your hands and arms.

• NEVER place anything or any-

one between the steering

wheel and the air bag.

• Do not allow the front passen-

ger to place feet or legs on the

dashboard to minimize the

risk of leg injuries.

WARNING

2-5

Safety system of your vehicle

2-6

Safety system of your vehicle

Front Seats

Take the following precautions

when adjusting your seat belt:

• NEVER use one seat belt for

more than one occupant.

• Always position the seatback

upright with the lap portion of

the seat belt snug and low

across the hips.

• NEVER allow children or small

infants to ride in a passenger’s

lap.

• Do not route the seat belt

across your neck, across sharp

edges, or reroute the shoulder

strap away from your body.

• Do not allow the seat belt to

become caught or jammed.

WARNING

Take the following precautions

when adjusting your seat:

• NEVER attempt to adjust the

seat while the vehicle is mov-

ing. The seat could respond

with unexpected movement

and may cause loss of vehicle

control resulting in an acci-

dent.

• Do not place anything under

the front seats. Loose objects

in the driver’s foot area could

interfere with the operation of

the foot pedals, causing an

accident.

• Do not allow anything to inter-

fere with the normal position

and proper locking of the seat-

back.

• Do not place a cigarette lighter

on the floor or seat. When you

operate the seat, gas may exit

out of the lighter causing a fire.

WARNING

To prevent injury:

• Do not adjust your seat while

wearing your seat belt.

Moving the seat cushion for-

ward may cause strong pres-

sure on your abdomen.

• Do not allow your hands or

fingers to get caught in the

seat mechanisms while the

seat is moving.

CAUTION

• Use extreme caution when

picking up small objects

trapped under the seats or

between the seat and the cen-

ter console. Your hands might

be cut or injured by the sharp

edges of the seat mechanism.

2-7

Safety system of your vehicle

Manual adjustment

The front seat can be adjusted by

using the levers located on the out-

side of the seat cushion. Before driv-

ing, adjust the seat to the proper

position so that you can easily con-

trol the steering wheel, foot pedals

and controls on the instrument

panel.

Forward and rearward adjustment

To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment

lever and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure

the seat is locked in place. Move

forward and rearward without using

the lever. If the seat moves, it is not

locked properly.

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the

seatback lever.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat

and adjust the seatback to the

position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure

the seatback is locked in place.

(The lever MUST return to its orig-

inal position for the seatback to

lock.)

OTL035003

OTL035002

2-8

Reclining seatback

Sitting in a reclined position when

the vehicle is in motion can be dan-

gerous. Even when buckled up, the

protection of your restraint system

(seat belts and air bags) is greatly

reduced by reclining your seatback.

Seat belts must be snug against your

hips and chest to work properly.

When the seatback is reclined, the

shoulder belt cannot do its job

because it will not be snug against

your chest. Instead, it will be in front

of you. During an accident, you could

be thrown into the seat belt, causing

neck or other injuries.

The more the seatback is reclined,

the greater chance the passenger’s

hips will slide under the lap belt or

the passenger’s neck will strike the

shoulder belt.

Seat cushion height

To change the height of the seat

cushion:

• Push down on the lever several

times, to lower the seat cushion.

• Pull up on the lever several times,

to raise the seat cushion.

Safety system of your vehicle

OTL035004

NEVER ride with a reclined

seatback when the vehicle is

moving.

Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your chance of seri-

ous or fatal injuries in the event

of a collision or sudden stop.

Drivers and passengers should

ALWAYS sit well back in their

seats, properly belted, and with

the seatbacks upright.

WARNING

2-9

Safety system of your vehicle

Power adjustment

The front seat can be adjusted by

using the control switches located on

the outside of the seat cushion.

Before driving, adjust the seat to the

proper position so that you can easi-

ly control the steering wheel, foot

pedals and controls on the instru-

ment panel.

To prevent damage to the seats:

• Always stop adjusting the seats

when the seat has moved as far

forward or rearward as possible.

• Do not adjust the seats for

longer than necessary when the

engine is turned off. This may

result in unnecessary battery

drain.

• Do not operate two or more

seats at the same time. This may

result in an electrical malfunc-

tion.

Forward and rearward adjustment

To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Push the control switch forward or

rearward.

2. Release the switch once the seat

reaches the desired position.

NOTICE

NEVER allow children in the

vehicle unattended. The power

seats are operable when the

engine is turned off.

WARNING

OTL035005

2-10

Safety system of your vehicle

Seatback angle

To adjust the seatback:

1. Rotate the top of control switch

forward or rearward.

2. Release the switch once the seat-

back reaches the desired position.

Reclining seatback

Sitting in a reclined position when

the vehicle is in motion can be dan-

gerous. Even when buckled up, the

protections of your restraint system

(seat belts and air bags) is greatly

reduced by reclining your seatback.

Seat belts must be snug against your

hips and chest to work properly.

When the seatback is reclined, the

shoulder belt cannot do its job

because it will not be snug against

your chest. Instead, it will be in front

of you. During an accident, you could

be thrown into the seat belt, causing

neck or other injuries.

The more the seatback is reclined,

the greater chance the passenger's

hips will slide under the lap belt or

the passenger’s neck will strike the

shoulder belt.

OTL035006

NEVER ride with a reclined seat-

back when the vehicle is moving.

Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your chance of serious

or fatal injuries in the event of a

collision or sudden stop.

Driver and passengers should

ALWAYS sit well back in their

seats, properly belted, and with

the seatbacks upright.

WARNING

2-11

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat cushion tilt (1)

To change the angle of the front part

of the seat cushion:

Push the front portion of the control

switch up to raise or down to lower

the front part of the seat cushion.

Release the switch once the seat

reaches the desired position.

Seat cushion height (2)

To change the height of the seat

cushion:

Push the rear portion of the control

switch up to raise or down to lower

the height of the seat cushion.

Release the switch once the seat

reaches the desired position.

Lumbar support

(for driver's seat, if equipped)

The lumbar support can be adjusted

by pressing the lumbar support

switch.

• Press the front portion of the

switch to increase support or the

rear portion of the switch to

decrease support.

OTL035008OTL035051

2-12

Safety system of your vehicle

Seatback pocket

The seatback pocket is provided on

the back of the front seatbacks.

Rear Seats

Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded to

facilitate carrying long items or to

increase the luggage capacity of the

vehicle.

To fold down the rear seatback:

1. Set the front seatback to the

upright position and if necessary,

slide the front seat forward.

2. Lower the rear head restraints to

the lowest position.

• Never allow passengers to sit

on top of the folded down

seatback while the vehicle is

moving. This is not a proper

seating position and no seat

belts are available for use.

This could result in serious

injury or death in case of an

accident or sudden stop.

• Objects carried on the folded

down seatback should not

extend higher than the top of

the front seatbacks. This

could allow cargo to slide for-

ward and cause injury or dam-

age during sudden stops.

WARNING

OTLE035060

OTL035017

Do not put heavy or sharp

objects in the seatback pockets.

In an accident they could come

loose from the pocket and

injure occupants.

CAUTION

2-13

Safety system of your vehicle

3. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in

the pocket between the rear seat-

back and cushion, and insert the

rear seat belt webbing in the guide

to prevent the seat belt from being

damaged.

4. Fold the seatback toward the front

of the vehicle.

5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull

the seatback rearward. Pull the

seatback firmly until it clicks into

place. Make sure the seatback is

locked in place.

When you return the seatback to

its upright position, always be sure

it has locked into position by push-

ing on the top of the seatback.

OTLE035024 OTLE035025OTL035029

OTLE035023

2-14

Armrest

The armrest is located in the center

of the rear seat. Pull the armrest

down by using the strap from the

seatback to use it.

You will find cup holders on the cen-

ter armrest.

Safety system of your vehicle

Make sure the engine is off, the

shift lever is in P (Park), and the

parking brake is securely applied

whenever loading or unloading

cargo. Failure to take these steps

may allow the vehicle to move if

the shift lever is inadvertently

moved to another position.

WARNING

OTLE035021

Do not place objects in the rear

seats, since they cannot be

properly secured and may hit

vehicle occupants in a collision

causing serious injury or death.

WARNING

When returning the rear seat-

back from a folded to an upright

position, hold the seatback and

return it slowly. Ensure that the

seatback is completely locked

into its upright position by

pushing on the top of the seat-

back. In an accident or sudden

stop, the unlocked seatback

could allow cargo to move for-

ward with great force and enter

the passenger compartment,

which could result in serious

injury or death.

WARNING

2-15

Safety system of your vehicle

Head restraints

The vehicle’s front and rear seats

have adjustable head restraints. The

head restraints provide comfort for

passengers, but more importantly

they are designed to help protect

passengers from whiplash and other

neck and spinal injuries during an

accident, especially in a rear impact

collision.

• Be careful when loading

cargo through the rear pas-

senger seats to prevent dam-

age to the vehicle interior.

• When cargo is loaded through

the rear passenger seats,

ensure the cargo is properly

secured to prevent it from

moving while driving.

• Unsecured cargo in the pas-

senger compartment can

cause damage to the vehicle

or injury to it’s occupants.

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death in an accident,

take the following precautions

when adjusting your head

restraints:

• Always properly adjust the

head restraints for all passen-

gers BEFORE starting the

vehicle.

• NEVER let anyone ride in a

seat with the head restraints

removed or reversed.

•

Adjust the head restraints so

the middle of the head

restraints is at the same height

as the height of the top of the

eyes.

• NEVER adjust the head

restraint position of the dri-

ver’s seat when the vehicle is

in motion.

• Adjust the head restraint as

close to the passenger’s head

as possible. Do not use a seat

cushion that holds the body

away from the seatback.

• Make sure the head restraint

locks into position after adjust-

ing it.

WARNING

OLF034072N

2-16

Safety system of your vehicle

To prevent damage, NEVER hit or

pull on the head restraints.

Front seat head restraints

The vehicle's front seats are

equipped with adjustable head

restraints for both safety and com-

fort.

Forward and rearward adjustment

The headrest may be adjusted for-

ward to 3 different positions by

pulling the headrest forward to the

desired detent. To adjust the head-

rest to it’s furthest rearwards posi-

tion, pull it fully forward to the farthest

position and release it.

NOTICE

OLMB033009

OTL035014

2-17

Safety system of your vehicle

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the head restraint:

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the head restraint:

1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the head restraint support.

2. Lower the head restraint to the

desired position (3).

If you recline the seatback towards

the front with the head restraint

and seat cushion raised, the head

restraint may come in contact with

the sunvisor or other parts of the

vehicle.

Removal/Reinstallation

To remove the head restraint:

1. Recline the seatback (2) rearward

using the seatback angle lever/

switch (1).

NOTICE

OLF034015

OTL035009 OTL035010

■ Manual seat

OTL035011

■ Power seat

2-18

Safety system of your vehicle

2. Raise the head restraint as far as it

can go.

3. Press the head restraint release

button (3) while pulling upward on

the head restraint (4).

To reinstall the head restraint:

1. Put the head restraint poles (2) into

the holes while pressing the

release button (1).

2. Adjust the head restraint to the

appropriate height.

3. Recline the seatback (4) forward

using the seatback angle lever/

switch (3).

OTL035012

■ Manual seat

OTL035013

■ Power seat

2-19

Safety system of your vehicle

Rear seat head restraints

The rear seats are equipped with

head restraints in all seating posi-

tions for passenger's safety and

comfort.

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the head restraint:

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the head restraint:

1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the head restraint support.

2. Lower the head restraint to the

desired position (3).

Removal/Reinstallation

To remove the head restraint:

1. Raise the head restraint as far as

it can go.

2. Press the head restraint release

button (1) while pulling the head

restraint up (2).

To reinstall the head restraint:

1. Put the head restraint poles into

the holes (3) while pressing the

release button (1).

2. Adjust the head restraint to the

appropriate height.

OTL038020NOTLE035018

OLMB033016

2-20

Safety system of your vehicle

Heated Seats and Ventilated

Seats

Front seat heaters (if equipped)

Seat heaters are provided to warm

the seats during cold weather.

To prevent damage to the seat

heater and seats:

• Never use a solvent such as

paint thinner, benzene, alcohol

or gasoline to clean the seats.

• Do not place heavy or sharp

objects on seats equipped with

seat heater.

• Do not change the seat cover. It

may damage the seat heater.

When the engine is running, the seat

heaters may be operated. Press the

driver's side button to heat the driver

seat or press the passenger side but-

ton to heat the passenger seat.

NOTICE

The seat warmers can cause a

SERIOUS BURN, even at low

temperatures and especially if

used for long periods of time.

Passengers must be able to feel

if the seat is becoming too warm

so they can turn it off, if needed.

People who cannot detect tem-

perature change or pain to the

skin should use extreme cau-

tion, especially the following

types of passengers:

• Infants, children, elderly or

disabled persons, or hospital

outpatients.

• People with sensitive skin or

who burn easily.

• Fatigued individuals.

• Intoxicated individuals.

• People taking medication that

can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness.

WARNING

NEVER place anything on the

seat that insulates against heat

when the seat heater is in opera-

tion, such as a blanket or seat

cushion. This may cause the

seat warmer to overheat, caus-

ing a burn or damage to the seat.

WARNING

OTLE035075

■ Type A

OTLE035076

■ Type B

2-21

Safety system of your vehicle

During mild weather or under condi-

tions where the operation of the seat

heater is not needed, keep the switch-

es in the OFF position.

• Manual temperature control

Each time you press the front seat

heater button, the temperature set-

ting of the seat is changed as fol-

lows :

• Automatic temperature control

The front seat heater will automat-

ically adjust the temperature level

after an extended period of time in

order to reduce long term exposure

with the seat heater.

If you re-select the HIGH tempera-

ture mode by pressing the front

seat heater button, the automatic

timer will reset and start again.

• When pressing the switch for more

than 1.5 seconds with the seat

heater operating, the seat heater

will turn OFF.

• The seat heater defaults to the OFF

position each time the ignition

switch is turned to the ON position.

Information

With the seat heater switch in the ON

position, the heating system in the seat

turns off or on automatically depend-

ing on the seat temperature.

Front ventilated seats

(if equipped)

OFF HIGH ( )

LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )

→

OFF HIGH ( )

LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )

→

30 MIN

60 MIN

OTLE035016

■ Type A

OTLE035015

■ Type B

2-22

Safety system of your vehicle

The ventilated seats are provided to

cool the front seats by blowing air

through small vent holes on the sur-

face of the seat cushions and seat-

backs.

When the operation of the ventilated

seat is not needed, keep the switch-

es in the OFF position.

When the engine is running, the ven-

tilated seats may be operated. Press

the driver's side button to cool the

driver seat or press the passenger

side button to cool the passenger

seat.

• Each time you press the ventilated

seats button, the temperature set-

ting of the seat is changed as fol-

lows:

• When pressing the switch for more

than 1.5 seconds with the ventilat-

ed seat operating, the operation

will turn OFF.

• The ventilated seats defaults to

the OFF position each time the

ignition switch is turned to the ON

position.

To prevent damage to the air ven-

tilation seat:

• Use the ventilated seats only

when the climate control system

is ON. Using the ventilated seats

for prolonged periods with the

climate control system OFF

could cause the ventilated seat

to malfunction.

• Never use a solvent such as

paint thinner, benzene, alcohol

or gasoline to clean the seats.

• Avoid spilling liquids on the sur-

face of the front seats and seat-

backs; this may cause the air

vent holes to become blocked

and not work properly.

• Do not place materials such as

plastic bags or newspapers

under the seats. They may block

the air intake causing the air

vents to not work properly.

• Do not change the seat covers. It

may damage the ventilated seat.

• If the air vents do not operate,

restart the vehicle. If there is no

change, have the vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

OFF HIGH ( )

LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )

→

2-23

Safety system of your vehicle

Rear seat heaters (if equipped)

When the engine is running, the rear

seat heaters may be operated. Press

the button on the door press the pas-

senger side button to heat the pas-

senger seat.

During mild weather or under condi-

tions where the operation of the seat

heater is not needed, keep the

switches in the OFF position.

• Manual temperature control

Each time you press the rear seat

heater button, the temperature set-

ting of the seat is changed as fol-

lows :

• Automatic temperature control

The rear seat heater will automati-

cally adjust the temperature level

after an extended period of time in

order to reduce long term exposure

with the seat heater.

If you re-select the HIGH tempera-

ture mode by pressing the rear

seat heater button, the automatic

timer will reset and start again.

• The seat heater defaults to the

OFF position whenever the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position.

Information

With the seat heater switch in the ON

position, the heating system in the seat

turns off or on automatically depend-

ing on the seat temperature.

OTL035022

OFF → HIGH () → LOW ()

→

30 MIN

OFF HIGH ( ) LOW ( )

→

2-24

Safety system of your vehicle

This section describes how to use the

seat belts properly. It also describes

some of the things to avoid when

using seat belts.

Seat Belt Safety Precautions

Always fasten your seat belt and

make sure all passengers have fas-

tened their seat belts before starting

any trip. Air bags are designed to

supplement the seat belt as an addi-

tional safety device, but they are not a

substitute. Most states require all

occupants of a vehicle to wear seat

belts.

SSEEAATT BBEELLTTSS

Seat belts must be used by ALL

passengers whenever the vehi-

cle is moving. Take the following

precautions when adjusting and

wearing seat belts:

• ALWAYS properly restrain

children under age 13 in the

rear seats.

• NEVER allow children to ride

in the front passenger seat. If

a child age 13 or older must be

seated in the front seat, move

the seat as far back as possi-

ble and properly restrain them

in the seat.

• NEVER allow an infant or child

to be carried on an occupant’s

lap.

• NEVER ride with the seatback

reclined when the vehicle is

moving.

• Do not allow children to share

a seat or seat belt.

WARNING

• Do not wear the shoulder belt

under your arm or behind your

back.

• Always wear both the shoul-

der portion and lap portion of

the lap/shoulder belt.

• Do not use the seat belt if it is

twisted. A twisted seat belt

will not protect you properly

in an accident.

• Do not use a seat belt if the

webbing or hardware is dam-

aged.

• Do not latch the seat belt into

the buckles of other seats.

• NEVER unfasten the seat belt

while driving. This may cause

loss of vehicle control result-

ing in an accident.

• Make sure there is nothing in

the buckle interfering with the

seat belt latch mechanism.

This may prevent the seat belt

from fastening securely.

2-25

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat Belt Warning Light

Seat belt warning light

Driver's seat belt warning

The driver's seat belt warning light

and chime will come on according to

the following table when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

: The Warning Pattern repeats 11 times with

an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver’s seat

belt is buckled, the light will stop within 6

seconds and chime will stop immediately.

: The light will stop within 6 seconds and

chime will stop immediately.

Damaged seat belts and seat

belt assemblies will not operate

properly. Always replace:

• Frayed, contaminated, or dam-

aged webbing

• Damaged hardware

• The entire seat belt assembly

after it has been worn in an

accident, even if damage to

webbing or assembly is not

apparent

WARNING

OLMB033022

• No modifications or additions

should be made by the user

which will either prevent the

seat belt adjusting devices

from operating to remove

slack, or prevent the seat belt

assembly from being adjusted

to remove slack.

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat Belt

Vehicle

Speed

Light (Blink) Chime

Unbuckled 6 seconds

Buckled 6 seconds None

Buckled →

Unbuckled

Below 3 mph

(5 km/h)

6 seconds None

3 mph~

6 mph

6 seconds

Above 6 mph

(10 km/h)

6 sec. ON / 24 sec. OFF

(11 times)

Unbuckled

Above 6 mph

(10 km/h)

↓

Below 3 mph

(5 km/h)

6 seconds *

↓

Stop *

2-26

Safety system of your vehicle

Front passenger's seat belt warning

The front passenger's seat belt

warning light will activate to the fol-

lowing table when the ignition switch

is in "ON" position.

: The seat belt warning light will go off if the

vehicle speed decreases below 3 mph (5

km/h). If the vehicle speed increases above

3 mph (5 km/h), the warning light will blink

again.

Seat Belt Restraint System

Seat Belt-Driver's 3-point sys-

tem with emergency locking

retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

Pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the metal tab (1) into the

buckle (2). There will be an audible

"click" when the tab locks into the

buckle.

Conditions

Warning

Pattern

Seat Belt

Vehicle

Speed

Light-Blink

Unbuckled 6 seconds

Unbuckled

Above 6mph

(10 km/h)

Continuously

Buckled 6 seconds

Buckled →

Unbuckled

Above 6mph

(10 km/h)

Continuously *

Below 6mph

(10 km/h)

None

OTLE035082

OHSS038101

2-27

Safety system of your vehicle

You should place the lap belt (1) por-

tion across your hips and the shoul-

der belt (2) portion across your chest.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to

the proper length after the lap belt por-

tion is adjusted manually so that it fits

snugly around your hips. If you lean

forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt

will extend and move with you.

If there is a sudden stop or impact,

the belt will lock into position. It will

also lock if you try to lean forward too

quickly.

If you are not able to smoothly pull

enough of the seat belt out from

the retractor, firmly pull the seat

belt out and release it. After

release, you will be able to pull the

belt out smoothly.

NOTICE

OHSS038102OHSS038102L

Improperly positioned seat belts

may increase the risk of serious

injury in an accident. Take the fol-

lowing precautions when adjust-

ing the seat belt:

• Position the lap portion of the

seat belt as low as possible

across your hips, not on your

waist, so that it fits snugly.

WARNING

2-28

Safety system of your vehicle

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the

shoulder belt anchor to one of the

four different positions for maximum

comfort and safety.

The shoulder portion should be

adjusted so it lies across your chest

and midway over your shoulder near-

est the door, not over your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt

anchor, lower or raise the height

adjuster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up

(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while

pressing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor

into position. Try sliding the height

adjuster to make sure that it has

locked into position.

Rear Seat Belt – Passenger's 3-

point system with convertible

locking retractor

This type of seat belt combines the

features of both an emergency locking

retractor seat belt and an automatic

locking retractor seat belt. Convertible

retractor type seat belts are installed in

the rear seat positions to help accom-

modate the installation of child

restraint systems. Although a convert-

ible retractor is also installed in the

front passenger seat position, NEVER

place any infant/child restraint system

in the front seat of the vehicle.

• Position one arm under the

shoulder belt and the other over

the belt, as shown in the illus-

tration.

• Always position the shoulder

belt anchor into the locked

position at the appropriate

height.

• Never position the shoulder

belt across your neck or face.

OTL035026

■ Front seat

2-29

Safety system of your vehicle

To fasten the rear center seat

belt

1. Extract the small tongue plate

from the slot on the belt assembly

pocket located in the headliner.

2. Insert the small tongue plate (A)

into the primary buckle (B) located

on the right hand (passenger) side

of the center seat. Insert the buck-

le until an audible "click" is heard,

indicating that the latch is locked.

Make sure the belt is not twisted.

3. Slip the large tongue plate (C) out

of the pocket (D) located on the

belt assembly.

OTLE035110

OTLE035111

OTLE035112

OTL035113

2-30

Safety system of your vehicle

4. Pull the large tongue plate and

insert it into the seat belt buckle

(E) located on the left hand (driv-

er) side of the center seat. Insert

the buckle until an audible "click"

is heard, indicating that the latch is

locked. Make sure the belt is not

twisted.

When using the rear center seat belt,

the buckle with the "CENTER" mark

must be used.

Information

If you are not able to pull out the safe-

ty belt from the retractor, firmly pull

the belt out and release it. After

release, you will be able to pull the belt

out smoothly.

To release your seat belt:

Press the release button (1) in the

locking buckle.

When it is released, the belt should

automatically draw back into the

retractor. If this does not happen,

check the belt to be sure it is not twist-

ed, then try again.

To release the rear center seat-

belt

1. Press the release button on the

rear center seat belt buckle (E)

located on the left hand (driver)

side of the center seat and

remove the large tongue plate (C).

OHSS038103

OTL035114

2-31

Safety system of your vehicle

2. To release and retract the rear

center seatbelt assembly, insert a

small tool or key into the primary

buckle release hole (F) located on

the right hand (passenger) side of

the center seat.

You can also insert the large buck-

le (C) into the release hole to

release the seat belt assembly.

Pull up on the seat belt webbing

and allow the webbing to retract

automatically.

3. Slip the large tongue plate (C) into

the pocket (D) located on the belt

assembly.

4. Insert the small tongue plate (A)

into the slot on the belt assembly

pocket located in the headliner.

OTLE035078OTL035115

OTLE035116

2-32

Safety system of your vehicle

Pre-tensioner seat belt

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's

and front passenger's Pre-tensioner

Seat Belts (Retractor Pretensioner

and Emergency Fastening Device

(EFD)). The purpose of the pre-ten-

sioner is to make sure the seat belts

fit tightly against the occupant's body

in certain frontal collisions. The Seat

Belt Anchor Pre-tensioner may be

activated in certain crashes where

the frontal collision is severe enough,

together with the air bags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or

if the occupant tries to lean forward

too quickly, the seat belt retractor will

lock into position. In certain frontal

collisions, the pre-tensioner will acti-

vate and pull the seat belt into tighter

contact against the occupant's body.

(1) Retractor Pretensioner

The purpose of the retractor pre-

tensioner is to make sure that the

shoulder belts fit in tightly against

the occupant's upper body in cer-

tain frontal collisions.

(2) Emergency Fastening Device (EFD)

(for the driver’s seat)

The purpose of the EFD is to

make sure that the pelvis belts fit

in tightly against the occupant's

lower body in certain frontal colli-

sions.

If the system senses excessive tension

on the driver or passenger's seat belt

when the pre-tensioner system acti-

vates, the load limiter inside the retrac-

tor pre-tensioner will release some of

the pressure on the affected seat belt.

• Always wear your seat belt and

sit properly in your seat.

• Do not use the seat belt if it is

loose or twisted. A loose or

twisted seat belt will not pro-

tect you properly in an acci-

dent.

• Do not place anything near the

buckle. This may adversely

affect the buckle and cause it

to function improperly.

• Always replace your pre-ten-

sioners after activation or an

accident.

• NEVER inspect, service, repair

or replace the pre-tensioners

yourself. This must be done by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not hit the seat belt assem-

blies.

WARNING

OTL035053

2-33

Safety system of your vehicle

The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System

consists mainly of the following com-

ponents. Their locations are shown in

the illustration above:

(1) SRS air bag warning light

(2) Retractor pre-tensioner

(3) SRS control module

(4) Emergency Fastening Device

(EFD)

The sensor that activates the SRS

air bag is connected with the

pre–tensioner seat belts. The SRS

air bag warning light on the instru-

ment panel will illuminate for

approximately 6 seconds after the

ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion, and then it should turn off.

If the pre-tensioner is not working

properly, the warning light will illu-

minate even if the SRS air bag is

not malfunctioning. If the warning

light does not illuminate, stays

illuminated or illuminates when

the vehicle is being driven, have

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

inspect the pre-tensioner seat

belts and SRS air bags as soon as

possible.

NOTICE

Do not touch the pre-tensioner

seat belt assemblies for several

minutes after they have been

activated. When the pre-ten-

sioner seat belt mechanism

deploys during a collision, the

pre-tensioners become hot and

can burn you.

WARNING

OLMB033040/Q

2-34

Safety system of your vehicle

• Both the driver's and front pas-

senger's pre-tensioner seat

belts may be activated in certain

frontal or side collisions or

rollovers.

• The passenger side pre-tension-

ers will not be activated if the

seat belts are not worn at the

time of the collision.

• When the pre-tensioner seat

belts are activated, a loud noise

may be heard and fine dust,

which may appear to be smoke,

may be visible in the passenger

compartment. These are normal

operating conditions and are not

hazardous.

• Although it is non-toxic, the fine

dust may cause skin irritation

and should not be breathed for

prolonged periods. Wash all

exposed skin areas thoroughly

after an accident in which the

pre-tensioner seat belts were

activated.

Additional Seat Belt Safety

Precautions

Seat belt use during pregnancy

The seat belt should always be used

during pregnancy. The best way to

protect your unborn child is to protect

yourself by always wearing the seat

belt.

Pregnant women should always

wear a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place

the shoulder belt across your chest,

routed between your breasts and

away from your neck. Place the lap

belt line so that it fits snugly and as

low as possible across the hips, not

across the abdomen.

NOTICE

• A pregnant woman or a

patient is more vulnerable to

any imapcts on the abdomen

during an abrupt stop or acci-

dent. If you are in an accident

while pregnant, we recom-

mend you consult your doc-

tor.

• To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death to an unborn

child during an accident,

pregnant women should

NEVER place the lap portion

of the seat belt above or over

the area of the abdomen

where the unborn child is

located.

WARNING

2-35

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat belt use and children

Infant and small children

All 50 states have child restraint laws

which require children to travel in

approved child restraint devices,

including booster seats. The age at

which seat belts can be used instead

of child restraints differs among

states, so you should be aware of the

specific requirements in your state,

and where you are travelling. Infant

and child restraints must be properly

placed and installed in a rear seat.

For more information refer to the

"Child Restraint Systems" section in

this chapter.

Small children are best protected

from injury in an accident when prop-

erly restrained in the rear seat by a

child restraint system that meets the

requirements of the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards. Before

buying any child restraint system,

make sure that it has a label certify-

ing that it meets Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213. The

restraint must be appropriate for your

child’s height and weight. Check the

label on the child restraint for this

information. Refer to the "Child

Restraint Systems" section in this

chapter.

ALWAYS properly restrain

infants and small children in a

child restraint appropriate for

the child’s height and weight.

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death to a child and

other passengers, NEVER hold a

child in your lap or arms when

the vehicle is moving. The violent

forces created during an acci-

dent will tear the child from your

arms and throw the child against

the interior of the vehicle.

WARNING

2-36

Safety system of your vehicle

Larger children

Children under age 13 and who are

too large for a booster seat must

always occupy the rear seat and use

the available lap/shoulder belts. A

seat belt should lie across the upper

thighs and be snug across the shoul-

der and chest to restrain the child

safely. Check belt fit periodically.

Children are afforded the most safe-

ty in the event of an accident when

they are restrained by a proper

restraint system and/or seat belts in

the rear seat. Always have the

LATCH system inspected by your

authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an

accident. An accident can damage

the LATCH system and may not

properly secure the child restraint.

If a larger child over age 13 must be

seated in the front seat, the child

must be securely restrained by the

available lap/shoulder belt and the

seat should be placed in the rear-

most position.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly

touches the child’s neck or face, try

placing the child closer to the center

of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still

touches their face or neck they need

to be returned to an appropriate

booster seat in the rear seat.

Transporting an injured person

A seat belt should be used when an

injured person is being transported.

Consult a physician for specific rec-

ommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should

never attempt to use a single seat belt.

This could increase the severity of

injuries in case of an accident.

Do not lie down

Sitting in a reclined position when the

vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.

Even when buckled up, the protec-

tions of your restraint system (seat

belts and air bags) are greatly reduced

by reclining your seatback.

To reduce the chance of injuries in the

event of an accident and to achieve

the maximum effectiveness of the

restraint system, all passengers

should be sitting up and the front and

rear seats should be in an upright

position when the car is moving.

A seat belt cannot provide proper

protection if the person is lying down

in the rear seat or if the front or rear

seats are in a reclined position.

• Always make sure children

are wearing their seat belts

and that they are properly

adjusted before driving.

• NEVER allow the shoulder

belt to contact the child’s

neck or face.

• Do not allow more than one

child to use a single seat belt.

WARNING

2-37

Safety system of your vehicle

Care of Seat Belts

Seat belt systems should never be

disassembled or modified. In addi-

tion, care should be taken to assure

that seat belts and belt hardware are

not damaged by seat hinges, doors

or other abuse.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected

periodically for wear or damage of

any kind. Any damaged parts should

be replaced as soon as possible by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and

dry. If belts become dirty, they can be

cleaned by using a mild soap solu-

tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,

strong detergents or abrasives

should not be used because they

may damage and weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts

The entire seat belt assembly or

assemblies should be replaced if the

vehicle has been involved in an acci-

dent. This should be done even if no

damage is visible. Additional ques-

tions concerning seat belt operation

should be directed to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• NEVER ride with a reclined

seatback when the vehicle is

moving.

• Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your chance of seri-

ous or fatal injuries in the event

of a collision or sudden stop.

• Drivers and passengers should

always sit well back in their

seats, properly belted, and with

the seatbacks upright.

WARNING

2-38

Safety system of your vehicle

Children Always in the Rear

Children under age 13 must always

ride in the rear seats and must

always be properly restrained to min-

imize the risk of injury in an accident,

sudden stop or sudden maneuver.

According to accident statistics, chil-

dren are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seats than in

the front seat. Even with air bags,

children can be seriously injured

or killed. Children too large for a

child restraint must use the seat belts

provided.

All 50 states have child restraint laws

which require children to travel in

approved child restraint devices. The

laws governing the age or

height/weight restrictions at which

seat belts can be used instead of

child restraints differs among states,

so you should be aware of the spe-

cific requirements in your state, and

where you are travelling.

Child restraint systems must be

properly placed and installed in the

rear seat. You must use a commer-

cially available child restraint system

that meets the requirements of the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (FMVSS 213).

Child restraint systems are generally

designed to be secured in a vehicle

seat by lap belt portion of a

lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH sys-

tem in the rear seats of the vehicle.

Child restraint system (CRS)

Infants and younger children must be

restrained in an appropriate rear-fac-

ing or forward-facing CRS that has

first been properly secured to the

rear seat of the vehicle. Read and

comply with the instructions for

installation and use provided by the

manufacturer of the child restraint.

CCHHIILLDD RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM ((CCRRSS))

Always properly restrain chil-

dren in the rear seats of the

vehicle.

Children of all ages are safer

when restrained in the rear seat.

A child riding in the front pas-

senger seat can be forcefully

struck by an inflating air bag

resulting in SERIOUS INJURY

or DEATH.

WARNING

An improperly secured child

restraint can increase the risk

of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH

in an accident. Always take the

following precautions when

using a child restraint system:

• NEVER install a child or infant

restraint in the front passen-

ger’s seat.

• Always properly secure the

child restraint to a rear seat of

the vehicle.

• Always follow the child

restraint system manufactur-

er’s instructions for installa-

tion and use.

WARNING

2-39

Safety system of your vehicle

Selecting a Child Restraint

System (CRS)

When selecting a CRS for your child,

always:

• Make sure the CRS has a label

certifying that it meets applicable

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (FMVSS 213).

• Select a child restraint based on

your child’s height and weight. The

required label or the instructions

for use typically provide this infor-

mation.

• Select a child restraint that fits the

vehicle seating position where it

will be used.

• Read and comply with the warn-

ings and instructions for installation

and use provided with the child

restraint system.

Child restraint system types

There are three main types of child

restraint systems: rearward-facing

seats, forward-facing seats, and

booster seats. They are classified

according to the child's age, height

and weight.

Rearward-facing child seats

• Always properly restrain your

child in the child restraint.

• If the vehicle head restraint

prevents proper installation of

a child seat (as described in

the child restraint system

manual), the head restraint of

the respective seating posi-

tion shall be readjusted or

entirely removed.

• Do not use an infant carrier or

a child safety seat that

"hooks" over a seatback, it

may not provide adequate

protection in an accident.

• After an accident, have a

HYUNDAI dealer check the

child restraint system, seat

belts, tether anchors and

lower anchors.

NEVER install a child or infant

restraint in the front passen-

ger's seat.

Placing a rearward-facing child

restraint in the front seat can

result in SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH if the child restraint is

struck by an inflating air bag.

WARNING

2-40

Safety system of your vehicle

A rear-facing child seat provides

restraint with the seating surface

against the back of the child. The har-

ness system holds the child in place,

and in an accident, acts to keep the

child positioned in the seat and

reduce the stress to the neck and

spinal cord.

All children under age one must

always ride in a rear-facing infant child

restraint.

Convertible and 3-in-1 child seats typ-

ically have higher height and weight

limits for the rear-facing position,

allowing you to keep your child rear-

facing for a longer period of time.

Continue to use a rear-facing child

seat for as long as your child will fit

within the height and weight limits

allowed by the child seat manufactur-

er. It's the best way to keep them

safe. Once your child has outgrown

the rear-facing child restraint, your

child is ready for a forward-facing

child restraint with a harness.

Forward-facing child restraints

A forward-facing child seat provides

restraint for the child’s body with a

harness. Keep children in a forward-

facing child seat with a harness until

they reach the top height or weight

limit allowed by your child restraint's

manufacturer.

Once your child outgrows the forward-

facing child restraint, your child is

ready for a booster seat.

OLMB033041 OTLE035033

2-41

Safety system of your vehicle

Booster seats

A booster seat is a restraint designed

to improve the fit of the vehicle’s seat

belt system. A booster seat positions

the seat belt so that it fits properly

over the lap of your child.

Keep your child in a booster seat until

they are big enough to sit in the seat

without a booster and still have the

seat belt fit properly. For a seat belt to

fit properly, the lap belt must lie snug-

ly across the upper thighs, not the

stomach. The shoulder belt should lie

snug across the shoulder and chest

and not across the neck or face.

Children under age 13 must always

ride in the rear seats and must always

be properly restrained to minimize the

risk of injury.

Installing a Child Restraint

System (CRS)

After selecting a proper child seat for

your child, check to make sure it fits

properly in your vehicle. Follow the

instructions provided by the manu-

facturer when installing the child

seat. Note these general steps when

installing the seat to your vehicle:

• Properly secure the child

restraint to the vehicle. All child

restraints must be secured to the

vehicle with the lap part of a

lap/shoulder belt or with the

LATCH system. If using the

lap/shoulder belt for your child

restraint, the convertible locking

retractor should be pulled all the

way out to engage the "automatic

locking" mode. (See page 2-45.)

• Make sure the child restraint is

firmly secured. After installing a

child restraint to the vehicle, push

and pull the seat forward-and-back

and from side-to-side to verify that

it is securely attached to the seat.

A child restraint secured with a

seat belt should be installed as

firmly as possible. However, some

side-to- side movement can be

expected.

Before installing your child

restraint system always:

• Read and follow the instruc-

tions provided by the manu-

facturer of the child restraint.

• Read and follow the instruc-

tions regarding child restraint

systems in this manual.

Failure to follow all warnings

and instructions could increase

the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY

or DEATH if an accident occurs.

WARNING

If the vehicle head restraint pre-

vents proper installation of a

child seat (as described in the

child seat system manual, the

head restraint of the respective

seating position shall be read-

justed or entirely removed.

WARNING

2-42

Safety system of your vehicle

• Secure the child in the child

restraint. Make sure the child is

properly strapped in the child

restraint according to the manufac-

turer instructions.

Lower Anchors and Tether for

Children (LATCH) System

The LATCH system holds a child

restraint during driving and in an acci-

dent. This system is designed to

make installation of the child restraint

easier and reduce the possibility of

improperly installing your child

restraint. The LATCH system uses

anchors in the vehicle and attach-

ments on the child restraint. The

LATCH system eliminates the need

to use seat belts to secure the child

restraint to the rear seats.

Lower anchors are metal bars built

into the vehicle. There are two lower

anchors for each LATCH seating

position that will accommodate a

child restraint with lower attachments.

To use the LATCH system in your

vehicle, you must have a child

restraint with LATCH attachments.

The child seat manufacturer will pro-

vide you with instructions on how to

use the child seat with its attachments

for the LATCH lower anchors.

LATCH anchors have been provided

in the left and right outboard rear

seating positions. Their locations are

shown in the illustration. There are no

LATCH anchors provided for the cen-

ter rear seating position.

A child restraint in a closed

vehicle can become very hot. To

prevent burns, check the seat-

ing surface and buckles before

placing your child in the child

restraint.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to install a child

restraint system using LATCH

anchors in the rear center seat-

ing position.There are no LATCH

anchors provided for this seat.

Using the outboard seat anchors

can damage the anchors which

may break or fail in a collision

resulting in serious injury or

death.

WARNING

OLM039035

Safety system of your vehicle

The lower anchor position indicator

symbols are located on the left and

right rear seat backs to identify the

position of the lower anchors in your

vehicle (see arrows in illustration).

The LATCH anchors are located

between the seatback and the seat

cushion of the rear seat left and right

outboard seating positions.

To use the lower anchor, push the

upper portion of the lower anchor

cover.

Securing a child restraint with

the LATCH anchors system

To install a LATCH-compatible child

restraint in either of the rear outboard

seating positions:

1. Move the seat belt buckle away

from the lower anchors.

2. Move any other objects away from

the anchors that could prevent a

secure connection between the

child restraint and the lower

anchors.

3. Place the child restraint on the

vehicle seat, then attach the seat

to the lower anchors according to

the instructions provided by the

child restraint manufacturer.

4. Follow the child restraint instruc-

tions for properly adjusting and

tightening the lower attachments

on the child restraint to the lower

anchors.

OTL035036

Lower Anchor

Position Indicator

Lower Anchor

Take the following precautions

when using the LATCH system:

• Read and follow all installation

instructions provided with

your child restraint system.

• To prevent the child from

reaching and taking hold of

unretracted seat belts, buckle

all unused rear seat belts and

retract the seat belt webbing

behind the child. Children can

be strangled if a shoulder belt

becomes wrapped around

their neck and the seat belt

tightens.

• NEVER attach more than one

child restraint to a single

anchor. This could cause the

anchor or attachment to come

loose or break.

• Always have the LATCH sys-

tem inspected by your author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer after an

accident. An accident can

damage the LATCH system

and may not properly secure

the child restraint.

WARNING

2-43

2-44

Safety system of your vehicle

The recommended weight for the

LATCH system is under 65 lb (30

kg).

How to determine an appropriate

child restraint weight:

Child weight + Child restraint

weight < 65 lb (30kg)

Securing a child restraint seat

with "Tether Anchor" system

First secure the child restraint with

the LATCH lower anchors or the seat

belt. If the child restraint manufactur-

er recommends that the top tether

strap be attached, attach and tighten

the top tether strap to the top tether

strap anchor.

Child restraint hook holders are

located on the rear of the seatbacks.

NOTICE

Take the following precautions

when installing the tether strap:

• Read and follow all installation

instructions provided with

your child restraint system.

• NEVER attach more than one

child restraint to a single teth-

er anchor. This could cause

the anchor or attachment to

come loose or break.

• Do not attach the tether strap

to anything other than the cor-

rect tether anchor. It may not

work properly if attached to

something else.

• Do not use the tether anchors

for adult seat belts or harness-

es, or for attaching other items

or equipment to the vehicle.

WARNING

OTL035034

2-45

Safety system of your vehicle

To install the tether anchor:

1. Route the child restraint tether

strap over the child restraint seat-

back. Route the tether strap under

the head restraint and between

the head restraint posts, or route

the tether strap over the top of the

vehicle seatback. Make sure the

strap is not twisted.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to

the tether anchor, then tighten the

tether strap according to the child

seat manufacturer's instructions to

firmly secure the child restraint to

the seat.

3. Check that the child restraint is

securely attached to the seat by

pushing and pulling the seat for-

ward-and-back and from side-to-

side.

Securing a child restraint with

a lap belt or lap/shoulder belt

When not using the LATCH system,

all child restraints must be secured to

a vehicle rear seat with the lap part

of a lap/shoulder belt.

Automatic locking mode

Since all passenger seat belts move

freely under normal conditions and

only lock under extreme or emer-

gency conditions (emergency locking

mode), you must manually pull the

seat belt all the way out to shift the

retractor to the "Automatic Locking"

mode to secure a child restraint.

The "Automatic Locking" mode will

help prevent the normal movement

of the child in the vehicle from caus-

ing the seat belt to loosen and com-

promise the child restraint system. To

secure a child restraint system, use

the following procedure.

OTLE035035

ALWAYS place a rear-facing

child restraint in the rear seat of

the vehicle.

Placing a rear-facing child

restraint in the front seat can

result in serious injury or death

if the child restraint is struck by

an inflating air bag.

WARNING

OLMB033044

2-46

Safety system of your vehicle

To install a child restraint system on

the rear seats, do the following:

1. Place the child restraint system on

a rear seat and route the lap/

shoulder belt around or through

the child restraint, following the

restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

Be sure the seat belt webbing is

not twisted.

When using the rear center seat

belt, you should also refer to the

"Rear Seat Belt – Passenger's 3-

point system" section in this

chapter.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch

into the buckle. Listen for the dis-

tinct "click" sound.

Information

Position the release button so that it is

easy to access in case of an emergency.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the

seat belt all the way out. When the

shoulder portion of the seat belt is

fully extended, it will shift the

retractor to the "Automatic

Locking" (child restraint) mode.

NOTICE

OLMB033045

OLMB033097

2-47

Safety system of your vehicle

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion

of the seat belt to retract and listen

for an audible "clicking" or "ratch-

eting" sound. This indicates that

the retractor is in the "Automatic

Locking" mode. If no distinct

sound is heard, repeat steps 3

and 4.

5. Remove as much slack from the

belt as possible by pushing down

on the child restraint system while

feeding the shoulder belt back into

the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraint

system to confirm that the seat

belt is holding it firmly in place. If it

is not, release the seat belt and

repeat steps 2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is

in the "Automatic Locking" mode

by attempting to pull more of the

seat belt out of the retractor. If you

cannot, the retractor is in the

"Automatic Locking" mode.

If your CRS manufacturer instructs or

recommends you to use a tether

anchor with the lap/shoulder belt,

refer to the previous pages for more

information.

When the seat belt is allowed to

retract to its fully stowed position,

the retractor will automatically

switch from the "Automatic

Locking" mode to the emergency

lock mode for normal adult usage.

To remove the child restraint, press

the release button on the buckle and

then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of

the restraint and allow the seat belt

to retract fully.

NOTICE

OLMB033098

If the retractor is not in the

"Automatic Locking" mode, the

child restraint can move when

your vehicle turns or stops sud-

denly. A child can be seriously

injured or killed if the child

restraint is not properly anchored

in the car, including manually

pulling the seat belt all the way

out to shift the rectractor to the

"Automatic Locking" mode.

WARNING

2-48

Safety system of your vehicle

AAIIRR BBAAGG -- AADDVVAANNCCEEDD SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM

OTLE035037

1. Driver's front air bag

2. Passenger's front air bag

3. Side air bag

4. Curtain air bag

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

2-49

Safety system of your vehicle

This vehicle is equipped with an

Advanced Supplemental Air Bag

System for the driver's seat and front

passenger's seats.

The front air bags are designed to

supplement the three-point seat

belts. For these air bags to provide

protection, the seat belts must be

worn at all times when driving.

You can be severely injured or killed

in an accident if you are not wearing

a seat belt. Air bags are designed to

supplement seat belts, but do not

replace them. Also, air bags are not

designed to deploy in every collision.

In some accidents, the seat belts are

the only restraint protecting you.

AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ALWAYS use seat belts and child restraints - every trip, every time,

everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in

a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt

when the air bag inflates.

NEVER place a child in any child restraint or booster seat in the front

passenger seat. An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant

or child causing serious or fatal injuries.

ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the

safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older

must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted

and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.

All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright posi-

tion, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs com-

fortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked

and is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during an accident,

the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the occupant

causing serious or fatal injuries.

You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console.

Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still

maintaining control of the vehicle. The U.S. National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends that drivers allow at

least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and

the chest.

WARNING

2-50

Safety system of your vehicle

Where Are the Air Bags?

Driver's and passenger's front

air bags

Your vehicle is equipped with a

Advanced Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) and lap/shoulder belts

at both the driver and passenger

seating positions.

The SRS consists of air bags which

are located in the center of the steer-

ing wheel, in the driver's side lower

crash pad below the steering wheel

column and the passenger's side

front panel pad above the glove box.

The air bags are labeled with the let-

ters "AIR BAG" embossed on the

pad covers.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide

the vehicle's driver and front passen-

gers with additional protection than

that offered by the seat belt system

alone.

The SRS uses sensors to gather

information about the driver's and

front passenger's seat belt usage

and impact severity.

The seat belt buckle sensors deter-

mine if the driver and front passen-

ger's seat belts are fastened. These

sensors provide the ability to control

the SRS deployment based on

whether or not the seat belts are fas-

tened, and how severe the impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability

to control the air bag inflation within

two levels. A first stage level is pro-

vided for moderate-severity impacts.

A second stage level is provided for

more severe impacts.

According to the impact severity, and

seat belt usage, the SRS Control

Module (SRSCM) controls the air

bag inflation. Failure to properly wear

seat belts can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

OTLE038038

■ Driver's front air bag

OTLE038039

■ Passenger's front air bag

2-51

Safety system of your vehicle

Side air bags

Your vehicle is equipped with a side

air bag in each front seat.

• No objects (such as crash pad

cover, cellular phone holder,

cup holder, perfume or stick-

ers) should be placed over or

near the air bag modules on

the steering wheel, instrument

panel, windshield glass, and

the front passenger's panel

above the glove box.

Such objects could cause

harm if the vehicle is in a

crash severe enough to cause

the air bags to deploy.

• Do not attach any objects on

front windshield and inside

mirror.

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from an inflating

front air bags, take the following

precautions:

• Seat belts must be worn at all

times to help keep occupants

positioned properly.

• Move your seat as far back as

possible from front air bags,

while still maintaining control

of the vehicle.

• Never lean against the door or

center console.

• Do not allow the front passen-

ger to place their feet or legs

on the dashboard.

WARNING

OTL035040

OTL035041

2-52

Safety system of your vehicle

The purpose of the air bag is to pro-

vide the vehicle's driver and the front

passenger with additional protection

than that offered by the seat belt

alone.

The side air bags are designed to

deploy during certain side impact

collisions, depending on the crash

severity, angle, speed and point of

impact.

The side and curtain air bags on

both sides of the vehicle may deploy

if a rollover or possible rollover is

detected.

The side air bags are not designed to

deploy in all side impact or rollover

situations.

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from an inflating

side air bag, take the following

precautions:

• Seat belts must be worn at all

times to help keep occupants

positioned properly.

• Do not allow passengers to

lean their heads or bodies onto

doors, put their arms on the

doors, stretch their arms out of

the window, or place objects

between the doors and seats.

• Hold the steering wheel at the 9

o'clock and 3 o'clock positions,

to minimize the risk of injuries

to your hands and arms.

• Do not use any accessory

seat covers.This could reduce

or prevent the effectiveness

of the system.

• Do not place any objects over

the air bag or between the air

bag and yourself.

WARNING

Also, do not attach any

objects around the area the

air bag inflates such as the

door, side door glass, front

and rear pillar.

• Do not place any objects

between the door and the

seat. They may become dan-

gerous projectiles if the side

air bag inflates.

• Do not install any accessories

on the side or near the side air

bags.

• Do not put any objects

between the side airbag label

and seat cushion. It could

cause harm if the vehicle is in

a crash severe enough to

cause the air bags to deploy.

• Do not cause impact to the

doors when the ignition

switch is in the ON position as

this may cause the side air

bags to inflate.

• If the seat or seat cover is

damaged, have the vehicle

checked and repaired by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

2-53

Safety system of your vehicle

Curtain air bags

Curtain air bags are located along

both sides of the roof rails above the

front and rear doors.

They are designed to help protect

the heads of the front seat occupants

and the rear outboard seat occu-

pants in certain side impact colli-

sions.

The curtain air bags are designed to

deploy during certain side impact

collisions, depending on the crash

severity, angle, speed and point of

impact.

The side and curtain air bags on

both sides of the vehicle may deploy

if a rollover or possible rollover is

detected.

The curtain air bags are not

designed to deploy in all side impact

or rollover situations.

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from an inflating

curtain air bags, take the follow-

ing precautions:

• All seat occupants must wear

seat belts at all times to help

keep occupants positioned

properly.

• Properly secure child restraints

as far away from the door as

possible.

• Do not place any objects over

the air bag. Also, do not attach

any objects around the area

the air bag inflates such as the

door, side door glass, front

and rear pillar, roof side rail.

• Do not hang other objects

except clothes, especially

hard or breakable objects. In

an accident, it may cause

vehicle damage or personal

injury.

• Do not allow passengers to

lean their heads or bodies

onto doors, put their arms on

the doors, stretch their arms

out of the window, or place

objects between the doors

and seats.

• Do not open or repair the side

curtain air bags.

WARNING

OTL035042

OTL035043

2-54

Safety system of your vehicle

How Does the Air Bag System

Operate?

The SRS consists of the following

components:

1. Driver's front air bag module

2. Passenger's front air bag module

3. Side air bag modules

4. Curtain air bag modules

5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies

6. Air bag warning light

7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/

Rollover sensor

8. Front impact sensors

9. Side impact sensors

10. Side pressure sensors

11. The front passenger's seat belt

buckle sensors

12. Emergency Fastening Device

(EFD)

13. Occupant classification system

The SRSCM (Supplemental Restraint

System Control Module) continually

monitors all SRS components while

the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion to determine if a crash impact is

severe enough to require air bag

deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt

deployment.

Information

The seat belt buckle sensor deter-

mines whether the front passenger's

seat belt is fastened. According to

whether the seat belt is fastened or not

and how severe the impact is, this sen-

sor provides the function to control

the SRS deployment.

SRS warning light

The SRS (Supplement Restraint

System) air bag warning light on the

instrument panel displays the air bag

symbol depicted in the illustration.

The system checks the air bag elec-

trical system for malfunctions. The

light indicates that there is a potential

malfunction with your air bag system,

which could include your side and

curtain air bags used for rollover pro-

tection.

ODH033104L/Q

2-55

Safety system of your vehicle

During a frontal collision, sensors will

detect the vehicle's deceleration. If

the rate of deceleration (measured in

g-force) is high enough the control

unit will inflate the front air bags.

The front air bags help protect the

driver and front passenger by

responding to frontal impacts in

which seat belts alone cannot pro-

vide adequate restraint. When need-

ed, the side air bags help provide

protection in the event of a side

impact or rollover.

• Air bags are activated (able to

inflate if necessary) only when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

• Air bags inflate in the event of cer-

tain frontal or side collisions to help

protect the occupants from serious

physical injury.

• There is no single speed at which

the air bags will inflate. Generally,

air bags are designed to inflate

based upon the severity of a colli-

sion and its direction, etc. These

two factors determine whether the

sensors produce an electronic

deployment/inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on a

number of factors including vehicle

speed, angles of impact and the

density and stiffness of the vehicles

or objects which your vehicle

impacts during a collision. The

determining factors are not limited

to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely

inflate and deflate in an instant. It is

virtually impossible for you to see

the air bags inflate during an acci-

dent. It is much more likely that you

will simply see the deflated air bags

hanging out of their storage com-

partments after the collision.

• In addition to inflating in certain

side collisions, vehicles equipped

with a rollover sensor, side and

curtain air bags will inflate if the

sensing system detects a rollover.

When a rollover is detected, side

and curtain air bags will remain

inflated longer to help provide pro-

tection from ejection, especially

when used in conjunction with the

seat belts.

If your SRS malfunctions, the air

bag may not inflate properly dur-

ing an accident increasing the

risk of serious injury or death.

If any of the following condi-

tions occur, your SRS is mal-

functioning:

• The light does not turn on for

approximately six seconds

when the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

• The light remains illuminated

after approximately six sec-

onds.

• The light comes on while the

vehicle is in motion.

• The light blinks when the

engine is running.

Have an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer inspect the SRS as soon

as possible if any of these con-

ditions occur.

WARNING

2-56

Safety system of your vehicle

• To help provide protection, the air

bags must inflate rapidly. The speed

of air bag inflation is a consequence

of extremely short time in which to

inflate the air bag between the

occupant and the vehicle structures

before the occupant impacts those

structures. This speed of inflation

reduces the risk of serious or life-

threatening injuries and is thus a

necessary part of air bag design.

However, the rapid air bag inflation

can also cause injuries which can

include facial abrasions, bruises

and broken bones because the

inflation speed also causes the air

bags to expand with a great deal of

force.

• There are even circumstances

under which contact with the air

bag can cause fatal injuries, espe-

cially if the occupant is positioned

excessively close to the air bag.

You can take steps to help reduce

the risk of being injured by an inflat-

ing air bag. The greatest risk is sitting

too close to the air bag. An air bag

needs about 10 inches (25 cm) of

space to inflate. NHTSA recom-

mends that drivers allow at least 10

inches (25 cm) between the center of

the steering wheel and the chest.

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from an inflating

air bag, take the following pre-

cautions:

• NEVER place a child restraint

in the front passenger seat.

Always properly restrain chil-

dren under age 13 in the rear

seats of the vehicle.

• Adjust the front passenger's

and driver's seats as far to the

rear as possible while allow-

ing you to maintain full con-

trol of the vehicle.

• Hold the steering wheel with

hands at the 9 o'clock and 3

o'clock positions.

• Never place anything or any-

one between the air bag and

the seat occupant.

• Do not allow the front passen-

ger to place their feet or legs

on the dashboard.

WARNING

2-57

Safety system of your vehicle

When the SRSCM detects a suffi-

ciently severe impact to the front of

the vehicle, it will automatically

deploy the front air bags.

Upon deployment, tear seams mold-

ed directly into the pad covers will

separate under pressure from the

expansion of the air bags. Further

opening of the covers allows full

inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combina-

tion with a properly worn seat belt,

slows the driver or the front passen-

ger forward motion, reducing the risk

of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bag

immediately starts deflating, enabling

the driver to maintain forward visibili-

ty and the ability to steer or operate

other controls.

OTLA035108

■ Driver's front air bag (2)

OTLA035107

■ Driver's front air bag (1)

OTLA035109

■ Driver's front air bag (3)

OLMB033057

■ Passenger's front air bag

2-58

Safety system of your vehicle

What to Expect After an Air

Bag Inflates

After a frontal or side air bag inflates,

it will deflate very quickly. Air bag

inflation will not prevent the driver

from seeing out of the windshield or

being able to steer. Curtain air bags

may remain partially inflated for

some time after they deploy.

After an air bag inflates, take

the following precautions:

• Open your windows and doors

as soon as possible after

impact to reduce prolonged

exposure to the smoke and

powder released by the inflat-

ing air bag.

• Do not touch the air bag stor-

age area's internal compo-

nents immediately after an air

bag has inflated. The parts

that come into contact with an

inflating air bag may be very

hot.

WARNING

• Always wash exposed skin

areas thoroughly with cold

water and mild soap.

• Always have an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer replace the air

bag immediately after deploy-

ment. Air bags are designed to

be used only once.

To prevent objects from becom-

ing dangerous projectiles when

the passenger's air bag inflates:

• Do not install or place any

objects (drink holder, CD

holder, stickers, etc.) on the

front passenger's panel above

the glove box where the pas-

senger’s air bag is located.

• Do not install a container of

liquid air freshener near the

instrument cluster or on the

instrument panel surface.

WARNING

2-59

Safety system of your vehicle

Noise and smoke from inflating

air bag

When the air bags inflate, they make

a loud noise and may produce

smoke and powder in the air inside of

the vehicle. This is normal and is a

result of the ignition of the air bag

inflator. After the air bag inflates, you

may feel substantial discomfort in

breathing because of the contact of

your chest with both the seat belt and

the air bag, as well as from breathing

the smoke and powder. The powder

may aggravate asthma for some

people. If you experience breathing

problems after an air bag deploy-

ment, seek medical attention imme-

diately.

Though the smoke and powder are

nontoxic, they may cause irritation to

the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If

this is the case, wash and rinse with

cold water immediately and seek

medical attention if the symptoms

persist.

Occupant Classification

System (OCS)

Your vehicle is equipped with an

Occupant Classification System

(OCS) in the front passenger's seat.

Main components of the

Occupant Classification System

• A detection device located within

the front passenger seat cushion.

• Electronic system to determine

whether the passenger air bag

systems should be activated or

deactivated.

• An indicator light located on the

instrument panel which illuminates

the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG

OFF" indicating the front passen-

ger air bag system is deactivated.

• The instrument panel air bag indi-

cator light is interconnected with

the OCS.

OTLA035102

■ Type A

OTLA035086

■ Type B

2-60

Safety system of your vehicle

The OCS is designed to help detect

the presence of a properly-seated

front passenger and determine if the

passenger's front air bag should be

enabled (may inflate) or not.

The purpose is to help reduce the

risk of injury or death from an inflat-

ing air bag to certain front passenger

seat occupants, such as children, by

requiring the air bag to be automati-

cally turned OFF.

For example, if a child restraint of the

type specified in the regulations is on

the seat, the occupant classification

sensor can detect it and cause the

air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occu-

pants who are properly seated and

wearing the seat belt properly,

should not cause the passenger air

bag to be automatically turned OFF.

For small adults it may be turned

OFF, however, if the occupant does

not sit in the seat properly (for exam-

ple, by not sitting upright, by sitting

on the edge of the seat, or by other-

wise being out of position), this could

cause the sensor to turn the air bag

OFF.

You will find the "PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF" indicator on the center

facia panel. This system detects the

conditions 1-4 in the following table

and activates or deactivates the front

passenger air bag based on these

conditions.

Always be sure that you and all vehi-

cle occupants are seated properly

and wearing the seat belt properly for

the most effective protection by the

air bag and the seat belt.

The OCS may not function properly if

the passenger takes actions which

can affect the classification system.

These include:

• Failing to sit in an upright position.

• Leaning against the door or center

console.

• Sitting towards the sides of the

front of the seat.

• Putting their legs on the dashboard

or resting them on other locations

which reduce the passenger

weight on the front seat.

• Wearing the seat belt improperly.

• Reclining the seatback.

2-61

Safety system of your vehicle

• Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear

or hip protection wear.

• Putting an additional thick cushion

on the seat.

• Putting electrical devices (e.g.

notebook, satellite radio) on the

seat with inverter charging.

Condition and operation in the front passenger Occupant Classification System

Condition detected by the

occupant classification system

Indicator/Warning light Devices

“PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF”

indicator light

SRS

warning light

Front passenger

air bag

1. Adult *

Off Off Activated

2. Infant *

or child restraint

system with 12 months old *

On Off Deactivated

3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated

4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated

The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front

passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique

and posture.

Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has out-

grown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize

him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting position.

Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12 months

to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front passenger seat. This is

a normal condition.

2-62

Safety system of your vehicle

Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passenger's seat when it is unoccupied by a

passenger adversely affects the OCS. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:

WARNING

OVQ036013NB

OLMB033100

OLMB033101

OLMB033103

OLMB033102

OLMB033104

• NEVER put a heavy load in

the front seat or seatback

pocket, or hang any items

on the front passenger

seat.

• NEVER place your feet on

the front passenger seat-

back.

• NEVER sit with your hips

shifted towards the front

of the seat.

• NEVER ride with the seat-

back reclined when the

vehicle is moving.

• NEVER place your feet or

legs on the dashboard.

• NEVER lean on the door or

center console or sit on

one side of the front pas-

senger seat.

2-63

Safety system of your vehicle

ODH035900K

ODH035901K

ODH035902K

ODH035903K

• Do not sit on the passen-

ger seat wearing heavily

padded clothes such as

ski wear and hip protector.

• Do not use car seat

accessories such as thick

blankets and cushions

which cover up the car

seat surface.

• Do not place electronic

devices such as laptops,

DVD player, or conductive

materials such as water

bottles on the passenger

seat.

• Do not use electronic

devices such as laptops

and satellite radios which

use inverter chargers.

• If large quantity of liquid

has been spilled on the

passenger seat, the air

bag warning light may

illuminate or malfunction.

Therefore, make sure the

seat has been completely

dried before driving the

vehicle.

• Do not place sharp objects on the front passenger seat.These may damage the occupant detection sys-

tem, if they puncture the seat cushion.

• Do not place any items under the front passenger seat.

• When changing or replacing the seat or seat cover, use original items only. The OCS has been devel-

oped based on using original HYUNDAI car seats only. Altering or changing the authentic parts may

result in system malfunction and increase risk of injury when in collision. Any of the above could inter-

fere with the proper operation of the OCS sensor thereby increasing the risk of an injury in an accident.

2-64

Safety system of your vehicle

Proper seated position for OCS

If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"

indicator is on when an adult is seat-

ed in the front passenger seat, place

the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF

position and ask the passenger to sit

properly (sitting upright with the seat

back in an upright position, centered

on the seat cushion with their seat

belt on, legs comfortably extended

and their feet on the floor). Restart

the engine and have the person

remain in that position. This will allow

the system to detect the person and

to enable the passenger air bag. If

the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"

indicator is still on, ask the passen-

ger to move to the rear seat.

The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"

indicator illuminates for approxi-

mately 4 seconds after the ignition

switch is in the ON position or

after the engine is started. If the

front passenger seat is occupied,

the OCS will then classify the front

passenger after several more sec-

onds.

NOTICE

B990A01O

Never allow an adult passenger

to ride in the front passenger

seat when the "PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF" indicator is illu-

minated. During a collision, the

air bag will not inflate if the indi-

cator is illuminated. Have your

passenger reposition them-

selves in the seat. If the "PAS-

SENGER AIR BAG OFF" indica-

tor remains illuminated after the

passenger repositions himself

properly and the vehicle is

restarted, have the passenger

move to the rear seat because

the air bag will not inflate.

WARNING

2-65

Safety system of your vehicle

Do Not Install a Child Restraint

in the Front Passenger's Seat

Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the OCS, never install

a child restraint in the front passen-

ger's seat. An inflating air bag can

forcefully strike a child or child

restraint resulting in serious or fatal

injury.

Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off

in a Collision?

Air bags are not designed to inflate in

every collision. There are certain

types of accidents in which the air

bag would not be expected to pro-

vide additional protection. These

include rear impacts, second or third

collisions in multiple impact acci-

dents, as well as low speed impacts.

Damage to the vehicle indicates a

collision energy absorption, and is

not an indicator of whether or not an

air bag should have inflated.

• NEVER place a rear-facing or

front-facing child restraint in

the front passenger's seat of

the vehicle.

• An inflating frontal air bag

could forcefully strike a child

resulting in serious injury or

death.

• Always properly restrain chil-

dren in an appropriate child

restraint in the rear seat of the

vehicle.

WARNING

1JBH3051

2-66

Safety system of your vehicle

Air bag collision sensors

To reduce the risk of an air bag

deploying unexpectedly and

causing serious injury or death:

• Do not hit or allow any objects

to impact the locations where air

bags or sensors are installed.

• Do not perform maintenance

on or around the air bag sen-

sors. If the location or angle of

the sensors is altered, the air

bags may deploy when they

should not or may not deploy

when they should.

• Do not install bumper guards

or replace the bumper with a

non-genuine HYUNDAI parts.

This may adversely affect the

collision and air bag deploy-

ment performance.

• Place the ignition switch in

the LOCK/OFF or ACC posi-

tion when the vehicle is being

towed to prevent inadvertent

air bag deployment.

• Have all air bag repairs conduct-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

WARNING

2-67

Safety system of your vehicle

1. SRS control module

2. Front impact sensor

3. Side pressure sensor (front)

4. Side impact sensor (rear)

OTLE038044/OTLE038045/OTLE038046/OTL035047/OTL035048

2-68

Safety system of your vehicle

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate

in a frontal collision depending on

the severity, speed, or angles of

impact of the front collision.

Side and curtain air bags

Side and curtain air bags are

designed to inflate when an impact is

detected by side collision sensors

depending on the severity, speed, or

angles of impact resulting from a

side impact collision.

Although the driver's and front pas-

senger's air bags are designed to

inflate only in frontal collisions, they

also may inflate in other types of col-

lisions if the front impact sensors

detect a sufficient impact. Side and

curtain air bags are designed to

inflate only in side impact collisions

or rollover situations, but they may

inflate in other collisions if the side

impact sensors detect a sufficient

impact.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by

bumps or objects on unimproved

roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive

carefully on unimproved roads or on

surfaces not designed for vehicle

traffic to prevent unintended air bag

deployment.

OTLE038070

OTLE038071

OTL035074

2-69

Safety system of your vehicle

Air bag non-inflation conditions

In certain low-speed collisions the air

bags may not deploy. The air bags

are designed not to deploy in such

cases because they may not provide

benefits beyond the protection of the

seat belts.

Front air bags are not designed to

inflate in rear collisions, because

occupants are moved backward by

the force of the impact. In this case,

inflated air bags would not provide

any additional benefit.

Front air bags may not inflate in side

impact collisions, because occupants

move in the direction of the collision,

and thus in side impacts, front air bag

deployment would not provide addi-

tional occupant protection.

However, side and curtain air bags

may inflate depending on the severi-

ty, vehicle speed and angles of

impact.

OTLE038066

OTLE038065 OTLE038067

2-70

Safety system of your vehicle

In an angled collision, the force of

impact may direct the occupants in a

direction where the air bags would

not be able to provide any additional

benefit, and thus the sensors may

not deploy any air bags.

Just before impact, drivers often

brake heavily. Such heavy braking

lowers the front portion of the vehicle

causing it to "ride" under a vehicle

with a higher ground clearance. Air

bags may not inflate in this "under-

ride" situation because deceleration

forces that are detected by sensors

may be significantly reduced by such

"underride" collisions.

Front air bags may not inflate in

rollover accidents because air bag

deployment could not provide protec-

tion to the occupants.

However, side and curtain air bags

may inflate when the vehicle is rolled

over by a side impact collision.

OTL035069 OTLE038064 OTL035068

2-71

Safety system of your vehicle

Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle

collides with objects such as utility

poles or trees, where the point of

impact is concentrated and the colli-

sion energy is absorbed by the vehi-

cle structure.

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-

free and there are no parts you can

safely service by yourself. If the SRS

air bag warning light does not illumi-

nate when the ignition switch is in the

ON position or continuously remains

on, have your vehicle immediately

inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such

as removing, installing, repairing, or

any work on the steering wheel, the

front passenger's panel, front seats

and roof rails must be performed by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Improper handling of the SRS system

may result in serious personal injury.

OTLE038063

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death, take the follow-

ing precautions:

• Do not attempt to modify or

disconnect the SRS compo-

nents or wiring, including the

addition of any kind of badges

to the pad covers or modifica-

tions to the body structure.

• Do not place objects over or

near the air bag modules on

the steering wheel, instrument

panel, or the front passen-

ger's panel above the glove

box.

• Clean the air bag pad covers

with a soft cloth moistened

with plain water. Solvents or

cleaners could adversely

affect the air bag covers and

proper deployment of the sys-

tem.

• Always have inflated air bags

replaced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

2-72

Safety system of your vehicle

Additional Safety Precautions

Passengers should not move out of

or change seats while the vehicle is

moving. A passenger who is not

wearing a seat belt during a crash or

emergency stop can be thrown

against the inside of the vehicle,

against other occupants, or be ejected

from the vehicle.

Do not use any accessories on seat

belts. Devices claiming to improve

occupant comfort or reposition the

seat belt can reduce the protection

provided by the seat belt and increase

the chance of serious injury in a crash

Do not modify the front seats.

Modification of the front seats could

interfere with the operation of the sup-

plemental restraint system sensing

components or side air bags.

Do not place items under the front

seats. Placing items under the front

seats could interfere with the opera-

tion of the supplemental restraint sys-

tem sensing components and wiring

harnesses.

Do not cause impact to the doors.

Impact to the doors when the ignition

switch or the engine Start/Stop button

is in the ON position may cause the air

bags to inflate.

Modifications to accommodate

disabilities. If you require modifica-

tion to your vehicle to accommodate

a disability, contact the HYUNDAI

Customer Connect Center at 1-800-

633-5151.

Adding equipment to or modify-

ing your air bag equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing

your vehicle's frame, bumper system,

front end or side sheet metal or ride

height, this may affect the operation of

your vehicle's air bag system.

• If components of the air bag

system must be discarded, or

if the vehicle must be

scrapped, certain safety pre-

cautions must be observed.

Consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer for the nec-

essary information. Failure to

follow these precautions

could increase the risk of per-

sonal injury.

2-73

Safety system of your vehicle

Air Bag Warning Labels

Air bag warning labels, required by

the U.S. National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA), are

attached to alert the driver and pas-

sengers of potential risks of the air

bag system. Be sure to read all of the

information about the air bags that

are installed on your vehicle in this

Owners Manual.

OTL035049

Convenient features of your vehicle

Accessing Your Vehicle .........................................3-4

Remote Key.........................................................................3-4

Smart Key............................................................................3-8

Immobilizer System.........................................................3-13

Door Locks............................................................3-15

Operating Door Locks from Outside the Vehicle....3-15

Operating Door Locks from Inside the Vehicle.......3-16

Automatic Door Lock and Unlock Features .............3-18

Child-Protector Rear Door locks ................................3-19

Theft-Alarm System............................................3-20

Steering Wheel.....................................................3-21

Electric Power Steering (EPS) .....................................3-21

Tilt Steering/Telescope Steering.................................3-22

Heated Steering Wheel..................................................3-23

Horn....................................................................................3-23

Mirrors...................................................................3-24

Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................................3-24

Side View Mirrors ...........................................................3-36

Windows ................................................................3-39

Power Windows...............................................................3-40

Panoramic Sunroof..............................................3-43

Sunshade...........................................................................3-44

Sliding the Sunroof.........................................................3-44

Tilting the Sunroof .........................................................3-45

Closing the Sunroof........................................................3-45

To Reset the Sunroof.....................................................3-46

Exterior Features.................................................3-47

Hood ...................................................................................3-47

Fuel Filler Door................................................................3-48

Liftgate..................................................................3-52

Non-Powered liftgate....................................................3-52

Power Liftgate .................................................................3-54

Smart Liftgate..................................................................3-61

Instrument Cluster ...............................................3-65

Instrument Cluster Control............................................3-66

Gauges and Meters ........................................................3-67

Icy Road Warning Light .................................................3-70

Warning and Indicator Lights.......................................3-72

LCD Display Messages...................................................3-84

LCD Display...........................................................3-91

LCD Display Control........................................................3-91

LCD Display Modes.........................................................3-92

Trip Computer .....................................................3-103

Light.....................................................................3-107

Exterior Lights ...............................................................3-107

Welcome System ...........................................................3-115

Interior Lights ................................................................3-116

Wipers and Washers..........................................3-120

Windshield Wipers ........................................................3-120

Front Windshield Washers..........................................3-122

Rear Window Wiper and Washer Switch ................3-123

Driver Assist System .........................................3-124

Rear View Monitor .......................................................3-124

Surround View Monitor...............................................3-125

Manual Climate Control System.......................3-127

Heating and Air Conditioning.....................................3-128

System Operation .........................................................3-133

System Maintenance....................................................3-135

Automatic Climate Control System..................3-137

Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning.................3-138

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning......................3-139

System Operation .........................................................3-146

System Maintenance....................................................3-148

Windshield Defrosting And Defogging ...........3-150

Manual Climate Control System ................................3-150

Automatic Climate Control System ...........................3-151

Defogging logic..............................................................3-152

Auto Defogging System ..............................................3-153

Rear Window Defroster ..............................................3-154

Climate Control Additional Features ...............3-156

Cluster ionizer................................................................3-156

Automatic Ventilation...................................................3-156

Sunroof Inside Air Recirculation...............................3-156

Storage Compartment .......................................3-157

Center Console Storage ..............................................3-157

Glove Box........................................................................3-157

Sunglass Holder.............................................................3-158

Convenient features of your vehicle

Interior Features................................................3-159

Cup Holder ......................................................................3-159

Sunvisor...........................................................................3-160

Power Outlet ..................................................................3-161

USB Charger...................................................................3-162

Wireless Cellular Phone Charging System..............3-162

Clock.................................................................................3-165

Clothes Hanger ..............................................................3-165

Plastic Bag Hook...........................................................3-166

Floor Mat Anchor(s).....................................................3-166

Cargo Net Holder ..........................................................3-167

Cargo Security Screen.................................................3-167

Luggage Tray .................................................................3-170

Exterior features ...............................................3-171

Roof Rack .......................................................................3-171

3-4

Convenient features of your vehicle

Remote Key (if equipped)

Your HYUNDAI uses a remote key,

which you can use to lock or unlock

the driver and passenger doors or

the rear liftgate.

1. Door Lock

2. Door Unlock

3. Liftgate Unlock

4. Panic (if equipped)

Locking Your Vehicle

To lock your vehicle:

1. Make sure all doors, the engine

hood and the liftgate are closed.

2. Press the Door Lock button (1) on

the remote key to lock all doors.

3. If the Door Lock button (1) is

pressed once more within four

seconds, the horn will beep once

and the hazard warning lights will

blink.

4. Make sure the doors are locked by

checking the position of the door

lock button inside the vehicle.

Unlocking Your Vehicle

To unlock your vehicle:

1. Press the Door Unlock button (2)

on the remote key.

2. The driver's door will unlock. The

hazard warning lights will blink two

times.

Two Press Unlock Feature

The priority for unlocking the driver

door only, or unlocking all the doors

with one press may be adjusted in

the User Settings mode in the cluster

LCD display.

The Two Press Unlock feature, when

enabled, will require the user to

press the door unlock button once for

driver door only and twice for unlock-

ing all the doors.

Select or Deselect the Two Press

Unlock feature in the User Settings

mode in the cluster LCD display. The

option can be found under the follow-

ing menu:

User Settings ➞ Door ➞ Two Press

Unlock

AACCCCEESSSSIINNGG YYOOUURR VVEEHHIICCLLEE

OTL045001

Do not leave the keys in your

vehicle with unsupervised chil-

dren. Unattended children

could place the key in the igni-

tion switch and may operate

power windows or other con-

trols, or even make the vehicle

move, which could result in

serious injury or death.

WARNING

3-5

Convenient features of your vehicle

The Two Press Unlock feature can

also be enabled or disabled by

pressing the door lock and unlock

buttons simultaneously on the Key

FOB:

Press and hold both the Door Lock

button and the Door Unlock button

simultaneously until the hazard

warning lights blink.

This will enable or disable the Two

Press Unlock feature. Repeat this

procedure to enable/disable the

mode again.

Information

After unlocking the doors, the doors

will automatically relock after 30 sec-

onds unless a door is opened.

Liftgate unlocking

To unlock the liftgate:

1. Press and hold the Liftgate Unlock

button (3) on the remote key for

more than one second.

2. The hazard warning lights will

blink two times.

3. Once the liftgate is opened and

then closed, the liftgate will auto-

matically re-lock after 30 seconds.

Information

The word "HOLD" is written on the

button to inform you that you must

press and hold the button for more

than one second.

Panic button (if equipped)

Press and hold the Panic button (4)

for more than one second. The horn

sounds and hazard warning lights

flash for about 30 seconds.

To cancel the panic mode, press any

button on the remote key.

Start-up

For more details, refer to the "Key

Ignition Switch" section in chapter

To prevent damaging the remote

key:

• Keep the remote key away from

water or any liquid and fire.

Internal circuits may malfunc-

tion if the inside of the remote

key gets damp (from liquids or

moisture) or if it is heated. This

can exclude the remote key from

being covered under warranty.

• Avoid dropping or throwing the

remote key.

• Protect the remote key from

extreme temperatures.

NOTICE

3-6

Mechanical key

If the remote key does not operate

normally, you can lock or unlock the

door by using the mechanical key.

To unfold the mechanical key, press

the release button on the remote.

To return the key to its stored posi-

tion, press the release button and

fold the key back into the remote.

Remote key precautions

The remote key will not work if any of

the following occur:

• The key is in the ignition switch.

• You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 90 feet [30 m]).

• The remote key battery is weak.

• Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.

• The weather is extremely cold.

• The remote key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station or

an airport which can interfere with

normal operation of the remote key.

When the remote key does not work

correctly, open and close the door

with the mechanical key. If you have

a problem with the remote key con-

tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the remote key is in close proximi-

ty to your mobile phone, the signal

could be blocked by your mobile

phone's normal operational signals.

This is especially important when the

phone is active such as making and

receiving calls, text messaging,

and/or sending/receiving emails.

When possible, avoid placing the

remote key and your mobile phone in

the same location such as a pants or

jacket pocket in order to avoid inter-

ference between the two devices.

Convenient features of your vehicle

OTL045002

3-7

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

3. Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate

the device.

Keep the remote key away from

electromagnetic materials that

block electromagnetic waves to

the key surface.

Battery replacement

If the remote key is not working prop-

erly, try replacing the battery with a

new one.

Battery Type: CR2032

To replace the battery:

1. Pry open the rear cover of the

remote key.

2. Remove the old battery and insert

the new battery. Make sure the

battery position is correct.

3. Reinstall the rear cover of the

remote key.

If you suspect your remote key might

have sustained some damage, or

you feel your remote key is not work-

ing correctly contact an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Information

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to the

environment and human health.

Dispose of the battery according

to your local law(s) or regula-

tions.

NOTICE

OLM042302

3-8

Convenient features of your vehicle

Smart Key (if equipped)

Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key,

which you can use to lock or unlock

the driver and passenger doors or

the liftgate.

1. Door Lock

2. Door Unlock

3. Liftgate Unlock

4. Panic

Locking Your Vehicle

To lock your vehicle:

1. Make sure all doors, the engine

hood and the liftgate are closed.

2. Make sure you have the smart key

in your possession.

3. Press either the button on the door

handle of the Door Lock button (1)

or the button on the smart key. The

chime will sound once and the

hazard warning lights will blink.

4. Make sure the doors are locked by

checking the position of the door

lock button inside the vehicle.

Information

The door handle button will only

operate when the smart key is within

28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the out-

side door handle.

Even though you press the outside

door handle button, the doors will not

lock and the chime will sound for three

seconds if any of the following occur:

• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.

• The Engine Start/Stop button is in

ACC or ON position.

• Any of the doors are open except

for the liftgate.

OTL045003OLF044003/Q

Do not leave the Smart Key in

your vehicle with unsupervised

children. Unattended children

could press the Engine Start/

Stop button and may operate

power windows or other con-

trols, or even make the vehicle

move, which could result in

serious injury or death.

WARNING

3-9

Convenient features of your vehicle

Unlocking Your Vehicle

To unlock your vehicle:

1. Make sure you have the smart key

in your possession.

2. Press either the button on the

door handle of the Door Unlock

button (2) or the Smart Key. The

driver's door will unlock and the

hazard warning lights will blink two

times.

Two Press Unlock Feature

The priority for unlocking the driver

door only, or unlocking all the doors

with one press may be adjusted in

the User Settings mode in the cluster

LCD display.

The Two Press Unlock feature, when

enabled, will require the user to

press the door unlock button once for

driver door only and twice for unlock-

ing all the doors.

Select or Deselect the Two Press

Unlock feature in the User Settings

mode in the cluster LCD display. The

option can be found under the follow-

ing menu:

User Settings ➞ Door ➞ Two Press

Unlock

The Two Press Unlock feature can

also be enabled or disabled by

pressing the door lock and unlock

buttons simultaneously on the Key

FOB:

Press and hold both the Door Lock

button and the Door Unlock button

simultaneously until the hazard

warning lights blink.

This will enable or disable the Two

Press Unlock feature. Repeat this

procedure to enable/disable the

mode again.

Information

• The door handle button will only

operate when the smart key is with-

in 28-40 inches (0.7~1m) from the

outside door handle.

• Either the driver or front passenger

door can be opened with the door

handle button when the smart key is

within this range.

• If you press the front passenger out-

side door handle, while carrying the

Smart Key, all doors will unlock.

OTL045003

3-10

Convenient features of your vehicle

Opening the Liftgate

To open the liftgate:

1. Make sure you have the smart key

in your possession.

2. Press either the liftgate handle

button or press and hold the

Liftgate Unlock button (3) on the

smart key for more than one sec-

ond. The hazard warning lights will

blink two times.

3. Once the liftgate is opened and

then closed, the liftgate will auto-

matically re-lock after 30 seconds.

Information

The liftgate handle button will only

operate when the smart key is within

28 inches (0.7 m) from the liftgate

handle.

Panic button

Press and hold the Panic button (4)

for more than one second. The horn

sounds and hazard warning lights

blink for about 30 seconds. To cancel

the panic mode, press any button on

the Smart Key.

Start-up

You can start the engine without

inserting the key.

For more details, refer to the

"Engine Start/Stop Button" sec-

tion in chapter 5.

To prevent damaging the smart key:

• Keep the smart key away from

water or any liquid or fire. Internal

circuits may malfunction if the

inside of the smart key gets damp

(from liquids or moisture) or if it is

heated. This can exclude the

smart key from warranty cover-

age.

• Avoid dropping or throwing the

smart key.

• Protect the smart key from

extreme temperatures.

Always have the smart key with

you when leaving the vehicle. If

the smart key is left near the vehi-

cle, the vehicle battery may be dis-

charged.

NOTICE

3-11

Convenient features of your vehicle

Mechanical key

If the Smart Key does not operate

normally, you can lock or unlock the

door by using the mechanical key.

To remove the mechanical key from

the smart key fob, press and hold the

release button (1) and pull the

mechanical key out.

To unlock the vehicle using the

mechanical key, insert the mechani-

cal key into the key hole on the driv-

er door.

To reinstall the mechanical key, put

the key into the hole and push it until

a click sound is heard.

Loss of a smart key

A maximum of two Smart Keys can

be registered to a single vehicle. If

you happen to lose your smart key,

you should immediately take the

vehicle and remaining keys to your

authorized HYUNDAI dealer or tow

the vehicle, if necessary.

Smart key precautions

The smart key will not work if any of

the following occur:

• The smart key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station

or an airport which can interfere

with normal operation of the trans-

mitter.

• The smart key is near a mobile two

way radio system or a cellular

phone.

• Another vehicle's smart key is being

operated close to your vehicle.

When the smart key does not work

correctly, open and close the door

with the mechanical key. If you have

a problem with the smart key, contact

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OTL045004

3-12

Convenient features of your vehicle

If the smart key is in close proximity

to your mobile phone, the signal

could be blocked by your mobile

phone's normal operational signals.

This is especially important when the

phone is active such as making and

receiving calls, text messaging,

and/or sending/receiving emails.

When possible, avoid placing the

remote key and your mobile phone in

the same location such as a pants or

jacket pocket in order to avoid inter-

ference between the two devices.

Keep the smart key away from

electromagnetic materials that

blocks electromagnetic waves to

the key surface.

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

3. Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate

the device.

Battery replacement

If the Smart Key is not working prop-

erly, try replacing the battery with a

new one.

Battery Type: CR2032

To replace the battery:

1. Pry open the rear cover of the

smart key.

2. Remove the old battery and insert

the new battery.

3. Reinstall the rear cover of the

smart key.

NOTICE

OLF044008

3-13

Convenient features of your vehicle

If you suspect your smart key might

have sustained some damage, or

you feel your smart key is not work-

ing correctly, contact an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Information

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to the

environment and human health.

Dispose of the battery according

to your local law(s) or regula-

tions.

Immobilizer System

The immobilizer system protects your

vehicle from theft. If an improperly

coded key (or other device) is used,

the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

When the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position, the immobilizer sys-

tem indicator should come on briefly,

then go off. If the indicator starts to

blink, the system does not recognize

the coding of the key.

Turn the ignition switch to the

LOCK/OFF position, then turn the igni-

tion switch to the ON position again.

The system may not recognize your

key’s coding if another immobilizer

key or other metal object (i.e., key

chain) is near the key. The engine

may not start because the metal may

interrupt the transponder signal from

transmitting normally.

If the system repeatedly does not

recognize the coding of the key, it is

recommended that you contact your

HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or

add other devices to it. Electrical

problems could result that may make

your vehicle inoperable.

The transponder in your key is an

important part of the immobilizer

system. It is designed to give

years of trouble-free service, how-

ever you should avoid exposure to

moisture, static electricity and

rough handling. Immobilizer sys-

tem malfunction could occur.

NOTICE

In order to prevent theft of your

vehicle, do not leave spare keys

anywhere in your vehicle. Your

immobilizer password is a cus-

tomer unique password and

should be kept confidential.

WARNING

3-14

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

3. Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate

the device.

Convenient features of your vehicle

3-15

Convenient features of your vehicle

DDOOOORR LLOOCCKKSS

Operating Door Locks from

Outside the Vehicle

Mechanical key

If you lock the driver's door with turn-

ing the key toward the front of the

vehicle, all vehicle doors will lock. If

you unlock the driver's door with

turning the key toward the rear of the

vehicle, the driver's door will unlock.

Once the doors are unlocked, they

may be opened by pulling the door

handle.

When closing the door, push the

door by hand. Make sure that doors

are closed securely.

Remote key

To lock the doors, press the Door

Lock button (1) on the remote key.

Press the Door Unlock button (2) on

the remote key, the driver's door will

unlock. If you press the Door Unlock

button on the remote key again with-

in four seconds, then all the doors

will unlock.

Once the doors are unlocked, they

may be opened by pulling the door

handle.

When closing the door, push the

door by hand. Make sure that doors

are closed securely.

Smart key

To lock the doors, press the button

on the outside door handle while car-

rying the Smart Key with you or

press the Door Lock button on the

Smart Key.

OTL045005

■ Type A ■ Type B

OTL045001 OTL045003

OLF044003

Door

Unlock

Door

Lock

Lock / Unlock

3-16

Convenient features of your vehicle

Press the button on the driver's out-

side door handle while carrying the

Smart Key with you or press the

Door Unlock button on the Smart

Key, the driver's door will unlock. If

you press the button on the front

passenger's outside door, all doors

will unlock.

Once the doors are unlocked, they

may be opened by pulling the door

handle.

When closing the door, push the

door by hand. Make sure that doors

are closed securely.

Information

• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not work

properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-

ple times in rapid succession with

either the vehicle key or door lock

switch, the system may stop operat-

ing temporarily in order to protect

the circuit and prevent damage to

system components.

• Two press unlock setting can be

changed in the User Settings mode

on the cluster.

Operating Door Locks from

Inside the Vehicle

With the door lock button

• To unlock a door, push the door

lock button (1) to the "Unlock" posi-

tion. The red mark (2) on the door

lock button will be visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lock

button (1) to the "Lock" position. If

the door is locked properly, the red

mark (2) on the door lock button

will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door han-

dle (3) outward.

OTL045007

Unlock

Lock

3-17

Convenient features of your vehicle

• If the inner door handle of the driv-

er door or front passenger door is

pulled when the door lock button is

in the lock position, the button is

unlocked and the door will open.

• The front doors cannot be locked if

the key is in the ignition switch and

any front door is open.

• The doors cannot be locked if the

smart key is in the vehicle and any

door is open.

Information

If a power door lock ever fails to func-

tion while you are in the vehicle try

one or more of the following tech-

niques to exit:

• Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic and

manual) while simultaneously

pulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks and

handles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use the

mechanical key to unlock the door

from outside.

With the central door lock

switch

When pressing the ( ) switch (1), all

vehicle doors will lock.

When pressing the ( ) switch (2), all

vehicle doors will unlock.

If the key is in the ignition switch and

any door is opened, the doors will

not lock even though the lock button

(1) of the central door lock switch is

pressed.

If the smart key is in the vehicle and

any door is opened, the doors will

not lock even though the lock button

(1) of the central door lock switch is

pressed.

■ Driver's door ■ Passenger's door

OTLA045008/OTLA045312

• The doors should always be

fully closed and locked while

the vehicle is in motion. If the

doors are unlocked, the risk of

being thrown from the vehicle

in a crash is increased.

• Do not pull the inner door

handle of the driver's or pas-

senger's door while the vehi-

cle is moving.

WARNING

Do not leave children or animals

unattended in your vehicle. An

enclosed vehicle can become

extremely hot, causing death or

serious injury to unattended

children or animals who cannot

escape the vehicle. Children

might operate features of the

vehicle that could injure them,

or they could encounter other

harm, possibly from someone

gaining entry to the vehicle.

WARNING

3-18

Convenient features of your vehicle

Automatic Door Lock and

Unlock Features

Your vehicle is equipped with fea-

tures that will automatically lock or

unlock your vehicle based on set-

tings you select in the cluster LCD

display.

Auto LOCK - Enable on Speed

When this feature is set in the cluster

LCD display, all the doors will be

locked automatically when the vehi-

cle exceeds 9 mph (15 kph).

Auto LOCK - Enable on Shift

When this feature is set in the cluster

LCD display, all the doors will be

locked automatically when the vehi-

cle is shifted out of P (Park) while the

engine is running.

Always secure your vehicle.

Leaving your vehicle unlocked

increases the potential risk to

you or others from someone

hiding in your vehicle.

To secure your vehicle, while

depressing the brake, move the

shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion, engage the parking brake,

and place the ignition switch in

the LOCK/OFF position, close

all windows, lock all doors, and

always take the key with you.

WARNING

Opening a door when something

is approaching may cause dam-

age or injury. Be careful when

opening doors and watch for

vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles

or pedestrians approaching the

vehicle in the path of the door.

CAUTION

If you stay in the vehicle for a

long time while the weather is

very hot or cold, there are risks

of injuries or danger to life. Do

not lock the vehicle from the

outside when someone is in the

vehicle.

WARNING

3-19

Convenient features of your vehicle

Auto UNLOCK - Enable on Shift

When this feature is set in the LCD

cluster display, all the doors will be

unlocked automatically when the

vehicle is shifted back into P (Park).

For more information on these

features, refer to the LCD Display

section later in this chapter.

Child-Protector Rear Door locks

The child safety lock is provided to

help prevent children seated in the

rear from accidentally opening the

rear doors.The rear door safety locks

should be used whenever children

are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock is located on

the edge of each rear door. When the

child safety lock is in the lock (1)

position, the rear door will not open if

the inner door handle (2) is pulled.

To lock the child safety lock, insert a

small flat blade tool (like a screwdriv-

er or similar) into the slot and turn it

to the lock position as shown.

To allow a rear door to be opened

from inside the vehicle, unlock the

child safety lock.

If children accidently open the

rear doors while the vehicle is

in motion, they could fall out of

the vehicle. The rear door safety

locks should always be used

whenever children are in the

vehicle.

WARNING

OTL045009

3-20

Convenient features of your vehicle

This system helps to protect your

vehicle and valuables. The horn will

sound and the hazard warning lights

will blink continuously if any of the

following occurs:

- A door is opened without using the

remote key or smart key.

- The liftgate is opened without

using the remote key or smart key.

- The engine hood is opened.

The alarm continues for 30 seconds,

then the system resets. To turn off

the alarm, unlock the doors with the

remote key or smart key.

The Theft Alarm System automatical-

ly sets 30 seconds after you lock the

doors and the liftgate. For the system

to activate, you must lock the doors

and the liftgate from outside the vehi-

cle with the remote key or smart key

or by pressing the button on the out-

side of the door handle with the smart

key in your possession.

The hazard warning lights will blink

and the chime will sound once to

indicate the system is armed.

Once the security system is set,

opening any door, the liftgate, or the

hood without using the remote key or

smart key will cause the alarm to

activate.

The Theft Alarm System will not set if

the hood, the liftgate, or any door is

not fully closed. If the system will not

set, check the hood, the liftgate, or

the doors are fully closed.

Do not attempt to alter this system or

add other devices to it.

Information

• Do not lock the doors until all pas-

sengers have left the vehicle. If the

remaining passenger leaves the

vehicle when the system is armed,

the alarm will be activated.

• If the vehicle is not disarmed with the

remote key or smart key, open the

doors by using the mechanical key

and place the ignition switch in the

ON position (for remote key) or start

the engine (for smart key) by direct-

ly pressing the ignition switch with

the smart key.

• If the system is disarmed by unlock-

ing the vehicle, but neither a door or

the liftgate is opened within 30 sec-

onds, the doors will relock and the

system will rearm automatically.

TTHHEEFFTT--AALLAARRMM SSYYSSTTEEMM

3-21

Convenient features of your vehicle

SSTTEEEERRIINNGG WWHHEEEELL

Electric Power Steering (EPS)

The system assists you with steering

the vehicle. If the engine is turned off

or if the power steering system

becomes inoperative, you may still

steer the vehicle, but it will require

increased steering effort.

Should you notice any change in the

effort required to steer during normal

vehicle operation, have the system

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

If the Electric Power Steering

System does not operate normal-

ly, the warning light ( ) will illu-

minate on the instrument cluster.

You may steer the vehicle, but it

will require increased steering

efforts. Take your vehicle to an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer and

have the system checked as soon

as possible.

Information

The following symptoms may occur

during normal vehicle operation:

• The steering effort may be high

immediately after placing the igni-

tion switch in the ON position.

This happens as the system per-

forms the EPS system diagnostics.

When the diagnostics are complet-

ed, the steering wheel will return to

its normal condition.

• A click noise may be heard from the

EPS relay after the ignition switch is

in the ON or OFF position.

• Motor noise may be heard when the

vehicle is at a stop or at a low driv-

ing speed.

• If the outside ambient temperature

is low, when you operate the steer-

ing wheel a noise from the electric

power steering may occur. As the

temperature increases, the noise will

dissappear. This is a normal condi-

tion.

NOTICE

3-22

Convenient features of your vehicle

Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering

When adjusting the steering wheel to

a comfortable position, adjust the

steering wheel so that it points

toward your chest, not toward your

face. Make sure you can see the

instrument panel warning lights and

gauges. After adjusting, push the

steering wheel both up and down to

be certain it is locked in position.

Always adjust the position of the

steering wheel before driving.

To adjust the steering wheel angle

and height:

1. Pull down the lock-release lever (1).

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the

desired angle (2) and distance for-

ward/back (3).

3. Pull up the lock-release lever to

lock the steering wheel in place.

Information

Sometimes the lock release lever may

not engage completely. This may

occur when the gears of the locking

mechanism do not completely mesh. If

this occurs, pull down on the lock-

release lever, readjust the steering

wheel again, and then pull back up on

the release lever to lock the steering

wheel in place.

OTLE048010

NEVER adjust the steering

wheel while driving. This may

cause loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident.

WARNING

3-23

Convenient features of your vehicle

Heated Steering Wheel

(if equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position or when the engine is run-

ning, press the heated steering

wheel button to warm the steering

wheel. The indicator on the button

will illuminate.

To turn the heated steering wheel off,

press the button again. The indicator

on the button will turn off.

The heated steering wheel will auto-

matically turn off after approximately

30 minutes.

Do not install any cover or acces-

sory on the steering wheel. The

cover or accessory could cause

damage to the heated steering

wheel system.

Horn

To sound the horn, press the area

indicated by the horn symbol on your

steering wheel (see illustration). The

horn will operate only when this area

is pressed.

Do not strike the horn severely to

operate it, or hit it with your fist.

Do not press on the horn with a

sharp-pointed object.

NOTICE

OTL045012

OTLA045325

■ Type A

OTLA045326

■ Type B

3-24

Convenient features of your vehicle

MMIIRRRROORRSS

Inside Rearview Mirror

Before you start driving, adjust the

rearview mirror to center on the view

through the rear window.

When cleaning the mirror, use a

paper towel or similar material

dampened with glass cleaner. Do

not spray glass cleaner directly on

the mirror as this may cause the

liquid cleaner to enter the mirror

housing.

Day/night rearview mirror

(if equipped)

Make this adjustment before you

start driving and while the day/night

lever is in the day position.

NOTICE

Make sure your line of sight is

not obstructed. Do not place

objects in the rear seat, cargo

area, or behind the rear head-

rests which could interfere with

your vision through the rear

window.

WARNING

NEVER adjust the mirror while

driving. This may cause loss of

vehicle control resulting in an

accident.

WARNING

To prevent serious injury during

an accident or deployment of

the air bag, do not modify the

rearview mirror and do not

install a wide mirror.

WARNING

OTL045013

■ Type A

OOSEV048005N

■ Type B

Day

Night

3-25

Convenient features of your vehicle

Pull the day/night lever toward you to

reduce glare from the headlights of

the vehicles behind you during night

driving.

Remember that you lose some

rearview clarity in the night position.

Blue Link

center (if equipped)

For details, refer to the Blue Link

Owner's Guide, Navigation Manual

or Audio Manual.

Electrochromic mirror (ECM)

with homelink system

(if equipped)

To operate the electric rearview

mirror

Press the I button (1) to turn the

automatic- dimming function on. The

mirror indicator light will illuminate.

Press the O button (2) to turn the

automatic- dimming function off. The

mirror indicator light will turn off.

OHD046025N

OOSEV048040N

■ Type A

OOSEV048039N

■ Type B

3-26

Convenient features of your vehicle

HomeLink

Wireless Control System

Your new mirror comes with an inte-

grated HomeLink Universal

Transceiver, which allows you to pro-

gram the mirror to activate your

garage door(s), estate gate, home

lighting, etc. The mirror actually

learns the codes from your various

existing transmitters.

Retain the original transmitter for

future programming procedures (i.e.,

new vehicle purchase). It is also sug-

gested that upon the sale of the vehi-

cle, the programmed HomeLink but-

tons be erased for security purposes

(follow step 1 in the "Programming"

portion of this text).

Programming

Your vehicle may require the ignition

switch to be turned to the ACC posi-

tion for programming and/or operation

of HomeLink. It is also recommended

that a new battery be replaced in the

hand-held transmitter of the device

being programmed to HomeLink for

quicker training and accurate trans-

mission of the radio-frequency.

Follow these steps to train your

HomeLink mirror:

• When programming the

HomeLink

Wireless Control

System, you may be operating

a garage door or gate operator.

Make sure that people and

objects are out of the way of

the moving door or gate to pre-

vent potential harm or damage.

• Do not use HomeLink with

any garage door opener that

lacks the safety stop and

reverse feature as required by

U.S. federal safety standards.

(This includes any garage

door opener model manufac-

tured before April 1, 1982.) A

garage door opener which

cannot detect an object, sig-

naling the door to stop and

reverse, does not meet cur-

rent U.S. federal safety stan-

dards. Using a garage door

opener without these features

increases risk of serious

injury or death. For more

details, call 1-800-355-3515 or

on the internet at www.home-

link.com.

WARNING

OHD046305N

Glare detection sensor

Indicator light

Homelink buttons

3-27

Convenient features of your vehicle

1. When programming the buttons for

the first time, press and hold the

left and center buttons ( , )

simultaneously for approximately

20 seconds until the indicator light

begins to flash. (This procedure

erases the factory-set default

codes. Do not perform this step to

program additional hand-held

transmitters.)

For non rolling code garage door

openers, follow steps 2 - 3.

For rolling code garage door

openers, follow steps 2 - 6.

For Canadian Programming,

please follow the Canadian

Programming section.

For help with determining whether

your garage is non-rolling code or

rolling code, please refer to the

garage door openers owner's

manual or contact HomeLink cus-

tomer service at 1-800-355-3515.

2. Press and hold the button on the

HomeLink system you wish to train

and the button on the transmitter

while the transmitter is approxi-

mately 1 to 3 inches away from the

mirror. Do not release the buttons

until step 3 has been completed.

3. The HomeLink indicator light will

flash, first slowly and then rapidly.

When the indicator light flashes

rapidly, both buttons may be

released. (The rapid flashing light

indicates successful programming

of the new frequency signal.)

NOTICE

OHD046307N

Flashing

1-3inches

Transmitter

OHD046306N

Flashing

3-28

Convenient features of your vehicle

Some gate operators and garage

door openers may require you to

replace step #3 with the "cycling"

procedure noted in the "Canadian

Programming" section of this doc-

ument.

Rolling code programming

To train a garage door opener (or

other rolling code equipped devices)

with the rolling code feature, follow

these instructions after completing

the "Programming" portion of this

text. (A second person may make the

following training procedures quicker

& easier.)

4. Locate the "learn" or "smart" but-

ton on the device's motor head

unit. Exact location and color of

the button may vary by product

brand. If there is difficulty locating

the "learn" or "smart" button, refer-

ence the device's owner's manual

or contact HomeLink at 1-800-

355-3515 or on the internet at

www.homelink.com.

5. Press and release the "learn" or

"smart" button on the device’s

motor head unit. You have 30 sec-

onds to complete step number 6.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly

press and release the pro-

grammed HomeLink button up to

three times. The rolling code

equipped device should now rec-

ognize the HomeLink signal and

activate when the HomeLink but-

ton is pressed. The remaining two

buttons may now be programmed

if this has not previously been

done. Refer to the "Programming"

portion of this text.

Operating HomeLink

To operate, simply press the pro-

grammed HomeLink button.

Activation will now occur for the

trained product (garage door, securi-

ty system, entry door lock, estate

gate, or home or office lighting). For

convenience, the hand-held trans-

mitter of the device may also be used

at any time. The HomeLink Wireless

Controls System (once programmed)

or the original hand-held transmitter

may be used to activate the device

(e.g. garage door, entry door lock,

etc.). In the event that there are still

programming difficulties, contact

HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on

the internet at www.homelink.com.

NOTICE

3-29

Convenient features of your vehicle

Erasing programmed HomeLink but-

tons

To erase the three programmed but-

tons (individual buttons cannot be

erased):

• Press and hold the left and center

buttons simultaneously, until the

indicator light begins to flash

(approximately 20 seconds).

Release both buttons. Do not hold

for longer than 30 seconds.

HomeLink is now in the train (or

learning) mode and can be pro-

grammed at any time.

Gate operator & Canadian program-

ming

During programming, your handheld

transmitter may automatically stop

transmitting. Continue to press the

Integrated HomeLink

Wireless

Control System button (note steps 2

through 3 in the Programming por-

tion of this document) while you

press and re-press ("cycle") your

handheld transmitter every two sec-

onds until the frequency signal has

been learned. The indicator light will

flash slowly and then rapidly after

several seconds upon successful

training.

FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3

IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following

three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

3. The transceiver has been tested and

complies with FCC and Industry

Canada rules. Changes or modifica-

tions not expressly approved by the

party responsible for compliance

could void the user's authority to

operate the device.

OHD046306N

Flashing

3-30

Convenient features of your vehicle

Electrochromic mirror (ECM)

with HomeLink

system and

Blue Link

(if equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a

Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror

and an Integrated HomeLink

Wireless Control System. The

HomeLink

Universal Transceiver

allows you to activate your garage

door(s), electric gate, home lighting,

etc.

(1) HomeLink Channel 1

(2) HomeLink Channel 2

(3) HomeLink Channel 3

(4) Garage Door Opener Status

Indicator : Closing or Closed

(5) HomeLink Operation Indicator

(6) Garage Door Opener Status

Indicator : Opening or Opened

(7) HomeLink User Interface

Indicator

Automatic-Dimming Night Vision

Safety™ (NVS

) Mirror

(if equipped)

The NVS

Mirror automatically

reduces glare by monitoring light lev-

els in the front and the rear of the

vehicle. Any object that obstructs

either light sensor will degrade the

automatic dimming control feature.

For more information regarding

NVS

mirrors and other applica-

tions, please refer to the Gentex

website:

www.gentex.com

OOS047093N

HomeLink Indicator

HomeLink Button

Telematics buttons

3-31

Convenient features of your vehicle

Your mirror will automatically dim

upon detecting glare from the vehi-

cles traveling behind you. The auto-

dimming function can be controlled

by pressing the Dimming ON/OFF

button:

1. Pressing and holding the button

for 3 seconds turns the auto-dim-

ming function OFF which is indi-

cated by the green Status

Indicator LED turning off.

2. Pressing and holding the button

for 3 seconds again turns the auto-

dimming function ON which is indi-

cated by the green Status Indicator

LED turning on.

The mirror defaults to the ON posi-

tion each time the vehicle is started.

Integrated HomeLink

Wireless

Control System

The HomeLink

Wireless Control

System can replace up to three

hand-held radio-frequency (RF)

transmitters with a single built-in

device. This innovative feature will

learn the radio frequency codes of

most current transmitters to operate

devices such as gate operators,

garage door openers, entry door

locks, security systems, even home

lighting. Both standard and rolling

code-equipped transmitters can be

programmed by following the out-

lined procedures.

Additional HomeLink

information

can be found at: www.homelink.com

or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Retain the original transmitter of the

RF device you are programming for

use in other vehicles as well as for

future HomeLink

programming. It is

also suggested that upon the sale of

the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLink

buttons be erased for

security purposes.

Before programming

HomeLink

to a garage door

opener or gate operator, make

sure people and objects are out

of the way of the device to pre-

vent potential harm or damage.

Do not use the HomeLink

with

any garage door opener that

lacks the safety stop and

reverse features required by

U.S. federal safety standards

(this includes any garage door

opener model manufactured

before April 1, 1982). A garage

door that cannot detect an

object - signaling the door to

stop and reverse - does not

meet current U.S. federal safety

standards. Using a garage door

opener without these features

increases the risk of serious

injury or death.

WARNING

3-32

Convenient features of your vehicle

Programming HomeLink

Please note the following:

• When programming a garage door

opener, it is advised to park the

vehicle outside of the garage.

• It is recommended that a new bat-

tery be placed in the hand-held

transmitter of the device being pro-

grammed to HomeLink

for quicker

training and accurate transmission

of the radio-frequency signal.

• Some vehicles may require the

ignition switch to be placed in the

ACC (or "Accessories") position for

programming and/or operation of

HomeLink

• In the event that there are still pro-

gramming difficulties or questions

after following the programming

steps listed below, contact

HomeLink

at: www.homelink.com

or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Programming

To program most devices, follow

these instructions:

1. Press and release (1), (2) or (3)

button.

• If the indicator (4) is turned ON

in Orange, go to Step 3) since it

is a new programming.

• If the indicator (4) is continuous-

ly turned ON or flashes in Green

rapidly several times, go to Step

2) since it is a programmed but-

ton.

2. Press and hold the button you

wish to program for approximately

15-25 seconds until the LED flash-

es in Orange for several times.

3. Hold the Garage Door Opener

Original Transmitter (OT) near the

HomeLink Mirror.

4. Press the Original Transmitter

(OT) button until the indicator (4)

is turned continuously ON or

flashes in Green for approximately

10 seconds and it indicates the

programing is completed.

OOS047095N

OOS047096N

3-33

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

• Some garage door openers require

to press the programmed button on

the mirror up to three times right

after the programming is just com-

pleted to operate the garage door.

• The indicator (4) is turned ON in

Orange and flashes for about 60sec-

onds, during the programing mode

and if a programing is not succeed-

ed within the 60 seconds, the pro-

graming mode will be abort.

HomeLink

should now activate your

rolling code equipped device.

Gate operator & Canadian program-

ming

During programming, your handheld

transmitter may automatically stop

transmitting. Continue to press the

Integrated HomeLink

Wireless

Control System button while you

press and re-press ("cycle") your

handheld transmitter every two sec-

onds until the frequency signal has

been learned. The indicator light will

flash slowly and then rapidly after

several seconds upon successful

training.

Operating HomeLink

1. Press and release one of the

HomeLink buttons (1, 2 or 3) that

programed.

2. The HomeLink indicator (4) will

operate as below:

- Indicates Green and is continu-

ously ON (Fixed Code Garage

Door Opener)

- Flashes in Green rapidly (Rolling

Code Garage Door Opener)

OOS047095N

3-34

Erasing HomeLink

buttons

1. Press and hold the button (1) and

(3) simultaneously.

2. The indicator (4) is turned contin-

uously ON in orange for about 10

seconds.

3. Then the indicator (4) color

changes to Green and flashes

rapidly.

Release the buttons once the

green indicator flashes.

4. Now HomeLink button (1), (2) and

(4) memories are all cleared.

NVS

is a registered trademark and

Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex

Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.

HomeLink

is a registered trademark

owned by Johnson Controls,

Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.

FCC ID: NZLUAHL5A

IC: 4112A-UAHL5A

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following

three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

3. The transceiver has been tested and

complies with FCC and Industry

Canada rules. Changes or modifica-

tions not expressly approved by the

party responsible for compliance

could void the user's authority to

operate the device.

Two Way Communication Programing

1. Complete the HomeLink

"Programming" first.

2. Before the first 10 times HomeLink

button is pressed after the pro-

gramming, the following steps

MUST occur to program two way

communication. (only for some

older garage doors)

3. Press and release the programed

HomeLink button to activate the

garage door.

Convenient features of your vehicle

OOS047098N

OOS047099N

3-35

Convenient features of your vehicle

4. Once the garage door is stopped,

press and release the "Learn" or

"Smart" button on the Garage door

opener within 1 minute from the

time of pressing the programed

HomeLink button on mirror.

5. If the both indicator (4) and (6) are

flashing rapidly for about 5 sec-

onds, the two way synchronization

is completed.

Information

Some newer garage door openers pro-

vide two-way communication syn-

chronizing when programming the

original transmitter (OT).

Operating Two Way Communication

1. Press and release (1), (2) or (3)

button.

2. The indicator (4) and (6) operates

as below:

- If the indicator (4) flashes in

Orange, it indicates that the

garage door is "closing".

- If the indicator (4) is ON continu-

ously in Green, it indicates that

the garage door is "closed".

- If the indicator (6) flashes in

Orange, it indicates that the

garage door is "Opening".

- If the indicator (6) is ON continu-

ously in Green, it indicates that

the garage door is "Opened".

- If the indicator (4) or (6) does not

turn to Green, it indicates that the

last status of garage door was

not received properly. The

HomeLink mirror tries to receive

the last known status of the

garage door for a few seconds.

OOS047411N

OOS047099N

OOS047412N

3-36

Convenient features of your vehicle

Recalling Garage Door Status

Homelink mirror with two way com-

munication provides a way to view

the last stored message from the

garage door opener. In order to recall

the last known status of the last acti-

vated device, press the buttons "1

and 2" OR "2 and 3" simultaneously.

• If the indicator (4) is ON continu-

ously in Green, it indicates that the

last activated device was "closed"

properly.

• If the indicator (6) is ON continu-

ously in Green, it indicates that the

last activated device was "open"

properly.

Information

Two way communication range dis-

tance between "vehicle" and "garage

door opener" is 100m.

The range may be reduced or

increased a little due to obstacle con-

ditions around the garage door open-

er, such as houses or trees.

Side View Mirrors

Make sure to adjust the side view

mirrors to your desired position

before you begin driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both

left-hand and right-hand side view

mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted

remotely with the remote switch. The

side view mirrors can be folded to

help prevent damage when going

through an automatic car wash or

when passing through a narrow

street.

The right side view mirror is convex.

Objects seen in the mirror are closer

than they appear.

Use the inside rear view mirror or

look back directly to determine the

actual distance of other vehicles

prior to changing lanes.

OTL045018

Do not adjust or fold the side

view mirrors while driving. This

may cause loss of vehicle con-

trol resulting in an accident.

WARNING

• Do not scrape ice off the mir-

ror face; this may damage the

surface of the glass.

• If the mirror is jammed with

ice, do not adjust the mirror by

force. Use an approved de-icer

spray. (Do not use radiator

anti-freeze.) Wipe the mirror

using a sponge or soft cloth

with warm water. Or move the

vehicle to a warm area and

allow the ice to melt.

CAUTION

3-37

Convenient features of your vehicle

Blind Spot Mirror (if equipped)

The Blind Spot Mirror (BSM) is a

supplemental mirror that minimizes

the driver's blind spot zone by

expanding the field of view on the

rear side of the vehicle.

The blind spot mirror is equipped on

the driver's left side view mirror.

Do not clean the mirror with harsh

abrasives, fuel or other petroleum

based cleaning products.

Side View Mirror Adjustment

Adjusting the side view mirrors:

1. Move the lever (1) either to the L

(left side) or R (right side) to select

the rearview mirror you would like

to adjust.

2. Use the mirror adjustment control

(2) to position the selected mirror

up, down, left or right.

3. After adjustment, put the button

into neutral (center) position to

prevent inadvertent adjustment.

NOTICE

OTLA045311

OLF044478N

• Always check the road condi-

tion while driving for unex-

pected situations even though

the vehicle is equipped with a

blind spot mirror.

• The blind spot mirror is a

device made for convenience.

Do not solely rely on the mir-

ror but always pay attention to

traffic around you.

WARNING

OTLA045313

3-38

Convenient features of your vehicle

• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum adjust-

ing angles, but the motor contin-

ues to operate while the switch

is pressed. Do not press the

switch longer than necessary,

because this can damage the

motor.

• Do not attempt to adjust the side

view mirrors by hand, because

this can damage the motor.

Folding the side view mirrors

To fold the side view mirrors, grasp

the housing of the mirror and then

fold it inwards.

NOTICE

OTL045019

3-39

Convenient features of your vehicle

(1) Driver's door power window

switch

(2) Front passenger's door power

window switch

(3) Rear door (left) power window

switch

(4) Rear door (right) power window

switch

(5) Window opening and closing

(6) Automatic power window

(7) Power window lock switch

WWIINNDDOOWWSS

OTLA045023

3-40

Convenient features of your vehicle

Power Windows

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position to be able to raise or lower

the windows. Each door has a Power

Window switch to control that door’s

window. The driver has a Power

Window Lock switch which can block

the operation of passenger windows.

The power windows will operate for

approximately 30 seconds after the

ignition switch is placed in the ACC

or LOCK/OFF position. However, if

the front doors are opened, the

Power Windows cannot be operated

even within the 30 second period.

Information

• In cold and wet climates, power win-

dows may not work properly due to

freezing conditions.

• While driving with the rear win-

dows down or with the sunroof (if

equipped) opened (or partially

opened), your vehicle may demon-

strate a wind buffeting or pulsation

noise. This noise is normal and can

be reduced or eliminated by taking

the following actions. If the noise

occurs with one or both of the rear

windows down, partially lower both

front windows approximately 1 inch

(2.5 cm). If you experience the noise

with the sunroof open, slightly close

the sunroof.

Window opening and closing

To open:

Press the window switch down to the

first detent position (5). Release the

switch when you want the window to

stop.

To close:

Pull the window switch up to the first

detent position (5). Release the win-

dow switch when you want the win-

dow to stop.

To avoid serious injury or death,

do not extend your head, arms

or body outside the windows

while driving.

WARNING

OTL045024

3-41

Convenient features of your vehicle

Auto up/down window

(if equipped)

Pressing or pulling up the power win-

dow switch momentarily to the sec-

ond detent position (6) completely

lowers or lifts the window even when

the switch is released. To stop the

window at the desired position while

the window is in operation, pull up or

press down and release the switch.

To reset the power windows

If the power windows do not operate

normally, the automatic power win-

dow system must be reset as follows:

1. Place the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Close the window and continue

pulling up on the power window

switch for at least one second.

If the power windows do not operate

properly after resetting, have the

system checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Automatic reverse (if equipped)

If a window senses any obstacle while

it is closing automatically, it will stop

and lower approximately 12 inches (30

cm) to allow the object to be cleared.

If the window detects the resistance

while the power window switch is

pulled up continuously, the window

will stop upward movement then

lower approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).

If the power window switch is pulled

up continuously again within 5 sec-

onds after the window is lowered by

the automatic window reverse fea-

ture, the automatic window reverse

will not operate.

OLF044032

The automatic reverse feature

doesn't activate while resetting

the power window system.

Make sure body parts or other

objects are safely out of the way

before closing the windows to

avoid injuries or vehicle dam-

age.

WARNING

3-42

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

The automatic reverse feature is only

active when the "Auto Up" feature is

used by fully pulling up the switch to

the second detent.

Do not install any accessories on

the windows. The automatic

reverse feature may not operate.

Power window lock switch

The driver can disable the power

window switches on the rear passen-

ger doors by pressing the power win-

dow lock switch.

When the power window lock switch

is pressed:

• The rear passenger control will not

be able to operate the rear pas-

senger power window

• Note that the front passenger con-

trol is still able to operate the front

passenger window, and that the

driver master control can still oper-

ate all the power windows.

• To prevent possible damage to

the power window system, do

not open or close two windows

or more at the same time. This

will also ensure the longevity of

the fuse.

• Never try to operate the main

switch on the driver's door and

the individual door window

switch in opposite directions at

the same time. If this is done, the

window will stop and cannot be

opened or closed.

NOTICE

Make sure body parts or other

objects are safely out of the way

before closing the windows to

avoid injuries or vehicle damage.

Objects less than 0.16 inch (4

mm) in diameter caught

between the window glass and

the upper window channel may

not be detected by the automat-

ic reverse window and the win-

dow will not stop and reverse

direction.

WARNING

OTLA045025

Do not allow children to play

with the power windows. Keep

the driver's door power window

lock switch in the LOCK posi-

tion. Serious injury or death can

result from unintentional win-

dow operation by a child.

WARNING

3-43

Convenient features of your vehicle

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position before you can open or

close the sunroof.

The sunroof can be operated for

approximately 30 seconds after the

ignition key is removed or turned to

the ACC or LOCK position. However,

if the front doors are opened, the

sunroof cannot be adjusted even

within the 30 seconds period.

Information

• In cold and wet climates, the sun-

roof may not work properly due to

freezing conditions.

• After the vehicle is washed or in a

rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any

water that is on the sunroof before

operating it.

• Do not continue to move the

sunroof control lever after the

sunroof is fully opened, closed,

or tilted. Damage to the motor or

system components could

occur.

• Make sure the sunroof is closed

fully when leaving your vehicle.

If the sunroof is left open, rain or

snow may wet the interior of the

vehicle. Also, leaving the sun-

roof open when the vehicle is

unattended may invite theft.

NOTICE

PPAANNOORRAAMMIICC SSUUNNRROOOOFF ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

OTL045026

• Never adjust the sunroof or

sunshade while driving. This

could result in loss of control

and an accident that may

cause death, serious injury, or

property damage.

• Make sure heads, hands, arms

or any other body parts or

objects are out of the way

before operating the sunroof.

• Do not extend your head, arms

or body outside the sunroof

while driving, to avoid serious

injury.

• Do not leave the engine run-

ning and the key in your vehi-

cle with unsupervised children.

Unattended children could

operate the sunroof, which

could result in serious injury.

• The panorama sunroof is

made of glass, subject to

break in case of an accident.

Passengers without the appro-

priate protection (e.g. seat belt,

CRS, etc.) on may project out

through the broken glass and

may be seriously injured or

even result in death.

• Do not sit on the top of the

vehicle. It may cause injury or

vehicle damage.

WARNING

3-44

Convenient features of your vehicle

Sunshade

• To open the sunshade, pull the

sunroof control lever backward (1)

to the first detent position.

• To close the sunshade when the

sunroof glass is closed, push the

sunroof control lever forward (2).

Sliding the Sunroof

When the sunshade is closed

If you push the sunroof control lever

backward past the first detent, the

sunshade will slide all the way open

and then the sunroof glass will slide

all the way open.

To stop the sunroof movement at any

point, push the sunroof control lever

either forward or backward momen-

tarily.

When the sunshade is opened

If you pull the sunroof control lever

backward, the sunroof glass will slide

all the way open. To stop the sunroof

movement at any point, pull or push

the sunroof control lever momentarily.

Information

Only the front glass of the panoramic

sunroof opens and closes.

OTL045028

OTL045027

3-45

Convenient features of your vehicle

Tilting the Sunroof

When the sunshade is closed

If you push the sunroof control lever

upward, the sunshade will slide open

then the sunroof glass will tilt open.

To stop the sunroof movement at any

point, push the sunroof control lever

momentarily.

When the sunshade is opened

If you push the sunroof control lever

upward, the sunroof glass will tilt

closed.

Closing the Sunroof

To close the sunroof glass only

Push the sunroof control lever for-

ward to the first detent position.

To close the sunroof glass with

the sunshade

Push the sunroof control lever for-

ward to the second detent position.

The sunroof glass will close, then the

sunshade will close automatically.

To stop the sunroof movement at any

point, push the sunroof control lever

either forward or backward momen-

tarily.

Automatic reverse

If the sunroof senses any to an

obstacle while it is closing automati-

cally, it will reverse direction then

stop to allow the object to be cleared.

OTL045030 ODH043039OTL045029

Small objects that can get

caught between the sunroof

glass and the front glass chan-

nel may not be detected by the

automatic reverse system. In

this case, the sunroof glass will

not detect the object and will

not reverse direction.

WARNING

3-46

Convenient features of your vehicle

• Periodically remove any dirt that

may accumulate on the sunroof

guide rail or between the sun-

roof and roof panel which can

make a noise.

• Do not try to open the sunroof

when the temperature is below

freezing or when the sunroof is

covered with snow or ice, other-

wise the motor could be dam-

aged. In cold and wet climates,

the sunroof may not work prop-

erly.

To Reset the Sunroof

The sunroof may need to be reset if

the following conditions occur:

- The battery is discharged or dis-

connected or the sunroof fuse has

been replaced or disconnected

- The sunroof control lever is not

operating correctly

To reset the sunroof, perform the fol-

lowing steps:

1. Turn the engine on and close the

sunroof glass and sunshade com-

pletely.

2. Release the control lever.

3. Push and hold the sunroof control

lever forward (to close the sun-

shade) for about 10 seconds until

the sunroof moves slightly, then

release the control lever.

4. Push and hold the sunroof control

lever forward until the sunroof

operates as follows:

Sunshade Open → Glass Tilt Open

→ Glass Slide Open → Glass Slide

Close → Sunshade Close

Then, release the control lever.

When this is complete, the sunroof

system is reset.

Information

• If the sunroof is not reset when the

vehicle battery is disconnected or

discharged, or the sunroof fuse is

blown, the sunroof may not operate

normally.

• For more details, contact an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

OTL045031

3-47

Convenient features of your vehicle

Hood

Opening the hood

1. Park the vehicle and set the park-

ing brake.

2. Pull the release lever to unlatch

the hood. The hood should pop

open slightly.

3. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise

the hood slightly, push up the sec-

ondary latch (1) inside of the hood

center and lift the hood (2).

4. Pull out the support rod and hold

the hood open with the support

rod (1).

EEXXTTEERRIIOORR FFEEAATTUURREESS

OTLA045032

OTLE048033 OTL045245

• Grasp the support rod in the

area wrapped in rubber. The

rubber will help prevent you

from being burned by hot

metal when the engine is hot.

• The stay rod must be inserted

completely into the hole pro-

vided whenever you inspect

the engine compartment. This

will prevent the hood from

falling and possibly injuring

you.

WARNING

3-48

Convenient features of your vehicle

Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the

following:

• All filler caps in the engine com-

partment must be correctly

installed.

• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be

removed from the engine com-

partment.

2. Return the support rod to its clip to

prevent it from rattling.

3. Lower the hood halfway (lifted

approximately 12 inches (30 cm)

from the closed position) and push

down to securely lock in place.

Then double check to be sure the

hood is secure.

Fuel Filler Door

Opening the fuel filler door

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Your vehicle is equipped with a

lockable push-to-open fuel filler

door. To unlock the fuel filler door,

the vehicle must be unlocked. The

vehicle may be unlocked by any of

the following methods:

- Press the door unlock button on

the remote key or the smart key

- Press the door unlock button on

the driver's side door panel

- Pull the inside door handle on the

driver's side door panel

Information

If the driver's side door is locked, the

push-to-open fuel filler door will

remain locked and will not open when

pressed.

Follow the procedure above to open

the fuel filler door.

• Before closing the hood,

ensure all obstructions are

removed from around the

hood opening.

• Always double check to be

sure that the hood is firmly

latched before driving away.

Check there is no hood open

warning light or message dis-

played on the instrument clus-

ter. If the hood is not latched

while the vehicle is moving,

the chime will sound to warn

the driver the hood is not fully

latched. Driving with the hood

opened may cause a total loss

of visibility, which might

result in an accident.

• Do not move the vehicle with

the hood in the raised posi-

tion, as vision is obstructed.

Doing so could result in an

accident. The hood could also

fall and become damaged.

WARNING

3-49

Convenient features of your vehicle

3. To open the fuel filler door, press

the center edge of the fuel filler

door.

4. Pull the fuel filler door (1) outward

to access the fuel tank cap.

5. To remove the fuel tank cap (2),

turn it counterclockwise. You may

hear a hissing noise as the pres-

sure inside the tank equalizes.

6. Place the fuel cap on the hook on

the inside of the fuel filler door.

Information

If the fuel filler door does not open

because ice has formed around it, tap

lightly or push on the door to break

the ice and release the door. Do not

pry on the door. If necessary, spray

around the door with an approved de-

icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-

freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm

place and allow the ice to melt.

OTLE048035OTLE048031

3-50

Convenient features of your vehicle

Closing the fuel filler door

1. To install the fuel tank cap, turn it

clockwise until it "clicks" one time.

2. Close the fuel filler door until it is

latched securely.

• Do not use cellular phones

while refueling. Electric cur-

rent and/or electronic interfer-

ence from cellular phones can

potentially ignite fuel vapors

and cause a fire.

• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refuel-

ing. You can generate a build-

up of static electricity by

touching, rubbing or sliding

against any item or fabric

capable of producing static

electricity. Static electricity

discharge can ignite fuel

vapors causing a fire. If you

must re-enter the vehicle, you

should once again eliminate

potentially dangerous static

electricity discharge by touch-

ing a metal part of the vehicle,

away from the fuel filler neck,

nozzle or other gasoline

source, with your bare hand.

• When using an approved

portable fuel container, be

sure to place the container on

the ground prior to refueling.

Static electricity discharge

from the container can ignite

fuel vapors causing a fire.

Once refueling has begun,

contact between your bare

hand and the vehicle should

be maintained until the filling

is complete.

• Use only approved portable

plastic fuel containers designed

to carry and store gasoline.

• When refueling, always move

the shift lever to the P (Park)

position, set the parking

brake, and place the ignition

switch to the LOCK/OFF posi-

tion. Sparks produced by

electrical components related

to the engine can ignite fuel

vapors causing a fire.

Gasoline is highly flammable

and explosive. Failure to follow

these guidelines may result in

SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• Read and follow all warnings

posted at the gas station.

• Before refueling, note the

location of the Emergency

Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,

at the gas station.

• Before touching the fuel noz-

zle, you should eliminate the

potential build-up of static

electricity by touching a metal

part of the vehicle, a safe dis-

tance away from the fuel filler

neck, nozzle, or other gas

source, with your bare hand.

WARNING

3-51

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

Make sure to refuel your vehicle

according to the "Fuel Requirements"

suggested in the Introduction chapter.

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Any type

of fuel spilled on painted sur-

faces may damage the paint.

• If the fuel filler cap requires

replacement, use only a genuine

HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent

specified for your vehicle. An

incorrect fuel filler cap can

result in a serious malfunction

of the fuel system or emission

control system.

NOTICE

• Always check that the fuel cap

is installed securely to pre-

vent fuel spillage in the event

of an accident.

• Do not use matches or a

lighter and do not smoke or

leave a lit cigarette in your

vehicle while at a gas station,

especially during refueling.

• Do not over-fill or top-off your

vehicle tank, which can cause

gasoline spillage.

• If a fire breaks out during refu-

eling, leave the vicinity of the

vehicle, and immediately con-

tact the manager of the gas

station and then contact the

local fire department. Follow

any safety instructions they

provide.

• If pressurized fuel sprays out,

it can cover your clothes or

skin and thus subject you to

the risk of fire and burns.

Always remove the fuel cap

carefully and slowly. If the cap

is venting fuel or if you hear a

hissing sound, wait until the

condition stops before com-

pletely removing the cap.

3-52

Convenient features of your vehicle

Non-Powered liftgate

Opening the liftgate

• The liftgate is locked or unlocked

when all doors are locked or

unlocked with the key, transmitter,

smart key or central door lock

switch.

• If unlocked, the liftgate can be

opened by pressing the handle

switch and pulling up on the handle.

• Only the liftgate is unlocked if the

liftgate unlock button on the trans-

mitter or smart key is pressed for

about 1 second, or the liftgate

handle button is pressed when the

smart key is detected.

Information

In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not work

properly due to freezing conditions.

Make certain that you close the

liftgate before driving your vehi-

cle. Possible damage may occur

to the liftgate lift cylinders and

attached hardware if the liftgate is

not closed prior to driving.

Closing the liftgate

To close the liftgate, lower and push

down the liftgate firmly. Make sure

that the liftgate is securely latched.

NOTICE

LLIIFFTTGGAATTEE

OTLE048036

The liftgate swings upward.

Make sure no objects or people

are near the rear of the vehicle

when opening the liftgate.

WARNING

OTLE048037

Make sure your hands, feet and

other parts of your body are

safely out of the way before

closing the liftgate.

WARNING

3-53

Convenient features of your vehicle

Emergency liftgate safety

release

Your vehicle is equipped with an

emergency liftgate safety release

lever located on the bottom of the lift-

gate inside the vehicle.

To unlock and open the liftgate man-

ually from inside the luggage com-

partment, perform the following

steps:

1. Remove the cover.

2. Push the release lever to the right.

3. Push the liftgate outward and

upward.

OTLE048038

Do not hold the part (gas lifter)

that supports the liftgate. Be

aware that the deformation of

the part may cause vehicle

damage and a risk of safety

accident.

WARNING

OHYK047009

Always keep the liftgate com-

pletely closed while the vehicle

is in motion. If it is left open or

ajar, poisonous exhaust gases

containing carbon monoxide

(CO) may enter the vehicle and

serious illness or death may

result.

WARNING

Make sure nothing is near the

liftgate latch and striker while

closing the tailgate. It may dam-

age the liftgate's latch.

CAUTION

3-54

Convenient features of your vehicle

Power liftgate (if equipped)

Power liftgate button

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position and the shift lever is in Park

(P), the power liftgate can be opened

by using the console button on the

dash.

Before using the power liftgate, make

sure the power liftgate option is

selected in the User Setting Modes

in the cluster LCD display.

For more details, refer to "LCD

Display" in this chapter.

Information

The power liftgate operates only when

the automatic shift lever is in P (Park).

OTLE048039

• For emergencies, be fully

aware of the location of the

emergency liftgate safety

release lever in this vehicle

and how to open the liftgate if

you are accidentally locked in

the luggage compartment.

• No one should be allowed to

occupy the luggage compart-

ment of the vehicle at any time.

The luggage compartment is a

very dangerous location in the

event of a crash.

• Use the release lever for

emergencies only. Use

extreme caution, especially

while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

Never leave children unattended

in your vehicle. Children might

operate the power liftgate.

Doing so could result in injury

to themselves or others, and

could damage the vehicle.

WARNING

Make sure there are no people

or objects around the liftgate

before operating the power lift-

gate. Wait until the liftgate is

opened fully and stopped before

loading or unloading cargo or

passengers from the vehicle.

WARNING

3-55

Convenient features of your vehicle

Do not close or open the power

liftgate manually. This may cause

damage to the power liftgate. If it

is necessary to close or open the

power liftgate manually when the

battery is discharged or discon-

nected, do not apply excessive

force.

Opening the liftgate

The power liftgate will open automat-

ically by doing one of the following:

Smart key liftgate unlock button

Press and hold the liftgate unlock

button on the smart key.

Power liftgate handle switch

Press the liftgate outside handle

switch while having the smart key

with you.

NOTICE

OTL048644N

OTLE048040

3-56

Power liftgate button

Press the power liftgate button for

approximately one second.

In order to suddenly stop the move-

ment of the liftgate while it is operat-

ing, quickly press the power liftgate

button.

Closing the liftgate

The power liftgate will close automat-

ically by doing one of the following:

Smart key liftgate unlock button

Press and hold the liftgate unlock

button on the smart key when the lift-

gate is opened. The liftgate will close

and lock automatically.

Power liftgate inner button

Press the power liftgate inner button

for approximately 1 second. The lift-

gate will close and lock automatically.

Convenient features of your vehicle

OTLE048039 OTLE048041

OTL048644N

3-57

Convenient features of your vehicle

Power liftgate button

Press the power liftgate button for

approximately one second. In order

to suddenly stop the movement of

the liftgate while it is operating,

quickly press the power liftgate but-

ton.

In order to suddenly stop the move-

ment of the liftgate while it is operat-

ing, quickly press the power liftgate

button.

Power liftgate non-opening con-

ditions

The power liftgate does not open

when the vehicle is in motion.

OTLE048039

The chime will sound if you

drive with the liftgate opened.

Stop your vehicle immediately

at a safe place and check if your

liftgate is opened.

WARNING

Operating the power liftgate

more than 5 times continuously

could cause damage to the oper-

ating motor. In this case, the

power liftgate system enters into

thermal protection mode to pre-

vent the motor from overheating.

In thermal protection mode the

power liftgate will not operate. If

any of the power liftgate buttons

are pressed to try to open the

liftgate, the chime will sound 3

times but the liftgate will remain

closed.

Allow the power liftgate system

to cool for about 1 minute before

operating the system again.

CAUTION

3-58

Convenient features of your vehicle

Never intentionally place any

object or part of your body in

the path of the power liftgate to

make sure the automatic rever-

sal operates.

WARNING

• The power liftgate can be oper-

ated when the engine is not run-

ning. However, the power liftgate

operation consumes a large

amount of electic power.

To prevent the battery from

being discharged, do not oper-

ate it excessively (e.g. more than

5 times repeatedly).

• To prevent the battery from

being discharged, do not leave

the power liftgate in the open

position for a long time.

• Do not modify or repair any part

of the power liftgate by yourself.

This must be done by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

• When jacking up the vehicle to

change a tire or repair the vehi-

cle, do not operate the power

liftgate. This could cause the

power liftgate to operate

improperly.

• In cold and wet climates, the

power liftgate may not work

properly due to freezing condi-

tions.

Automatic reversal

During power opening and closing if

the power liftgate is blocked by an

object or part of the body, the power

liftgate will detect the resistance.

If resistance is detected while open-

ing or closing the power liftgate, the

liftgate will stop and move in the

opposite direction.

However, in some instances the

automatic reversal system may not

detect the object if it is too soft or is

very thin, or if the liftgate is almost

fully closed near the latched position.

Caution should be taken to prevent

any objects from obstructing the lift-

gate opeining.

If the automatic reversal feature

operates more than 2 times while

attempting to open or close the lift-

gate, the power liftgate may stop at

that position. If this occurs, carefully

close the liftgate manually, and then

try to operate the power liftgate auto-

matically again.

NOTICE

OTLE048042

3-59

Convenient features of your vehicle

How to reset the power liftgate

If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, or if the power liftgate

fuse has been replaced or removed,

reset the power liftgate by performing

the following procedure:

1. Put the shift lever in park (P).

2. Press the power liftgate inner but-

ton and the power liftgate outer

handle button simultaneously for

more than 3 seconds. The chime

will sound.

3. Close the liftgate manually.

If the power liftgate does not work

properly after the above procedure,

have the system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

When operating the power liftgate,

the gear shift lever must be in the

(P) park position in order to oper-

ate normally.

Power liftgate opening height

user setting

Follow the instructions below to set

the fully open height of the power lift-

gate:

1. Position the liftgate manually to

the height you prefer.

2. Press the power liftgate inner but-

ton for more than 3 seconds.

3. Close the liftgate manually after

hearing the buzzer sound.

The liftgate will open to the manually

adjusted height that was set.

NOTICE

Do not put heavy objects on the

power liftgate before you oper-

ate the power liftgate feature.

Additional weight may damage

the operation of the system.

CAUTION

OTLE048041

3-60

Convenient features of your vehicle

Emergency liftgate safety

release

Your vehicle is equipped with an

emergency liftgate safety release

lever located on the bottom of the lift-

gate inside the vehicle.

To unlock and open the liftgate man-

ually from inside the luggage com-

partment, perform the following

steps:

1. Remove the cover.

2. Push the release lever to the right.

3. Push the liftgate outward and

upward.

Always keep the liftgate com-

pletely closed while the vehicle

is in motion. If it is left open or

ajar, poisonous exhaust gases

containing carbon monoxide

(CO) may enter the vehicle and

serious illness or death may

result.

WARNING

Rear cargo area

Occupants should never ride in

the rear cargo area where no

restraints are available. To avoid

injury in the event of an acci-

dent or sudden stops, occu-

pants should always be proper-

ly restrained.

WARNING

OTLE048038

• For emergencies, be fully

aware of the location of the

emergency liftgate safety

release lever in this vehicle

and how to open the liftgate if

you are accidentally locked in

the luggage compartment.

• No one should be allowed to

occupy the luggage compart-

ment of the vehicle at any time.

The luggage compartment is a

very dangerous location in the

event of a crash.

• Use the release lever for

emergencies only. Use

extreme caution, especially

while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

3-61

Convenient features of your vehicle

Smart Liftgate (if equipped)

On vehicles equipped with a smart

key, the liftgate can be opened with

hands-free activation using the

Smart Liftgate system.

How to use the Smart Liftgate

The hands-free smart liftgate system

can be opened automatically when

the following conditions are met:

• The Smart Liftgate option is

enabled in the User Settings in the

cluster LCD display

• The Smart Liftgate is activated and

ready 15 seconds after all the

doors are closed and locked

• The Smart Liftgate will open when

the smart key is detected in the

area behind the vehicle for 3 sec-

onds

Information

• The Smart Liftgate will NOT oper-

ate when:

- Any door is open, or all doors are

closed but not locked

- The smart key is detected within

15 seconds from when the doors

were closed and locked

- For vehicles equipped with illumi-

nated exterior front door handles,

if the smart key is detected within

15 seconds from when the doors

were closed and locked or if the

smart key is within 60 inches (1.5

m) from the front door handles

- The smart key is in the vehicle.

OTLE048043

3-62

Convenient features of your vehicle

1. Setting

To activate the Smart Liftgate, go to

User Settings Mode and select

Smart Liftgate on the LCD display.

For more details, refer to "LCD

Display" in this chapter.

2. Detect and Alert

The Smart Liftgate detecting area

extends approximately 20-40 in (50-

100 cm) behind the vehicle. If you

are positioned in the detecting area

and are carrying the smart key, the

hazard warning lights will blink and

the chime will sound to alert you that

the smart liftgate will open.

Information

Do not approach the detecting area if

you do not want the liftgate to open.

If you have unintentionally entered

the detecting area and the hazard

warning lights and chime starts to

operate, move away from the area

behind the vehicle with the smart key.

The liftgate will remain closed.

OTLE048045

3-63

Convenient features of your vehicle

3. Automatic opening

The hazard warning lights will blink

and chime will sound several times

and then the liftgate will slowly open.

How to deactivate the Smart

Liftgate function using the

smart key

1. Door lock

2. Door unlock

3. Liftgate open

4. Panic

If you press any button on the smart

key during the Detect and Alert

stage, the Smart Liftgate function will

be deactivated.

Make sure to be aware of how to

deactivate the Smart Liftgate func-

tion for emergency situations.

OLF044006

• Make certain that you close

the liftgate before driving your

vehicle.

• Make sure there are no people

or objects around the liftgate

before opening or closing the

liftgate.

• Make sure objects in the rear

cargo area do not come out

when opening the liftgate,

especially if the vehicle is

parked on a grade or incline.

• If you keep your vehicle

parked and locked on your

driveway, you may want to

temporarily deactivate the

Smart Liftgate system.

Otherwise, standing at the

rear of the vehicle with the

smart key may cause the lift-

gate to open unintentionally.

• The key should be kept out of

reach of children. Children

may inadvertently open the

Smart Liftgate while playing

around the rear area of the

vehicle.

WARNING

OTLE048044

3-64

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

• If you press the door unlock button

(2), the Smart Liftgate function will

be deactivated temporarily. But, if

you do not open any door for 30 sec-

onds, the Smart Liftgate function

will be activated again.

• If you press the liftgate open button

(3) for more than 1 second, the lift-

gate opens.

• The Smart Liftgate function will

still be activated if you press the

door lock button (1) or liftgate open

button (3) on the smart key as long

as the Smart Liftgate is not already

in the Detect and Alert stage.

• In case you have deactivated the

Smart Liftgate function by pressing

the smart key button and opened a

door, the Smart Liftgate function

can be activated again by closing

and locking all doors.

Detecting area

• The Smart Liftgate detecting area

extends approximately 20-40 in

(50-100 cm) behind the vehicle. If

you are positioned in the detecting

area and are carrying the smart

key, the hazard warning lights will

blink and the chime will sound for

about 3 seconds to alert you that

the smart liftgate will open.

• The alert stops once the smart key

is moved outside of the detecting

area within the 3 second period.

Information

• The Smart Liftgate function may

not operate properly if any of the

following instances occur:

- The smart key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station

or an airport which can interfere

with normal operation of the

transmitter.

- The smart key is near a mobile two

way radio system or a cellular

phone.

- Another vehicle's smart key is

being operated close to your vehi-

cle.

• The Smart Liftgate detecting area

may change when:

- The vehicle is parked on an incline

or slope

- One side of the vehicle is raised or

lowered relative to the opposite

side

OTLE048046

20~40 inch

3-65

Convenient features of your vehicle

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT CCLLUUSSTTEERR

1. Tachometer

2. Speedometer

3. Engine coolant temperature gauge

4. Fuel gauge

5. Warning and indicator lights

6. LCD display (including Trip computer)

OTL048600N/OTL048640N

■■

Type A

The actual cluster in the vehicle may dif-

fer from the illustration.

■■

Type B

3-66

Convenient features of your vehicle

Instrument Cluster Control

Adjusting instrument cluster

illumination

When the vehicle's parking lights or

headlights are on, press the illumina-

tion control button to adjust the

brightness of the instrument panel

illumination.

When pressing the illumination con-

trol button, the interior switch illumi-

nation intensity is also adjusted.

• The brightness of the instrument

panel illumination is displayed.

• If the brightness reaches the maxi-

mum or minimum level, a chime

will sound.

OTLE048070

OTL045150L

Never adjust the instrument

cluster while driving. Doing so

could lead to driver distraction

which may cause an accident

and lead to vehicle damage,

serious injury, or death.

WARNING

3-67

Convenient features of your vehicle

Gauges and Meters

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the

speed of the vehicle and is calibrated

in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilo-

meters per hour (km/h).

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates the

approximate number of engine revo-

lutions per minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the cor-

rect shift points and to prevent lug-

ging and/or over-revving the engine.

Do not operate the engine within

the tachometer's RED ZONE. This

may cause severe engine damage.

Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge

This gauge indicates the tempera-

ture of the engine coolant when the

ignition switch in the ON position.

NOTICE

OTL045107OTLE045103

OTLE047107

3-68

Convenient features of your vehicle

If the gauge pointer moves

beyond the normal range area

toward the "H" position, it indi-

cates overheating that may dam-

age the engine.

Do not continue driving with an

overheated engine. If your vehicle

overheats, refer to "If the Engine

Overheats" in chapter 6.

Fuel Gauge

This gauge indicates the approxi-

mate amount of fuel remaining in the

fuel tank.

Information

• The fuel tank capacity is given in

chapter 8.

• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a

low fuel warning light, which will

illuminate when the fuel tank is

nearly empty.

• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge

pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel

warning light may come on earlier

than usual due to the movement of

fuel in the tank.

Avoid driving with an extremely

low fuel level. Running out of fuel

could cause the engine to misfire,

damaging the catalytic converter.

NOTICE

Running out of fuel can expose

vehicle occupants to danger.You

must stop and obtain additional

fuel as soon as possible after

the warning light comes on or

when the gauge indicator comes

close to the "E (Empty)" level.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap

or engine coolant reservoir cap

when the engine is hot. The

engine coolant is under pres-

sure and could severely burn.

Wait until the engine is cool

before adding coolant to the

reservoir.

WARNING

OTL045106

3-69

Convenient features of your vehicle

Odometer

The odometer indicates the total dis-

tance that the vehicle has been driv-

en and should be used to determine

when periodic maintenance should

be performed.

Range

• The range is the estimated dis-

tance the vehicle can be driven

with the remaining fuel.

• If the estimated distance is below

1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will

display "---" as range.

Information

• If the vehicle is not on level ground

or the battery power has been

interrupted, the range function

may not operate correctly.

• The range may differ from the

actual driving distance as it is only

an estimate of the available driving

range for the vehicle and driving

conditions.

• The trip computer may not register

additional fuel if less than 1.6 gal-

lon (6 liters) of fuel are added to the

vehicle.

• The range may vary significantly

based on driving conditions, driving

habits, and condition of the vehicle.

OAD048551N/OAD048552N

■ Type A ■ Type B

OPDE046138R

3-70

Convenient features of your vehicle

Outside temperature gauge

This gauge indicates the current out-

side air temperatures by 1°F (1°C).

- Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F

(-40°C ~ 60°C)

The outside temperature on the dis-

play may not change immediately

like a general thermometer to pre-

vent the driver from being inattentive.

To change the temperature unit from

°F to °C or °C to °F:

- Go to User Settings Mode ➝ Other

Features ➝ Temperature Unit.

- Press the AUTO button for 3 sec-

onds while pressing the OFF button.

(Automatic climate control system)

Both the temperature unit on the

cluster LCD display and climate con-

trol screen will change.

Icy Road Warning Light

This warning light is to warn the driv-

er the road may be icy.

When the following conditions occur,

the warning light (including Outside

Temperature Gauge) blinks 10 times

and then illuminates, and also warn-

ing chime sounds 3 times.

- The temperature on the Outside

Temperature Gauge is below

approximately 39°F (4°C).

OTLE045132/OTLE045133

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAD048555N/OAD048556N

■ Type A ■ Type B

3-71

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

If the icy road warning light appears

while driving, you should drive more

attentively and safely refraining from

over-speeding, rapid acceleration,

sudden braking or sharp turning, etc.

Automatic transmission shift

indicator (If equipped)

This indicator displays which auto-

matic transmission shift lever is

selected.

•Park :P

• Reverse : R

• Neutral : N

•Drive :D

• Manual Shift Mode

- 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Shift indicator pop-up (if equipped)

The pop-up displays the current gear

position selected for 2 seconds

(P/R/N/D).

OTL045132/OTL045133

■ Type A ■ Type B

OTL045134/OTL045135

■ Type A ■ Type B

3-72

Convenient features of your vehicle

Warning and Indicator Lights

Information

Make sure that all warning lights are

OFF after starting the engine. If any

light is still ON, this indicates a situa-

tion that needs attention.

Supplemental Restraint

System Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 6

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the SRS.

If this occurs, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Seat Belt Warning Light

This warning light informs the driver

that the seat belt is not fastened.

For more details, refer to the "Seat

Belts" in chapter 2.

Parking Brake & Brake

Fluid Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds.

- It remains on if the parking brake

is applied.

• When the parking brake is applied.

• When the brake fluid level in the

reservoir is low.

- If the warning light illuminates

with the parking brake released, it

indicates the brake fluid level in

reservoir is low.

3-73

Convenient features of your vehicle

If the brake fluid level in the reser-

voir is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check

the brake fluid level immediately

and add fluid as required (For

more details, refer to "Brake

Fluid" in chapter 7). After adding

brake fluid, check all brake com-

ponents for fluid leaks. If a brake

fluid leak is found, or if the warning

light remains on, or if the brakes

do not operate properly, do not

drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Dual-diagonal braking system

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-

diagonal braking systems. This

means you still have braking on two

wheels even if one of the dual sys-

tems should fail.

With only one of the dual systems

working, more than normal pedal

travel and greater pedal pressure is

required to stop the vehicle.

Also, the vehicle will not stop in as

short a distance with only a portion

of the brake system working.

If the brakes fail while you are driv-

ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-

al engine braking and stop the vehi-

cle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid

Warning Light

Driving the vehicle with a warn-

ing light ON is dangerous. If the

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid

Warning Light illuminates with

the parking brake released, it

indicates that the brake fluid

level is low.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

3-74

Convenient features of your vehicle

Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the ABS (The normal braking sys-

tem will still be operational without

the assistance of the anti-lock

brake system).

If this occurs, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Electronic Brake force

Distribution (EBD)

System Warning Light

These two warning lights illuminate

at the same time while driving:

When the ABS and regular brake

system may not work normally.

If this occurs, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Electronic Brake force

Distribution (EBD) System

Warning Light

When both ABS and Parking

Brake & Brake Fluid Warning

Lights are on, the brake system

will not work normally and you

may experience an unexpected

and dangerous situation during

sudden braking.

In this case, avoid high speed

driving and abrupt braking.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

3-75

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

- Electronic

Brake force Distribution (EBD)

System Warning Light

When the ABS Warning Light is on or

both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake

Fluid Warning Lights are on, the

speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter

may not work. Also, the EPS Warning

Light may illuminate and the steering

effort may increase or decrease.

In this case, have your vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Electronic Power

Steering (EPS)

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It remains on until the engine is

started.

• When there is a malfunction with

the EPS.

If this occurs, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL)

This warning light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button to the ON

position.

- It remains on until the engine is

started.

• When there is a malfunction with

the emission control system.

If this occurs, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

3-76

Convenient features of your vehicle

Driving with the Malfunction

Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may

cause damage to the emission

control systems which could

affect drivability and/or fuel econ-

omy.

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(MIL) illuminates, potential catalyt-

ic converter damage is possible

which could result in loss of

engine power.

If this occurs, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Electronic Parking

Brake (EPB) Warning

Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch

or the Engine Start/Stop button to

the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the EPB.

If this occurs, have the vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Information

The Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)

Warning Light may illuminate when

the Electronic Stability control (ESC)

Indicator Light comes on to indicate

that the ESC is not working properly

(This does not indicate malfunction of

the EPB).

Charging System

Warning Light

If this warning light comes on while

the engine is running, the battery is

not being charged. Immediately turn

off all electrical accessories. Try not

to use electrically operated controls,

such as the power windows. Keep the

engine running; starting the engine

will quickly discharge the battery.

If there is a malfunction with either

the alternator or electrical charging

system:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and check the

alternator drive belt for looseness

or breakage.

If the belt is adjusted properly,

there may be a problem in the

electrical charging system.

If this occurs, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

EPB

3-77

Convenient features of your vehicle

Engine Oil Pressure

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It remains on until the engine is

started.

• When the engine oil pressure is low.

If the engine oil pressure is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and check the

engine oil level (For more details,

refer to "Engine Oil" in chapter

7). If the level is low, add oil as

required.

If the warning light remains on after

adding oil and restarting the engine

or if oil is not available, turn off the

engine. There is a mechanical con-

cern that needs to be repaired

before you can continue driving. In

this case, have your vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er.

• If the engine is not turned OFF

immediately after the Engine Oil

Pressure Warning Light is illumi-

nated, severe damage could

result.

• If the warning light stays on

while the engine is running, it

indicates that there may be seri-

ous engine damage or malfunc-

tion. In this case:

1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it

is safe to do so.

2. Turn off the engine and check

the oil level. If the oil level is

low, fill the engine oil to the

proper level.

3. Start the engine again. If the

warning light stays on after

the engine is started, the

engine odd immediately and

have the vehicle towed to an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer

for inspection.

Low Fuel Level

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When the fuel tank is nearly empty.

Add fuel as soon as possible.

Driving with the Low Fuel Level

warning light on or with the fuel

level below "E" can cause the

engine to misfire and damage the

catalytic converter.

NOTICE

3-78

Convenient features of your vehicle

Master Warning Light

This warning light illuminates

when there is a malfunction in any

of the following systems:

- LED Headlamp

- Forward Collision Avoidance Assist

System

- Blind Spot Collision Warning

System

- Smart Cruise Control System

- Headlamp/Tail lamp Bulb

- High Beam Assist

- Tire Pressure Monitoring System

When this occurs, in order to identify

the details of the warning in your

vehicle, refer to the message in the

cluster LCD display.

The information provided may dif-

fer depending on which functions

are applicable to your vehicle.

Low Tire Pressure

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When one or more of your tires are

significantly underinflated (The

location of each underinflated tire

is displayed on the LCD display).

For more details, refer to "Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

This warning light remains ON

after blinking for approximately 60

seconds, or repeatedly blinks ON

and OFF in 3 second intervals:

When there is a malfunction with the

TPMS.

If this occurs, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, refer to "Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

Safe Stopping

• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire damage

caused by external factors.

• If you notice any vehicle insta-

bility, immediately take your

foot off the accelerator pedal,

apply the brakes gradually with

light force, and slowly move to

a safe position off the road.

WARNING

3-79

Convenient features of your vehicle

All Wheel Drive (AWD)

Warning Light

(if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the AWD system.

If this occurs, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Forward Collision-

Avoidance Assist (FCA)

System Warning Light

(if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the FCA.

If this occurs, have the vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, refer to "Forward

Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA)

system" in chapter 5.

Lane Keeping Assist

(LKA) System Indicator

Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• [Green] When the system operat-

ing conditions are satisfied.

• [White] The system operating con-

ditions are not satisfied.

• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-

tion with the lane keeping assist

system.

If this occurs, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, refer to "Lane

Keeping Assist (LKA) system" in

chapter 5.

3-80

Convenient features of your vehicle

LED Headlight Warning

Light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

• When there is a malfunction with

the LED headlight.

If this occurs, have the vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

This warning light blinks:

When there is a malfunction with a

LED headlight related part.

If this occurs, have the vehicle

inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Continuous driving with the LED

Headlight Warning Light on or

blinking can reduce LED headlight

life.

Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the ESC system.

If this occurs, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

This indicator light blinks:

While the ESC is operating.

For more details, refer to

"Electronic Stability Control

(ESC)" in chapter 5.

NOTICE

3-81

Convenient features of your vehicle

Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) OFF

Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or

the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When you deactivate the ESC sys-

tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-

ton.

For more details, refer to

"Electronic Stability Control

(ESC)" in chapter 5.

Immobilizer Indicator

Light (without smart

key) (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the vehicle detects the

immobilizer in the key with the igni-

tion switch in the ON position.

- At this time, you can start the

engine.

- The indicator light goes off after

starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks:

• When there is a malfunction with

the immobilizer system.

If this occurs, have the vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Immobilizer Indicator

Light (With Smart Key)

(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates for

up to 30 seconds:

When the vehicle detects the smart

key in the vehicle with the Engine

Start/Stop button in the ACC or ON

position.

- At this time, you can start the

engine.

- The indicator light goes off after

starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks for a few

seconds:

When the smart key is not in the

vehicle.

- At this time, you cannot start the

engine.

3-82

Convenient features of your vehicle

This indicator light illuminates for

2 seconds and goes off:

If the smart key is in the vehicle and

the Engine Start/Stop button is ON,

but the vehicle cannot detect the

smart key.

If this occurs, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

This indicator light blinks:

• When the battery voltage of the

smart key is low.

- At this time, you can not start the

engine. However, you can start the

engine if you press the ignition

switch or the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton with the smart key. (For more

details, refer to "Starting the

Engine" in chapter 5).

• When there is a malfunction with

the immobilizer system.

If this occurs, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Turn Signal Indicator

Light

This indicator light blinks:

• When you operate the turn signal

indicator.

If any of the following occurs, there

may be a malfunction with the turn

signal system.

- The turn signal indicator light illu-

minates but does not blink

- The turn signal indicator light

blinks rapidly

- The turn signal indicator light

does not illuminate at all

If either of these conditions occur,

have your vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

High Beam Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the headlights are on and in

the high beam position.

• When the turn signal lever is pulled

into the Flash-to-Pass position.

3-83

Convenient features of your vehicle

Light ON Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the tail lights or headlights

are on.

Front Fog Indicator

Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the front fog lights are on.

High Beam Assist

(HBA) indicator light

(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates :

• When the high-beam is on with the

light switch in the AUTO light posi-

tion.

• If your vehicle detects oncoming or

preceding vehicles, the High Beam

Assist (HBA) system will switch the

high beam to low beam automati-

cally.

For more details, refer to "High

Beam Assist (HBA) system" in this

chapter.

AUTO HOLD Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• [White] When you activate the Auto

Hold system by pressing the AUTO

HOLD button.

• [Green] When you stop the vehicle

completely by depressing the

brake pedal with the Auto Hold

system activated.

• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-

tion with the Auto Hold system.

If this occurs, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, refer to "Auto

Hold" in chapter 5.

AUTO

HOLD

3-84

Convenient features of your vehicle

All Wheel Drive (AWD)

LOCK Indicator Light

(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When you select AWD Lock mode

by pressing the AWD LOCK button.

- The AWD LOCK mode is to trans-

fer a portion of the drive torque to

the rear wheels for increased

traction on wet pavement, snow

covered roads or when driving off

road.

Downhill Brake Control

(DBC) Indicator Light

(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When you activate the system by

pressing the DBC button.

This indicator light blinks:

• When the DBC is operating.

This indicator light illuminates yel-

low:

• When there is a malfunction with

the DBC system.

If this occurs, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, refer to

"Downhill Brake Control (DBC)

System" in chapter 5.

LCD Display Messages

Shift to P or N to start engine

(for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

you try to start the engine with the

shift lever not in the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position.

Information

You can start the engine with the shift

lever in the N (Neutral) position. But,

for your safety, we recommend that

you start the engine with the shift

lever in the P (Park) position.

AWD Lock Mode

Do not use the AWD lock mode

on dry paved roads. Doing so

can cause abnormal noise or

vibration, and may damage the

AWD system.

CAUTION

3-85

Convenient features of your vehicle

Shift to P

(for smart key system)

This message is displayed if you try

to turn off the engine without the shift

lever in P (Park) position.

If this occurs, the Engine Start/Stop

button turns to the ACC position (If

you press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton once more, it will turn to the ON

position).

Press START button again

(for smart key system)

This message is displayed if you

were unable to start the vehicle when

the Engine Start/Stop button was

pressed.

If this occurs, attempt to start the

engine by pressing the Engine

Start/Stop button again.

If the warning message appears

each time you press the Engine

Start/Stop button, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Press brake pedal to start

engine (for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

the Engine Start/Stop button

changes to the ACC position twice

by pressing the button repeatedly

without depressing the brake pedal.

You can start the vehicle by depress-

ing the brake pedal and then press-

ing the Engine Start/Stop button.

Press START button with key

(for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

you press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton while the warning message "Key

not detected" is displayed.

At this time, the immobilizer indicator

light blinks.

Low Key Battery

(for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

the battery of the smart key is dis-

charged when the Engine Start/Stop

button changes to the OFF position.

Key not detected

(for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

the smart key is not detected when

you press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton.

Key not in vehicle

(for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if

the smart key is not in the vehicle

when you press the Engine Start/

Stop button.

When attempting to start the vehicle,

always have the smart key with you.

3-86

Convenient features of your vehicle

Door / Hood / liftgate open indi-

cator

This warning message is displayed

indicating which door, or the hood, or

the liftgate is open.

Sunroof open indicator

(if equipped)

This warning message is displayed

if you turn off the engine when the

sunroof is open.

Lights Mode

This indicator displays the exterior

lights mode when selected using the

headlamp control stalk.

To enable or disable this feature in

the cluster LCD display, go to 'User

Settings → Convenience → Wiper/

Lights Display'.

OTLE048606 OTLE048607

Before driving the vehicle, you

should confirm that the door/

hood/liftgate is fully closed.

Also, check there is no door/

hood/liftgate open warning light

or message displayed on the

instrument cluster.

CAUTION

OIK047145L

3-87

Convenient features of your vehicle

Wiper

This indicator displays the windshield

wiper mode when selected using the

windshield wiper stalk.

To enable or disable this feature in

the cluster LCD display, go to 'User

Settings → Convenience → Wiper/

Lights Display'.

Heated Steering Wheel turned

off

This message illuminates if the heat-

ed steering wheel will turn off auto-

matically approximately 30 minutes

after the heated steering wheel is

turned on.

For more details, refer to "Heated

Steering Wheel" in this chapter.

Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse

This warning message is displayed if

the brake switch fuse is disconnect-

ed.

You need to replace the fuse with a

new one before starting the vehicle.

If that is not possible, you can start

the engine by pressing the Engine

Start/Stop button for 10 seconds in

the ACC position.

Turn FUSE SWITCH on

This warning message is displayed if

the fuse switch is in the OFF posi-

tion.

If this message is displayed, turn the

fuse switch on.

For more details, refer to "Fuses"

in chapter 7.

■ Rear■ Front

OIK047146L/OTMA048119 OIK057135L

3-88

Convenient features of your vehicle

Low Pressure

This warning message is displayed if

the tire pressure is low. The corre-

sponding tire on the vehicle will be

illuminated.

For more details, refer to "Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

Low washer fluid

This warning message is displayed

on the service reminder mode if the

washer fluid level in the reservoir is

nearly empty.

If this warning message is displayed,

have the washer fluid reservoir

refilled.

Low fuel

This warning message is displayed if

the fuel tank is almost out of fuel.

When this message is displayed, the

vehicle range is approximately 30

miles (50 km).

When this message is displayed, the

low fuel level warning light in the

cluster will come on.

It is recommended to look for the

nearest fueling station and refuel as

soon as possible.

Add fuel as soon as possible.

Engine overheated

This warning message is displayed

with a warning chime when the

engine coolant temperature is above

248°F (120°C). This means that the

engine is overheated and may be

damaged.

If your vehicle is overheated, refer

to "Overheating" in chapter 6.

OTLE048608

3-89

Convenient features of your vehicle

Check headlight

This warning message is displayed if

the headlights are not operating

properly. A headlight bulb may need

to be replaced.

Information

Make sure to replace the burned out

bulb with a new one of the same

wattage rating.

Check High Beam Assist (HBA)

system (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if

there is a problem with the High

Beam Assist (HBA) system. Have the

vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, refer to "High

Beam Assist (HBA) system" in

chapter 3.

Check headlight LED

This warning message is displayed if

there is a problem with the LED

headlight. Have the vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er.

Check Forward Collision

Avoidance Assist system

This warning message is displayed if

there is a problem with the Forward

Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA)

system. Have the vehicle inspected

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, refer to "Forward

Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA)

system" in chapter 5.

Check Blind-Spot Collision

Warning (BCW) system

(if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if

there is a problem with the Blind-

Spot Collision Warning system. Have

the vehicle inspected by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, refer to "Blind-

Spot Collision Warning (BCW)"

System in chapter 5.

3-90

Convenient features of your vehicle

Check Smart Cruise Control

System (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if

there is a problem with the Smart

Cruise Control system. Have the

vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, refer to "Smart

Cruise Control with Stop & Go" in

chapter 5.

Check Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if

there is a problem with the Driver

Attention Warning (DAW). Have the

vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, refer to "Driver

Attention Warning (DAW)" in chap-

ter 5.

Check Lane Keeping Assist

(LKA) system (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if

there is a problem with the Check

Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system.

Have the vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, refer to "Check

Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) sys-

tem" in chapter 5.

3-91

Convenient features of your vehicle

LCD Display Control

[A] : Type A, [B] : Type B, [C] : Type C

The LCD display modes can be

changed by using the control but-

tons.

(1) : MODE button for changing

modes

(2) , : MOVE switch for

changing items

(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for

setting or resetting the

selected item

LLCCDD DDIISSPPLLAAYY

OTLE048112/OTLE048603

3-92

Convenient features of your vehicle

Modes Symbol Explanation

Trip Computer

The Trip Computer mode displays driving information such as the tripmeter, fuel economy,

etc. For details, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

Turn By Turn (TBT)

(if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the navigation.

Assist

The Driver Assist mode displays the status of the following features:

- Smart Cruise Control (SCC) system

- Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system

- Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system

- Traction force distribution status of front-wheels and rear-wheels

- Tire pressure

For more details, refer to "Smart Cruise Control with Stop & Go)", "Lane Keeping

Assist (LKA) system", "Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system", "All Wheel

Drive (AWD)" in chapter 5 and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in

chapter 6.

User Settings

The User Settings mode provides user options for a variety of settings including door

lock/unlock features, convenience features, driver assistance settings, etc.

Master Warning

The Master Warning mode displays warning messages related to the vehicle when one

or more systems is not operating normally.

The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.

LCD Display Modes

3-93

Convenient features of your vehicle

Trip Computer Mode

The trip computer mode displays

information related to vehicle driving

parameters including range, fuel

economy, trip meter information and

vehicle speed.

For more details, refer to "Trip

Computer" in this chapter.

Turn By Turn (TBT) Mode

This mode displays the state of the

navigation.

Assist mode

SCC/LKA/DAW

This mode displays the state of the

Smart Cruise Control (SCC), Lane

Keeping Assist (LKA) and Driver

Attention Warning (DAW).

For more details, refer to each

system information in chapter 5.

OIK047124N OIK047147N OTLE058213R

3-94

Convenient features of your vehicle

Tire Pressure

This mode displays information relat-

ed to Tire Pressure.

For more details, refer to "Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

Driving force distribution (AWD)

This mode displays an image of the

torque distribution to each wheel

while driving. The display shows

when the real time all-wheel drive

system is active.

If the AWD lock button is selected,

this mode is not displayed.

For more details, refer to the "All

Wheel Drive" in the chapter 5.

Master warning mode

This warning light illuminates when

there is a malfunction in any of the

following systems:

- LED Headlamp

- Forward Collision Avoidance Assist

System

- Blind Spot Collision Warning

System

- Smart Cruise Control System

- Headlamp/Tail lamp Bulb

- High Beam Assist

- Tire Pressure Monitoring System

The information provided may dif-

fer depending on which functions

are applicable to your vehicle.

OTLE048605 OTM048127L

3-95

Convenient features of your vehicle

User settings mode

In this mode, you can change the

settings of the instrument cluster,

doors, lamps, etc.

1. Driver Assistance

2. Door

3. Lights

4. Sound

5. Convenience

6. Service interval

7. Other

8. Language

9. Reset

The information provided may differ

depending on which functions are

applicable to your vehicle.

Shift to P to edit settings

This warning message appears if

you try to adjust the User Settings

while driving.

For your safety, change the User

Settings after parking the vehicle,

applying the parking brake and shift-

ing to P (Park).

Quick guide help

This mode provides quick guides for

the systems in the User Settings

mode.

Select an item, press and hold the

OK button.

For more details, about each sys-

tem, refer to this Owner's Manual.

OOSEV048172L

3-96

Convenient features of your vehicle

Items Explanation

SCC Reaction

To adjust the sensitivity of the Smart Cruise Control system.

- Fast / Normal / Slow

For more details, refer to ''Smart Cruise Control with Stop & Go'' in chapter 5.

Driver Attention Warning

To adjust the sensitivity of the Driver Attention Warning.

- Off / Normal / Early

For more details, refer to "Driver Attention Warning (DAW) System" in chapter 5.

Lane Safety

To adjust the Lane Keeping Assist function.

- Active LKA / Lane Keeping Assist / Lane Departure Warning

For more details, refer to "Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system" in chapter 5.

Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist

To activate or deactivate the Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist system.

For more details, refer to "Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) System" in chapter 5.

Forward Collision Warning

To adjust the initial warning alert time for Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist system.

- Early / Normal / Late

For more details, refer to "Forward Collision Avoidance Assist (FCA) System" in chapter 5.

Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning

To activate or deactivate the Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning function.

For more details, refer to "Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW) System" in chapter 5.

Blind-Spot Collision Warning Sound

To activate or deactivate the Blind- Spot Collision Warning sound.

For more details, refer to "Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW) System" in chapter 5.

1. Driver Assistance

❈ The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.

3-97

Convenient features of your vehicle

Items Explanation

Auto Lock

• Enable on speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3

mph (15 km/h).

• Enable on shift: All doors will be automatically locked if the vehicle is shifted from the P (Park)

position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.

Auto Unlock

• Disable : The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.

• On key out : All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed from the

key ignition switch (if equipped with remote key).

• Vehicle off : All doors will be automatically unlocked when the Engine Start/Stop button is set

to the OFF position. (if equipped with smart key)

• On shift to P : All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transmission is shifted

to the P (Park) position.

Two Press Unlock

• Off: The two press unlock function will be deactivated. Therefore, all doors will unlock if the

door unlock button is pressed.

• On: Only the driver's door will unlock if the door unlock button is pressed. When the door

unlock button is pressed again within 4 seconds, the remaining doors will unlock.

Horn Feedback

To activate or deactivate the horn feedback.

If the horn feedback is activated, after locking the door by pressing the lock button on the remote

key, and pressing it again within 4 seconds, the horn feedback sound will operate once to indi-

cate that all doors are locked (if equipped with remote key).

2. Door

3-98

Convenient features of your vehicle

Items Explanation

Power Liftgate

To activate or deactivate the Power Liftgate system.

For more details, refer to "Power Liftgate" in this chapter.

Smart Liftgate

To activate or deactivate the Smart Liftgate system.

For more details, refer to "Smart Liftgate" in this chapter.

❈ The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.

3-99

Convenient features of your vehicle

Items Explanation

One Touch Turn Signal

• Off: The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated.

• 3, 5, 7 Flashes: The turn signal indicator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is

moved slightly.

For more details, refer to "Lighting" in this chapter.

Headlight Delay

To activate or deactivate the headlight delay function.

For more details, refer to "Lighting" in this chapter.

3. Lights

Items Explanation

Parking Distance Warning Volume

To adjust the Parking Distance Warning volume.

- Level 1 / Level 2 / Level 3

Welcome Sound To activate or deactivate the welcome sound function.

4. Sound

❈ The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.

3-100

Convenient features of your vehicle

Items Explanation

Welcome light

To activate or deactivate the welcome mirror and welcome light function.

For more details, refer to ''Welcome System'' in this chapter.

Wireless Charging System

To activate or deactivate the wireless charging system in the front seat.

For more details, refer to "Wireless Charging System" in this chapter.

Wiper/Lights Display

To activate or deactivate the Wiper/Light mode.

When activated, the LCD display shows the selected Wiper/Light mode whenever you change

the mode.

Auto Rear Wiper (in R) To activate or deactivate the rear wiper while the vehicle is in reverse with the front wiper ON.

Gear Position Pop-up

To activate or deactivate the gear position pop-up.

When activated, the gear position will be displayed in the cluster LCD display.

Icy Road Warning To activate or deactivate the Icy Road Warning function.

5. Convenience

❈ The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.

3-101

Convenient features of your vehicle

6. Service interval

If the service interval is activated and the time and distance is adjusted, messages are displayed in the following

situations each time the vehicle is turned on.

- Service in: Displayed to inform the driver the remaining mileage and days to service.

- Service required: Displayed when the mileage and days to service has been reached or passed.

Information

If any of the following conditions occur, the mileage and number of days to service may be incorrect.

- The battery cable is disconnected.

- The fuse switch is turned off.

- The battery is discharged.

Items Explanation

Service Interval To activate or deactivate the service interval function.

Adjust Interval If the service interval menu is activated, you may adjust the time and distance.

3-102

Convenient features of your vehicle

Items Explanation

Fuel Econ. Reset

• Off: The average fuel economy will not reset automatically whenever refueling.

• After ignition: When the engine has been OFF for 4 hours or longer the average fuel economy

will reset automatically.

• After refueling: The average fuel economy will reset automatically after adding 1.6 gallons (6

liters) of fuel or more and after driving speed exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).

For more details, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

Fuel Econ. Unit

• US gallon / UK gallon

To select the fuel economy unit.

Temperature Unit

• °C / °F

To select the temperature unit.

Tire Pressure Unit

• psi / kPa / bar

To select the tire pressure unit.

7. Other

Items Explanation

Language To select language.

8. Language

Items Explanation

Reset

You can reset the menus in the User Settings mode. All menus in the User Settings mode are

reset to factory settings, except language and service interval.

9. Reset

❈ The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.

3-103

Convenient features of your vehicle

The trip computer is a microcomput-

er-controlled driver information sys-

tem that displays information related

to driving.

Information

Some driving information stored in the

trip computer (for example Average

Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is

disconnected.

Trip modes

[A] : Type A, [B] : Type B, [C] : Type C

To change the trip mode, toggle the

" , " switch on the steering

wheel.

TTRRIIPP CCOOMMPPUUTTEERR

• Tripmeter

• Fuel Economy

• Timer

Accumulated Info

• Tripmeter

• Fuel Economy

• Timer

Drive Info

• Average Fuel Economy

• Instant Fuel Economy

Fuel Economy

Digital Speedometer

OTLE048112

OTLE048603

3-104

Convenient features of your vehicle

Average fuel economy/

Instant fuel economy

Average Fuel Economy (1)

• The average fuel economy is calcu-

lated by the total driving distance

and fuel consumption since the last

average fuel economy reset.

• The average fuel economy can be

reset both manually and automati-

cally.

Manual reset

To clear the average fuel economy

manually, press the OK button on the

steering wheel for more than 1 sec-

ond when the average fuel economy

is displayed.

Automatic reset

To automatically reset the average

fuel economy, select between "After

Ignition" or "After Refueling" in the

User Settings mode in the cluster

LCD display.

- After ignition: When the engine has

been OFF for 4 hours or longer the

average fuel economy will reset

automatically.

- After refueling: The average fuel

economy will reset automatically

after adding 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of

fuel or more and after driving speed

exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).

Information

The vehicle must be driven for a min-

imum of 0.19 miles (300 meters) since

the last ignition key cycle before the

average fuel economy will be recalcu-

lated.

Instant Fuel Economy (2)

• The instantaneous fuel economy is

displayed according to the bar

graph in the LCD display while

driving.

OIK047124N

3-105

Convenient features of your vehicle

Accumulated Info display

This display shows the accumulated

trip distance (1), the average fuel

economy (2), and the total driving

time (3).

The information is accumulated start-

ing from the last reset.

To reset the details, press and hold

the OK button when viewing the

Accumulated driving info. The trip

distance, the average fuel economy,

and total driving time will reset simul-

taneously.

The accumulated driving information

will continue to be counted while the

engine is still running (for example,

when the vehicle is in traffic or

stopped at a stop light).

Information

The vehicle must be driven for a min-

imum of 0.19 miles (300 meters) since

the last ignition key cycle before the

average fuel economy will be recalcu-

lated.

Drive Info display

This display shows the trip distance

(1), the average fuel economy (2),

and the total driving time (3).

The information is combined for each

ignition cycle. However, when the

engine has been OFF for 4 hours or

longer the Drive Info screen will reset.

To reset the details, press and hold

the OK button when viewing the Drive

Info. The trip distance, the average

fuel economy, and total driving time

will reset simultaneously.

OIK047174N OIK047176N

3-106

Convenient features of your vehicle

The driving information will continue to

be counted while the engine is still run-

ning (for example, when the vehicle is

in traffic or stopped at a stop light).

Information

The vehicle must be driven for a mini-

mum of 0.19 miles (300 meters) since the

last ignition key cycle before the average

fuel economy will be recalculated.

Digital speedometer

This digital speedometer display

shows the speed of the vehicle.

OIK047151N

3-107

Convenient features of your vehicle

LLIIGGHHTT

Exterior Lights

Lighting control

To operate the lights, turn the knob at

the end of the control lever to one of

the following positions:

(1) OFF position

(2) AUTO headlamp position

(3) Parking lamp position

(4) Headlamp position

Daytime running light (DRL)

The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

can make it easier for others to see

the front of your vehicle during the

day, especially after dawn and before

sunset.

The DRL system will turn the dedi-

cated lamp OFF when :

• The headlamps are ON.

• The parking lamps are ON.

• The vehicle is turned off.

• The parking brake is engaged.

OTL045316C

OOS047404N

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-108

Convenient features of your vehicle

AUTO light position

The parking lamp and headlamp will

be turned ON or OFF automatically

depending on the amount of light

outside the vehicle.

Even with the AUTO headlamp fea-

ture in operation, it is recommended

to manually turn ON the headlamps

when driving at night or in a fog, driv-

ing in the rain, or when you enter

dark areas, such as tunnels and

parking facilities.

• Do not cover or spill anything on

the sensor (1) located in front of

the instrument panel.

• Do not clean the sensor using a

window cleaner, the cleaner may

leave a light film which could

interfere with sensor operation.

• If your vehicle has window tint

or other types of metallic coat-

ing on the front windshield, the

AUTO headlamp system may not

work properly.

Parking lamp position ( )

The parking lamp, license plate lamp

and instrument panel lamp are turned

ON.

NOTICE

OTL048615 OTL045253C

3-109

Convenient features of your vehicle

Headlamp position ( )

The headlamp, parking lamp, license

plate lamp and instrument panel lamp

are turned ON.

Information

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position to turn on the headlamp.

High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlamp,

push the lever away from you. The

lever will return to its original position.

The high beam indicator will light

when the headlamp high beams are

switched on.

To turn off the high beam headlamp,

pull the lever towards you. The low

beams will turn on.

To flash the high beam headlamp,

pull the lever towards you, then

release the lever. The high beams

will remain ON as long as you hold

the lever towards you.

OTL045317C

OTL045255C

OTL045254C

Do not use high beam when there

are other vehicles approaching

you. Using high beam could

obstruct the other driver’s vision.

WARNING

3-110

Convenient features of your vehicle

High Beam Assist (HBA)

(if equipped)

The High Beam Assist (HBA) is a

system that automatically adjusts the

headlamp range (switches between

high beam and low beam) according

to the brightness of other vehicles

and road conditions.

Operating condition

1. Place the headlamp switch in the

AUTO position.

2. Turn on the high beam by pushing

the lever away from you.

The High Beam Assist (HBA) ( )

indicator will illuminate.

3. The High Beam Assist (HBA) will

turn on when vehicle speed is

above 25 mph (40 km/h).

• If the headlamp switch is pushed

away when the High Beam Assist

(HBA) is operating, the High

Beam Assist (HBA) will turn off

and the high beam will be on con-

tinuously.

• If the headlamp switch is pulled

towards you when the high beam

is off, the high beam will turn on

without the High Beam Assist

(HBA) canceled. When you let go

of the light switch, the lever will

move to the middle and the high

beam will turn off.

• If the headlamp switch is pulled

towards you when the high beam

is on by the High Beam Assist

(HBA), the low beam will be on

and the High Beam Assist (HBA)

will turn off.

• If the headlamp switch is placed

to the headlamp ON position, the

High Beam Assist (HBA) will turn

off and the low beam will be on

continuously.

OTL048641

3-111

Convenient features of your vehicle

When the High Beam Assist (HBA) is

operating, the high beam switches to

low beam if any of the following con-

ditions occur :

- When the headlamp of an on-com-

ing vehicle is detected.

- When the tail lamp of a vehicle in

front is detected.

- When the headlamp or tail lamp of

a motorcycle or a bicycle is detect-

ed.

- When the surrounding ambient

light is bright enough that high

beams are not required.

- When streetlights or other lights

are detected.

- When the headlamp switch is not

in the AUTO position.

- When the High Beam Assist (HBA)

is off.

- When vehicle speed is below 15

mph (24 km/h).

Warning light and message

When the High Beam Assist (HBA) is

not working properly, the Check High

Beam Assist warning message will

come on for a few second. After the

message disappears, the master

warning light ( ) will illuminate.

Take your vehicle to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-

tem checked.

OIK047132N

The system may not operate

normally if any of the following

conditions should occur:

1) When the illumination from

an on-coming vehicle or a

vehicle in front is dim. Such

examples may include:

• When the headlamps of an on-

coming vehicle or the tail

lamps of a vehicle in front is

covered with dust, snow, or

water.

• When the headlamps on an

on-coming vehicle are OFF,

but the fog lamps are ON.

2) When the High Beam Assist

camera is adversely affected

by an external condition.

Such examples may include:

• When the vehicle's head-

lamps have been damaged or

not repaired properly.

• When the vehicle headlamps

are not aimed properly.

WARNING

3-112

Convenient features of your vehicle

• When the vehicle is driven on

a narrow curved road or rough

road.

• When the vehicle is driven on

an uphill road or downhill

road.

• When only part of the vehicle

in front is visible on a cross-

road or curved road.

• When there is a traffic light,

reflecting sign, flashing sign

or mirror.

• When the road conditions are

bad such as being wet or cov-

ered with snow.

• When a vehicle suddenly

appears from a curve.

• When the vehicle is tilted from

a flat tire or being towed.

• When the Lane Keeping

Assist (LKA) system warning

light illuminates.

• When the light from the on-

coming or front vehicle is not

detected because of exhaust

fume, smoke, fog, snow, etc.

• When the front window is cov-

ered with foreign matters

such as ice, dust, fog, or is

damaged.

3) When the forward visibility is

poor. Such examples may

include:

• When the headlamps of an on-

coming vehicle or a vehicle in

front is not detected due to

poor outside visibility (smog,

smoke, dust, fog, heavy rain,

snow, etc.).

• When the windshield visibility

is poor.

• Do not attempt to disassem-

ble the front view camera

without the assistance of an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer

technician. If camera is

removed for any reason, the

system may need to be re-cal-

ibrated. Have the system

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• If the windshield of your vehi-

cle is replaced, most likely the

front view camera will need to

be re-calibrated. If this occurs,

have your vehicle inspected

and have the system re-cali-

brated by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Be careful that water doesn't

get into the High Beam Assist

(HBA) unit and do not remove

or damage related parts of the

High Beam Assist (HBA) sys-

tem.

WARNING

3-113

Convenient features of your vehicle

Turn signals and lane change

signals

To signal a turn, push down on the

lever for a left turn or up for a right

turn in position (A). To signal a lane

change, move the turn signal lever

slightly and hold it in position (B). The

lever will return to the original posi-

tion when released or when the turn

is completed.

If an indicator stays on and does not

flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of

the turn signal bulbs may be burned

out and will require replacement.

One touch turn signal function

To activate the One Touch Turn

Signal function, move the turn signal

lever slightly and then release it. The

turn signal indicators will blink 3, 5,

or 7 times, depending on the User

Settings on the LCD display.

You can activate or deactivate the

One Touch Turn Signal function or

choose the number of blinking (3, 5,

or 7) from the User Settings Mode on

the LCD display.

For more details, refer to the "LCD

Display" section in this chapter.

OTL045257C

• Do not place objects on the

crash pad that reflect light

such as mirrors, white paper,

etc. The system may malfunc-

tion if sunlight is reflected.

• At times, the High Beam

Assist (HBA) may not work

properly. The system is for

your convenience only. It is

the responsibility of the driver

for safe driving practices and

always check the road condi-

tions for your safety.

• When the system does not

operate normally, change the

headlamp position manually

between the high beam and

low beam.

3-114

Convenient features of your vehicle

Front fog lamp (if equipped)

Fog lamps are used to provide

improved visibility when visibility is

poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. Use

the switch next to the headlamp switch

to turn the fog lamps ON and OFF.

1. Turn on the parking lamp.

2. Turn the light switch (1) to the front

fog lamp position.

3. To turn off the front fog lamp, turn

the headlamp switch to the front

fog lamp position again or turn off

the parking lamp.

When in operation, the fog lamps

consume large amounts of vehicle

electrical power. Only use the fog

lamps when visibility is poor.

Battery saver function

The purpose of this feature is to pre-

vent the battery from being dis-

charged. The system automatically

turns off the parking lamp when the

key is removed (remote key) or when

the driver turns the engine off (smart

key) and opens the driver-side door.

With this feature, the parking lamps

will turn off automatically if the driver

parks on the side of road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lamps on

when the engine is turned off, perform

the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the parking lamps OFF and

ON again using the headlamp

switch on the steering column.

NOTICE

OTL047258

3-115

Convenient features of your vehicle

Headlamp delay function

If the key is removed from the ignition

switch or placed in the ACC position

or the LOCK/OFF position with the

headlamps ON, the headlamps

(and/or parking lamps) remain on for

about 5 minutes. However, if the dri-

ver's door is opened and closed, the

headlights are turned off after 15

seconds. Also, with the engine off if

the driver's door is opened and

closed, the headlamps (and/or park-

ing lamps) are turned off after 15

seconds.

The headlamps (and/or parking

lamps) can be turned off by pressing

the lock button on the remote key or

smart key twice or turning the light

switch to the OFF or AUTO position.

However, if you turn the light switch

to the AUTO position when it is dark

outside, the headlamps will not be

turned off.

You can activate or deactivate the

Headlamp Delay function from the

User Settings Mode on the LCD dis-

play.

For more details, refer to the "LCD

Display" section in this chapter.

If the driver gets out of the vehicle

through other doors (except dri-

ver’s door), the battery saver func-

tion does not operate and the

headlamp delay function does not

turn off automatically. Therefore, It

causes the battery to be dis-

charged. In this case, make sure

to turn off the headlamp switch

before getting out of the vehicle.

Welcome System (if equipped)

Welcome light

Door handle lamp (if equipped)

When all the doors (and tailgate) are

closed and locked, the door handle

lamp will come on for about 15 sec-

onds if any of the below is performed.

• When the door unlock button is

pressed on the remote key or

smart key.

• When the button of the outside

door handle is pressed.

• When the vehicle is approached

with the smart key in possession.

NOTICE

OTL048076N

3-116

Convenient features of your vehicle

Headlamp and Parking lamp

When the headlamp (lamp switch in

the headlamp or AUTO position) is

on and all doors (and tailgate) are

locked and closed, the parking lamp

and headlamp will come on for 15

seconds when the door unlock but-

ton is pressed on the remote key or

smart key.

At this time, if you press the door lock

or unlock button, the parking lamp

and headlamp will turn off immedi-

ately.

You can activate or deactivate the

Welcome Light from the User

Settings Mode on the LCD display.

For more details, refer to the "LCD

Display" section in this chapter.

Interior lamp

When the interior lamp switch is in

the DOOR position and all doors (and

tailgate) are closed and locked, the

room lamp will come on for 30 sec-

onds if any of the below is performed.

• When the door unlock button is

pressed on the remote key or

smart key.

• When the button of the outside

door handle is pressed.

At this time, if you press the door lock

or unlock button on the remote key or

smart key the room lamp will turn off

immediately.

Interior Lights

Do not use the interior lights for

extended periods when the engine

is turned off or the battery will dis-

charge.

NOTICE

Do not use the interior lights

when driving in the dark.The inte-

rior lights may obscure your view

and cause an accident.

WARNING

3-117

Convenient features of your vehicle

Interior lamp AUTO cut

The interior lamps will automatically

go off approximately 20 minutes after

the engine is turned off and the

doors closed. If a door is opened, the

lamp will go off 40 minutes after the

engine is turned off. If the doors are

locked by the remote key or smart

key and the vehicle enters the armed

stage of the theft alarm system, the

lamps will go off five seconds later.

Front lamps

(1) Front Map Lamp

(2) Front Room Lamp

(3) Front Door Lamp

Front Map lamp

• Press the map lamp cover (1) to

turn ON the map lamp. Re-press

the map lamp cover to turn OFF

the map lamp.

Front Room Lamp

• :

(Type A) Press the button to turn

ON the map lamp for the front/rear

seats.

(Type B) Press the button to turn

ON the map lamp for the front/rear

seats. Re-press the button to turn

OFF the map lamp.

•:

(Type A) Press the button to turn

OFF the map lamp for the front/rear

seats.

OTL047079L

■ Type A

OTL045080

■ Type B

3-118

Convenient features of your vehicle

Front Door Lamp

•:

The map lamp for the front/rear

seats is automatically turned ON

for approximately 30 seconds,

when a door is opened.

The map lamp for the front/rear

seats is automatically turned ON

for approximately 15 seconds,

when the remote key (smart key)

unlocks the doors. The map lamp

fades out, when the ignition switch

is pressed to the ON position in 15

seconds. The map lamp remains

ON up to 20 minutes, when a door

is opened with the ignition switch in

the either the ACC or OFF position.

Rear lamps

Rear Room Lamp ( ) :

Press this switch to turn the rear

room lamp on and off.

Do not leave the lamp switches on

for an extended period of time

when the engine is turned off.

NOTICE

OTL045081

■ Type A

OTL045082

■ Type B

3-119

Convenient features of your vehicle

Liftgate room lamp

The liftgate room lamp comes on

when the tailgate is opened.

The liftgate lamp comes on as

long as the liftgate is open. To pre-

vent unnecessary charging sys-

tem drain, close the liftgate

securely after using the liftgate.

Glove box lamp

The glove box lamp comes on when

the glove box is opened.

If the glove box is not closed, the

lamp will turn off after 20 minutes.

To prevent possible battery dis-

charge, securely close the glove

box after use.

Vanity mirror lamp

The vanity mirror lamp is located in

the headliner just behind the sun

visor. Push the switch to turn the van-

ity light on or off.

• : The lamp will turn on if this

button is pressed.

• : The lamp will turn off if this

button is pressed.

Always have the switch in the off

position when the vanity mirror

lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor

is closed without the lamp off, it

may discharge the battery or dam-

age the sunvisor.

NOTICE

OTLE048083 OTLE048084 OTL045085

3-120

Convenient features of your vehicle

A : Wiper speed control

· MIST – Single wipe

· OFF – Off

· INT – Intermittent wipe

AUTO* – Auto control wipe

· LO – Low wiper speed

· HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent control wipe time

adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes

(pull lever towards you)

D : Rear wiper/washer control

· HI – High wiper speed

· LO – Low wiper speed

· OFF – Off

E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)

(push lever away from you)

* : if equipped

Windshield Wipers

Operates as follows when the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

MIST : For a single wiping cycle,

push the lever upward and

release. The wipers will oper-

ate continuously if the lever is

held in this position.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation.

INT : Wiper operates intermittently at

the same wiping intervals. To

vary the speed setting, move

the speed control lever.

AUTO : A rain sensor located near

the top of the windshield

detects moisture accumula-

tion and controls the wiping

cycle automatically. This

mode is designed to operate

the wiper at an appropriate

speed depending on the

amount of rainfall. The sensi-

tivity can be varied by turn-

ing the adjustment control

(B) located on the wiper

stalk.

LO : The wiper runs at a lower speed.

HI : The wiper runs at a higher speed.

WWIIPPEERRSS AANNDD WWAASSHHEERRSS

OTLE045161

OTLA045318

■ Front windshield wiper/washer

■ Rear window wiper/washer

3-121

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

If there is heavy accumulation of snow

or ice on the windshield, defrost the

windshield for about 10 minutes, or

until the snow and/or ice is removed

before using the windshield wipers to

ensure proper operation.

If you do not remove the snow and/or

ice before using the wiper and washer,

it may damage the wiper and washer

system.

AUTO - Automatic Wiper Control

(if equipped)

A rain sensor located near the top of

the windshield detects moisture

accumulation and controls the wiping

cycle automatically. This mode is

designed to operate the wiper at an

appropriate speed depending on the

amount of rainfall. The sensitivity can

be varied by turning the adjustment

control (B) located on the wiper stalk.

If the wiper switch is set in AUTO

mode when the ignition switch is in

the ON position, the wiper will oper-

ate once to perform a self-check of

the system. Set the wiper control to

the OFF position when the wind-

shield wipers are not required.

To avoid personal injury from

the windshield wipers, when the

engine is running and the wind-

shield wiper switch is placed in

the AUTO mode:

• Do not touch the upper end of

the windshield glass facing

the rain sensor.

• Do not wipe the upper end of

the windshield glass with a

damp or wet cloth.

• Do not put pressure on the

windshield glass.

WARNING

3-122

Convenient features of your vehicle

• When washing the vehicle, set

the wiper switch in the OFF posi-

tion to stop the auto wiper oper-

ation. The wiper may operate

and be damaged if the switch is

set in the AUTO mode while

washing the vehicle.

• Do not remove the sensor cover

located on the upper end of the

passenger side windshield

glass. Damage to system parts

could occur and may not be cov-

ered by your vehicle warranty.

• Because of using a photo sen-

sor, temporary malfunction

could occur according to sud-

den ambient light change made

by stone and dust while driving.

Front Windshield Washers

In the OFF position, pull the lever

gently toward you to spray washer

fluid on the windshield and to run the

wipers 1-3 cycles. The spray and

wiper operation will continue until you

release the lever. If the washer does

not work, you may need to add wash-

er fluid to the washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE

OTLE045164

When the outside temperature is

below freezing, ALWAYS warm

the windshield using the

defroster to help prevent the

washer fluid from freezing on the

windshield and obscuring your

vision which could result in an

accident and serious injury or

death.

WARNING

3-123

Convenient features of your vehicle

• To prevent possible damage to

the washer pump, do not oper-

ate the washer when the fluid

reservoir is empty.

• To prevent possible damage to

the wipers or windshield, do not

operate the wipers when the

windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiper

arms and other components, do

not attempt to move the wipers

manually.

• To prevent possible damage to

the wipers and washer system,

use anti-freezing washer fluids

in the winter season or cold

weather.

Rear Window Wiper and

Washer Switch

The rear window wiper and washer

switch is located at the end of the

wiper and washer switch lever. Turn

the switch to the desired position to

operate the rear wiper and washer.

HI – High wiper speed

LO – Low wiper speed

OFF – Off

Push the lever away from you to

spray rear washer fluid and to run the

rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray

and wiper operation will continue

until you release the lever.

Automatic Rear Wiper Operation

A useful feature of your vehicle is the

Auto Rear Wiper Operation. When

the front windshield wipers are oper-

ating, and when the vehicle is shifted

into reverse (R), the rear wiper will

come ON automatically and continue

to operate until the vehicle is shifted

out of reverse (R).

To enable or disable this feature in

the cluster LCD display, go to 'User

Settings → Convenience → Auto

Rear Wiper (in R)'.

NOTICE

OTLE045165

OTLE045166

3-124

Convenient features of your vehicle

Rear View Monitor

The Rear View Monitor will activate

when the engine is running and the

shift lever is in the R (Reverse) posi-

tion.

This is a supplemental system that

helps provide a view of the area

behind the vehicle through the multi-

media screen while the vehicle is in

the R (Reverse) position.

Always keep the camera lens

clean. The camera may not work

normally if the lens is covered

with dirt, water or snow.

NOTICE

DDRRIIVVEERR AASSSSIISSTT SSYYSSTTEEMM

The Rear View Monitor is not a

safety device. It only serves to

assist the driver in identifying

objects directly behind the mid-

dle of the vehicle. The camera

does NOT cover the complete

area behind the vehicle.

WARNING

• Never rely solely on the Rear

view monitor when backing-

up.

• ALWAYS look around your

vehicle to make sure there are

no objects or obstacles before

moving the vehicle in any

direction to prevent a collision.

• Always pay close attention

when the vehicle is driven

close to objects, particularly

pedestrians, and especially

children.

WARNING

OTLE048052

OTLE048333Q

3-125

Convenient features of your vehicle

Surround View Monitor

(if equipped)

The Surround View Monitor system

can assist in parking by allowing the

driver to see around the vehicle.

Push the button (1, indicator ON) to

operate the system. To cancel the

system, push the button again (1,

indicator OFF).

The system is activated when:

• The engine is ON

• The shift lever is in D (Drive), N

(Neutral) or R (Reverse)

• Vehicle speed is under 10 mph (15

km/h)

The system is deactivated when:

• You press the button (1) again

• Vehicle speed is over 10 mph (15

km/h)

Information

• When vehicle speed is over 10 mph

(15 km/h), the system will turn off.

The system will not automatically

turn on again, even though vehicle

speed gets below 10 mph (15 km/h).

Push the button (1, indicator ON)

again, to turn on the system.

• When the vehicle is backing up, the

system will turn ON regardless of

vehicle speed or button status.

However, if vehicle speed is over 10

mph (15 km/h) when driving for-

ward, the SVM system will turn off.

• A warning appears on the system

when:

- The liftgate is opened

- The driver's door is opened

- The passenger's door is opened

- The outer side view mirror is fold-

• If the system is not operating nor-

mally, the system should be checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, refer to the sep-

arately supplied manual with your

vehicle.

OTLE048616

3-126

Convenient features of your vehicle

Always keep the camera lens

clean. The camera may not work

normally if the lens is covered

with foreign material.

NOTICE

(1) Front camera

(2) Left/Right cam-

era

(3) Rear camera

The Surround View Monitor only

serves to assist the driver in

parking. ALWAYS look around

your vehicle to make sure there

are no objects or obstacles

before moving the vehicle.

CAUTION

ODH047435

3-127

Convenient features of your vehicle

MMAANNUUAALL CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

OTL045207/OTL045207R-1

1. Fan speed control knob

2. Temperature control knob

3. Mode selection buttons

4. Front windshield defroster button

5. Rear window defroster button

6. Air intake control (recirc) button

7. A/C (Air conditioning) button*

8. Air intake control (fresh) button

* : if equipped

■■

Type A

■■

Type B

3-128

Convenient features of your vehicle

Heating and Air Conditioning

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired posi-

tion.

To improve the effectiveness of

heating and cooling, select the

mode according to the following:

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air or recirculated

air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn

the air conditioning system on.

OTLE048173

* : if equipped

3-129

Convenient features of your vehicle

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls

the direction of the air flow through

the ventilation system.

Air can be directed to the floor, dash-

board outlets, or windshield. Five

symbols are used to represent Face,

Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and

Front Defrost air position

Face-Level (B, D, F)

Air flow is directed toward the upper

body and face. Additionally, each

outlet can be controlled to direct the

air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, C, E, F)

Air flow is directed towards the face

and the floor.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E, F)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount directed to

the windshield, side window

defrosters, and side vents.

Floor & Defrost

(A, C, D, E, F)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor and the windshield, with a small

amount directed to the side window

defrosters, and side vents.

Front Air Defrost (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windshield, with a small amount

directed to the side window

defrosters.

In this mode the air conditioning and

the recirculated air position will be

selected automatically.

OTL045208

OTL045208R-1

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-130

Convenient features of your vehicle

MAX A/C-Level (B, D)

The MAX A/C mode is used to cool

the inside of the vehicle faster. Air

flow is directed toward the upper

body and face.

In this mode, the air conditioning and

the recirculated air position will be

selected automatically.

Instrument panel vents

The instrument panel vent air flow

can be directed up/down or left/right

using the vent adjustment lever.

Front

The outlet vents can be opened or

closed separately using the vent

control lever. To close the vent com-

pletely, move the vent control lever

all the way to the left. You will hear a

click.

Rear

The outlet vents can be opened ( )

or closed ( ) separately using the

thumbwheel.

OTL045209 OTLE048086

OTLE048087

■ Front

■ Rear (if equipped)

3-131

Convenient features of your vehicle

Temperature control

The temperature will increase by

turning the knob to the right.

The temperature will decrease by

turning the knob to the left.

Air intake control

This button is used to select the out-

side (fresh) air position or recirculat-

ed air position.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air

position selected, air

from the passenger com-

partment will be drawn

through the heated sys-

tem and heated or

cooled according to the

function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh)

air position selected, air

enters the vehicle from

outside and is heated or

cooled according to the

function selected.

OTL045210

■ Type A

■ Type B

OTL045211

OTL045211R

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-132

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

Prolonged operation of the heater in

the recirculated air position (without

air conditioning selected) may cause

fogging of the windshield and side

windows and the air within the pas-

senger compartment may become

stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air

conditioning with the recirculated air

position selected will result in exces-

sively dry air in the passenger com-

partment.

Fan speed control

Turn the knob to the right to increase

the fan speed and airflow. Turn the

knob to the left to decrease fan

speed and airflow.

Setting the fan speed control knob to

the “0” position turns off the fan.

OTL045212

• Continued use of the climate

control system operation in

the recirculated air position

can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness, that may cause

loss of vehicle control result-

ing in an accident. Set the air

intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position as much as

possible while driving.

• Continued use of the climate

control system operation in

the recirculated air position

(without the air conditioning

selected) may allow humidity

to increase inside the vehicle

which may fog the glass and

obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with

the air conditioning or heating

system on. It may cause seri-

ous injury or death due to a

drop in the oxygen level

and/or body temperature.

WARNING

3-133

Convenient features of your vehicle

Air conditioning (if equipped)

Press the A/C button to turn the sys-

tem on (indicator light will illuminate)

and off.

System Operation

Ventilation

1. Select the Face Level mode.

2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating

1. Select the Floor Level mode.

2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system on.

If the windshield fogs up, select the

Floor & Defrost mode or press

the Front Defrost mode.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes

from entering the car through the

ventilation system, temporarily set

the air intake control to the recircu-

lated air position. Return the con-

trol to the fresh air position when

the dust or odor has dissipated.

This will help keep the driver alert

and comfortable.

• To prevent the inside of the wind-

shield from fogging, set the air

intake control to the fresh air posi-

tion and fan speed to the desired

position, turn on the air conditioning

system, and adjust the temperature

control to desired temperature.

OTL045213

3-134

Convenient features of your vehicle

Air conditioning

Your HYUNDAI vehicle air condition-

ing system is filled with R-1234yf

refrigerant.

1. Start the engine.

2. Press the air conditioning button.

3. Select the Face Level mode.

4. Set the air intake control to the

recirculated air position. However,

prolonged operation of the recircu-

lated air position will excessively

dry the air. In this case, switch the

air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position. The indicator

light on the button will turn OFF.

5. Adjust the fan speed control and

temperature control to maintain

maximum comfort.

When maximum cooling is desired,

rotate the temperature control knob

to the left-most position (MAX AC).

Then set the fan speed control knob

to the highest speed.

When using the air conditioning

system, monitor the engine tem-

perature gauge closely while driv-

ing up hills or in heavy traffic

when outside temperatures are

high. Air conditioning system

operation can cause engine over-

heating. Continue to use the blow-

er fan, but turn the air condition-

ing system off if the engine tem-

perature gauge indicates engine

overheating.

Air conditioning system operation

tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in

direct sunlight during hot weather,

open the windows for a short time

to let the hot air inside the vehicle

escape.

• After sufficient cooling has been

achieved, switch back from the

recirculated air to the fresh outside

air position.

• To help reduce moisture inside of

the windows on rainy or humid

days, decrease the humidity inside

the vehicle by operating the air

conditioning system with the win-

dows and sunroof closed.

• Use the air conditioning system

every month for a few minutes to

ensure maximum system perform-

ance.

NOTICE

3-135

Convenient features of your vehicle

• If you operate the air conditioner

excessively, the difference

between the temperature of the

outside air and that of the wind-

shield could cause the outer sur-

face of the windshield to fog up,

causing loss of visibility. In this

case, set the mode selection but-

ton to the position and set the

fan speed control knob to the low-

est speed setting.

System Maintenance

Climate control air filter

[A] : Outside air, [B] : Recirculated air

[C] : Climate control air filter, [D] : Blower

[E] : Evaporator core, [F] : Heater core

This filter is installed behind the

glove box. It filters the dust or other

pollutants that enter the vehicle

through the heating and air condi-

tioning system.

Have the climate control air filter

replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer according to the maintenance

schedule. If the car is being driven in

severe conditions such as dusty or

rough roads, more frequent climate

control filter inspections and

changes are required.

If the air flow rate suddenly decreas-

es, the system should be checked at

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OIK047401L

3-136

Convenient features of your vehicle

Checking the amount of air

conditioner refrigerant and

compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is

low, the performance of the air con-

ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also

has a negative influence on the air

conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is

found, have the system inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

It is important that the correct

type and amount of oil and refrig-

erant is used. Otherwise, damage

to the compressor and abnormal

system operation may occur.

The air conditioning system should

be serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Air Conditioning refrigerant label

The actual Air Conditioning refriger-

ant label in the vehicle may differ

from the illustration.

Each symbols and specification on

air conditioning refrigerant label

means as below :

1. Classification of refrigerant

2. Amount of refrigerant

3. Classification of Compressor

lubricant

Refer to chapter 8 for more detail

location of the air conditioning refrig-

erant label.

NOTICE

Because the refrigerant

is mildly inflammable at

very high pressure, the

air conditioning system

should only be serv-

iced by trained and cer-

tified technicians. It is

important that the cor-

rect type and amount of oil and

refrigerant is used. Otherwise, it

may cause damage to the vehi-

cle and personal injury.

WARNING

ODH043366

■ Example

3-137

Convenient features of your vehicle

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM

OTLE045267R/OTLE045266R

■■

Type A

■■

Type B

1. Driver’s temperature control knob

2. Passenger’s temperature control knob

3. AUTO (automatic control) button

4. SYNC button

5. OFF button

6. Fan speed control button

7. Mode selection button

8. Air conditioning button

9. Front windshield defrost button

10. Rear window defrost button

11. Air intake control (recirc) button

12. Climate control information screen

13. Air intake control (fresh) button

3-138

Convenient features of your vehicle

Automatic Heating and Air

Conditioning

The Automatic Climate Control

System is controlled by setting the

desired temperature.

1. Press the AUTO button.

The modes, fan speeds, air intake

and air-conditioning will be controlled

automatically by the temperature set-

ting you select.

2. Turn the temperature control knob

to the desired temperature. If the

temperature is set to the lowest

setting (Lo), the air conditioning

system will operate continuously.

To turn the automatic operation off,

select any button of the following:

- Mode selection button

- Front windshield defroster button

(Press the button one more time

to deselect the front windshield

defroster function. The 'AUTO'

sign will illuminate on the infor-

mation display once again.)

- Fan speed control button

The selected function will be con-

trolled manually while other functions

operate automatically.

For your convenience and to improve

the effectiveness of the climate con-

trol, use the AUTO button and set the

temperature to 73°F (23°C).

OTL045215

OTL045216

3-139

Convenient features of your vehicle

A solar compensation sensor is

located inside the vehicle on the

center of the dash near the front

windshield. In order to ensure

optimum control of the heating

and cooling system, never block

the sensor or place anything near

the sensor while the climate con-

trol system is operating.

Manual Heating and Air

Conditioning

The heating and cooling system can

be controlled manually by pushing

buttons other than the AUTO button.

In this case, the system works

sequentially according to the order of

buttons selected.

When pressing any button except the

AUTO button while using automatic

operation, the functions not selected

will be controlled automatically.

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired posi-

tion.

To improve the effectiveness of

heating and cooling, select the

mode according to the following:

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn

the air conditioning system on.

7. Press the AUTO button to convert

to full automatic control of the sys-

tem.

NOTICE

OTLE048246

3-140

Convenient features of your vehicle

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls

the direction of the air flow through

the ventilation system.

OTLE048173

* : if equipped

OTL045291R

■ Type A

OTLE045217R

■ Type B

3-141

Convenient features of your vehicle

The air flow outlet direction is cycled

as follows:

Face-Level (B, D, F)

Air flow is directed toward the upper

body and face. Additionally, each

outlet can be controlled to direct the

air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)

Air flow is directed towards the face

and the floor.

Floor & Defrost

(A, C, D, E, F)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor and the windshield, with a small

amount directed to the side window

defrosters, and side vents.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E, F)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount directed to

the windshield, side window

defrosters, and side vents.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windshield, with a small amount

directed to the side window defrosters.

OTLE045218R

■ Type A

OTLE045263R

■ Type B

3-142

Convenient features of your vehicle

Instrument panel vents

The instrument panel vent air flow

can be directed up/down or left/right

using the vent adjustment lever.

Front

The outlet vents can be opened or

closed separately using the vent

control lever. To close the vent com-

pletely, move the vent control lever

all the way to the left. You will hear a

click.

Rear

The outlet vents can be opened ( )

or closed ( ) separately using the

thumbwheel.

Temperature control

Turn the knob to the right to increase

the temperature. Turn the knob to the

left to decrease the temperature.

The temperature will increase or

decrease by 1°F/0.5°C for each

incremental location. When set to the

lowest temperature setting, the air

conditioning will operate continuous-

ly.

OTL045219

■ Driver's side ■ Passenger's side

OTLE048086

■ Front

OTLE048087

■ Rear (if equipped)

3-143

Convenient features of your vehicle

Adjusting the driver and passenger

side temperature equally

• Press the "SYNC" button to oper-

ate the driver and passenger side

temperature equally.

The passenger side temperature

will be set to the same temperature

as the driver side temperature.

• Turn the left temperature control

knob. The driver and passenger

side temperature will be adjusted

equally.

Adjusting the driver and passenger

side temperature individually

Press the "SYNC" button again to

operate the driver and passenger

side temperature individually. The

button indicator will turn off.

Temperature conversion

If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, the temperature mode

display will reset to Fahrenheit.

To change the temperature unit from

°F to °C or °C to °F:

- On the instrument cluster, go to

User Settings ➝ Other ➝

Temperature Unit.

- Press the AUTO button while press-

ing the OFF button on the climate

control unit for 3 seconds.

The temperature unit on both the

cluster LCD display and climate con-

trol screen will change.

Air intake control

This button is used to select the out-

side (fresh) air position or recirculat-

ed air position.

OTL045220

OTLE045283R

■ Type A

OTLE045256R

■ Type B

3-144

Convenient features of your vehicle

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air

position selected, air

from the passenger

compartment will be

drawn through the heat-

ing system and heated

or cooled according to

the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh)

air position selected, air

enters the vehicle from

outside and is heated or

cooled according to the

function selected.

Information

Prolonged operation of the heater in

the recirculated air position (without

air conditioning selected) may cause

fogging of the windshield and side

windows and the air within the pas-

senger compartment may become

stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air

conditioning with the recirculated air

position selected will result in exces-

sively dry air in the passenger com-

partment.

• Continued use of the climate

control system operation in

the recirculated air position

can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness, that may cause

loss of vehicle control result-

ing in an accident. Set the air

intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position as much as

possible while driving.

• Continued use of the climate

control system operation in

the recirculated air position

(without the air conditioning

selected) may allow humidity

to increase inside the vehicle

which may fog the glass and

obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with

the air conditioning or heating

system on. It may cause seri-

ous injury or death due to a

drop in the oxygen level

and/or body temperature.

WARNING

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-146

Convenient features of your vehicle

OFF mode

Push the OFF button to turn the air

climate control system off.

You can still operate the mode and

air intake buttons as long as the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

System Operation

Ventilation

1. Select the Face Level mode.

2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating

1. Select the Floor Level mode.

2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system on.

If the windshield fogs up, select the

Floor & Defrost mode or press

the Front Defrost mode.

OTLE045285R

■ Type A

OTLE045224R

■ Type B

3-147

Convenient features of your vehicle

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes

from entering the car through the

ventilation system, temporarily set

the air intake control to the recircu-

lated air position. Return the con-

trol to the fresh air position when

the dust or odor has dissipated.

This will help keep the driver alert

and comfortable.

• To prevent the inside of the wind-

shield from fogging, set the air

intake control to the fresh air posi-

tion and fan speed to the desired

position, turn on the air conditioning

system, and adjust the temperature

control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning

Your HYUNDAI vehicle air condition-

ing system is filled with R-1234yf

refrigerant.

1. Start the engine.

2. Press the air conditioning button.

3. Select the Face Level mode.

4. Set the air intake control to the

recirculated air position. However,

prolonged operation of the recircu-

lated air position will excessively

dry the air. In this case, switch the

air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

5. Adjust the fan speed control and

temperature control to maintain

maximum comfort.

When maximum cooling is desired,

rotate the temperature control knob

until the temperature display indi-

cates Lo. Then set the fan speed

control button to the highest speed.

When using the air conditioning

system, monitor the engine tem-

perature gauge closely while driv-

ing up hills or in heavy traffic

when outside temperatures are

high. Air conditioning system

operation can cause engine over-

heating. Continue to use the blow-

er fan, but turn the air condition-

ing system off if the engine tem-

perature gauge indicates engine

overheating.

NOTICE

3-148

Convenient features of your vehicle

Air conditioning system operation

tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in

direct sunlight during hot weather,

open the windows for a short time

to let the hot air inside the vehicle

escape.

• After sufficient cooling has been

achieved, switch back from the

recirculated air to the fresh outside

air position.

• To help reduce moisture inside of

the windows on rainy or humid

days, decrease the humidity inside

the vehicle by operating the air

conditioning system with the win-

dows and sunroof closed.

• Use the air conditioning system

every month for a few minutes to

ensure maximum system perform-

ance.

• If you operate the air conditioner

excessively, the difference

between the temperature of the

outside air and that of the wind-

shield could cause the outer sur-

face of the windshield to fog up,

causing loss of visibility. In this

case, toggle the mode selection

button to the position and set

the fan speed control knob to the

lowest speed setting.

System Maintenance

Climate control air filter

[A] : Outside air, [B] : Recirculated air

[C] : Climate control air filter, [D] : Blower

[E] : Evaporator core, [F] : Heater core

This filter is installed behind the glove

box. It filters the dust or other pollu-

tants that enter the vehicle through the

heating and air conditioning system.

Have the climate control air filter

replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer according to the maintenance

schedule. If the car is being driven in

severe conditions such as dusty or

rough roads, more frequent climate

control air filter inspections and

changes are required.

OIK047401L

3-149

Convenient features of your vehicle

If the air flow rate suddenly decreas-

es, the system should be checked at

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Checking the amount of air

conditioner refrigerant and

compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is

low, the performance of the air con-

ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also

has a negative influence on the air

conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is

found, have the system inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

It is important that the correct

type and amount of oil and refrig-

erant is used. Otherwise, damage

to the compressor and abnormal

system operation may occur.

The air conditioning system should

be serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Air Conditioning refrigerant label

The actual Air Conditioning refriger-

ant label in the vehicle may differ

from the illustration.

Each symbols and specification on

air conditioning refrigerant label

means as below :

1. Classification of refrigerant

2. Amount of refrigerant

3. Classification of Compressor

lubricant

Refer to chapter 8 for more detail

location of the air conditioning refrig-

erant label.

NOTICE

ODH043366

■ Example

Because the refrigerant

is mildly inflammable at

very high pressure, the

air conditioning system

should only be serv-

iced by trained and cer-

tified technicians. It is

important that the cor-

rect type and amount of oil and

refrigerant is used. Otherwise, it

may cause damage to the vehi-

cle and personal injury.

WARNING

3-150

Convenient features of your vehicle

WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD DDEEFFRROOSSTTIINNGG AANNDD DDEEFFOOGGGGIINNGG

• For maximum windshield defrost-

ing, set the temperature control

knob to the highest temperature

setting and the fan control knob to

the highest fan speed. Select the

front defrost button on the climate

control display. After the engine

warm-up period, warm air will be

directed to the front windshield.

• If warm air to the floor is desired

while defrosting or defogging, set the

mode to the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and

ice from the windshield, rear win-

dow, side view mirrors, and all side

windows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the

hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to

improve heater and defroster effi-

ciency and to reduce the probability

of fogging up the inside of the wind-

shield.

If the engine temperature is still

cold after starting, then a brief

engine warm up period may be

required for the vented air flow to

become warm or hot.

Manual Climate Control System

To defog inside windshield

1. Select any fan speed except "0"

position.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Select the or position.

4. The outside (fresh) air will be

selected automatically. Additionally,

the air conditioning will automati-

cally operate if the mode is select-

ed to the position.

If the air conditioning and outside

(fresh) air position are not selected

automatically, press the correspon-

ding button manually.

NOTICE

Outside Windshield Moisture

Note that if you operate the air

conditioner to cool your vehicle

with the mode set to or

when the outside relative

humidity is high, moisture may

collect on the outer surface of

the windshield glass causing

the windshield to fog up on the

outside and limit your visibility.

If this occurs, use the wind-

shield wipers to clear the glass.

In addition, change the mode

selection knob or button on the

climate control system to the

mode to redirect cooling air

away from the windshield.

WARNING

OTL045225R

3-151

Convenient features of your vehicle

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme

hot (HI) position.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-

ditioning will be selected automat-

ically.

Automatic Climate Control

System

To defog inside windshield

1. Select desired fan speed.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4. The outside (fresh) air position will

be selected automatically.

If the outside (fresh) air position is

not selected automatically, adjust the

corresponding button manually.

If the position is selected, lower

fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan

speed.

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme

hot (HI) position.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4. The outside (fresh) air position will

be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower

fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan

speed.

OTL045227

■ Type A

■ Type B

OTL045226R

OTL045228

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-152

Convenient features of your vehicle

Defogging logic

To reduce the probability of fogging

up the inside of the windshield, the

air intake or air conditioning are con-

trolled automatically according to

certain conditions such as or

position. To cancel or return the

defogging logic, do the following.

Manual climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Press the defroster button ( ).

3. Press the air intake control button

at least 5 times within 3 seconds.

The indicator on the air intake button

blinks 3 times in 0.5 second inter-

vals. This indicates that the defog-

ging logic is cancelled.

If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, the defogging logic

will be enabled as the default logic.

Automatic climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Press the defroster button ( ).

3. While pressing the air conditioning

button (A/C), press the air intake

control button at least 5 times with-

in 3 seconds.

The climate control information

screen will blink 3 times in 0.5 sec-

ond intervals. This indicates that the

defogging logic is cancelled.

If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, the defogging logic

will be enabled as the default logic.

OTL045229C OTL045230

3-153

Convenient features of your vehicle

Auto Defogging System

(if equipped)

Auto defogging helps reduce the

possibility of fogging up the inside of

the windshield by automatically

sensing the moisture that accumu-

lates on inside the windshield.

The auto defogging system operates

when the heater or air conditioning is

on.

When the Auto Defogging

System operates, the indi-

cator will illuminate.

If a high amount of humidity is

detected in the vehicle, the Auto

Defogging System will be enabled.

The following steps will be performed

automatically:

Step 1 : Outside air position

Step 2 : Operating the air condition-

ing

Step 3 : Blowing air toward the wind-

shield

Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward

the windshield

If the air conditioning is off or recircu-

lated air position is manually select-

ed while Auto Defogging System is

ON, the "ADS OFF" symbol will blink

3 times to signal that the manual

operation has been canceled.

To cancel or reset the

Auto Defogging System

Press the front windshield defroster

button for 3 seconds when the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

When the Auto Defogging System is

canceled, the ADS OFF symbol will

blink 3 times and ADS OFF will be

displayed on the climate control

information screen.

When the Auto Defogging System is

reset, the ADS OFF symbol will blink

6 times without a signal.

OTLE048332

3-155

Convenient features of your vehicle

• To activate the rear window

defroster, press the rear window

defroster button located on the cli-

mate control instrument panel dis-

play. The indicator on the rear win-

dow defroster button illuminates

when the defroster is ON.

• To turn off the defroster, press the

rear window defroster button

again.

Information

• If there is heavy accumulation of

snow on the rear window, brush it

off before operating the rear

defroster.

• The rear window defroster automat-

ically turns off after approximately

20 minutes or when the ignition

switch is in the LOCK/OFF posi-

tion.

Heated Side Mirrors

If your vehicle is equipped with the

heated side mirrors, they will operate

at the same time you turn on the rear

window defroster.

Front wiper deicer (if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the

wiper deicer, it will operate at the

same time you turn on the rear win-

dow defroster.

3-156

Convenient features of your vehicle

CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL AADDDDIITTIIOONNAALL FFEEAATTUURREESS

Cluster ionizer

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the clean air function turns

on automatically.

Also, the clean air function turns off

automatically, when the ignition

switch is in the OFF position.

Automatic Ventilation

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position or when the engine is run-

ning and the outside temperature is

below 59°F (15°C), the automatic

ventilation feature will activate if the

recirculated air intake position is

selected for more than 5 minutes

while A/C is off and floor mode is

selected. In this condition the air

intake position will automatically

switch to the outside (fresh) air

intake position.

To cancel or reset the Automatic

Ventilation

When the air conditioning system is

on, select Face Level mode and

while pressing the A/C button, press

the recirculated air position button

five times within three seconds.

Sunroof Inside Air

Recirculation

When the heater or air conditioning

system is on with the sunroof

opened, the outside (fresh) air posi-

tion will be automatically selected. If

you press the recirculation mode but-

ton when the sunroof is open, recir-

culation mode will activate, but will

only remain enabled for 3 minutes.

When the sunroof is closed, the air

intake position will return to the orig-

inal position that was selected.

3-157

Convenient features of your vehicle

SSTTOORRAAGGEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storage

compartments.

Center Console Storage

To open :

Grab and hold the latch (1) on the

arm rest then lift the lid.

Glove Box

To open the glove box, pull the handle

and the glove box will automatically

open. Close the glove box after use.

NOTICE

Never store cigarette lighters,

propane cylinders, or other

flammable/explosive materials

in the vehicle. These items may

catch fire and/or explode if the

vehicle is exposed to hot tem-

peratures for extended periods.

WARNING

ALWAYS keep the storage com-

partment covers closed secure-

ly while driving. Items inside

your vehicle are moving as fast

as the vehicle. If you have to

stop or turn quickly, or if there

is a crash, the items may fly out

of the compartment and may

cause an injury if they strike the

driver or a passenger.

WARNING

OTLE048090

ALWAYS close the glove box

door after use.

An open glove box door can

cause serious injury to the pas-

senger in an accident, even if the

passenger is wearing a seat belt.

WARNING

OTL046089

3-158

Convenient features of your vehicle

Sunglass Holder

To open:

Push and release the cover and the

holder will slowly open. Place your

sunglasses in the compartment door

with the lenses facing out.

To close:

Push back into position.

Make sure the sunglass holder is

closed while driving.

• Do not keep objects except

sunglasses inside the sun-

glass holder. Such objects can

be thrown from the holder in

the event of a sudden stop or

an accident, possibly injuring

the passengers in the vehicle.

• Do not open the sunglass

holder while the vehicle is

moving. The rear view mirror

of the vehicle can be blocked

by an open sunglass holder.

• Do not put the glasses

forcibly into a sunglass hold-

er. It may cause personal

injury if you try to open it

forcibly when the glasses are

jammed in holder.

WARNING

OTL045275

■ Type A

OTL045091

■ Type B

3-159

Convenient features of your vehicle

IINNTTEERRIIOORR FFEEAATTUURREESS

Cup Holder

Front

Cups or small beverages cups may

be placed in the cup holders.

Rear

Pull the armrest down to use the cup

holders.

• Avoid abrupt starting and

braking when the cup holder

is in use to prevent spilling

your drink. If hot liquid spills,

you could be burned. Such a

burn to the driver could cause

loss of vehicle control result-

ing in an accident.

• Do not place uncovered or

unsecured cups, bottles,

cans, etc., in the cup holder

containing hot liquid while the

vehicle is in motion. Injuries

may result in the event of a

sudden stop or collision.

• Only use soft cups in the cup

holders. Hard objects can

injure you in an accident.

WARNING

Keep cans or bottles out of

direct sun light and do not put

them in a hot vehicle. It may

explode.

WARNING

OTLA045094

■ Front

OTLE045096

■ Rear

3-160

Convenient features of your vehicle

• Keep your drinks sealed while

driving to prevent spilling your

drink. If liquid spills, it may get

into the vehicle's electrical/elec-

tronic system and damage elec-

trical/electronic parts.

• When cleaning spilled liquids do

not use hot air to blow out or dry

the cup holder. This may dam-

age the interior.

Sunvisor

To use the sunvisor, pull it down-

ward.

To use the sunvisor to block the sun

from the side window, pull it down-

ward, release it from the bracket (1)

and swing it to the side towards the

window (2).

To use the vanity mirror, pull down

the sunvisor and slide the mirror

cover (3).

Adjust the sunvisor forward or back-

ward (4) as needed. Use the ticket

holder (5 or 6) to hold tickets.

Close the vanity mirror cover

securely and return the sunvisor

to its original position after use.

• Do not put several tickets in the

ticket holder at one time. This

could cause damage to the tick-

et holder.

• Avoid putting a plastic card

such as a credit card in the tick-

et holder located in the outside

of the sunvisor. This could cause

damage to the plastic card.

NOTICE

NOTICENOTICE

OTLA045097

For your safety, do not block

your view when using the sunvi-

sor.

WARNING

3-161

Convenient features of your vehicle

Power Outlet

The accessory 12V power outlet can

be used to plug in electrical equip-

ment such as a mobile phone or

other electronic device.

The accessory power outlet only

works with the vehicle turned ON.

The devices should draw less than

180 W with the engine running.

To prevent damage to the Power

Outlets :

• Use the power outlet only when

the engine is running and

remove the accessory plug after

use. Using the accessory plug

for prolonged periods of time

with the engine off could cause

the battery to discharge.

• Only use 12V electric acces-

sories which are less than 180 W

in electric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or

heater to the lowest operating

level when using the power out-

let.

• Close the cover when not in use.

• Some electronic devices can

cause electronic interference

when plugged into a vehicle’s

power outlet.These devices may

cause excessive audio static

and malfunctions in other elec-

tronic systems or devices used

in your vehicle.

• Push the plug in as far as it will

go. If good contact is not made,

the plug may overheat and the

fuse may blow.

• Plug in battery equipped electri-

cal/electronic devices with

reverse current protection. The

current from the battery may

flow into the vehicle’s electri-

cal/electronic system and cause

system malfunction.

NOTICE

Avoid electrical shocks. Do not

place your fingers or foreign

objects (pin, etc.) into a power

outlet or touch the power outlet

with a wet hand.

WARNING

OTLE048098

■ Front

OTL045516

■ Rear (if equipped)

3-162

Convenient features of your vehicle

USB Charger (if equipped)

The USB charging port is designed

to recharge small electronic devices

using a USB charging cable.

The USB charging port is powered

only when the ignition switch is ON.

Disconnect the USB cable from the

USB port after use.

• A smart phone or a tablet PC may

get warm during the re-charging

process. It does not indicate any

malfunction with the charging sys-

tem.

• A smart phone or a tablet PC,

which adopts a different re-charg-

ing method, may not be properly

re-charged. In this case, use an

exclusive charger of your device.

• The charging terminal is only to

recharge a device. Do not use the

charging terminal either to turn ON

an audio or to play media.

Wireless Cellular Phone

Charging System (if equipped)

[A]: Indicator light, [B]: Charging pad

On certain models, the vehicle

comes equipped with a wireless cel-

lular phone charger.

The system is available when all

doors are closed, and when the igni-

tion switch is ON.

OTLE048618

OTLE048619

■ Rear

3-163

Convenient features of your vehicle

To charge a cellular phone

The wireless cellular phone charging

system charges only the Qi-enabled

cellular phones ( ). Read the label

on the cellular phone accessory

cover or visit your cellular phone

manufacturer's website to check

whether your cellular phone supports

the Qi technology.

The wireless charging process starts

when you put a Qi-enabled cellular

phone on the wireless charging unit.

1. Remove other items, including the

smart key, from the wireless

charging unit. If not, the wireless

charging process may be inter-

rupted. Place the cellular phone

on the center of the charging pad

().

2. The indicator light is orange when

the cellular phone is charging. The

indicator light turns green when

phone charging is complete.

3. You can turn ON or OFF the wire-

less charging function in the user

settings mode on the instrument

cluster. For further information,

refer to the "LCD Display Modes"

in this chapter.

If your cellular phone is not charging:

- Slightly change the position of the

cellular phone on the charging

pad.

- Make sure the indicator light is

orange.

The indicator light will blink orange

for 10 seconds if there is a malfunc-

tion in the wireless charging system.

In this case, temporarily stop the

charging process, and re-attempt to

charge your cellular phone again.

The system warns you with a mes-

sage on the LCD display if the cellu-

lar phone is still on the wireless

charging unit after the engine is

turned OFF and the front door is

opened.

Information

For some manufacturer's cellular

phones, the system may not warn you

even though the cellular phone is left

on the wireless charging unit. This is

due to the particular characteristic of

the cellular phone and not a malfunc-

tion of the wireless charging.

• The wireless cellular phone

charging system may not sup-

port certain cellular phones,

which are not verified for the Qi

specification ( ).

• When placing your cellular

phone on the charging mat,

position the phone in the middle

of the mat for optimal charging

performance. If your cell phone

is off to the side, the charging

rate may be less and in some

cases the cell phone may experi-

ence higher heat conduction.

• In some cases, the wireless

charging may stop temporarily

when the Remote Key or Smart

Key is used, either when starting

the vehicle or locking/unlocking

the doors, etc.

• When charging certain cellular

phones, the charging indicator

may not change to green when

the cell phone is fully charged.

NOTICE

3-164

Convenient features of your vehicle

• For certain cellular phones with

their own protection, the wire-

less charging speed may

decrease and the wireless

charging may stop if the temper-

ature inside the vehicle is too

high or low.

When the inside temperature is

too high or low do not use the

system and wait until the tem-

perature maintains a proper

level before using the system.

• The wireless charging process

may temporarily stop, when tem-

perature abnormally increases

inside the wireless cellular

phone charging system. Stop

the charging cellular phone and

wait until temperature falls to a

certain level.

• The wireless charging process

may temporarily stop when

there is any metallic item, such

as a coin, between the wireless

cellular phone charging system

and the cellular phone.

• When charging some cellular

phones with a self-protection

feature, the wireless charging

speed may decrease and the

wireless charging may stop.

• If the cellular phone has a thick

cover, the wireless charging may

not be possible.

• If the cell phone is not complete-

ly contacting the charging pad,

wireless charging may not oper-

ate properly.

• Some magnetic items like credit

cards, phone cards or rail tickets

may be damaged if left with the

cellular phone during the charg-

ing process.

• When any cellular phone with-

out a wireless charging function

or a metallic object is placed on

the charging pad, a small noise

may sound. This small sound is

due to the vehicle discerning

compatibility of the object

placed on the charging pad. It

does not affect your vehicle or

the cellular phone in any way.

Information

If the ignition switch is in the OFF

position, the charging also stops.

Information

This device complies with part 15 of

the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

3-165

Convenient features of your vehicle

Clock

Set the clock on the multimedia dis-

play by pressing the SETUP button

on the side of the audio unit and

selecting Date/Time icon on the dis-

play.

For more details, refer to the

"Multimedia System" in chapter 4 or

Navigation System (AVN) Manual

that was supplied with your vehicle.

Clothes Hanger

To hang items, pull the hanger down.

These hangers are not designed to

hold large or heavy items.

Do not hang other objects such

as hangers or hard objects

except clothes. Also, do not put

heavy, sharp or breakable

objects in the clothes pockets.

In an accident or when the cur-

tain air bag is inflated, it may

cause vehicle damage or per-

sonal injury.

WARNING

OOS047066

Do not adjust the clock while

driving, you may lose your

steering control and cause an

accident that results in severe

personal injury or death.

WARNING

OTL045099

■ Rear

OTL045270

■ Door post

3-166

Convenient features of your vehicle

Plastic Bag Hook

To hang a plastic bag, open the tail-

gate and find a hook attached on

rear seat back.

Floor Mat Anchor(s)

ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors

to attach the front floor mats to the

vehicle. The anchors on the front

floor carpet keep the floor mats from

sliding forward.

OTL045273

Do not hang other objects

except a plastic bag. In an acci-

dent it may cause vehicle dam-

age or personal injury.

WARNING

OTL045231

The following must be observed

when installing ANY floor mat

to the vehicle.

• Ensure that the floor mats are

securely attached to the vehi-

cle's floor mat anchor(s)

before driving the vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floor mat that

cannot be firmly attached to

the vehicle's floor mat anchors.

• Do not stack floor mats on top

of one another (e.g. all-weath-

er rubber mat on top of a car-

peted floor mat). Only a single

floor mat should be installed

in each position.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was

manufactured with driver's side

floor mat anchors that are

designed to securely hold the

floor mat in place. To avoid any

interference with pedal opera-

tion, HYUNDAI recommends

that the HYUNDAI floor mat

designed for use in your vehicle

be installed.

WARNING

3-167

Convenient features of your vehicle

Cargo Net Holder (if equipped)

To keep items from shifting in the

rear area of the vehicle, you can use

the four hooks around the floorboard

of the rear cargo area to attach a

cargo net.

Your vehicle may come equipped

with a cargo net, or the cargo net is

available as an optional accessory at

your local HYUNDAI dealer.

Cargo Security Screen

(if equipped)

Use the cargo security screen to

cover items stored in the cargo area.

OTL045232

To avoid eye injury, DO NOT

overstretch the luggage net.

ALWAYS keep your face and

body out of the luggage net’s

recoil path. DO NOT use the lug-

gage net when the strap has vis-

ible signs of wear or damage.

WARNING

To prevent damage to the goods

or the vehicle, care should be

taken when carrying fragile or

bulky objects in the luggage

compartment.

CAUTION

OTL045233

3-168

Convenient features of your vehicle

To use the cargo security screen

1. Pull the cargo security screen

towards the rear of the vehicle by

the handle (1).

2. Pull the cargo screen out all the

way and then slowly allow the

screen to retract back into the

mechanism.

When the cargo security screen is

not in use:

1. Pull the cargo security screen

backward and up to release it from

the guides.

2. The cargo security screen will

automatically slide back in.

Information

The cargo security screen may not

automatically slide back in if the

cargo security screen is not fully

pulled out. Pull the cargo screen out

all the way and then slowly allow the

screen to retract back into the mecha-

nism.

To remove the cargo security

screen

1. Push one side of the cargo screen

inward to compress the spring

mechanism and release the

screen from the vehicle.

2. While the mechanism is com-

pressed, pull out the cargo securi-

ty screen.

OTL045234

OTLE048639

3-169

Convenient features of your vehicle

3. Open the luggage tray and keep the

cargo security screen in the tray.

To remove the cargo security

screen from the luggage tray

1. Pull up the screen board.

2. Push in the guide pin.

3. While pushing the guide pin, pull

out the cargo security screen.

OTL045236

OTLE055152

OTLE055153

OTLE055154

3-170

Convenient features of your vehicle

Since the cargo security screen

may be damaged or malformed,

do not put luggage on it when it is

used.

Luggage Tray (if equipped)

You can place a first aid kit, a reflec-

tor triangle, tools, etc. under the rear

cargo floorboard.

• Grasp the handle on the top of the

cover and lift it.

NOTICE

• Do not place objects on the

cargo security screen. Such

objects may be thrown about

inside the vehicle and possi-

bly injure vehicle occupants

during an accident or when

braking.

• Never allow anyone to ride in

the luggage compartment. It is

designed for luggage only.

• Maintain the balance of the

vehicle and locate the weight

as forward as possible.

WARNING

OTL045274

■ Type A

OTLE048274

■ Type B

3-171

Convenient features of your vehicle

EEXXTTEERRIIOORR FFEEAATTUURREESS

Roof Rack (if equipped)

If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can

load cargo on top of your vehicle.

If the vehicle is equipped with a

sunroof or a panorama roof, be

sure not to position cargo onto

the roof rack in such a way that it

could interfere with sunroof or a

panorama roof operation.

• When carrying cargo on the roof

rack, take the necessary precau-

tions to make sure the cargo

does not damage the roof of the

vehicle.

• When carrying large objects on

the roof rack, make sure they do

not exceed the overall roof

length or width.

NOTICE

OTL045502L

• The following specification is

the maximum weight that can

be loaded onto the roof rack.

Distribute the load as evenly

as possible onto the roof rack

and secure the load firmly.

Loading cargo or luggage in

excess of the specified weight

limit on the roof rack may

damage your vehicle.

• The vehicle center of gravity

will be higher when items are

loaded onto the roof rack.

Avoid sudden starts, braking,

sharp turns, abrupt maneu-

vers or high speeds that may

result in loss of vehicle con-

trol or rollover resulting in an

accident.

• Always drive slowly and turn

corners carefully when carry-

ing items on the roof rack.

Severe wind updrafts, caused

by passing vehicles or natural

causes, can cause sudden

upward pressure on items

loaded on the roof rack. This

is especially true when carry-

ing large, flat items such as

wood panels or mattresses.

This could cause the items to

fall off the roof rack and cause

damage to your vehicle or

others around you.

• To prevent damage or loss of

cargo while driving, check fre-

quently before or while driv-

ing to make sure the items on

the roof rack are securely fas-

tened.

WARNING

ROOF 220 lbs. (100 kg)

RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED

Multimedia System

Multimedia System.................................................4-3

AUX, USB and iPod

®®

Port ...............................................4-2

Antenna ...............................................................................4-2

Steering Wheel Audio Control........................................4-3

Audio / Video / Navigation System (AVN)..................4-4

Bluetooth

®®

Wireless Technology Hands-Free...........4-4

4-2

• If you install an aftermarket HID

head lamp, your vehicle's audio

and electronic device may mal-

function.

• Use caution to keep chemicals

such as perfumes, cosmetics,

sun screen lotions, hand sanitiz-

ers, or air fresheners from con-

tacting any interior components.

These chemicals may cause

damage or discoloration to the

interior materials.

AUX, USB and iPod

Port

You can use the AUX port to connect

audio devices and the USB port to

plug in a USB device or iPod

Information

When using a portable audio device

connected to the power outlet, noise

may occur during playback. If this

happens, use the power source of the

portable audio device.

❈ iPod

is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Antenna

Shark fin antenna

The shark fin antenna receives

transmitted data. (for example: GPS)

NOTICE

MMUULLTTIIMMEEDDIIAA SSYYSSTTEEMM

Multimedia System

OTLE048239

OTLE048237

4-3

Multimedia System

Steering Wheel Audio Control

Do not operate multiple audio

remote control buttons simultane-

ously.

VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1)

• Move the VOLUME lever up to

increase volume.

• Move the VOLUME lever down to

decrease volume.

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)

If the SEEK/PRESET switch is

pressed up or down and held for 0.8

second or more, it will function in the

following modes:

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK

select button. It will SEEK until you

release the button.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET switch is

pressed up or down, it will function

in the following modes:

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STA-

TION UP/DOWN button.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/

DOWN button.

MODE (3)

Press the MODE button to select

Radio, Disc*, or AUX.

* if equipped

Information

Detailed information for audio control

buttons are described in the separate-

ly supplied manual with the vehicle.

NOTICE

OTLA045238

4-4

(1) Call / Answer button

(2) Call end button

(3) Microphone

Detailed information for the

Bluetooth hands-free is described in

a separately supplied manual with

the vehicle.

Audio (Display Audio) / Video /

Navigation System (AVN)

(if equipped)

Detailed information for the AVN sys-

tem is described in a separately sup-

plied manual with the vehicle.

Multimedia System

OTL045240

OTL045241

■ Type A

OTL045262

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

■ Type B

Driving your vehicle

Before Driving ........................................................5-4

Before Entering the Vehicle...........................................5-4

Before Starting ..................................................................5-4

Ignition Switch........................................................5-6

Key Ignition Switch ...........................................................5-6

Engine Start/Stop Button................................................5-9

Automatic Transmission ......................................5-14

Automatic transmission operation ..............................5-14

Good Driving Practices ..................................................5-19

Braking System ....................................................5-21

Power Brakes...................................................................5-21

Disc Brakes Wear Indicator ..........................................5-22

Parking Brake...................................................................5-22

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)...................................5-24

Auto Hold ..........................................................................5-30

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-33

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-35

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM).........................5-39

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ....................................5-40

Downhill Brake Control (DBC)......................................5-40

Good Braking Practices.................................................5-42

All Wheel Drive (AWD)........................................5-43

AWD operation.................................................................5-45

Emergency precautions.................................................5-49

Drive Mode Integrated Control System............5-51

Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW) System...5-52

BCW (Blind-Spot Collision Warning) ..........................5-53

RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning).........5-55

Blind-Spot Collision Warning - Sensor Location....5-57

Limitations of the System.............................................5-58

Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA)

System - Camera Type........................................5-60

System Setting and Activation.....................................5-60

FCA Warning Message and System Control ............5-63

FCA Sensor .......................................................................5-65

System Not Operating....................................................5-67

Limitations of the System.............................................5-68

Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA)

System - Sensor Fusion Type

(Front Radar + Front Camera)...........................5-73

System Setting and Activation.....................................5-73

FCA Warning Message and System Control ............5-76

FCA Sensor .......................................................................5-78

System Not Operating....................................................5-80

Limitations of the System.............................................5-81

Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) System ...................5-87

LKA System Operation...................................................5-89

Warning Light and Message.........................................5-91

Limitations of the System.............................................5-93

LKA System Function Change......................................5-95

Driver Attention Warning (DAW) System.........5-96

System Setting and Activation.....................................5-96

Resetting the System.....................................................5-97

System Standby...............................................................5-98

System Malfunction .......................................................5-98

Cruise Control.....................................................5-100

Cruise Control operation.............................................5-100

Smart Cruise Control With Stop &

Go System ...........................................................5-105

Smart Cruise Control Switch ......................................5-105

Smart Cruise Control Speed .......................................5-106

Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-to-Vehicle

Distance...........................................................................5-110

Smart Cruise Control Radar Sensor .........................5-114

To Adjust the Sensitivity of

Smart Cruise Control....................................................5-115

Conventional Cruise Control Mode...........................5-116

Limitations of the System...........................................5-117

Special Driving Conditions................................5-122

Hazardous driving conditions ....................................5-122

Rocking the vehicle ......................................................5-122

Smooth cornering .........................................................5-123

Driving at night..............................................................5-123

Driving in the rain.........................................................5-123

Driving in flooded areas..............................................5-124

Highway driving.............................................................5-124

Reducing the risk of a rollover.................................5-125

Winter Driving ....................................................5-126

Snow or Icy Conditions................................................5-126

Winter Precautions.......................................................5-128

Trailer Towing.....................................................5-130

If you decide to pull a trailer.....................................5-130

Trailer towing equipment ............................................5-132

Driving with a trailer ....................................................5-133

Maintenance when trailer towing.............................5-136

Vehicle Load Limit..............................................5-138

Tire Loading Information Label.................................5-139

5-3

Driving your vehicle

Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death.

Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.

Do not inhale engine exhaust.

If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. Exposure to CO can cause

unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If

you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the

vehicle, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.

Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine only

long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.

Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle , be sure to do so only in an

open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

Keep the air intakes clear.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the windshield

clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.

If you must drive with the liftgate open:

Close all windows.

Open instrument panel air vents.

Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.

WARNING

5-4

Driving your vehicle

Before Entering the Vehicle

• Be sure all windows, outside mir-

ror(s), and outside lights are clean

and unobstructed.

• Remove frost, snow, or ice.

• Visually check the tires for uneven

wear and damage.

• Check under the vehicle for any

sign of leaks.

• Be sure there are no obstacles

behind you if you intend to back up.

Before Starting

• Make sure the hood, the liftgate,

and the doors are securely closed

and locked.

• Adjust the position of the seat and

steering wheel.

• Adjust the inside and outside

rearview mirrors.

• Verify all the lights work.

• Fasten your seatbelt. Check that all

passengers have fastened their

seatbelts.

• Check the gauges and indicators in

the instrument panel and the mes-

sages on the instrument display

when the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

• Check that any items you are car-

rying are stored properly or fas-

tened down securely.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide vari-

ety of automobile components

including components found in

the interior furnishings in a

vehicle, contain or emit harmful

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and

birth defects and reproductive

harm. In addition, certain fluids

contained in vehicles and cer-

tain products of components

contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California

to cause cancer and birth

defects or other reproductive

harm.

WARNING

BBEEFFOORREE DDRRIIVVIINNGG

5-5

Driving your vehicle

NEVER drink or take drugs and

drive.

Drinking or taking drugs and

driving is dangerous and may

result in an accident and SERI-

OUS INJURY or DEATH.

Drunk driving is the number

one contributor to the highway

death toll each year. Even a

small amount of alcohol will

affect your reflexes, percep-

tions and judgment. Just one

drink can reduce your ability to

respond to changing conditions

and emergencies and your reac-

tion time gets worse with each

additional drink.

Driving while under the influ-

ence of drugs is as dangerous

or more dangerous than driving

under the influence of alcohol.

WARNING

You are much more likely to have

a serious accident if you drink or

take drugs and drive. If you are

drinking or taking drugs, don't

drive. Do not ride with a driver

who has been drinking or taking

drugs. Choose a designated

driver or call a taxi.

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-

lowing precautions:

• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.

All passengers must be prop-

erly belted whenever the vehi-

cle is moving. For more

details, refer to "Seat Belts" in

chapter 2.

• Always drive defensively.

Assume other drivers or pedes-

trians may be careless and

make mistakes.

• Stay focused on the task of

driving. Driver distraction can

cause accidents.

• Leave plenty of space between

you and the vehicle in front of

you.

WARNING

5-6

Key Ignition Switch

Whenever the front door is opened,

the ignition switch will illuminate, pro-

vided the ignition switch is not in the

ON position. The light will go off

immediately when the ignition switch

is turned on or go off after about 30

seconds when the door is closed.

IIGGNNIITTIIOONN SSWWIITTCCHH

Driving your vehicle

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-

lowing precautions:

• NEVER allow children or any

person who is unfamiliar with

the vehicle to touch the igni-

tion switch or related parts.

Unexpected and sudden vehi-

cle movement can occur.

• NEVER reach through the

steering wheel for the ignition

switch, or any other control,

while the vehicle is in motion.

The presence of your hand or

arm in this area may cause a

loss of vehicle control result-

ing in an accident.

WARNING

NEVER turn the ignition switch

to the LOCK or ACC position

while the vehicle is in motion

except in an emergency. This

will result in the engine turning

off and loss of power assist for

the steering and brake systems.

This may lead to loss of direc-

tional control and braking func-

tion, which could cause an acci-

dent.

Before leaving the driver's seat,

always make sure the shift lever

is in P (Park) position, apply the

parking brake, and turn ignition

switch to the LOCK position.

Unexpected vehicle movement

may occur if these precautions

are not followed.

WARNING

OTL055001

5-7

Driving your vehicle

Key ignition switch positions

Switch

Position

Action Notice

LOCK

To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, push the

key in slightly at the ACC position and turn the key

towards the LOCK position.

The ignition key can be removed in the LOCK position.

The steering wheel locks to protect the vehicle from theft.

(if equipped)

ACC

Some of the electrical accessories are usable.

The steering wheel unlocks.

This is the normal key position when the engine has

started.

All features and accessories are usable.

The warning lights can be checked when you turn the

ignition switch from ACC to ON.

Do not leave the ignition switch in the ON position when

the engine is not running in order to prevent the battery

from discharging.

START

To start the engine, turn the ignition switch to the START

position. The switch returns to the ON position when you

let go of the key.

The engine will crank until you release the key.

5-8

Starting the engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

2. Make sure the shift lever is in P

(Park).

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the

START position. Hold the key

(maximum of 10 seconds) until the

engine starts and release it.

Information

• It is best to maintain a moderate

engine speed until the vehicle engine

comes up to normal operating tem-

perature. Avoid harsh or abrupt

acceleration or deceleration while

the engine is still cold.

• Whether the engine is cold or warm,

always start the vehicle with your

foot on the brake pedal. Do not

depress the accelerator while start-

ing the vehicle. Do not race the

engine while warming it up.

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

• Do not hold the ignition key in

the START position for more

than 10 seconds. Wait 5 to 10

seconds before trying again.

• Do not push or tow your vehicle

to start the engine.

NOTICE

Driving your vehicle

Always wear appropriate shoes

when operating your vehicle.

Unsuitable shoes, such as high

heels, ski boots, sandals, flip-

flops, etc., may interfere with

your ability to use the brake and

accelerator pedals.

WARNING

5-9

Driving your vehicle

Engine Start/Stop Button

Whenever the front door is opened,

the Engine Start/Stop button will illu-

minate and will go off 30 seconds

after the door is closed.

• NEVER press the Engine Start/

Stop button while the vehicle

is in motion except in an emer-

gency. This will result in the

engine turning off and loss of

power assist for the steering

and brake systems.

WARNING

To turn the engine off in an

emergency:

Press and hold the Engine

Start/Stop button for more than

two seconds OR rapidly press

and release the Engine Start/

Stop button three times (within

three seconds).

If the vehicle is still moving, you

can restart the engine without

depressing the brake pedal by

pressing the Engine Start/Stop

button with the shift lever in the

N (Neutral) position.

This may lead to loss of direc-

tional control and braking

function, which could cause

an accident.

• Before leaving the driver's

seat, always make sure the

shift lever is in the P (Park)

position, set the parking

brake, press the Engine Start/

Stop button to the OFF posi-

tion, and take the Smart Key

with you. Unexpected vehicle

movement may occur if these

precautions are not followed.

• NEVER reach through the

steering wheel for the Engine

Start/Stop button or any other

control while the vehicle is in

motion. The presence of your

hand or arm in this area may

cause a loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident.

WARNING

To reduce risk of serious injury

or death, NEVER allow children

or any person who is unfamiliar

with the vehicle to touch the

Engine Start/Stop button or

related parts. Unexpected and

sudden vehicle movement can

occur.

WARNING

OTLE058002

5-10

Driving your vehicle

Engine Stop/Start button positions

Button Position Action Notice

OFF

To turn off the engine, press the Engine

Start/Stop button with shift lever in P (Park).

When you press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton without the shift lever in P (Park), the

Engine Start/Stop button does not turn to the

OFF position, but turns to the ACC position.

ACC

Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the

button is in the OFF position without depress-

ing the brake pedal.

Smoe of the electrical accessories are

usable.

If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the

ACC position for more than one hour, the bat-

tery power will turn off automatically to prevent

the battery from discharging.

5-11

Driving your vehicle

Button Position Action Notice

Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it is

in the ACC position without depressing the

brake pedal.

The warning lights can be checked before

the engine is started.

Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in

the ON position when the engine is not run-

ning to prevent the battery from discharging.

START

To start the engine, depress the brake pedal

and press the Engine Start/Stop button with

the shift lever in the P (Park) or in the N

(Neutral) position.

For your safety, start the engine with the shift

lever in the P (Park) position.

If you press the Engine Start/Stop button with-

out depressing the brake pedal, the engine

does not start and the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton changes as follows:

OFF

→→

ACC

→→

OFF

However, the engine may start if you depress

the brake pedal within 0.5 second after press-

ing the Engine Start/Stop button when it is in

the OFF position.

5-12

Driving your vehicle

• Always wear appropriate shoes

when operating your vehicle.

Unsuitable shoes, such as

high heels, ski boots, sandals,

flip-flops, etc., may interfere

with your ability to use the

brake and accelerator pedals.

• Do not start the vehicle with the

accelerator pedal depressed.

The vehicle can move and lead

to an accident.

• Wait until the engine rpm is

normal. The vehicle may sud-

denly move if the brake pedal

is released when the rpm is

high.

WARNING

Starting the engine

Information

• The engine will start by pressing the

Engine Start/Stop button, only when

the smart key is in the vehicle.

• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-

cle, if it is far away from the driver,

the engine may not start.

• When the Engine Start/Stop button

is in the ACC or ON position, if any

door is open, the system checks for

the smart key. If the smart key is not

in the vehicle, the " " indicator

will blink and the warning "Key not

in vehicle" will come on and if all

doors are closed, the chime will also

sound for about 5 seconds. Keep the

smart key in the vehicle when using

the ACC position or if the vehicle

engine is ON.

1. Always carry the smart key with

you.

2. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

3. Make sure the shift lever is in P

(Park).

4. Depress the brake pedal.

5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton.

Information

• Do not wait for the engine to warm

up while the vehicle remains station-

ary. Start driving at moderate

engine speeds. (Aggressive accelerat-

ing and decelerating should be

avoided.)

• Always start the vehicle with your

foot on the brake pedal. Do not

depress the accelerator while start-

ing the vehicle. Do not race the

engine while warming it up.

5-13

Driving your vehicle

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

• If the engine stalls while you are

in motion, do not attempt to

move the shift lever to the P

(Park) position.

If traffic and road conditions

permit, you may put the shift

lever in the N (Neutral) position

while the vehicle is still moving

and press the Engine Start/Stop

button in an attempt to restart

the engine.

• Do not push or tow your vehicle

to start the engine.

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

When the stop lamp fuse is blown,

you can't start the engine normal-

ly. Replace the fuse with a new

one. If you are not able to replace

the fuse, you can start the engine

by pressing and holding the

Engine Start/Stop button for 10

seconds with the Engine Start/

Stop button in the ACC position.

Do not press the Engine Start/Stop

button for more than 10 seconds

except when the stop lamp fuse is

blown.

For your safety always depress

the brake pedal before starting the

engine.

Information

If the smart key battery is weak or the

smart key does not work correctly,

you can start the engine by pressing

the Engine Start/Stop button with the

smart key in the direction of the pic-

ture above.

NOTICENOTICE

OTL058008

5-14

Driving your vehicle

Automatic transmission opera-

tion

The automatic transmission has six

forward speeds and one reverse

speed.

The individual speeds are selected

automatically in the D (Drive) posi-

tion.

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN

Move shift lever.

Press the shift button, then move shift lever.

Depress the brake pedal, press ths shift button, and then move shift lever.

OTL055006

5-15

Driving your vehicle

Transmission ranges

The indicator in the instrument clus-

ter displays the shift lever position

when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into P (Park).

To shift from P (Park), you must

depress firmly on the brake pedal.

Make sure your foot is off the accel-

erator pedal.

If you have done all of the above and

still cannot shift the lever out of P

(Park), see "Shift-Lock Release" in

this section.

The shift lever must be in P (Park)

before turning the engine off.

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death:

• ALWAYS check the surround-

ing areas near your vehicle for

people, especially children,

before shifting a vehicle into

D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver's

seat, always make sure the

shift lever is in the P (Park)

position, then set the parking

brake, and place the ignition

switch in the LOCK/OFF posi-

tion. Unexpected and sudden

vehicle movement can occur

if these precautions are not

followed.

• Do not use engine braking

(shifting from a high gear to

lower gear) rapidly on slip-

pery roads. The vehicle may

slip causing an accident.

WARNING

• Shifting into P (Park) while the

vehicle is in motion may

cause you to lose control of

the vehicle.

• After the vehicle has stopped,

always make sure the shift

lever is in P (Park), apply the

parking brake, and turn the

engine off.

• Do not use the P (Park) posi-

tion in place of the parking

brake.

WARNING

5-16

Driving your vehicle

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle

backward.

Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into or out of R

(Reverse); you may damage the

transmission if you shift into R

(Reverse) while the vehicle is in

motion.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transmission are not

engaged.

Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart

a stalled engine, or if it is necessary

to stop with the engine ON. Shift into

P (Park) if you need to leave your

vehicle for any reason.

Always depress the brake pedal

when you are shifting from N

(Neutral) to another gear.

D (Drive)

This is the normal driving position.

The transmission will automatically

shift through a six-gear sequence,

providing the best fuel economy and

power.

For extra power when passing anoth-

er vehicle or driving uphill depress

the accelerator pedal further until

you feel the transmission downshift

to a lower gear.

The DRIVE MODE switch, located

on the shift lever console, allows the

driver to switch from COMFORT

mode to SPORT mode.

For more details, refer to "Drive

Mode Integrated Control System"

later in this chapter.

NOTICE

Do not shift into gear unless

your foot is firmly on the brake

pedal. Shifting into gear when

the engine is running at high

speed can cause the vehicle to

move very rapidly. You could

lose control of the vehicle and

hit people or objects.

WARNING

5-17

Driving your vehicle

Manual shift mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or

in motion, manual shift mode is

selected by pushing the shift lever

from the D (Drive) position into the

manual gate. To return to D (Drive)

range operation, push the shift lever

back into the main gate.

In Manual Shift Mode, moving the

shift lever backwards and forwards

will allow you to select the desired

range of gears for the current driving

conditions.

+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once

to shift up one gear.

- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards

once to shift down one

gear.

Information

• Only the six forward gears can be

selected in Manual shift mode. To

reverse or park the vehicle, move

the shift lever to the R (Reverse) or

P (Park) position as required.

• Downshifts are made automatically

when the vehicle slows down. When

the vehicle stops, 1

gear is automat-

ically selected.

• When the engine rpm approaches

the red zone the transmission will

upshift automatically.

• If the driver presses the lever to

+ (Up) or - (Down) position, the

transmission may not make the

requested gear change if the next

gear is outside of the allowable

engine rpm range. The driver must

execute upshifts in accordance with

road conditions, taking care to keep

the engine rpms below the red zone.

• When accelerating from a stop on a

slippery road, push the shift lever

forward into the + (Up) position.

This allows the transmission to shift

into the 2

gear which is better for

smooth driving on a slippery road.

Push the shift lever to the - (Down)

side to shift back to the 1

gear.

OTL055007

((

))

((

))

5-18

Shift-Lock System

For your safety, the automatic trans-

mission has a shift-lock system

which prevents shifting the transmis-

sion from P (Park) into R (Reverse)

unless the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transmission from P

(Park) into R (Reverse):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine or place the igni-

tion switch in the ON position.

3. Move the shift lever.

Shift-Lock Release

If the shift lever cannot be moved from

the P (Park) position into R (Reverse)

position with the brake pedal

depressed, continue depressing the

brake, and then do the following:

1. Place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Carefully remove the cap (1) cov-

ering the shift-lock release access

hole.

4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screw-

driver) into the access hole and

press down on the tool.

5. Move the shift lever.

6. Remove the tool from the shift-

lock override access hole then

install the cap.

If you need to use the shift-lock

release, have your vehicle inspected

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

immediately.

Driving your vehicle

OTLA055002

5-19

Driving your vehicle

Parking

Always come to a complete stop and

continue to depress the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever into the P (Park)

position, apply the parking brake,

and place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position. Take the Key

with you when exiting the vehicle.

Good Driving Practices

• Never move the shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other

position with the accelerator pedal

depressed.

• Never move the shift lever into P

(Park) when the vehicle is in

motion.

Be sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before you attempt to shift

into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Do not move the shift lever to N

(Neutral) when driving. Doing so

may result in an accident because

of a loss of engine braking and the

transmission could be damaged.

• Do not drive with your foot resting

on the brake pedal. Even light, but

consistent pedal pressure can

result in the brakes overheating,

brake wear and possibly even

brake failure.

• Depressing both accelerator and

brake pedals at the same time can

trigger logic for engine power

reduction to assure vehicle decel-

eration. Vehicle acceleration will

resume after the brake pedal is

released.

• When driving in Manual Shift

Mode, slow down before shifting to

a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower

gear may not be engaged if the

engine rpms are outside of the

allowable range.

• Always apply the parking brake

when leaving the vehicle. Do not

depend on placing the transmis-

sion in P (Park) to keep the vehicle

from moving.

• Exercise extreme caution when

driving on a slippery surface. Be

especially careful when braking,

accelerating or shifting gears. On a

slippery surface, an abrupt change

in vehicle speed can cause the

drive wheels to lose traction and

may cause loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident.

• Optimum vehicle performance and

economy is obtained by smoothly

depressing and releasing the

accelerator.

• When you stay in the vehicle

with the engine running, be

careful not to depress the

accelerator pedal for a long

period of time. The engine or

exhaust system may overheat

and start a fire.

• The exhaust gas and the

exhaust system are very hot.

Keep away from the exhaust

system components.

• Do not stop or park over flam-

mable materials, such as dry

grass, paper or leaves. They

may ignite and cause a fire.

WARNING

5-20

Information -

Kickdown

Mechanism

Use the kickdown mechanism for

maximum acceleration. Depress the

accelerator pedal beyond the pressure

point. The automatic transmission will

shift to a lower gear depending on the

engine speed.

Driving your vehicle

• In the event your vehicle

leaves the roadway, do not

steer sharply. Instead, slow

down before pulling back into

the travel lanes.

• HYUNDAI recommends you

follow all posted speed limits.

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.

In a collision, an unbelted

occupant is significantly more

likely to be seriously injured

or killed than a properly belt-

ed occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when cor-

nering or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as

sharp lane changes or fast,

sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose control

of your vehicle at highway

speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off

the roadway and the driver

over steers to reenter the

roadway.

WARNING

5-21

Driving your vehicle

Power Brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted

brakes that adjust automatically

through normal usage.

If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power

assist for the brakes will not work.

You can still stop your vehicle by

applying greater force to the brake

pedal than typical. The stopping dis-

tance, however, will be longer than

with power brakes.

When the engine is not running, the

reserve brake power is partially

depleted each time the brake pedal

is applied. Do not pump the brake

pedal when the power assist has

been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when

necessary to maintain steering con-

trol on slippery surfaces.

BBRRAAKKIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM

Take the following precautions:

• Do not drive with your foot

resting on the brake pedal.

This will create abnormal high

brake temperatures, exces-

sive brake lining and pad

wear, and increased stopping

distances.

• When descending down a

long or steep hill, move the

gear shift lever to Manual

Shift Mode and manually

downshift to a lower gear in

order to control your speed

without using the brake pedal

excessively. Applying the

brakes continuously will

cause the brakes to overheat

and could result in a tempo-

rary loss of braking perform-

ance.

• Wet brakes may impair the

vehicle's ability to safely slow

down; the vehicle may also

pull to one side when the

brakes are applied. Applying

the brakes lightly will indicate

whether they have been

affected in this way. Always

test your brakes in this fash-

ion after driving through deep

water. To dry the brakes, light-

ly tap the brake pedal to heat

up the brakes while maintain-

ing a safe forward speed until

brake performance returns to

normal. Avoid driving at high

speeds until the brakes func-

tion correctly.

WARNING

5-22

Driving your vehicle

Disc Brakes Wear Indicator

When your brake pads are worn and

new pads are required, you will hear

a high pitched warning sound from

your front or rear brakes. You may

hear this sound come and go or it

may occur whenever you depress

the brake pedal.

Note that some driving conditions or

climates may cause a brake squeal

when you first apply (or lightly apply)

the brakes. This is normal and does

not indicate a problem with your

brakes.

To avoid costly brake repairs, do

not continue to drive with worn

brake pads.

Information

Always replace brake pads as com-

plete front or rear axle sets.

Parking Brake

Always set the parking brake before

leaving the vehicle. To apply the

parking brake:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Depress the parking brake pedal

down as far as possible.

NOTICE

OTL055012

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, do not oper-

ate the parking brake while the

vehicle is moving except in an

emergency situation. It could

damage the brake system and

lead to an accident.

WARNING

5-23

Driving your vehicle

To release:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Depress the parking brake pedal

down and it will release automatical-

ly.

If the parking brake does not release

or does not release all the way, have

your vehicle checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not apply the accelerator

pedal while the parking brake is

engaged. If you depress the

accelerator pedal with the park-

ing brake engaged, warning will

sound. Damage to the parking

brake may occur.

• Driving with the parking brake

on can overheat the braking sys-

tem and cause premature wear

or damage to brake parts. Make

sure the parking brake is

released and the Brake Warning

Light is off before driving.

NOTICE

OTL055014

• Whenever leaving the vehicle

or parking, always come to a

complete stop and continue to

depress the brake pedal. Move

the shift lever into P (Park)

position, then apply the park-

ing brake, and place the igni-

tion switch in the LOCK/OFF

position.

Vehicles with the parking

brake not fully engaged are at

risk for moving inadvertently

and causing injury to yourself

or others.

• NEVER allow anyone who is

unfamiliar with the vehicle to

touch the parking brake. If the

parking brake is released

unintentionally, serious injury

may occur.

• Only release the parking

brake when you are seated

inside the vehicle with your

foot firmly on the brake pedal.

WARNING

5-24

Driving your vehicle

Check the Parking

Brake Warning Light

by placing the ignition

switch to the ON posi-

tion (do not start the

engine).

This light will be illuminated when the

parking brake is applied with the igni-

tion switch in the START or ON posi-

tion.

Before driving, be sure the parking

brake is released and the Brake

Warning Light is OFF.

If the Parking Brake Warning Light

remains on after the parking brake is

released while engine is running,

there may be a malfunction in the

brake system. Immediate attention is

necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the

vehicle immediately. If that is not pos-

sible, use extreme caution while

operating the vehicle and only con-

tinue to drive the vehicle until you

can reach a safe location.

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)

Applying the parking brake

To apply the EPB

(Electronic Parking Brake):

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Pull up the EPB switch.

Make sure the Parking Brake

Warning Light comes on.

OTLE058015

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, do not oper-

ate the EPB while the vehicle is

moving except in an emergency

situation. It could damage the

brake system and lead to an

accident.

WARNING

5-25

Driving your vehicle

Releasing the Electronic

Parking Brake (EPB)

To release the EPB (Electronic

Parking Brake), press the EPB

switch in the following condition:

• Make sure the ignition is ON posi-

tion.

• Depress the brake pedal.

Make sure the Parking Brake

Warning Light goes off.

The Electronic Parking Brake will

release automatically under the fol-

lowing conditions:

1) Driver and passenger seat belts

are fastened.

2) All doors, the hood, and the lift-

gate are closed.

3) The engine is running.

4) Shifting out of P (Park) or N

(Neutral) :

With the engine running and the

gear shift lever in either P (Park)

or N (Neutral), depress the brake

pedal and shift to either R

(Reverse) or D (Drive).

5) Gradually depress the accelerator

pedal.

Make sure the Parking Brake

Warning light goes off.

Information

• For your safety, you can engage the

EPB even though the ignition switch

is in the OFF position, but you can-

not release it.

• For your safety, depress the brake

pedal and release the parking brake

manually with the EPB switch when

you drive downhill or when backing

up the vehicle.

• If the parking brake warning

light is still on even though the

EPB has been released, have the

system checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not drive your vehicle with

the EPB applied. It may cause

excessive brake pad and brake

rotor wear.

NOTICE

OTLE058016

5-26

Driving your vehicle

EPB (Electronic Parking Brake)

may be automatically applied

when:

• Requested by other systems

• The driver turns the engine off

while Auto Hold is operating.

Warning messages

To release EPB, fasten seatbelt,

close door, hood and liftgate

• If you try to drive with the EPB

applied, a warning will sound and a

message will appear.

• If the driver's seat belt is unfas-

tened and the engine hood or lift-

gate is opened, a warning will

sound and a message will appear.

• If there is a problem with the vehi-

cle, a warning may sound and a

message may appear.

If the situation occurs, depress the

brake pedal and release EPB by

pressing the EPB switch.

OTMA058132

• Whenever leaving the vehicle

or parking, always come to a

complete stop and continue

to depress the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever into the P

(Park) position, press the EPB

switch, and set the ignition

switch to the OFF position.

Take the Key with you when

exiting the vehicle.

Vehicles not fully engaged in

P (Park) with the parking

brake set are at risk for mov-

ing inadvertently and causing

injury to yourself or others.

• NEVER allow anyone who is

unfamiliar with the vehicle to

touch the EPB switch. If the

EPB is released unintentional-

ly, serious injury may occur.

• Only release the EPB when

you are seated inside the

vehicle with your foot firmly

on the brake pedal.

WARNING

5-27

Driving your vehicle

• Do not apply the accelerator

pedal while the parking brake is

engaged. If you depress the

accelerator pedal with the EPB

engaged, a warning will sound

and a message will appear.

Damage to the parking brake

may occur.

• Driving with the parking brake

on can overheat the braking sys-

tem and cause premature wear

or damage to brake parts. Make

sure the EPB is released and the

Parking Brake Warning Light is

off before driving.

Information

• A clicking sound may be heard

while operating or releasing the

EPB. These conditions are normal

and indicate that the EPB is func-

tioning properly.

• When leaving your keys with a

parking attendant or assistant,

make sure to inform him/her how

to operate the EPB.

AUTO HOLD turning Off!

Press brake pedal

When the conversion from Auto Hold

to EPB is not working properly a

warning will sound and a message

will appear.

NOTICE

OIK057079N

5-28

Driving your vehicle

Parking brake automatically

engaged

If the EPB is applied while Auto Hold

is activated, a warning will sound and

a message will appear.

EPB malfunction indicator

This warning light illuminates if the

ignition switch is set to the ON posi-

tion and goes off in approximately 3

seconds if the system is operating

normally.

If the EPB malfunction indicator

remains on, comes on while driving,

or does not come on when the igni-

tion switch is changed to the ON

position, this indicates that the EPB

may have malfunctioned.

If this occurs, have the system

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

The EPB malfunction indicator may

illuminate when the ESC indicator

comes on to indicate that the ESC is

not working properly, but it does not

indicate a malfunction of the EPB.

• If the EPB warning light is still

on, have the system checked by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• If the parking brake warning

light does not illuminate or

blinks even though the EPB

switch was pulled up, the EPB

may not be applied.

• If the parking brake warning

light blinks when the EPB warn-

ing light is on, press the switch,

and then pull it up. Repeat this

one more time. If the EPB warn-

ing does not go off, have the

system checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

OIK057077N

OTLE058017

5-29

Driving your vehicle

Parking brake warning light

Check the Parking

Brake Warning Light

by placing the ignition

switch to the ON posi-

tion (do not start the

engine).

This light will be illuminated when the

parking brake is applied with the igni-

tion switch in the START or ON posi-

tion.

Before driving, be sure the parking

brake is released and the Brake

Warning Light is OFF.

If the Parking Brake Warning Light

remains on after the parking brake is

released while engine is running,

there may be a malfunction in the

brake system. Immediate attention is

necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the

vehicle immediately. If that is not pos-

sible, use extreme caution while

operating the vehicle and only con-

tinue to drive the vehicle until you

can reach a safe location.

Emergency braking

If there is a problem with the brake

pedal while driving, emergency brak-

ing is possible by pulling up and

holding the EPB switch. Braking is

possible only while you are holding

the EPB switch. However, braking

distance will be longer than normal.

Information

During emergency braking, the park-

ing brake warning light will illumi-

nate to indicate that the system is

operating.

If you continuously notice a noise

or burning smell when the EPB is

used for emergency braking, have

system checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

When the EPB (Electronic Parking

Brake) does not release

If the EPB does not release normal-

ly, we recommend that you contact

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer by

loading the vehicle on a flatbed tow

truck and have the system checked.

NOTICE

Do not operate the parking

brake while the vehicle is mov-

ing except in an emergency sit-

uation. It could damage the

brake system and lead to a

severe accident.

WARNING

5-30

Driving your vehicle

Auto Hold (if equipped)

The Auto Hold maintains the vehicle

in a standstill even though the brake

pedal is not depressed after the driv-

er brings the vehicle to a complete

stop by depressing the brake pedal.

To apply :

1. With the driver's door and engine

hood closed, depress the brake

pedal and then press the [AUTO

HOLD] switch. The white AUTO

HOLD indicator will come on and

the system will be in the standby

position.

2. When you stop the vehicle com-

pletely by depressing the brake

pedal, the Auto Hold maintains the

brake pressure to hold the vehicle

stationary. The indicator changes

from white to green.

3. The vehicle will remain stationary

even if you release the brake

pedal.

4. If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be

released.

To release :

• If you press the accelerator pedal

with the shift lever in D (Drive) or

Manual shift mode, the Auto Hold

will be released automatically and

the vehicle will start to move. The

AUTO HOLD indicator changes

from green to white.

• If the vehicle is restarted using the

cruise control toggle switch (RES+

or SET-) while Auto Hold and

cruise control is operating, the

Auto Hold will be released regard-

less of accelerator pedal operation.

The AUTO HOLD indicator

changes from green to white.

OTL055018

OTL055019

When the AUTO HOLD is auto-

matically released by depress-

ing the accelerator pedal, always

take a look around your vehicle.

Slowly depress the accelerator

pedal for a smooth start.

WARNING

5-31

Driving your vehicle

To cancel :

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Press the [AUTO HOLD] switch.

The AUTO HOLD indicator will turn

off.

Information

• The Auto Hold does not operate

when:

- The driver's door is opened

- The engine hood is opened

- The shift lever is in P (Park) or R

(Reverse)

- The EPB is applied

• For your safety, the Auto Hold auto-

matically switches to EPB when:

- The driver's door is opened with

the shift lever in D (Drive) or N

(Neutral)

- The engine hood is opened with the

shift lever in D (Drive) or N

(Neutral)

- The vehicle stops for more than 10

minutes

- The vehicle stands on a steep slope

- The vehicle moves several times

In these cases, the parking brake

warning light comes on, the AUTO

HOLD indicator changes from

green to white, and a warning sound

and a message will appear to inform

you that EPB has been automatical-

ly engaged. Before driving off again,

press foot brake pedal, check the

surrounding area near your vehicle

and release parking brake manually

with the EPB switch.

• While operating Auto Hold, you

may hear mechanical noise.

However, it is normal operating

noise.

If the AUTO HOLD indicator

changes to yellow, the Auto Hold

is not working properly. Contact

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

OTL055020

To prevent, unexpected and

sudden vehicle movement,

ALWAYS press your foot on the

brake pedal to cancel the Auto

Hold before you:

- Drive downhill.

- Drive the vehicle in R (Reverse).

- Park the vehicle.

WARNING

5-32

Driving your vehicle

If there is a malfunction with the

driver's door or engine hood open

detection system, the Auto Hold

may not work properly.

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Warning messages

Parking brake automatically

engaged

When the EPB is applied from Auto

Hold, a warning will sound and a

message will appear.

AUTO HOLD turning Off!

Press brake pedal

When the conversion from Auto Hold

to EPB is not working properly a

warning will sound and a message

will appear.

When this message is displayed, the

Auto Hold and EPB may not operate.

For your safety, depress the brake

pedal.

NOTICE

• Depress the accelerator pedal

slowly when you start the

vehicle.

• For your safety, cancel the

Auto Hold when you drive

downhill, back up the vehicle

or park the vehicle.

WARNING

OIK057077N/OIK057075N

OIK057079N

■ Type A ■ Type B

5-33

Driving your vehicle

Press brake pedal to deactivate

AUTO HOLD

If you did not apply the brake pedal

when you release the Auto Hold by

pressing the [AUTO HOLD] switch, a

warning will sound and a message

will appear.

AUTO HOLD conditions not met.

Close door hood, and liftgate; fas-

ten seatbelt

When you press the [AUTO HOLD]

switch, if the driver's door and engine

hood, liftgate are not closed or the

driver's seat belt is unfastened, a

warning will sound and a message

will appear on the LCD display. At

this moment, press the [AUTO

HOLD] button after closing the dri-

ver's door and engine hood, liftgate

and fastening the seat belt.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

OIK057080L

OTL058235N

An Anti-Lock Braking System

(ABS) or an Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system will not

prevent accidents due to

improper or dangerous driving

maneuvers. Even though vehi-

cle control is improved during

emergency braking, always

maintain a safe distance

between you and objects ahead

of you. Vehicle speeds should

always be reduced during

extreme road conditions. The

braking distance for cars

equipped with ABS or ESC may

be longer than for those without

these systems in the following

road conditions.

WARNING

5-34

Driving your vehicle

ABS is an electronic braking system

that helps prevent a braking skid.

ABS allows the driver to steer and

brake at the same time.

Using ABS

To obtain the maximum benefit from

your ABS in an emergency situation,

do not attempt to modulate your

brake pressure and do not try to

pump your brakes. Depress your

brake pedal as hard as possible.

When you apply your brakes under

conditions which may lock the

wheels, you may hear sounds from

the brakes, or feel a corresponding

sensation in the brake pedal. This is

normal and it means your ABS is

active.

ABS does not reduce the time or dis-

tance it takes to stop the vehicle.

Always maintain a safe distance from

the vehicle in front of you.

ABS will not prevent a skid that

results from sudden changes in

direction, such as trying to take a

corner too fast or making a sudden

lane change. Always drive at a safe

speed for the road and weather con-

ditions.

ABS cannot prevent a loss of stabili-

ty. Always steer moderately when

braking hard. Severe or sharp steer-

ing wheel movement can still cause

your vehicle to veer into oncoming

traffic or off the road.

On loose or uneven road surfaces,

operation of the anti-lock brake sys-

tem may result in a longer stopping

distance than for vehicles equipped

with a conventional brake system.

The ABS warning light ( ) will stay

on for several seconds after the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

During that time, the ABS will go

through self-diagnosis and the light

will go off if everything is normal. If

the light stays on, you may have a

problem with your ABS. Contact an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon

as possible

• Drive your vehicle at reduced

speeds during the following

conditions:

• Rough, gravel or snow-cov-

ered roads.

• On roads where the road sur-

face is pitted or has different

surface height.

• Tire chains are installed on

your vehicle.

The safety features of an ABS

or ESC equipped vehicle should

not be tested by high speed

driving or cornering. This could

endanger the safety of yourself

or others.

5-35

Driving your vehicle

When you drive on a road having

poor traction, such as an icy road,

and apply your brakes continu-

ously, the ABS will be active con-

tinuously and the ABS warning

light ( ) may illuminate. Pull

your car over to a safe place and

turn the engine off.

Restart the engine. If the ABS

warning light is off, then your ABS

system is normal.

Otherwise, you may have a prob-

lem with your ABS system.

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

Information

When you jump start your vehicle

because of a drained battery, the ABS

warning light ( ) may turn on at the

same time. This happens because of

the low battery voltage. It does not

mean your ABS is malfunctioning.

Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

Electronic Stability Control

(ESC)

The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) system helps to stabilize the

vehicle during cornering maneuvers.

ESC checks where you are steering

and where the vehicle is actually

going. ESC applies braking pressure

to any one of the vehicle’s brakes

and intervenes in the engine man-

agement system to assist the driver

with keeping the vehicle on the

intended path. It is not a substitute

for safe driving practices. Always

adjust your speed and driving to the

road conditions.

NOTICE

If the ABS warning light ( ) is

on and stays on, you may have

a problem with the ABS. Your

power brakes will work normal-

ly. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death, contact your

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as

possible.

WARNING

OTLE058021

5-36

Driving your vehicle

ESC operation

ESC ON condition

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the ESC and the ESC OFF

indicator lights illuminate for approxi-

mately three seconds. After both

lights go off, the ESC is enabled.

When operating

When the ESC is in opera-

tion, the ESC indicator light

blinks:

• When you apply your brakes under

conditions which may lock the

wheels, you may hear sounds from

the brakes, or feel a corresponding

sensation in the brake pedal. This

is normal and it means your ESC is

active.

• When the ESC activates, the

engine may not respond to the

accelerator as it does under rou-

tine conditions.

• If the Cruise Control was in use

when the ESC activates, the

Cruise Control automatically disen-

gages. The Cruise Control can be

reengaged when the road condi-

tions allow. See "Cruise Control

System" later in this chapter. (if

equipped)

• When moving out of the mud or

driving on a slippery road, the

engine RPM (revolutions per

minute) may not increase even if

you press the accelerator pedal

deeply. This is to maintain the sta-

bility and traction of the vehicle and

does not indicate a problem.

Never drive too fast for the road

conditions or too quickly when

cornering. The ESC system will

not prevent accidents.

Excessive speed in turns, abrupt

maneuvers, and hydroplaning

on wet surfaces can result in

severe accidents.

WARNING

5-37

Driving your vehicle

ESC OFF condition

To cancel ESC operation :

• State 1

Press the ESC OFF button briefly.

The ESC OFF indicator light and

message will illuminate. In this state,

the traction control function of ESC

(engine management) is disabled,

but the brake control function of ESC

(braking management) still operates.

• State 2

Press the ESC OFF button continu-

ously for more than 3 seconds. The

ESC OFF indicator light and mes-

sage illuminates and a warning

chime sounds. In this state, both the

traction control function of ESC

(engine management) and the brake

control function of ESC (braking

management) are disabled.

If the ignition switch is placed to the

LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off,

ESC remains off. Upon restarting the

engine, the ESC will automatically turn

on again.

Indicator lights

When the ignition switch is placed to

the ON position, the ESC indicator

light illuminates, then goes off if the

ESC system is operating normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks when-

ever the ESC is operating.

If ESC indicator light stays on, your

vehicle may have a malfunction with

the ESC system. When this warning

light illuminates have your vehicle

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

The ESC OFF indicator light comes

on when the ESC is turned off.

OIK057082L OIK057084L

■ ESC indicator light (blinks)

■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)

5-38

Driving your vehicle

Driving with wheels and tires with

different sizes may cause the ESC

system to malfunction. Before

replacing tires, make sure all four

tires and wheels are the same

size. Never drive the vehicle with

different sized tires and wheels

installed.

ESC OFF usage

When Driving

The ESC OFF mode should only be

used briefly to help free the vehicle if

stuck in snow or mud by temporarily

stopping operation of the ESC to

maintain wheel torque.

To turn ESC off while driving, press

the ESC OFF button while driving on

a flat road surface.

To prevent damage to the trans-

mission:

• Do not allow wheel(s) of one

axle to spin excessively while

the ESC, ABS, and parking brake

warning lights are displayed.

The repairs would not be cov-

ered by the vehicle warranty.

Reduce engine power and do

not spin the wheel(s) excessive-

ly while these lights are dis-

played.

• When operating the vehicle on a

dynamometer, make sure the

ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light

illuminated).

Information

Turning the ESC off does not affect

ABS or standard brake system opera-

tion.

NOTICE

When the ESC is blinking, this

indicates the ESC is active:

Drive slowly and NEVER attempt

to accelerate. NEVER turn the

ESC off while the ESC indicator

light is blinking or you may lose

control of the vehicle resulting in

an accident.

WARNING

5-39

Driving your vehicle

Vehicle Stability Management

(VSM)

The Vehicle Stability Management

(VSM) is a function of the Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system. It

helps ensure the vehicle stays stable

when accelerating or braking sud-

denly on wet, slippery and rough

roads where traction over the four

tires can suddenly become uneven.

VSM operation

VSM ON condition

The VSM operates when:

• The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) is on.

• Vehicle speed is approximately

above 9 mph (15 km/h) on curve

roads.

• Vehicle speed is approximately

above 12 mph (20 km/h) when the

vehicle is braking on rough roads.

When operating

When you apply your brakes under

conditions which may activate the

ESC, you may hear sounds from the

brakes, or feel a corresponding sen-

sation in the brake pedal. This is nor-

mal and it means your VSM is active.

Information

The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on bank road such as gradi-

ent or incline.

• Driving rearward.

• ESC OFF indicator light is on.

• EPS (Electric Power Steering)

warning light ( ) is on.

Take the following precautions

when using the Vehicle Stability

Management (VSM):

• ALWAYS check the speed and

the distance to the vehicle

ahead. The VSM is not a sub-

stitute for safe driving prac-

tices.

• Never drive too fast for the

road conditions.The VSM sys-

tem will not prevent acci-

dents. Excessive speed in bad

weather, slippery and uneven

roads can result in severe

accidents.

WARNING

5-40

Driving your vehicle

VSM OFF condition

To cancel VSM operation, press the

ESC OFF button. ESC OFF indicator

light ( ) will illuminate.

To turn on VSM, press the ESC OFF

button again. The ESC OFF indicator

light will go out.

Driving with wheels and tires with dif-

ferent sizes may cause the ESC sys-

tem to malfunction. Before replacing

tires, make sure all four tires and

wheels are the same size. Never

drive the vehicle with different sized

tires and wheels installed.

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)

The Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)

helps prevent the vehicle from rolling

backwards when starting a vehicle

from a stop on a hill. The system

operates the brakes automatically for

approximately 2 seconds and releas-

es the brake after 2 seconds or when

the accelerator pedal is depressed.

• The HAC does not operate when

the shift lever is in P (Park) or N

(Neutral)

• The HAC activates even though

the ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) is off but does not acti-

vate when the ESC has malfunc-

tioned.

Downhill Brake Control (DBC)

The Downhill Brake Control (DBC)

feature assists the driver to descend

down a steep hill without having to

depress the brake pedal.

NOTICE

If ESC indicator light ( ) or EPS

warning light ( ) stays on, your

vehicle may have a malfunction

with the VSM system. When the

warning light illuminates, have

your vehicle checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

WARNING

Always be ready to depress the

accelerator pedal when starting

off on a incline.The HAC activates

only for approximately 2 seconds.

WARNING

OTL055022

■ Type A

OTLA055119

■ Type B

5-41

Driving your vehicle

The system automatically applies the

brakes to maintain the vehicle speed

below 5 mph (8 km/h) and allows the

driver to concentrate on steering the

vehicle down hill.

• The DBC defaults to the OFF

position whenever the ignition

switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion.

• Noise or vibration may occur

from the brakes when the DBC is

activated.

• The rear stop light comes on

when DBC is activated.

NOTICE

Always turn off the DBC on nor-

mal roads. The DBC might acti-

vate inadvertently from the stand-

by mode when driving through

speed bumps or making sharp

curves.

WARNING

Standby

Press the DBC button when vehicle speed is under

25 mph (40 km/h). The DBC system will turn ON and

enter the standby mode.

The system does not turn ON if vehicle speed is over

25 mph (40 km/h).

In the standby mode, if vehicle speed is under 22 mph

(35 km/h) while driving down a steep hill, the DBC will

activate automatically.

In the activated mode, the DBC will temporarily deacti-

vate under the following conditions:

• The hill is not steep enough.

•

The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed.

If the above conditions are not met, the DBC will auto-

matically activate again.

The DBC will turn OFF under the following conditions:

• The DBC button is pressed again.

• Vehicle speed is over 38 mph (60 km/h).

Activated

Temporarily

deactivated

OFF

Mode Indicator light Description

blinks

illuminated

not

illuminated

DBC operation

5-42

Driving your vehicle

• The DBC may not deactivate on

steep inclines even though the

brake or accelerator pedal is

depressed.

• The DBC does not operate

when:

- The shift lever is in P (Park).

- The ESC is activated.

Good Braking Practices

Wet brakes can be dangerous! The

brakes may get wet if the vehicle is

driven through standing water or if it

is washed. Your vehicle will not stop

as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet

brakes may cause the vehicle to pull

to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes

lightly until the braking action returns

to normal, taking care to keep the

vehicle under control at all times. If

the braking action does not return to

normal, stop as soon as it is safe to

do so and call an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

DO NOT drive with your foot resting

on the brake pedal. Even light, but

constant pedal pressure can result in

the brakes overheating, brake wear,

and possibly even brake failure.

If a tire goes flat while you are driv-

ing, apply the brakes gently and

keep the vehicle pointed straight

ahead while you slow down. When

you are moving slowly enough for it

to be safe to do so, pull off the road

and stop in a safe location.

Keep your foot firmly on the brake

pedal when the vehicle is stopped to

prevent the vehicle from rolling for-

ward.

NOTICE

If the DBC red indicator light

illuminates, the system may

have overheated or have mal-

functioned. When the warning

light illuminates even though

the DBC system has cooled off,

have your vehicle checked by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

as soon as possible.

WARNING

Whenever leaving the vehicle or

parking, always come to a com-

plete stop and continue to

depress the brake pedal. Move

the shift lever into the P (Park)

position, then apply the parking

brake, and place the ignition

switch in the OFF position.

Vehicles parked with the park-

ing brake not applied or not

fully engaged may roll inadver-

tently and may cause injury to

the driver and others. ALWAYS

apply the parking brake before

exiting the vehicle.

WARNING

5-43

Driving your vehicle

The All Wheel Drive (AWD) system

delivers engine torque to both the

front and rear wheels for extra trac-

tion.

AWD is useful when maximum trac-

tion is required on slippery, muddy,

wet, or snow-covered roads.

Occasional off-road use such as

established unpaved roads and trails

are OK. It is always important that

the driver carefully reduces the

speed to a level that does not exceed

the safe operating speed for those

conditions.

AALLLL WWHHEEEELL DDRRIIVVEE ((AAWWDD)) ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH:

• Do not drive in conditions that

exceed the vehicles intended

design such as challenging

off-road conditions.

• Avoid high speeds when cor-

nering or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as

sharp lane changes or fast,

sharp turns.

• The risk of a rollover is great-

ly increased if you lose con-

trol of your vehicle at highway

speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off

the roadway and the driver

over steers to reenter the

roadway.

WARNING

OTLE058178

5-44

Driving your vehicle

• Do not drive in water if the level

is higher than the bottom of the

vehicle.

• Check your brake condition

once you are out of mud or

water. Depress the brake pedal

several times as you move slow-

ly until you feel normal braking

return.

• Shorten your scheduled mainte-

nance interval if you drive in off-

road conditions such as sand,

mud or water (see "Maintenance

Under Severe Usage

Conditions" in chapter 7).

• Always wash your vehicle thor-

oughly after off road use, espe-

cially the bottom of the vehicle.

• Be sure to equip the vehicle with

four tires of the same size and

type.

• Make sure that a full time AWD

vehicle is towed by a flat bed

tow truck.

NOTICE

• In the event your vehicle

leaves the roadway, do not

steer sharply. Instead, slow

down before pulling back into

the travel lanes.

5-45

Driving your vehicle

AWD operation

If AWD warning light ( ) stays on the instrument cluster, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the

AWD system. When the AWD warning light ( ) illuminates have your vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

• The main goal of AWD Lock mode is to allow a driver to max-

imize the vehicle’s traction under extreme driving conditions

such as unpaved off-road, sandy roads, and muddy roads.

• AWD Lock mode is in operation only when a vehicle travels

at 60 km/h or less. When traveling at 60 km/h or faster, the

mode will switch to AWD Auto.

• When AWD Lock mode illuminates, the cluster does not dis-

play the front/rear wheel traction force distribution status.

• Press the AWD Lock mode switch again to switch back to

AWD Auto.

AWD AUTO

(AWD LOCK is

deactivated)

(not illuminated)

Transfer mode Selection button Indicator light Description

• AWD Auto is used when driving on roads in normal condi-

tions, roads in urban areas, and on highways.

• All wheels are in operation when a vehicle travels at a con-

stant speed. Required tractions applying on front and rear

wheels vary depending on road driving conditions and driv-

ing conditions, which will be automatically controlled by the

computing system.

• When the cluster's AWD Auto display mode is selected, the

cluster displays the status of how four wheels’ traction forces

are distributed.

AWD LOCK

(illuminated)

All Wheel Drive (AWD) mode selection

5-46

Driving your vehicle

• Maintain AWD Auto mode when

driving on roads in normal con-

ditions.

• When driving under normal road

conditions (especially when cor-

nering) in AWD Lock mode, a

driver may find minor mechani-

cal vibration or noise, which is

extremely normal phenomenon,

not a malfunction. When AWD

Lock mode is released, such

noise or vibration will be imme-

diately gone.

When driving on normal roads,

deactivate the AWD LOCK mode

by pushing the AWD LOCK button

(AWD LOCK indicator light goes

off). Driving on normal roads with

the AWD LOCK mode, especially,

when cornering may cause

mechanical noise or vibration.The

noise and vibration will disappear

when the AWD LOCK mode is

deactivated. Prolong driving with

the noise and vibration may dam-

age some parts of the power train.

Information

When the AWD LOCK mode is deac-

tivated, a sensation may be felt as the

driving power is delivered entirely to

the front wheels.

For safe AWD operation

Before driving

• Make sure all passengers are

wearing seat belts.

• Sit upright and closer to the steer-

ing wheel than usual. Adjust the

steering wheel to a position com-

fortable for you to drive.

Driving on snow-covered or icy

roads

• Start off slowly by applying the

accelerator pedal gently.

• Use snow tires or tire chains.

• Keep sufficient distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle in front

of you.

• Apply engine braking during decel-

eration by switching the gear shift

lever to Manual Shift Mode and

manually selecting a lower gear.

• Avoid speeding, rapid acceleration,

sudden brake applications, and

sharp turns to prevent skids.

NOTICENOTICE

5-47

Driving your vehicle

Driving in sand or mud

• Maintain slow and constant speed.

• Use tire chains driving in mud if

necessary.

• Keep sufficient distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle in front

of you.

• Reduce vehicle speed and always

check the road condition.

• Avoid speeding, rapid acceleration,

sudden brake applications, and

sharp turns to prevent getting

stuck.

Driving up or down hills

• Driving uphill

- Before starting off, check if it is

possible to drive uphill.

- Drive as straight as possible.

• Driving downhill

- Do not change gear while driving

downhill. Select gear before driv-

ing downhill.

- Drive slowly using engine braking

while driving downhill.

- Drive straight as possible.

OLMB053017

Exercise extreme caution when

driving up or down steep hills.

The vehicle may flip over

depending on the grade, the ter-

rain, and the trail conditions.

WARNING

When the vehicle is stuck in

snow, sand or mud, place a non-

slip material under the drive

wheels to provide traction OR

Slowly spin the wheels in for-

ward and reverse directions

which causes a rocking motion

that may free the vehicle.

However, avoid running the

engine continuously at high

rpm, doing so may damage the

AWD system.

CAUTION

5-48

Driving your vehicle

Driving through water

• Try to avoid driving in deep stand-

ing water. It may stall your engine

and clog your exhaust system.

• If you need to drive in water, stop

your vehicle, set the vehicle in

AWD LOCK mode and drive under

5 mph (8 km/h).

• Do not change gear while driving in

water.

Additional driving conditions

• Become familiar with the off-road

conditions before driving.

• Always pay attention when driving

off-road and avoid dangerous

areas.

• Drive slowly when driving in heavy

wind.

• Reduce vehicle speed when cor-

nering. The center of gravity of

AWD vehicles is higher than con-

ventional 2WD vehicles, making

them more likely to roll over when

you rapidly turn corners.

Always drive slowly in water. If

you drive too fast, water may

get into the engine compart-

ment and wet the ignition sys-

tem causing your vehicle to

suddenly stop.

CAUTION

Do not drive across the contour

of steep hills. A slight change in

the wheel angle can destabilize

the vehicle, or a stable vehicle

may lose stability if the vehicle

stops its forward motion. Your

vehicle may roll over and lead to

a serious injury or death.

WARNING

OLMB053018

5-49

Driving your vehicle

• Always hold the steering wheel

firmly when you are driving off-

road.

Emergency precautions

Tires

Do not use a tire and wheel package

with a different size and type from

the one originally installed on your

vehicle. It can affect the safety and

performance of your vehicle, which

could lead to steering failure or

rollover causing serious injury.

When replacing the tires, be sure to

equip all four tires with the tire and

wheel of the same size, type, tread,

brand and load-carrying capacity. If

you equip your vehicle with any

tire/wheel combination not recom-

mended by HYUNDAI for off-road

driving, you should not use these

tires for highway driving.

Towing

AWD vehicles must be towed with a

wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equip-

ment with all the wheels off the

ground.

For more details, refer to "Towing"

in chapter 6.

Dynamometer testing

A full-time AWD vehicle must be test-

ed on a special four wheel chassis

dynamometer.

OTLE055003

Do not grab the inside of the

steering wheel when you are

driving off-road. You may hurt

your arm by a sudden steering

maneuver or from steering wheel

rebound due to an impact with

objects on the ground.You could

lose control of the steering wheel

which may lead to serious injury

or death.

WARNING

Never start or run the engine

while a full-time AWD vehicle is

raised on a jack.The vehicle can

slip or roll off of a jack causing

serious injury or death to you or

those nearby.

WARNING

5-50

Driving your vehicle

A full-time AWD vehicle should not

be tested on a 2WD roll tester. If a

2WD roll tester must be used, per-

form the following procedure:

1. Check the tire pressures recom-

mended for your vehicle.

2. Place the front wheels on the roll

tester for a speedometer test as

shown in the illustration.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Place the rear wheels on the tem-

porary free roller as shown in the

illustration.

OTLE058117

Roll Tester (Speedometer)

Temporary Free Roller

• Never engage the parking

brake while performing the

test.

• When the vehicle is lifted up,

do not operate the front and

rear wheel separately. All four

wheels should be operated.

CAUTION

Keep away from the front of the

vehicle while the vehicle is in

gear on the dynamometer. The

vehicle can jump forward and

cause serious injury or death.

WARNING

5-51

Driving your vehicle

The drive mode may be selected

according to the driver's preference

or road condition.

The system resets to be in the COM-

FORT mode, when the engine is

restarted.

Information

If there is a problem with the instru-

ment cluster, the drive mode will be in

COMFORT mode and may not

change to SPORT mode.

The mode changes, as below,

whenever the DRIVE MODE button

is pressed.

When COMFORT mode is selected,

it is not displayed on the instrument

cluster.

SPORT mode

SPORT mode manages

the driving dynamics by

automatically adjusting the

steering effort, and the

engine and transmission control

logic for enhanced driver perform-

ance.

• When SPORT mode is selected by

pressing the DRIVE MODE button,

the SPORT indicator (yellow color)

will illuminate.

• Whenever the engine is restarted,

the Drive Mode will revert back to

COMFORT mode. If SPORT mode

is desired, re-select SPORT mode

from the DRIVE MODE button.

• When SPORT mode is activated:

- The engine rpm will tend to

remain raised over a certain

length of time even after releas-

ing the accelerator

- Upshifts are delayed when accel-

erating

Information

In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency

may decrease.

DDRRIIVVEE MMOODDEE IINNTTEEGGRRAATTEEDD CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

OTLA055147

SPORT COMFORT

5-52

Driving your vehicle

[A] : Blind spot area

[B] : Closing at high speed

The Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system uses radar sensors in

the rear bumper to monitor and warn

the driver of an approaching vehicle

in the driver's blind spot area.

The system monitors the rear area of

the vehicle and provides information

to the driver with an audible alert and

an indicator on the outer side view

mirrors.

(1) Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW)

The Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) range varies relative to

vehicle speed. Note that if your

vehicle is traveling much faster

than the vehicles around you, the

warning will not occur.

(2) BCW : Closing at high speed

The BCW-Closing at high speed

feature will alert you when a vehi-

cle is approaching in an adjacent

lane at a high rate of speed. If the

driver activates the turn signal

when the system detects an

oncoming vehicle, the system

sounds an audible alert.

The time of alert (warning signal)

varies according to the speed dif-

ference between you and the

approaching vehicle.

(3) RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic

Collision Warning)

The RCCW feature monitors

approaching cross traffic from the

left and right side of the vehicle

when your vehicle is in reverse.

The feature will operate when the

vehicle is moving in reverse

below about 6 mph (10 km/h). If

oncoming cross traffic is detected

a warning chime will sound. The

time of alert varies according to

the speed difference between you

and the approaching vehicle.

BBLLIINNDD--SSPPOOTT CCOOLLLLIISSIIOONN WWAARRNNIINNGG ((BBCCWW)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

OOS057099L

• Always be aware of road con-

ditions while driving and be

alert for unexpected situations

even though the Blind-Spot

Collision Warning (BCW) sys-

tem is operating.

• The Blind-Spot Collision

Warning (BCW) system is not

a substitute for proper and

safe driving. Always drive

safely and use caution when

changing lanes or backing up

the vehicle. The Blind-Spot

Collision Warning (BCW) sys-

tem may not detect every

object alongside the vehicle.

WARNING

5-53

Driving your vehicle

BCW (Blind-Spot Collision

Warning)

Operating conditions

To operate:

Press the BCW switch with the igni-

tion switch in the ON position.

The indicator on the BCW switch will

illuminate.

To cancel:

Press the BCW switch again. The

indicator on the switch will go off.

When the system is not used, turn

the system off by turning off the

switch.

Information

• If the ignition switch is turned OFF

and then ON again, the BCW sys-

tem returns to the previous state.

• When the system is turned on, the

warning light will illuminate for 3

seconds on the outer side view mir-

ror.

The function will activate when:

1. The system is on.

2. The vehicle speed is above

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

3. An oncoming vehicle is detected

in the blind spot area.

First stage alert

If a vehicle is detected within the

boundary of the system, a warning

light will illuminate on the outer side

view mirror.

Once the detected vehicle is no

longer within the blind spot area, the

warning will turn off depending on

the driving conditions of the vehicle.

OTLE058237

OTL055039

■ Left side

■ Right side

5-54

Driving your vehicle

• The second stage alarm may be

deactivated.

- To deactivate the warning chime:

Go to the ''User Settings → Driver

Assistance and deselect Blind-

Spot Collision Warning sound'' on

the LCD display.

- To activate the warning chime:

Go to the ''User Settings → Driver

Assistance and select Blind-Spot

Collision Warning sound'' on the

LCD display.

Information

The warning chime function helps

alert the driver. Deactivate this func-

tion only when it is necessary.

OTL055029

■ Left side

OTL055030

■ Right side

Second stage alert

A warning chime to alert the driver will activate when:

1. A vehicle has been detected in the blind spot area by the radar system

(the warning light will illuminate on the outer side view mirror) AND

2. The turn signal is applied (same side as where the vehicle is being

detected).

When this alert is activated, the warning light on the side view mirror will

also blink.

If you turn off the turn signal indicator, the warning chime will be deactivat-

ed.

5-55

Driving your vehicle

RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic

Collision Warning)

The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision

Warning function monitors approach-

ing cross traffic from the left and right

side of the vehicle when your vehicle

is in reverse.

Operating conditions

To operate:

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver

Assistance and select Rear Cross-

Traffic Collision Warning' on the LCD

display. (For more details, refer to

"LCD Display" in chapter 3.)

The system will turn on and standby

to activate. The system will activate

when vehicle speed is below 6 mph

(10 km/h) and with the shift lever in R

(Reverse).

Information

The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision

Warning (RCCW) detecting range is

approximately 1 - 65 ft (0.5 – 20 m).

An approaching vehicle will be detect-

ed if their vehicle speed is within 2.5 -

22.5 mph (4 - 36 km/h).

Note that the detecting range may

vary under certain conditions. As

always, use caution and pay close

attention to your surroundings when

backing up your vehicle.

Warning type

If the vehicle detected by the sensors

approaches your vehicle, the warn-

ing chime will sound, the warning

light on the outer side view mirror will

blink and a message will appear on

the LCD display.

■ Left ■ Right

OTLE058186/OTLE058187

5-56

Driving your vehicle

Information

• The warning chime will turn off

when:

- The detected vehicle moves out of

the sensing area or

- when the vehicle is right behind

your vehicle or

- when the vehicle is not approach-

ing your vehicle or

- when the other vehicle slows down.

• The system may not operate proper-

ly due to other factors or circum-

stances. Always pay attention to

your surroundings.

• If the sensing area near the rear

bumper is blocked by either a wall

or barrier or by a parked vehicle,

the system sensing area may be

reduced.

• The system may not work prop-

erly when the bumper has been

damaged, or if the rear bumper

has been replaced or repaired.

• The sensing range differs some-

what according to the width of

the road. When the road is nar-

row, the system may detect

other vehicles in the next lane

OR when the road is wide, the

system may not detect other

vehicles in the next lane.

• The system may turn off due to

strong electromagnetic waves.

NOTICE

• The warning light on the outer

side view mirror will illumi-

nate whenever a vehicle is

detected at the rear side by

the system.

To avoid accidents, do not

focus only on the warning

light and neglect to see the

surrounding of the vehicle.

• Drive safely even though the

vehicle is equipped with a

Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system and Rear

Cross-Traffic Collision

Warning (RCCW). Do not sole-

ly rely on the system but

check your surrounding

before changing lanes or

backing the vehicle up.

The system may not alert the

driver in some conditions so

always check your surround-

ings while driving.

• The Blind-Spot Collision

Warning (BCW) system and

Rear Cross-Traffic Collision

Warning (RCCW) are not a

substitute for proper and safe

driving practices. Always

drive safely and use caution

when changing lanes or back-

ing up your vehicle. The Blind-

Spot Collision Warning (BCW)

system may not detect every

object alongside the vehicle.

WARNING

5-57

Driving your vehicle

Blind-Spot Collision Warning -

Sensor Location

The sensors are located inside the

rear bumper.

Always keep the rear bumper clean

for the proper operation of the sys-

tem.

Warning message

Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system disabled.

Radar blocked

• This warning message may appear

when :

- One or both of the sensors on the

rear bumper is blocked by dirt or

snow or a foreign object.

- Driving in rural areas where the

BCW sensor does not detect

another vehicle for an extended

period of time.

- When there is inclement weather

such as heavy snow or rain.

- A trailer or carrier is installed. To

use the BCW system, remove the

trailer or carrier from your vehicle.

If any of these conditions occur, the

light on the BCW switch and the sys-

tem will turn off automatically.

When the BCW cancelled warning

message is displayed in the cluster,

check to make sure that the rear

bumper is free from any dirt or snow

in the areas where the sensor is

located. Remove any dirt, snow, or

foreign material that could interfere

with the radar sensors.

After any dirt or debris is removed,

the BCW system should operate nor-

mally after about 10 minutes of driv-

ing the vehicle.

If the system still does not operate

normally have your vehicle inspected

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Information

Turn off the system by pressing the

BCW switch and deselecting Rear

Cross Traffic Alert from the User

Settings mode on the cluster, when

using a trailer or carrier behind your

vehicle.

OTLE058031

OIK057092L

5-58

Driving your vehicle

Check Blind-Spot Collision

Warning (BCW) system

If there is a problem with the BCW

system, a warning message will

appear and the light on the switch

will turn off. The system will turn off

automatically. Have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Non-operating condition

The BCW indicator on the outer

side view mirror may not illumi-

nate properly when:

- The outer side view mirror housing

is damaged.

- The mirror is covered with dirt,

snow, or debris.

- The window is covered with dirt,

snow, or debris.

- The window is tinted.

Limitations of the System

The driver must be cautious in the

below situations, because the sys-

tem may not detect other vehicles or

objects in certain circumstances.

• When a trailer or carrier is

installed.

• The vehicle driven in inclement

weather such as heavy rain or

snow.

• The sensor is polluted with rain,

snow, mud, etc.

• The rear bumper where the sensor

is located is covered with a foreign

object such as a bumper sticker, a

bumper guard, a bike rack, etc.

• The rear bumper is damaged, or

the sensor is out of the original

default position.

• The vehicle height gets lower or

higher due to heavy loading in a

trunk, abnormal tire pressure, etc.

• When the temperature of the rear

bumper is high.

• When the sensors are blocked by

other vehicles, walls or parking-lot

pillars.

OOS057078L

5-59

Driving your vehicle

• The vehicle driven on a curved

road.

• The vehicle driven through a toll-

gate.

• The road pavement (or the periph-

eral ground) abnormally contains

metallic components (i.e. possibly

due to subway construction).

• There is a fixed object near the

vehicle, such as a guardrail.

• While going down or up a steep

road where the height of the lane is

different.

• Driving on a narrow road where

trees or grass or overgrown.

• Driving in rural areas where the

sensor does not detect another

vehicle or structure for an extended

period of time.

• Driving on a wet road.

• Driving on a road where the

guardrail or wall is in double struc-

ture.

• A big vehicle is near such as a bus

or truck.

• When the other vehicle approach-

es very close.

• When the other vehicle passes at a

very fast speed.

• While changing lanes.

• If the vehicle has started at the

same time as the vehicle next to

you and has accelerated.

• When the vehicle in the next lane

moves two lanes away from you

OR when the vehicle two lanes

away moves to the next lane from

you.

• A motorcycle or bicycle is near.

• A flat trailer is near.

• If there are small objects in the

detecting area such as a shopping

cart or a baby stroller.

• If there is a low height vehicle such

as a sports car.

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

5-60

Driving your vehicle

The Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system is designed to

help detect and monitor the vehicle

ahead in the roadway through cam-

era recognition that a collision is

imminent, and if necessary, apply

emergency braking.

❈ The camera type Forward

Collision-Avoidance Assist system

detects the vehicle ahead in the

roadway through the camera

mounted on the center of the

windshield.

System Setting and Activation

System setting

• The Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system is enabled

whenever the vehicle is turned on.

To turn off the system, go to the

'User Settings → Driver

Assistance' and deselect 'Forward

Collision Avoidance Assist' on the

cluster LCD display.

The FCA deactivates, when the

driver deselects the system set-

ting.

FFOORRWWAARRDD CCOOLLLLIISSIIOONN--AAVVOOIIDDAANNCCEE AASSSSIISSTT ((FFCCAA)) SSYYSSTTEEMM -- CCAAMMEERRAA TTYYPPEE ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

Take the following precautions

when using the Forward

Collision-Avoidance Assist

(FCA) system:

• This system is only a supple-

mental system and it is not

intended to, nor does it

replace the need for extreme

care and attention of the driv-

er. The sensing range and

objects detectable by the sen-

sors are limited. Pay attention

to the road conditions at all

times.

• NEVER drive too fast in accor-

dance with the road condi-

tions or while cornering.

• Always drive cautiously to

prevent unexpected and sud-

den situations from occur-

ring. FCA does not stop the

vehicle completely and is not

a collision avoidance system.

WARNING

5-61

Driving your vehicle

The warning light illumi-

nates on the LCD display,

when you cancel the FCA

system. The driver can

monitor the FCA ON/OFF status on

the LCD display. Also, the warning

light illuminates when the ESC

(Electronic Stability Control) is

turned off (Traction & Stability control

disabled).

If the warning light remains ON when

the FCA is activated, have the sys-

tem checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• The driver can select the initial warn-

ing activation time on the LCD dis-

play.

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver

Assistance → Forward Collision

Warning → Late/Normal/Early'.

The options for the initial Forward

Collision Warning includes the fol-

lowing:

- Late:

When this condition is selected,

the initial Forward Collision

Warning is activated later than nor-

mal. This setting reduces the

amount of distance between the

vehicle ahead before the initial

warning occurs.

Even though, 'Late' is selected if

the front vehicle suddenly stops

the initial warning activation time

may not seem late.

Select 'Late' when traffic is light

and when driving speed is slow.

- Normal:

When this condition is selected, the

initial Forward Collision Warning is

activated normally. This setting

allows for a nominal amount of dis-

tance between the vehicle ahead

before the initial warning occurs.

OOSEV058100N

5-62

Driving your vehicle

- Early:

When this condition is selected, the

initial Forward Collision Warning is

activated earlier than normal. This

setting maximizes the amount of

distance between the vehicle

ahead before the initial warning

occurs.

Even though, 'Early' is selected if

the front vehicle suddenly stops the

initial warning activation time may

not seem fast.

If you feel the warning activates too

early, set the Forward Collision

Warning to "Normal".

Prerequisite for activation

The FCA system is on and ready

when FCA is selected on the LCD

display and when the following pre-

requisites are satisfied:

- The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) on.

- Driving speed exceeds approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h). (The FCA

is only activated within a certain

speed range.)

- The system detects a vehicle in

front, which may collide with your

vehicle. (The FCA may not be acti-

vated or may sound a warning

alarm in accordance with the driv-

ing situation or vehicle condition.)

• Completely stop the vehicle

on a safe location before

operating the switch on the

steering wheel to activate/

deactivate the FCA system.

• The FCA automatically acti-

vates upon placing the igni-

tion switch to the ON position.

The driver can deactivate the

FCA by canceling the system

setting on the LCD display.

• If you cancel the ESC

(Electronic Stability Control)

when the FCA system is

turned on the FCA automati-

cally deactivates and the FCA

warning light illuminates.

When the ESC is canceled the

FCA cannot be activated on

the LCD display. The FCA

warning light will illuminate

which is normal.

WARNING

5-63

Driving your vehicle

FCA Warning Message and

System Control

The FCA produces warning mes-

sages and warning alarms in accor-

dance with the collision risk levels,

such as abrupt stopping of the vehi-

cle in front, or insufficient braking dis-

tance detection. Also, it controls the

brakes in accordance with the colli-

sion risk levels.

The driver can select the initial warn-

ing activation time in the User

Settings in the LCD display. The

options for the initial Forward

Collision Warning include Late,

Normal or Early initial warning time.

Collision Warning

(First warning)

This warning message appears on

the LCD display with a warning

chime. Additionally, some vehicle

system intervention occurs to help

decelerate the vehicle.

- Your vehicle speed may deceler-

ate moderately.

- The FCA system limitedly con-

trols the brakes to preemptively

mitigate impact in a collision.

Emergency braking

(Second warning)

This warning message appears on

the LCD display with a warning

chime.

Additionally, some vehicle system

intervention occurs to help deceler-

ate the vehicle.

- The FCA system limitedly con-

trols the brakes to preemptively

mitigate impact in a collision. The

brake control is maximized just

before a collision.

OTLE058179 OTLE058180

5-64

Driving your vehicle

Brake operation

• The braking system enters into the

ready status to react promptly to

urgent situations.

• The FCA provides additional brak-

ing power for optimum braking per-

formance, when the driver depress-

es the brake pedal.

• The braking control is automatical-

ly deactivated, when the driver

sharply depresses the accelerator

pedal, or when the driver abruptly

operates the steering wheel.

• The FCA brake control is automat-

ically canceled, when risk factors

disappear.

• The driver should always use

extreme caution while operat-

ing the vehicle, whether or not

there is a warning message or

alarm from the FCA system.

• If any other warning sound

such as seat belt warning

chime is already generated,

the Forward Collision-

Avoidance Assist (FCA) sys-

tem warning may not sound.

CAUTION

The braking control cannot

completely stop the vehicle nor

avoid all collisions. The driver

should hold the responsibility

to safely drive and control the

vehicle.

WARNING

The FCA system logic operates

within certain parameters, such

as the distance from the vehicle

ahead, the speed of the vehicle

ahead, and the driver's vehicle

speed. Certain conditions such

as inclement weather and road

conditions may affect the oper-

ation of the FCA system.

WARNING

Never deliberately drive danger-

ously to activate the system.

WARNING

5-65

Driving your vehicle

FCA Sensor

In order for the FCA system to oper-

ate properly, always make sure the

view on the windshield near the cam-

era is clean and free of dirt, snow,

and debris.

Dirt, snow, or foreign substances on

the front camera sensor may

adversely affect the performance of

the system.

The sensing performance of the

sensor may be affected if the fol-

lowing instructions are not fol-

lowed.

• Always keep the camera sensor

clean and free of dirt and debris.

• Use only genuine parts to repair

or replace a damaged camera

sensor.

Be careful not to apply unneces-

sary force on the camera sensor. If

the sensor is forcibly moved out

of proper alignment, the FCA sys-

tem may not operate correctly. In

this case, a warning message may

not be displayed. Have the vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not tint the window or install

stickers, accessories around the

inside mirror where the camera

is installed.

• NEVER locate any reflective

objects (i.e. white paper, mirror)

over the dashboard. Any light

reflection may cause a malfunc-

tion of the system.

• Pay extreme caution to keep the

camera out of water.

• NEVER arbitrarily disassemble

the camera assembly, nor apply

any impact on the camera

assembly.

• The FCA warning chime may be

difficult to hear if the audio sys-

tem volume is set to a high level.

NOTICE

OTLE058182

■ Front camera

5-66

Driving your vehicle

Information

Have the system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer when:

• The windshield glass is replaced.

• The camera or related parts are

repaired or removed.

Warning message and warning

light

Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist

(FCA) system disabled.

Camera obscured

When the front camera is blocked

with dirt, snow, or debris, the FCA

system operation may be temporari-

ly disabled. If this occurs, a warning

message will appear on the LCD dis-

play. Remove any dirt, snow, or

debris and clean the front camera

before operating the FCA system.

However, the FCA may not properly

operate in an area (e.g. open ter-

rain), where any substances are not

detected or the camera is blocked

with dirt, snow or debris after turning

ON the vehicle.

OAD058172L

The FCA system may not acti-

vate according to road condi-

tions, inclement weather, driv-

ing conditions or traffic condi-

tions.

WARNING

5-67

Driving your vehicle

System Not Operating

Check Forward Collision Avoidance

Assist system

• When the FCA is not working prop-

erly, the FCA warning light ( )

will illuminate and the warning

message will appear for a few sec-

onds. After the message disap-

pears, the master warning light

( ) will illuminate. In this case,

have the vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• The FCA warning message may

appear along with the illumination

of the ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) warning light and the FCA

is automatically deactivated.

OIK057091L

• Even if there is any problem

with the brake control function

of the FCA system, the vehi-

cle's basic braking perform-

ance will operate normally.

However, brake control func-

tion for avoiding collision will

not activate.

• If the vehicle in front stops

suddenly, you may have less

control of the brake system.

Therefore, always keep a safe

distance between your vehicle

and the vehicle in front of you.

• The FCA system may activate

during braking and the vehi-

cle may stop suddenly shift-

ing loose objects toward the

passengers. Always keep

loose objects secured.

• The FCA system may not acti-

vate if the driver applies the

brake pedal to avoid a colli-

sion.

• The brake control may be

insufficient, possibly causing

a collision, if a vehicle in front

abruptly stops. Always pay

extreme caution.

• The FCA is only a supplemen-

tal system for the driver's con-

venience. The driver should

hold the responsibility to con-

trol the vehicle operation. Do

not solely depend on the FCA

system. Rather, maintain a

safe braking distance, and, if

necessary, depress the brake

pedal to reduce the driving

speed.

• In certain instances and

under certain driving condi-

tions, the FCA system may

unintentionally activate. This

initial warning message

appears on the LCD display

with a warning chime.

Also, in certain instances the

front camera recognition sys-

tem may not detect the vehi-

cle ahead. The FCA system

may not activate and the

warning message will not be

displayed.

WARNING

5-68

Driving your vehicle

Limitations of the System

The Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system is designed to

help monitor the vehicle ahead in the

roadway through camera recognition

to warn the driver that a collision is

imminent, and if necessary, apply

emergency braking.

In certain situations, the camera may

not be able to detect the vehicle

ahead. In these cases, the FCA sys-

tem may not operate normally. The

driver must pay careful attention in

the following situations where the

FCA operation may be limited.

• Occupants may get injured, if

the vehicle abruptly stops by

the activated FCA system. Pay

extreme caution.

• The FCA system operates

only to help detect vehicles in

front of the vehicle.

• The FCA system does not

operate when the vehicle is in

reverse.

• The FCA system is not

designed to detect other

objects on the road such as

animals.

• The FCA system does not

detect vehicles in the oppo-

site lane.

• The FCA system does not

detect cross traffic vehicles

that are approaching.

• The FCA system cannot

detect the driver approaching

the side view of a parked vehi-

cle (for example on a dead

end street.)

In these cases, you must main-

tain a safe braking distance,

and if necessary, depress the

brake pedal to reduce the driv-

ing speed in order to maintain a

safe distance.

WARNING

5-69

Driving your vehicle

Detecting vehicles

The sensor may be limited when:

• The camera is blocked with a for-

eign object or debris

• The camera lens is contaminated

due to tinted, filmed or coated

windshield, damaged glass, or

stuck of foreign matter (sticker,

bug, etc.) on the glass

• Inclement weather such as heavy

rain or snow obscures the field of

view of the camera

• The vehicle is on unpaved or

uneven rough surfaces, or road

with sudden gradient changes.

• The camera sensor recognition is

limited

• The vehicle in front is too small to

be detected (for example a motor-

cycle or a bicycle, etc.)

• The camera does not recognize

the entire vehicle in front.

• The vehicle in front is an oversize

vehicle or trailer that is too big to

be detected by the camera recog-

nition system (for example a tractor

trailer, etc.)

• The camera's field of view is not

well illuminated (either too dark or

too much reflection or too much

backlight that obscures the field of

view)

• The vehicle in front does not have

their rear lights properly turned ON

• The outside brightness changes

suddenly, for example when enter-

ing or exiting a tunnel

• Light coming from a street light or

an oncoming vehicle is reflected on

a wet road surface such as a pud-

dle in the road

• The field of view in front is

obstructed by sun glare

• The vehicle drives inside a build-

ing, such as a basement parking

lot

• The adverse road conditions cause

excessive vehicle vibrations while

driving

• The camera is damaged.

• The brightness outside is too low

such as when the headlamps are

not on at night or the vehicle is

going through a tunnel.

• The shadow is on the road by a

median strip, trees, etc.

• The vehicle drives through a toll-

gate.

• The windshield glass is fogged up;

a clear view of the road is obstruct-

• The rear part of the vehicle in front

is not normally visible (for example,

the vehicle is spinning or the vehi-

cle is overturned)

• The sensor recognition changes

suddenly when passing over a

speed bump

• The vehicle in front is driving errat-

ically

• The vehicle in front is moving verti-

cally to the driving direction

• The vehicle in front is stopped ver-

tically

• The vehicle in front is driving

towards your vehicle or reversing

• You are on a roundabout and the

vehicle in front circles

5-70

Driving your vehicle

- Driving on a curve

The performance of the FCA system

may be limited when driving on a

curved road.

In certain instances on a curved

road, the FCA system may activate

prematurely.

Also, in certain instances the front

camera recognition system may not

detect the vehicle traveling on a

curved road.

In these cases, the driver must main-

tain a safe braking distance, and if

necessary, depress the brake pedal

to reduce your driving speed in order

to maintain a safe distance.

The FCA system may recognize a

vehicle in the next lane when driving

on a curved road.

In this case, the system may unnec-

essarily alarm the driver and apply

the brake.

Always pay attention to road and

driving conditions, while driving. If

necessary, depress the brake pedal

to reduce your driving speed in order

to maintain a safe distance.

Also, when necessary depress the

accelerator pedal to prevent the sys-

tem from unnecessarily decelerating

your vehicle.

Check the surrounding traffic condi-

tions before use.

- Driving on a slope

The performance of the FCA decreas-

es while driving upward or downward

on a slope, not recognizing the vehi-

cle in front in the same lane. It may

unnecessarily produce the warning

message and the warning alarm, or it

may not produce the warning mes-

sage and the warning alarm at all.

When the FCA suddenly recognizes

the vehicle in front while passing

over a slope, you may experience

sharp deceleration.

Always keep your eyes forward while

driving upward or downward on a

slope, and, if necessary, depress the

brake pedal to reduce your driving

speed in order to maintain distance.

OOSEV058111N OTL058270OOSEV058110N

5-71

Driving your vehicle

- Changing lanes

When a vehicle changes lanes in

front of you, the FCA system may not

immediately detect the vehicle, espe-

cially if the vehicle changes lanes

abruptly. In this case, you must main-

tain a safe braking distance, and if

necessary, depress the brake pedal

to reduce your driving speed in order

to maintain a safe distance.

When driving in stop-and-go traffic,

and a vehicle in front of you merges

out of the lane, the FCA system may

not immediately detect the new vehi-

cle that is now in front of you. In this

case, you must maintain a safe brak-

ing distance, and if necessary,

depress the brake pedal to reduce

your driving speed in order to main-

tain a safe distance.

- Detecting the vehicle in front of you

If the vehicle in front of you has cargo

that extends rearward from the cab,

or when the vehicle in front of you

has higher ground clearance, addi-

tional special attention is required.

The FCA system may not be able to

detect the cargo extending from the

vehicle. In these instances, you must

maintain a safe braking distance

from the rearmost object, and if nec-

essary, depress the brake pedal to

reduce your driving speed in order to

maintain distance.

OTM058119 OTL058271OOSEV058112N

5-72

Driving your vehicle

Information

In some instances, the FCA system

may be cancelled when subjected to

electromagnetic interference.

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

• Do not use the Forward

Collision-Avoidance Assist

(FCA) system when towing a

vehicle. Application of the

FCA system while towing may

adversely affect the safety of

your vehicle or the towing

vehicle.

• Use extreme caution when the

vehicle in front of you has

cargo that extends rearward

from the cab, or when the

vehicle in front of you has

higher ground clearance.

• The FCA system is designed

to help detect and monitor the

vehicle ahead in the roadway

through camera recognition. It

is not designed to detect bicy-

cles, motorcycles, or smaller

wheeled objects such as lug-

gage bags, shopping carts, or

strollers.

• Never try to test the operation

of the FCA system. Doing so

may cause severe injury or

death.

• If the front glass or camera

have been replaced or

repaired, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

5-73

Driving your vehicle

The Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system is designed to

help detect and monitor the vehicle

ahead or detect a pedestrian in the

roadway through radar signals and

camera recognition to warn the driv-

er that a collision is imminent, and if

necessary, apply emergency brak-

ing.

System Setting and Activation

System setting

• The Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system is enabled

whenever the vehicle is turned on.

To turn off the system, go to the

'User Settings → Driver

Assistance' and deselect 'Forward

Collision Avoidance Assist' on the

cluster LCD display.

The FCA deactivates, when the

driver deselects the system set-

ting.

FFOORRWWAARRDD CCOOLLLLIISSIIOONN--AAVVOOIIDDAANNCCEE AASSSSIISSTT ((FFCCAA)) SSYYSSTTEEMM -- SSEENNSSOORR FFUUSSIIOONN TTYYPPEE

((FFRROONNTT RRAADDAARR ++ FFRROONNTT CCAAMMEERRAA)) ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

Take the following precautions

when using the Forward

Collision-Avoidance Assist

(FCA) system:

• This system is only a supple-

mental system and it is not

intended to, nor does it

replace the need for extreme

care and attention of the driv-

er. The sensing range and

objects detectable by the sen-

sors are limited. Pay attention

to the road conditions at all

times.

• NEVER drive too fast in accor-

dance with the road condi-

tions or while cornering.

• Always drive cautiously to

prevent unexpected and sud-

den situations from occur-

ring. FCA does not stop the

vehicle completely and is not

a collision avoidance system.

WARNING

5-74

Driving your vehicle

The warning light illumi-

nates on the LCD display,

when you cancel the FCA

system. The driver can

monitor the FCA ON/OFF status on

the LCD display. Also, the warning

light illuminates when the ESC

(Electronic Stability Control) is

turned off (Traction & Stability control

disabled).

If the warning light remains ON when

the FCA is activated, have the sys-

tem checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• The driver can select the initial warn-

ing activation time on the LCD dis-

play.

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver

Assistance → Forward Collision

Warning → Late/Normal/Early'.

The options for the initial Forward

Collision Warning includes the fol-

lowing:

- Late:

When this condition is selected,

the initial Forward Collision

Warning is activated later than nor-

mal. This setting reduces the

amount of distance between the

vehicle or pedestrian ahead before

the initial warning occurs.

Even though, 'Late' is selected if

the front vehicle suddenly stops

the initial warning activation time

may not seem late.

Select 'Late' when traffic is light

and when driving speed is slow.

- Normal:

When this condition is selected, the

initial Forward Collision Warning is

activated normally. This setting

allows for a nominal amount of dis-

tance between the vehicle or

pedestrian ahead before the initial

warning occurs.

OOSEV058100N

5-75

Driving your vehicle

- Early:

When this condition is selected, the

initial Forward Collision Warning is

activated earlier than normal. This

setting maximizes the amount of

distance between the vehicle or

pedestrian ahead before the initial

warning occurs.

Even though, 'Early' is selected if

the front vehicle suddenly stops the

initial warning activation time may

not seem fast.

If you feel the warning activates too

early, set the Forward Collision

Warning to "Normal".

Prerequisite for activation

The FCA system is on and ready

when FCA is selected on the LCD

display and when the following pre-

requisites are satisfied:

- The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) on.

- Driving speed exceeds approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h). (The FCA

is only activated within a certain

speed range.)

- The system detects a pedestrian or

a vehicle in front, which may collide

with your vehicle. (The FCA may

not be activated or may sound a

warning alarm in accordance with

the driving situation or vehicle con-

dition.)

• Completely stop the vehicle

on a safe location before

operating the switch on the

steering wheel to activate/

deactivate the FCA system.

• The FCA automatically acti-

vates upon placing the igni-

tion switch to the ON position.

The driver can deactivate the

FCA by canceling the system

setting on the LCD display.

• If you cancel the ESC

(Electronic Stability Control)

when the FCA system is

turned on the FCA automati-

cally deactivates and the FCA

warning light illuminates.

When the ESC is canceled the

FCA cannot be activated on

the LCD display. The FCA

warning light will illuminate

which is normal.

WARNING

5-76

Driving your vehicle

FCA Warning Message and

System Control

The FCA produces warning mes-

sages and warning alarms in accor-

dance with the collision risk levels,

such as abrupt stopping of the vehi-

cle in front, insufficient braking dis-

tance, or pedestrian detection. Also,

it controls the brakes in accordance

with the collision risk levels.

The driver can select the initial warn-

ing activation time in the User

Settings in the LCD display. The

options for the initial Forward

Collision Warning include Late,

Normal or Early initial warning time.

Collision Warning

(First warning)

This warning message appears on

the LCD display with a warning

chime. Additionally, some vehicle

system intervention occurs to help

decelerate the vehicle.

- Your vehicle speed may deceler-

ate moderately.

- The FCA system limitedly con-

trols the brakes to preemptively

mitigate impact in a collision.

Emergency braking

(Second warning)

This warning message appears on

the LCD display with a warning

chime.

Additionally, some vehicle system

intervention occurs to help deceler-

ate the vehicle.

- The FCA system limitedly con-

trols the brakes to preemptively

mitigate impact in a collision. The

brake control is maximized just

before a collision.

OTLE058179 OTLE058180

5-77

Driving your vehicle

Brake operation

• The braking system enters into the

ready status to react promptly to

urgent situations.

• The FCA provides additional brak-

ing power for optimum braking per-

formance, when the driver depress-

es the brake pedal.

• The braking control is automatical-

ly deactivated, when the driver

sharply depresses the accelerator

pedal, or when the driver abruptly

operates the steering wheel.

• The FCA brake control is automat-

ically canceled, when risk factors

disappear.

• The driver should always use

extreme caution while operat-

ing the vehicle, whether or not

there is a warning message or

alarm from the FCA system.

• If any other warning sound

such as seat belt warning

chime is already generated,

the Forward Collision-

Avoidance Assist (FCA) sys-

tem warning may not sound.

CAUTION

The braking control cannot

completely stop the vehicle nor

avoid all collisions. The driver

should hold the responsibility

to safely drive and control the

vehicle.

WARNING

The FCA system logic operates

within certain parameters, such

as the distance from the vehicle

or pedestrian ahead, the speed

of the vehicle ahead, and the

driver's vehicle speed. Certain

conditions such as inclement

weather and road conditions

may affect the operation of the

FCA system.

WARNING

Never deliberately drive danger-

ously to activate the system.

WARNING

5-78

Driving your vehicle

FCA Sensor

In order for the FCA system to oper-

ate properly, always make sure the

view on the windshield near the cam-

era and front radar sensor are clean

and free of dirt, snow, and debris.

Dirt, snow, or foreign substances on

the front radar sensor may adversely

affect the performance of the sys-

tem.

• Do not apply license plate frame

or foreign objects such as a

bumper sticker or a bumper

guard near the radar sensor.

Doing so may adversely affect

the sensing performance of the

radar.

• Always keep the radar sensor

and cover clean and free of dirt

and debris.

• Use only a soft cloth to wash the

vehicle. Do not spray pressur-

ized water directly on the sensor

or sensor cover.

• Be careful not to apply unneces-

sary force on the sensor or sen-

sor cover. If the sensor is

forcibly moved out of proper

alignment, the FCA system may

not operate correctly. In this

case, a warning message may

not be displayed. Have the vehi-

cle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• If the front bumper becomes

damaged in the area around the

sensor, the FCA system may not

operate properly. Have the vehi-

cle inspected by authorized

HYUNDAI.

• Use only genuine parts to repair

or replace a damaged sensor or

sensor cover. Do not apply paint

to the sensor cover.

NOTICE

OTLE058181

OTLE058182

■ Front camera

■ Front radar

5-79

Driving your vehicle

• Do not tint the window or install

stickers, accessories around the

inside mirror where the camera

is installed.

• NEVER locate any reflective

objects (i.e. white paper, mirror)

over the dashboard. Any light

reflection may cause a malfunc-

tion of the system.

• Pay extreme caution to keep the

camera out of water.

• NEVER arbitrarily disassemble

the camera assembly, nor apply

any impact on the camera

assembly.

• The FCA warning chime may be

difficult to hear if the audio sys-

tem volume is set to a high level.

Information

Have the system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer when:

• The windshield glass is replaced.

• The front bumper is replaced.

• The radar sensor or cover gets dam-

aged or replaced.

Warning message and warning

light

Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist

(FCA) system disabled.

Radar blocked

When the sensor cover is blocked

with dirt, snow, or debris, the FCA

system operation may be temporarily

disabled. If this occurs, a warning

message will appear on the LCD dis-

play.

Remove any dirt, snow, or debris and

clean the radar sensor cover before

operating the FCA system.

The FCA may not properly operate in

an area (e.g. open terrain), where

any substances are not detected

after turning ON the vehicle.

NOTICE

OIK057090L

The FCA system may not acti-

vate according to road condi-

tions, inclement weather, driv-

ing conditions or traffic condi-

tions.

WARNING

5-80

Driving your vehicle

System Not Operating

Check Forward Collision Avoidance

Assist system

• When the FCA is not working prop-

erly, the FCA warning light ( )

will illuminate and the warning

message will appear for a few sec-

onds. After the message disap-

pears, the master warning light

( ) will illuminate. In this case,

have the vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• The FCA warning message may

appear along with the illumination

of the ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) warning light and the FCA

is automatically deactivated.

OIK057091L

• Even if there is any problem

with the brake control function

of the FCA system, the vehi-

cle's basic braking perform-

ance will operate normally.

However, brake control func-

tion for avoiding collision will

not activate.

• If the vehicle in front stops

suddenly, you may have less

control of the brake system.

Therefore, always keep a safe

distance between your vehicle

and the vehicle in front of you.

• The FCA system may activate

during braking and the vehi-

cle may stop suddenly shift-

ing loose objects toward the

passengers. Always keep

loose objects secured.

• The FCA system may not acti-

vate if the driver applies the

brake pedal to avoid a colli-

sion.

• The brake control may be

insufficient, possibly causing

a collision, if a vehicle in front

abruptly stops. Always pay

extreme caution.

• The FCA is only a supplemen-

tal system for the driver's con-

venience. The driver should

hold the responsibility to con-

trol the vehicle operation. Do

not solely depend on the FCA

system. Rather, maintain a

safe braking distance, and, if

necessary, depress the brake

pedal to reduce the driving

speed.

• In certain instances and

under certain driving condi-

tions, the FCA system may

unintentionally activate. This

initial warning message

appears on the LCD display

with a warning chime.

Also, in certain instances the

front radar sensor or camera

recognition system may not

detect the vehicle or pedestri-

an ahead. The FCA system

may not activate and the

warning message will not be

displayed.

WARNING

5-81

Driving your vehicle

Limitations of the System

The Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system is designed to

help monitor the vehicle ahead or a

pedestrian in the roadway through

radar signals and camera recognition

to warn the driver that a collision is

imminent, and if necessary, apply

emergency braking.

In certain situations, the radar sen-

sor or the camera may not be able to

detect the vehicle or pedestrian

ahead. In these cases, the FCA sys-

tem may not operate normally. The

driver must pay careful attention in

the following situations where the

FCA operation may be limited.

• Occupants may get injured, if

the vehicle abruptly stops by

the activated FCA system. Pay

extreme caution.

• The FCA system operates

only to help detect vehicles or

pedestrians in front of the

vehicle.

• The FCA system does not

operate when the vehicle is in

reverse.

• The FCA system is not

designed to detect other

objects on the road such as

animals.

• The FCA system does not

detect vehicles in the oppo-

site lane.

• The FCA system does not

detect cross traffic vehicles

that are approaching.

• The FCA system cannot

detect the driver approaching

the side view of a parked vehi-

cle (for example on a dead

end street.)

In these cases, you must main-

tain a safe braking distance,

and if necessary, depress the

brake pedal to reduce the driv-

ing speed in order to maintain a

safe distance.

WARNING

5-82

Driving your vehicle

Detecting vehicles

The sensor may be limited when:

• The radar sensor or camera is

blocked with a foreign object or

debris

• The camera lens is contaminated

due to tinted, filmed or coated

windshield, damaged glass, or

stuck of foreign matter (sticker,

bug, etc.) on the glass

• Inclement weather such as heavy

rain or snow obscures the field of

view of the radar sensor or camera

• There is interference by electro-

magnetic waves

• The vehicle is on unpaved or

uneven rough surfaces, or road

with sudden gradient changes.

• The vehicle drives through a con-

struction area, on an unpaved

road, or above metal materials,

such as a railway

• The radar/camera sensor recogni-

tion is limited

• The vehicle in front is too small to

be detected (for example a motor-

cycle or a bicycle, etc.)

• The camera does not recognize

the entire vehicle in front.

• The vehicle in front is an oversize

vehicle or trailer that is too big to

be detected by the camera recog-

nition system (for example a tractor

trailer, etc.)

• The camera's field of view is not

well illuminated (either too dark or

too much reflection or too much

backlight that obscures the field of

view)

• The vehicle in front does not have

their rear lights properly turned ON

• The outside brightness changes

suddenly, for example when enter-

ing or exiting a tunnel

• The field of view in front is

obstructed by sun glare

• The vehicle drives inside a build-

ing, such as a basement parking

lot

• The adverse road conditions cause

excessive vehicle vibrations while

driving

• The camera is damaged.

• The brightness outside is too low

such as when the headlamps are

not on at night or the vehicle is

going through a tunnel.

• Light coming from a street light or

an oncoming vehicle is reflected on

a wet road surface such as a pud-

dle in the road

• The shadow is on the road by a

median strip, trees, etc.

• The vehicle drives through a toll-

gate.

• The windshield glass is fogged up;

a clear view of the road is obstruct-

• The rear part of the vehicle in front

is not normally visible (for example,

the vehicle is spinning or the vehi-

cle is overturned)

• There is severe irregular reflection

from the radar sensor

• The sensor recognition changes

suddenly when passing over a

speed bump

• The vehicle in front is driving errat-

ically

• The vehicle in front is moving verti-

cally to the driving direction

5-83

Driving your vehicle

• The vehicle in front is stopped ver-

tically

• The vehicle in front is driving

towards your vehicle or reversing

• You are on a roundabout and the

vehicle in front circles

- Driving on a curve

The performance of the FCA system

may be limited when driving on a

curved road.

In certain instances on a curved

road, the FCA system may activate

prematurely.

Also, in certain instances the front

radar sensor or camera recognition

system may not detect the vehicle

traveling on a curved road.

In these cases, the driver must main-

tain a safe braking distance, and if

necessary, depress the brake pedal

to reduce your driving speed in order

to maintain a safe distance.

The FCA system may recognize a

vehicle in the next lane when driving

on a curved road.

In this case, the system may unnec-

essarily alarm the driver and apply

the brake.

Always pay attention to road and

driving conditions, while driving. If

necessary, depress the brake pedal

to reduce your driving speed in order

to maintain a safe distance.

Also, when necessary depress the

accelerator pedal to prevent the sys-

tem from unnecessarily decelerating

your vehicle.

Check the surrounding traffic condi-

tions before use.

OTM058073OTM058117

5-84

Driving your vehicle

- Driving on a slope

The performance of the FCA decreas-

es while driving upward or downward

on a slope, not recognizing the vehi-

cle in front in the same lane. It may

unnecessarily produce the warning

message and the warning alarm, or it

may not produce the warning mes-

sage and the warning alarm at all.

When the FCA suddenly recognizes

the vehicle in front while passing

over a slope, you may experience

sharp deceleration.

Always keep your eyes forward while

driving upward or downward on a

slope, and, if necessary, depress the

brake pedal to reduce your driving

speed in order to maintain distance.

- Changing lanes

When a vehicle changes lanes in

front of you, the FCA system may not

immediately detect the vehicle, espe-

cially if the vehicle changes lanes

abruptly. In this case, you must main-

tain a safe braking distance, and if

necessary, depress the brake pedal

to reduce your driving speed in order

to maintain a safe distance.

When driving in stop-and-go traffic,

and a vehicle in front of you merges

out of the lane, the FCA system may

not immediately detect the new vehi-

cle that is now in front of you. In this

case, you must maintain a safe brak-

ing distance, and if necessary,

depress the brake pedal to reduce

your driving speed in order to main-

tain a safe distance.

OTM058074 OTM058119OTLE058222

5-85

Driving your vehicle

- Detecting the vehicle in front of you

If the vehicle in front of you has cargo

that extends rearward from the cab,

or when the vehicle in front of you

has higher ground clearance, addi-

tional special attention is required.

The FCA system may not be able to

detect the cargo extending from the

vehicle. In these instances, you must

maintain a safe braking distance

from the rearmost object, and if nec-

essary, depress the brake pedal to

reduce your driving speed in order to

maintain distance.

Detecting pedestrians

The sensor may be limited when:

• The pedestrian is not fully detected

by the camera recognition system,

for example, if the pedestrian is

leaning over or is not fully walking

upright

• The pedestrian is moving very

quickly or appears abruptly in the

camera detection area

• The pedestrian is wearing clothing

that easily blends into the back-

ground, making it difficult to be

detected by the camera recogni-

tion system

• The outside lighting is too bright

(e.g. when driving in bright sunlight

or in sun glare) or too dark (e.g.

when driving on a dark rural road

at night)

• It is difficult to detect and distin-

guish the pedestrian from other

objects in the surroundings, for

example, when there is a group of

pedestrians or a large crowd

• There is an item similar to a per-

son's body structure

• The pedestrian is small

• The pedestrian has impaired

mobility

• The radar sensor or camera is

blocked with a foreign object or

debris

• The camera lens is contaminated

due to tinted, filmed or coated

windshield, damaged glass, or

stuck of foreign matter (sticker,

bug, etc.) on the glass

• The brightness outside is too low

such as when the headlamps are

not on at night or the vehicle is

going through a tunnel

• Inclement weather such as heavy

rain or snow obscures the field of

view of the radar sensor or camera

• When light coming from a street

light or an oncoming vehicle is

reflected on a wet road surface

such as a puddle in the road

• The field of view in front is

obstructed by sun glare

• The windshield glass is fogged up;

a clear view of the road is obstruct-

OTLE058223

5-86

Driving your vehicle

• The adverse road conditions cause

excessive vehicle vibrations while

driving

• The sensor recognition changes

suddenly when passing over a

speed bump

• You are on a roundabout

Information

In some instances, the FCA system

may be cancelled when subjected to

electromagnetic interference.

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

• Do not use the Forward

Collision-Avoidance Assist

(FCA) system when towing a

vehicle. Application of the

FCA system while towing may

adversely affect the safety of

your vehicle or the towing

vehicle.

• Use extreme caution when the

vehicle in front of you has

cargo that extends rearward

from the cab, or when the

vehicle in front of you has

higher ground clearance.

• The FCA system is designed

to help detect and monitor the

vehicle ahead or help detect a

pedestrian in the roadway

through radar signals and

camera recognition. It is not

designed to detect bicycles,

motorcycles, or smaller

wheeled objects such as lug-

gage bags, shopping carts, or

strollers.

• Never try to test the operation

of the FCA system. Doing so

may cause severe injury or

death.

• If the front bumper, front

glass, radar or camera have

been replaced or repaired,

have your vehicle inspected

by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

WARNING

5-87

Driving your vehicle

The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) sys-

tem detects lane markers on the

road using a forward facing front

camera located on the top center of

the windshield. The LKA system

assists the driver's steering to help

keep the vehicle between the lane

markers.

When the system detects the vehicle

straying from its lane, it alerts the

driver with a visual and audible warn-

ing, while applying a counter-steer-

ing torque, to try to prevent the vehi-

cle from moving out of its lane.

LLAANNEE KKEEEEPPIINNGG AASSSSIISSTT ((LLKKAA)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

OTLE058182

The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)

system is not a substitute for

safe driving practices. It is the

responsibility of the driver to

always be aware of the sur-

rounding and steer the vehicle.

WARNING

Take the following precautions

when using the Lane Keeping

Assist (LKA) system:

• Do not steer the steering

wheel suddenly when the

steering wheel is being assist-

ed by the system.

• LKA system helps to prevent

the driver from moving out of

the lane unintentionally by

assisting the driver's steering.

However, the driver should not

solely rely on the system but

always pay attention on the

steering wheel to stay in the

lane.

WARNING

• The operation of the LKA sys-

tem can be canceled or not

work properly according to

road condition and surround-

ings. Always be cautious

when driving.

• Do not disassemble the LKA

system camera temporarily to

tint the window or attach any

types of coatings and acces-

sories. If you disassemble the

camera and assemble it again,

take your vehicle to an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer and

have the system checked for

calibration.

• When you replace the wind-

shield glass, LKA system

camera or related parts of the

steering wheel, take your

vehicle to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and have the

system checked for calibra-

tion.

5-88

Driving your vehicle

• Always have your hands on

the steering wheel while the

LKA system is activated. Also,

when Active LKA is selected

from the User Settings mode

and if you continue to drive

with your hands off the steer-

ing wheel after the "Keep

hands on steering wheel"

warning message appears,

the system will stop control-

ling the steering wheel.

However, if the driver has their

hands on the steering wheel

again, the system will start

controlling the steering

wheel.

• The steering wheel is not con-

tinuously controlled so if the

vehicle speed is at a higher

speed when leaving a lane the

vehicle may not be able to be

controlled by the system. The

driver must always follow the

speed limit when using the

system.

• If you attach objects to the

steering wheel, the system

may not assist steering or the

hands off alarm may not work

properly. When you tow a trail-

er, make sure that you turn off

the LKA system.

• When you tow a trailer, make

sure that you turn off the LKA

system.

• The system detects lane lines

and controls the steering

wheel by a camera, therefore,

if the lane lines are hard to

detect, the system may not

work properly.

Please refer to "Limitations of

the system".

• Do not remove or damage the

related parts of LKA system.

• You may not hear a warning

sound of LKA system

because of excessive audio

sound.

• If any other warning sound

such as seat belt warning

chime is already generated,

the Lane Keeping Assist

(LKA) system warning may

not sound.

• Do not place objects on the

dashboard that reflects light

such as mirrors, white paper,

etc. The system may malfunc-

tion if the sunlight is reflected.

5-89

Driving your vehicle

LKA System Operation

To activate/deactivate the LKA sys-

tem:

With the ignition switch in the ON

position, press the LKA system

switch located on the instrument

panel on the left hand side of the

steering wheel. The indicator in the

cluster display will initially illuminate

white. This indicates the LKA system

is in the READY but NOT ENABLED

state.

If you press the LKA button again,

the indicator on the cluster display

will go off.

Note that the vehicle

speed must be at least

approximately 40 mph

(64 km/h) to ENABLE the

LKA system. The indicator in the

cluster display will illuminate green.

The color of indicator will change

depending on the condition of LKA

system.

- White : Sensor does not detect

lane markers or vehicle

speed is under 40 mph (64

km/h).

- Green : Sensor detects lane mark-

ers and the system is able

to control vehicle steering.

Information

If the indicator (white) is activated

from the previous ignition cycle, the

system will turn ON without any addi-

tional control. If you press the LKA

switch again, the indicator on the clus-

ter goes off.

LKA system activation

• To see the LKA system screen on

the LCD display in the cluster,

select Assist mode ( ). For more

details, refer to "LCD Display

Modes" in chapter 3.

OTLE058189

OTL058188

5-90

Driving your vehicle

• If vehicle speed is over 40 mph (64

km/h) and the system detects lane

markers, the color changes from

gray to white.

• Both lane markers must be detect-

ed for the system to fully activate.

• If your vehicle departs from the

projected lane in front of you, the

LKA system operates as follows:

1. A visual warning appears on the

cluster LCD display. Either the left

lane marker or the right lane

marker in the cluster LCD display

will blink depending on which

direction the vehicle is veering.

Also, a warning sound will be

heard.

The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)

system is a system to help pre-

vent the driver from leaving the

lane. However, the driver should

not solely rely on the system

but always check the road con-

ditions when driving.

WARNING

■ Lane marker undetected

■ Lane marker detected

OTLE058190/OTLE058191

■ Left lane marker ■ Right lane marker

OTLE058192/OTLE058193

5-91

Driving your vehicle

2. The LKA system will control the

vehicle's steering to prevent the

vehicle from crossing the lane

maker in below conditions.

- Vehicle speed is over 40 mph (64

km/h)

- The system detects both lane

markers

- When driving, the vehicle is locat-

ed between both lanes normally.

- The steering wheel is not turned

suddenly.

When lanes are detected and all the

conditions to activate the LKA sys-

tem are satisfied, a LKA system indi-

cator light ( ) will change from

white to green. This indicates that the

LKA system is in the ENABLED state

and the steering wheel will be able to

be controlled.

Warning Light and Message

Keep hands on steering wheel

If the driver takes their hands off the

steering wheel while the LKA system

is activated, the system will warn the

driver.

Information

If the steering wheel is held very light-

ly, the message may still appear

because the LKA system may not rec-

ognize that the driver has their hands

on the wheel.

The warning message may

appear late according to road

conditions. Therefore, always

have your hands on the steering

wheel while driving.

WARNING

OTLE058194

5-92

Driving your vehicle

Driver's grasp not detected.

LKA system will be disabled

temporarily

If the driver still does not have their

hands on the steering wheel after the

message "Keep hands on steering

wheel", the system will not control

the steering wheel and warn the driv-

er only when the driver crosses the

lane markers.

However, if the driver has their hands

on the steering wheel again, the sys-

tem will start controlling the steering

wheel.

This warning message is available

when Active LKA is selected from the

User Settings mode.

Information

• Even though the steering is assisted

by the system, the driver can still

steer to control the steering wheel.

• The steering wheel may feel heavier

when the steering wheel is assisted

by the system than when it is not.

Check Lane Keeping Assist

(LKA) system

If there is a problem with the system

a message will appear for a few sec-

onds. If the problem continues the

LKA system failure indicator will illu-

minate.

OIK057120N

■ Type A ■ Type B

OIK057121N/OIK057122N

• The driver is responsible for

accurate steering.

• Turn off the system in below

situations.

- In bad weather

- In bad road condition

- When the steering wheel

needs to be controlled by the

driver frequently.

WARNING

5-93

Driving your vehicle

LKA system failure indicator

The LKA system failure

indicator (yellow) will illu-

minate if the LKA system

is not working properly.

Have your vehicle

checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

When there is a problem with the

system do one of the following:

• Turn the system on after turning

the engine off and on again.

• Check if the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

• Check if the system is affected by

the weather. (ex: fog, heavy rain,

etc.)

• Check if there is foreign matter on

the camera lens.

If the problem is not solved, have

your vehicle checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

The LKA system will not be in the

ENABLED state and/or the steering

wheel will not be assisted when:

• The turn signal is turned on before

changing a lane. If you change

lanes without the turn signal on, the

steering wheel might be controlled.

• The vehicle is not driven in the mid-

dle of the lane when the system is

turned on or right after changing a

lane.

• ESC (Electronic Stability Control) or

VSM (Vehicle Stability Management)

is activated.

• The vehicle is driven on a sharp

curve.

• Vehicle speed is below 35 mph

(56 km/h) and over 110 mph (177

km/h).

• The vehicle makes sharp lane

changes.

• The vehicle brakes suddenly.

• The lane is very wide or narrow.

• There are more than two lane lines

on the road. (e.g. construction area)

• Only one side of the lane marker is

detected.

• Radius of a curve is too small.

• The vehicle is driven on a steep

incline.

• The steering wheel is turned sud-

denly.

Limitations of the System

The LKA system may operate pre-

maturely even if the vehicle does not

depart from the intended lane, OR,

the LKA system may not warn you if

the vehicle leaves the intended lane

under the following circumstances:

When the lane and road condi-

tions are poor

• It is difficult to distinguish the lane

marker from the road because the

lane marker is covered with dust or

sand.

• It is difficult to distinguish the color

of the lane marker from the road.

• There are markings on the road

surface that look like a lane marker

that is inadvertently being detected

by the camera.

• The lane marker is indistinct or

damaged.

5-94

Driving your vehicle

• The lane marker is merged or

divided. (e.g. tollgate)

• The lane number increases or

decreases or the lane marker are

crossing complicatedly.

• There are more than two lane

markers on the road in front of you.

• The lane marker is very thick or

thin.

• The lane is very wide or narrow.

• The lane marker ahead is not visi-

ble due to rain, snow, water on the

road, damaged or stained road

surface, or other factors.

• The shadow is on the lane marker

by a median strip, trees, guardrail,

noise barriers, etc.

• The lane markers are complicated

or a structure substitutes for the

lines such as a construction area.

• There are crosswalk signs or other

symbols on the road.

• The lane marker in a tunnel is

stained with oil, etc.

• The lane suddenly disappears

such as at the intersection.

When external condition is inter-

vened

• The brightness outside changes

suddenly such as when entering or

exiting a tunnel, or when passing

under a bridge.

• The brightness outside is too low

such as when the headlamps are

not on at night or the vehicle is

going through a tunnel.

• There is a boundary structure in

the roadway such as a concrete

barrier, guardrail and reflector post

that is inadvertently being detected

by the camera.

• When light coming from a street

light or an oncoming vehicle is

reflected on a wet road surface

such as a puddle in the road.

• The field of view in front is

obstructed by sun glare.

• There is not enough distance

between you and the vehicle in

front to be able to detect the lane

marker or the vehicle ahead is driv-

ing on the lane marker.

• Driving on a steep grade, over a

hill, or when driving on a curved

road.

• The adverse road conditions cause

excessive vehicle vibrations while

driving.

• The surrounding of the inside rear

view mirror temperature is high

due to direct sunlight, etc.

5-95

Driving your vehicle

When front visibility is poor

• The windshield or the camera lens

is blocked with dirt or debris.

• The windshield glass is fogged up;

a clear view of the road is obstruct-

ed.

• Placing objects on the dashboard,

etc.

• The sensor cannot detect the lane

because of fog, heavy rain or snow.

LKA System Function Change

The driver can change LKA to Lane

Departure Warning from the LCD

display. Go to the 'User Settings →

Driver Assistance → Lane Safety →

Active LKA/Lane Keeping Assist/

Lane Departure Warning.

Active LKA

The Active LKA mode provides more

frequent steering wheel control in

comparison with the Standard LKA

mode.

Lane Keeping Assist

This mode guides the driver to help

keep the vehicle within the lanes. It

rarely controls the steering wheel,

when the vehicle drives well inside

the lanes. However, it starts to con-

trol the steering wheel, when the

vehicle is about to deviate out of the

lane.

Lane Departure Warning

LDW system alerts the driver with a

visual warning and a warning alarm

when the system detects the vehicle

departing the lane. The steering

wheel will not be controlled.

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

5-96

Driving your vehicle

The Driver Attention Warning (DAW)

system is designed as a safety fea-

ture to help reduce drowsy or inat-

tentive driving. The DAW displays a

bar graph that is intended to repre-

sent the driver's attention and fatigue

level while driving.

System Setting and Activation

System setting

• To turn ON the Driver Attention

Warning (DAW) system, turn on

the engine, and then select 'User

Settings → Driver Assistance →

Driver Attention Warning → Off/

Normal/Early'

• The driver can select the mode of

the Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system.

- Early : The Driver Attention

Warning system helps alert the

driver of his/her fatigue level or

inattentive driving practices faster

than Normal mode.

- Normal : The Driver Attention

Warning system helps alert the

driver of his/her fatigue level or

inattentive driving practices.

- Off : The Driver Attention Warning

system is deactivated.

• The set-up of the Driver Attention

Warning system will be main-

tained, as selected, when the

engine is re-started.

Driver's attention level

DDRRIIVVEERR AATTTTEENNTTIIOONN WWAARRNNIINNGG ((DDAAWW)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

OIK057129N

■ System off

OIK057130N

■ Attentive driving

5-97

Driving your vehicle

• The driver can monitor their driving

conditions on the LCD display.

The DAW screen will appear when

you select the Assist mode tab ( )

on the LCD display if the system is

activated. For more details, refer to

"LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.

• The driver's attention level is dis-

played on the scale of 1 to 5. The

lower the number is, the more inat-

tentive the driver is.

• The number decreases when the

driver does not take a break for a

certain period of time.

• The number increases when the

driver attentively drives for a cer-

tain period of time.

• When the driver turns on the sys-

tem while driving, it displays 'Last

Break time' and level.

Take a break

• The "Consider taking a break"

message appears on the LCD dis-

play and a warning sounds in order

to suggest the driver to take a

break, when the driver’s attention

level is below 1.

• The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system does not suggest

the driver to take a break, when the

total driving time is shorter than 10

minutes.

Resetting the System

• The last break time is set to 00:00

and the driver's attention level is

set to 5 (very attentive) when the

driver resets the Driver Attention

Warning (DAW) system.

• The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system resets in the follow-

ing situations.

- The engine is turned OFF.

- The driver unfastens the seat belt

and then opens the driver's door.

- The vehicle is stopped for more

than 10 minutes.

• The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system operates again,

when the driver restarts driving.

OIK057132L

OIK057131N

5-98

Driving your vehicle

System Standby

The Driver Attention Warning (DAW)

system enters the ready status and

displays the 'Standby' screen in the

following situations.

- The camera does not detect the

lanes.

- Driving speed remains under 40

mph (64 km/h) or over 110 mph

(177 km/h).

System Malfunction

Check Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system

When the warning message

appears, the system is not working

properly. In this case, have the vehi-

cle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• The Driver Attention Warning

system is not a substitute for

safe driving practices, but a

convenience function only. It

is the responsibility of the

driver to always drive cau-

tiously to prevent unexpected

and sudden situations from

occurring. Pay attention to the

road conditions at all times.

• The system may suggest a

break according to the dri-

ver's driving pattern or habits

even if the driver doesn't feel

fatigue.

• The driver, who feels fatigued,

should take a break, even

though there is no break sug-

gestion by the Driver Attention

Warning system.

WARNING

OIK057133N OIK057134N

5-99

Driving your vehicle

The Driver Attention Warning sys-

tem utilizes the camera sensor on

the front windshield for its opera-

tion. To keep the camera sensor in

the best condition, you should

observe the followings:

• Do not disassemble the camera

temporarily to tint the window or

to attach any types of coatings

and accessories. If you disas-

semble a camera and assemble

it again, take your vehicle to an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer and

have the system checked for cal-

ibration.

• NEVER install any accessories

or stickers on the front wind-

shield, nor tint the front wind-

shield.

• NEVER locate any reflective

objects (i.e. white paper, mirror)

over the dashboard. Any light

reflection may cause a malfunc-

tion of the Driver Attention Alert

(DAW) system.

• Pay extreme caution to keep the

camera sensor out of water.

NOTICE

The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system may not properly

operate with limited alerting in

the following situations:

• The lane detection perform-

ance is limited. (For more

details, refer to "Lane Keeping

Assist (LKA) system" in this

chapter.)

• The vehicle is violently driven

or is abruptly turned for

obstacle avoidance (e.g. con-

struction area, other vehicles,

fallen objects, bumpy road).

• Forward drivability of the

vehicle is severely under-

mined (possibly due to wide

variation in tire pressures,

uneven tire wear-out, toe-

in/toe-out alignment).

• The vehicle drives on a curvy

road.

• The vehicle drives on a

bumpy road.

• The vehicle drives through a

windy area.

• The vehicle is controlled by

the following driving assist

systems:

- Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)

system

- Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system

- Smart Cruise Control (SCC)

system

CAUTION

The DAW system warning

chime may be difficult to hear if

the audio system volume is set

to a high level.

CAUTION

5-100

Driving your vehicle

Cruise Control operation

➀ Cruise indicator

➁ Set speed

The Cruise Control system allows

you to drive at speeds above 20 mph

(30 km/h) without depressing the

accelerator pedal.

Information

• During normal cruise control opera-

tion, when the SET switch is activat-

ed or reactivated after applying the

brakes, the cruise control will ener-

gize after approximately 3 seconds.

This delay is normal.

• Before activating the cruise control

function, the system will check to

verify that the brake switch is oper-

ating normally. Depress the brake

pedal at least once after turning ON

the ignition or starting the engine.

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL

- When driving in heavy traffic

or when traffic conditions

make it difficult to drive at a

constant speed

- When driving on rainy, icy, or

snow-covered roads

- When driving on hilly or

windy roads

- When driving in windy areas

- When driving with limited

view (possibly due to bad

weather such as fog, snow,

rain and sandstorm)

OIK057157N

Take the following precautions:

• If the Cruise Control is left on,

("CRUISE" indicator light in

the instrument cluster is illu-

minated) the Cruise Control

can be activated unintention-

ally. Keep the Cruise Control

system off ("CRUISE" indica-

tor light OFF) when the Cruise

Control is not in use, to avoid

inadvertently setting a speed.

• Use the Cruise Control sys-

tem only when traveling on

open highways in good

weather.

• Do not use Cruise Control

when towing a trailer.

• Do not use the Cruise Control

when it may be unsafe to keep

the vehicle at a constant

speed:

WARNING

5-101

Driving your vehicle

To set Cruise Control speed

1. Press the CRUISE button on the

steering wheel to turn the system

on. The "CRUISE" indicator will

illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed,

which must be more than 20 mph

(30 km/h).

3. Push the toggle switch down

(SET-), and release it. The set

speed on the LCD display will illu-

minate.

4. Release the accelerator pedal.

Information

On a steep slope, the vehicle may

slightly slow down or speed up, while

driving uphill or downhill.

To increase Cruise Control

speed

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+)

and hold it, while monitoring the

SET speed on the instrument clus-

ter.

Release the toggle switch when

the desired speed is shown and

the vehicle will accelerate to that

speed.

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+)

and release it immediately. The

cruising speed will increase 1.0

mph (1.6 km/h) each time the tog-

gle switch is operated in this man-

ner.

OTL055101

OTL055102

OTL055100

5-102

Driving your vehicle

• Depress the accelerator pedal.

When the vehicle attains the

desired speed, push the toggle

switch down (SET-).

To decrease Cruise Control

speed

• Push the toggle switch down (SET-)

and hold it.Your vehicle will gradual-

ly slow down. Release the toggle

switch at the speed you want to

maintain.

• Push the toggle switch down (SET-)

and release it immediately. The

cruising speed will decrease 1.0

mph (1.6 km/h) each time the toggle

switch is operated in this manner.

• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired

speed, push the toggle switch

down (SET-).

To temporarily accelerate with

the Cruise Control ON

Depress the accelerator pedal. When

you take your foot off the accelerator,

the vehicle will return to the previous-

ly set speed.

If you push the toggle switch down

(SET-) at the increased speed, the

Cruise Control will maintain the

increased speed.

OTL055101

5-103

Driving your vehicle

Cruise Control will be canceled

when:

• Depressing the brake pedal.

• Pressing the CANCEL button

located on the steering wheel.

• Pressing the CRUISE button. Both

the cruise indicator and the set

speed will disappear on the LCD.

• Moving the shift lever into N

(Neutral).

• Decreasing the vehicle speed to

less than approximately 20 mph

(30 km/h).

• The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) is operating.

• Downshifting to 2

gear when in

Manual Shift mode.

Information

Each of the above actions will cancel

Cruise Control operation (the set

speed the instrument cluster will go

off), but only pressing the CRUISE

button will turn the system off. If you

wish to resume Cruise Control opera-

tion, push the toggle switch up (RES+)

located on your steering wheel. You

will return to your previously preset

speed, unless the system was turned off

using the CRUISE button.

To resume preset Cruising

speed

Push the toggle switch up (RES+). If

the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (30

km/h), the vehicle will resume the

preset speed.

OTL055102OTL055103

5-104

Driving your vehicle

To turn Cruise Control off

• Press the CRUISE button (the

"CRUISE" indicator light will go

off).

• Turn the vehicle OFF.

OTL055100

5-105

Driving your vehicle

➀ Cruise indicator

➁ Set speed

➂ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

To see the SCC screen on the LCD

display in the cluster, select Assist

mode ( ). For more details, refer to

"LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.

The Smart Cruise Control system

allows you to program the vehicle to

maintain constant speed and mini-

mum distance between the vehicle

ahead.

The Smart Cruise Control system

will automatically adjust your vehicle

speed to maintain your programmed

speed and following distance without

requiring you to depress the acceler-

ator or brake pedals.

Smart Cruise Control Switch

CRUISE : Turns cruise control sys-

tem on or off.

RES+ : Resumes or increases

cruise control speed.

SET- : Sets or decreases cruise con-

trol speed.

: Sets vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance.

CANCEL : Cancels cruise control

operation.

SSMMAARRTT CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL WWIITTHH SSTTOOPP && GGOO SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

OTL058205N

The Smart Cruise Control sys-

tem is not a substitute for safe

driving practices, but a conven-

ience function only. It is the

responsibility of the driver to

always check the speed and

distance to the vehicle ahead.

WARNING

OTL058056N

For your safety, please read the

owner's manual before using the

Smart Cruise Control system.

WARNING

5-106

Driving your vehicle

Smart Cruise Control Speed

To set Smart Cruise Control

speed

1. Push the CRUISE button on the

steering wheel to turn the system

on. The cruise indicator will illumi-

nate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed.

The Smart Cruise Control speed

can be set as follows:

• 20 ~ 110 mph (30 ~ 180 km/h) :

when there is no vehicle in front

• 0 ~ 110 mph (0 ~ 180 km/h) :

when there is a vehicle in front

3. Push the toggle switch down

(SET-). The Set Speed and

Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance on the

LCD display will illuminate.

4. Release the accelerator pedal.

The desired speed will automati-

cally be maintained.

If there is a vehicle in front of you, the

speed may decrease to maintain the

distance to the vehicle ahead.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may

slow down or speed up slightly while

going uphill or downhill.

Information

• Vehicle speed may decrease on an

upward slope and increase on a

downward slope.

• When you are setting the cruise con-

trol speed, with a vehicle in front

and your vehicle speed is between 0

~ 20 mph (0 ~ 30 km/h), the speed

will set to 20 mph (30 km/h).

OTL055100

OTLE058207

5-107

Driving your vehicle

To increase Smart Cruise

Control set speed

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+),

and release it immediately. The

cruising speed will increase by

1 mph (1 km/h) each time you

move the toggle switch up in this

manner.

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+),

and hold it. Your vehicle set speed

will increase by 5 mph (10 km/h).

Release the toggle switch at the

speed you want.

You can set the speed to 110 mph

(180 km/h).

To decrease the Smart Cruise

Control set speed

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the toggle switch down

(SET-), and release it immediately.

The cruising speed will decrease

by 1 mph (1 km/h) each time you

move the toggle switch down in

this manner.

• Push the toggle switch down

(SET-), and hold it. Your vehicle set

speed will decrease by 5 mph (10

km/h). Release the toggle switch

at the speed you want.

• You can set the speed to 20 mph

(30 km/h).

OTLE058208 OTLE058207

Check the driving condition

before using the toggle switch.

Driving speed sharply increas-

es, when you push up and hold

the toggle switch.

CAUTION

5-108

Driving your vehicle

To temporarily accelerate with

the Smart Cruise Control on

If you want to speed up temporarily

when the Smart Cruise Control is on,

depress the accelerator pedal.

Increased speed will not interfere

with Smart Cruise Control operation

or change the set speed.

To return to the set speed, take your

foot off the accelerator pedal.

If you push the toggle switch down

(SET-) at increased speed, the cruis-

ing speed will be set again pedal.

Smart Cruise Control set speed

will be temporarily canceled

when:

Canceled manually

• Depressing the brake pedal.

• Pushing the CANCEL button locat-

ed on the steering wheel.

The Smart Cruise Control turns off

temporarily when the Set Speed and

Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance indicator

on the LCD display turns off.

The cruise indicator is illuminated

continuously.

Canceled automatically

• The driver's door is opened.

• The vehicle is shifted to N

(Neutral), R (Reverse) or P (Park).

• The EPB (Electronic Parking

Brake) is applied.

• The vehicle speed is over 120 mph

(190 km/h).

• The vehicle stops on a steep incline.

• The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control), TCS (Traction Control

System) or ABS is operating.

• The ESC is turned off.

• The sensor or the cover is dirty or

blocked with foreign matter.

• The vehicle is stopped for a certain

period of time.

• The vehicle stops and goes repeat-

edly for a long period of time.

• The accelerator pedal is continu-

ously depressed for a long period

of time.

• The engine performance is abnor-

mal.

• Engine rpm is in the red zone.

Be careful when accelerating

temporarily, because the speed

is not controlled automatically

at this time even if there is a

vehicle in front of you.

CAUTION

OTL055103

5-109

Driving your vehicle

• The driver starts driving by pushing

the toggle switch up (RES+)/down

(SET-) or depressing the accelera-

tor pedal, after the vehicle is

stopped by the Smart Cruise

Control system with no other vehi-

cle ahead.

• The driver starts driving by pushing

the toggle switch up (RES+)/down

(SET-) or depressing the accelera-

tor pedal, after stopping the vehicle

with a vehicle stopped far away in

front.

• The Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) is activated.

Each of these actions will cancel the

Smart Cruise Control operation. The

Set Speed and Vehicle-to-Vehicle

Distance on the LCD display will go

off.

In a condition the Smart Cruise

Control is cancelled automatically,

the Smart Cruise Control will not

resume even though the RES+ or

SET- toggle switch is pushed.

Information

If the Smart Cruise Control is canceled

by other than the reasons mentioned,

have the system checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

Smart Cruise Control canceled

If the system is cancelled, the warn-

ing chime will sound and a message

will appear for a few seconds.

You must adjust the vehicle speed by

depressing the accelerator or brake

pedal according to the road condition

ahead and driving condition.

Always check the road conditions.

Do not rely on the warning chime.

To resume Smart Cruise Control

set speed

If any method other than the cruise

toggle switch was used to cancel

cruising speed and the system is still

activated, the cruising speed will

automatically resume when you

push the toggle switch up (RES+) or

down (SET-).

If you push the toggle switch up

(RES+), the speed will resume to the

recently set speed. However, if vehi-

cle speed drops below 20 mph (30

km/h), it will resume when there is a

vehicle in front of your vehicle.

OIK057096N

Always check the road condi-

tions when you push the toggle

switch up (RES+) to resume

speed.

CAUTION

5-110

Driving your vehicle

To turn Cruise Control off

• Push the CRUISE button (the

cruise indicator light will go off).

If you wish not to use the cruise

control system, always turn the

system off by pushing the CRUISE

button.

Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-

to-Vehicle Distance

To set Vehicle-to-Vehicle

Distance

When the Smart Cruise Control sys-

tem is ON, you can set and maintain

the distance from the vehicle ahead

of you without pressing the accelera-

tor or brake pedal.

Each time the button is pressed, the

vehicle to vehicle distance changes

as follows:

For example, if you drive at 56 mph

(90 km/h), the distance is maintained

as follows:

Distance 4 - approximately 172 feet

Distance 3 - approximately 130 feet

Distance 2 - approximately 106 feet

Distance 1 - approximately 82 feet

Information

The distance is set to the last set dis-

tance when the system is used for the

first time after starting the engine.

OTL055100

OTLE058211

Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2

Distance 1

5-111

Driving your vehicle

When the lane ahead is clear:

The vehicle speed will maintain the

set speed.

When there is a vehicle ahead

of you in your lane:

• Your vehicle speed will slow down

or speed up to maintain the select-

ed distance.

• If the vehicle ahead speeds up,

your vehicle will travel at a steady

cruising speed after accelerating to

the set speed.

• If distance from the front vehicle

has changed due to accelerating or

decelerating of the front vehicle,

the distance on the LCD display

may change.

Distance 4 Distance 3

Distance 1

Distance 2

OTL058213N/OTL058214N/

OTL058215N/OTL058216N

OTL058212N

When using the Smart Cruise

Control system:

• The warning message may

appear and a warning chime

may sound if the vehicle is

unable to maintain the select-

ed distance from the vehicle

ahead.

• If this warning message

appears, apply the brake

pedal directly to adjust your

vehicle speed in order to

increase the distance

between the vehicle ahead.

WARNING

OTLE058217

5-112

Driving your vehicle

In traffic situation

Use switch or pedal to accelerate

• In traffic, your vehicle will stop if the

vehicle ahead of you stops. Also, if

the vehicle ahead of you starts

moving, your vehicle will start as

well. However, if the vehicle stops

for more than 3 seconds, you must

depress the accelerator pedal or

push up the toggle switch (RES+)

or push down the toggle switch

(SET-) to start driving.

• Even if the warning message

does not appear and warning

chime does not sound, always

pay attention to the driving

conditions to prevent danger-

ous situations from occur-

ring.

• The SCC warning chime may

be difficult to hear if the audio

system volume is set to a high

level.

If the vehicle ahead (vehicle

speed: less than 20 mph (30

km/h)) disappears to the next

lane, the warning chime will

sound and a message "Watch

for surrounding vehicles" will

appear. Adjust your vehicle

speed for vehicles or objects

that can suddenly appear in

front of you by depressing the

brake pedal.

Always pay attention to the road

condition ahead.

CAUTION

OTLE058218

OTLE058219

5-113

Driving your vehicle

• If you push the smart cruise control

toggle switch (RES+ or SET-) while

Auto Hold and smart cruise control

is operating the Auto Hold will be

released regardless of accelerator

pedal operation and the vehicle will

start to move. The AUTO HOLD

indicator changes from green to

white.

- Driving on rainy, icy, or

snow-covered roads

- Driving on a steep downhill

or uphill

- Driving in windy areas

- Driving in parking lots

- Driving near crash barriers

- Driving on a sharp curve

- Driving with limited view

(possibly due to bad weath-

er, such as fog, snow, rain or

sandstorm)

- The vehicle's sensing ability

decreases due to vehicle

modification, resulting in a

level difference of the vehi-

cle's front and rear

• Unexpected situations may

lead to possible accidents.

Pay attention continuously to

road conditions and driving

even when the smart cruise

control system is being oper-

ated.

Take the following precautions :

• Always set the vehicle speed

under the speed limit.

• If the Smart Cruise Control is

left on, (cruise indicator light

in the instrument cluster is

illuminated) the Smart Cruise

Control can be activated unin-

tentionally. Keep the Smart

Cruise Control system off

(cruise indicator light OFF)

when the Smart Cruise

Control is not in use, to avoid

inadvertently setting a speed.

• Use the Smart Cruise Control

system only when traveling

on open highways in good

weather.

• Do not use the Smart Cruise

Control when it may not be

safe to keep the vehicle at a

constant speed.

• Do not use when:

- Driving in heavy traffic or

when traffic conditions make

it difficult to drive at a con-

stant speed

WARNING

5-114

Driving your vehicle

Smart Cruise Control Radar

Sensor

The Smart Cruise Control uses a

radar sensor to detect distance to the

vehicle ahead.

If the sensor is covered with dirt or

other foreign matter, the vehicle to

vehicle distance control may not

operate correctly.

Always keep the sensor clean.

Warning message

Smart Cruise Control disabled.

Radar blocked

When the sensor lens cover is

blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the

Smart Cruise Control system opera-

tion may be disabled temporarily. If

this occurs, a warning message will

appear on the LCD display. Remove

any dirt, snow, or debris and clean

the radar sensor lens cover before

operating the Smart Cruise Control

system. The Smart Cruise Control

system may not properly activate, if

the radar is totally contaminated, or if

any substance is not detected after

turning on the engine (e.g. in an

open terrain).

Information

For the SCC operation is temporarily

stopped if the radar is blocked, but

you wish to use conventional cruise

control mode (speed only control func-

tion), you must convert to the cruise

control mode (refer to "To convert to

Cruise Control mode" in the following

page).

OTLE058181

OTM058061L

• Do not apply license plate

frame or foreign objects such

as a bumper sticker or a

bumper guard near the radar

sensor. Doing so may

adversely affect the sensing

performance of the radar.

• Always keep the radar sensor

and lens cover clean and free

of dirt and debris.

• Use only a soft cloth to wash

the vehicle. Do not spray pres-

surized water directly on the

sensor or sensor cover.

CAUTION

5-115

Driving your vehicle

Check Smart Cruise Control System

The message will appear when the

vehicle to vehicle distance control

system is not functioning normally.

Take your vehicle to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-

tem checked.

To Adjust the Sensitivity of

Smart Cruise Control

The sensitivity of vehicle speed

when following the front vehicle to

maintain the set distance can be

adjusted. Go to the 'User Settings →

Driver Assistance → SCC Reaction

→ Fast/Normal/Slow' on the LCD

display. You may select one of the

three stages you prefer.

• Fast:

Vehicle speed following the front

vehicle to maintain the set distance

is faster than normal speed.

OIK057097N

■ Type A ■ Type B

OIK057109L/OIK057110L

• Be careful not to apply unnec-

essary force on the radar sen-

sor or sensor cover. If the sen-

sor is forcibly moved out of

proper alignment, the Smart

Cruise Control system may

not operate correctly. In this

case, a warning message may

not be displayed. Have the

vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• If the front bumper becomes

damaged in the area around

the radar sensor, the Smart

Cruise Control System may

not operate properly. Have the

vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Use only genuine HYUNDAI

parts to repair or replace a

damaged sensor or sensor

cover. Do not apply paint to

the sensor cover.

5-116

Driving your vehicle

• Normal:

Vehicle speed following the front

vehicle to maintain the set distance

is normal.

• Slow:

Vehicle speed following the front

vehicle to maintain the set distance

is slower than normal speed.

Information

When you select the SCC Reaction

sensitivity in the User Settings menu,

this setting will remain as the default

setting each time you start your vehi-

cle.

Conventional Cruise Control

Mode

The driver may choose to switch to

use the conventional Cruise Control

mode (speed only control function)

by following these steps:

1. Push the CRUISE button on the

steering wheel to turn the system

on. The cruise ( ) indi-

cator will illuminate.

2. Push and hold the Vehicle-to-

Vehicle Distance button for more

than 2 seconds.

3. Choose between "Smart Cruise

Control" and "Cruise Control".

When the system is canceled using

the CRUISE button or the CRUISE

button is used after the engine is

turned on, the Smart Cruise Control

mode will turn on.

When using the conventional

Cruise Control mode, you must

manually adjust the distance to

other vehicles by depressing

the brake pedal. The system

does not automatically adjust

the distance to vehicles in front

of you.

WARNING

5-117

Driving your vehicle

Limitations of the System

The Smart Cruise Control system

may have limits to its ability to detect

distance to the vehicle ahead due to

road and traffic conditions.

On curves

• The Smart Cruise Control system

may not detect a moving vehicle in

your lane, and then your vehicle

could accelerate to the set speed.

Also, the vehicle speed will

decrease when the vehicle ahead

is recognized suddenly.

• Select the appropriate set speed

on curves and apply the brakes or

accelerator pedal if necessary.

Your vehicle speed can be reduced

due to a vehicle in the adjacent lane.

Apply the accelerator pedal and

select the appropriate set speed.

Check to be sure that the road condi-

tions permit safe operation of the

Smart Cruise Control.

OTM058073

OTM058117

5-118

Driving your vehicle

On inclines

• During uphill or downhill driving,

the Smart Cruise Control system

may not detect a moving vehicle in

your lane, and cause your vehicle

to accelerate to the set speed.

Also, the vehicle speed will rapidly

decrease when the vehicle ahead

is recognized suddenly.

• Select the appropriate set speed

on inclines and apply the brake or

accelerator pedal if necessary.

Lane changing

• A vehicle which moves into your

lane from an adjacent lane cannot

be recognized by the sensor until it

is in the sensor's detection range.

• The radar may not detect immedi-

ately when a vehicle cuts in sud-

denly. Always pay attention to the

traffic, road and driving conditions.

• If a slower vehicle moves into your

lane, your speed may decrease to

maintain the distance to the vehicle

ahead.

• If a faster vehicle which moves into

your lane, your vehicle will acceler-

ate to the set speed.

Detecting vehicles

Some vehicles in your lane cannot

be recognized by the sensor:

- Narrow vehicles such as motorcy-

cles or bicycles

- Vehicles offset to one side

- Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-

decelerating vehicles

- Stopped vehicles

- Vehicles with small rear profile

such as trailers with no loads

OTM058074OTLE058222 OTM058128

5-119

Driving your vehicle

A vehicle ahead cannot be recog-

nized correctly by the sensor if any of

following occurs:

- When the vehicle is pointing

upwards due to overloading in the

luggage compartment

- While the steering wheel is operat-

ing

- When driving to one side of the

lane

- When driving on narrow lanes or

on curves

Apply the brake or accelerator pedal

if necessary.

• Your vehicle may accelerate when

a vehicle ahead of you disappears.

• When you are warned that the

vehicle ahead of you is not detect-

ed, drive with caution.

• When driving in stop-and-go traffic,

and a stopped vehicle in front of

you merges out of the lane, the

system may not immediately

detect the new vehicle that is now

in front of you. In this case, you

must maintain a safe braking dis-

tance, and if necessary, depress

the brake pedal to reduce your

driving speed in order to maintain a

safe distance.

OTM058119OTM058129

5-120

Driving your vehicle

• Always look out for pedestrians

when your vehicle is maintaining a

distance with the vehicle ahead.

• Always be cautious for vehicles

with higher height or vehicles car-

rying loads that sticks out from the

back of the vehicle.

OTLE058223OTM058124

When using the Smart Cruise

Control take the following pre-

cautions:

• If an emergency stop is nec-

essary, you must apply the

brakes. The vehicle cannot be

stopped at every emergency

situation by using the Smart

Cruise Control system.

• Keep a safe distance accord-

ing to road conditions and

vehicle speed. If the vehicle to

vehicle distance is too close

during a high-speed driving, a

serious collision may result.

• Always maintain sufficient

braking distance and deceler-

ate your vehicle by applying

the brakes if necessary.

• The Smart Cruise Control sys-

tem cannot recognize a

stopped vehicle, pedestrians or

an oncoming vehicle. Always

look ahead cautiously to pre-

vent unexpected and sudden

situations from occurring.

WARNING

5-121

Driving your vehicle

Information

The Smart Cruise Control system

may not operate temporarily due to:

• Electrical interference

• Modifying the suspension

• Differences of tire abrasion or tire

pressure

• Installing different type of tires

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

3. Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate

the device.

Information

Radio frequency radiation exposure

information:

This equipment complies with FCC

radiation exposure limits set forth for

an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed

and operated with minimum distance

of 8 in. (20 cm) between the radiator

(antenna) and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-locat-

ed or operating in conjunction with

any other antenna or transmitter.

• Vehicles moving in front of

you with a frequent lane

change may cause a delay in

the system's reaction or may

cause the system to react to a

vehicle actually in an adjacent

lane. Always drive cautiously

to prevent unexpected and

sudden situations from occur-

ring.

• Always be aware of the select-

ed speed and vehicle to vehi-

cle distance. The driver

should not solely rely on the

system but always pay atten-

tion to driving conditions and

control your vehicle speed.

• The Smart Cruise Control sys-

tem may not recognize com-

plex driving situations so

always pay attention to driv-

ing conditions and control

your vehicle speed.

5-122

Driving your vehicle

Hazardous driving conditions

When hazardous driving elements

are encountered such as water,

snow, ice, mud and sand, take the

below suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and keep a longer

braking distance.

• Avoid abrupt braking or steering.

• When your vehicle is stuck in snow,

mud, or sand, use second gear.

Accelerate slowly to avoid unnec-

essary wheel spin.

• Put sand, rock salt, tire chains or

other non-slip materials under the

wheels to provide additional trac-

tion while the vehicle becomes

stuck in ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle

to free it from snow, sand, or mud,

first turn the steering wheel right and

left to clear the area around your

front wheels. Then, shift back and

forth between R (Reverse) and a for-

ward gear.

Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and

do not race the engine.

To prevent transmission wear, wait

until the wheels stop spinning before

shifting gears. Release the accelera-

tor pedal while shifting, and press

lightly on the accelerator pedal while

the transmission is in gear. Slowly

spinning the wheels in forward and

reverse directions causes a rocking

motion that may free the vehicle.

SSPPEECCIIAALL DDRRIIVVIINNGG CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNSS

Downshifting with an automatic

transmission while driving on

slippery surfaces can cause an

accident. The sudden change in

tire speed could cause the tires

to skid. Be careful when down-

shifting on slippery surfaces.

WARNING

If the vehicle is stuck and

excessive wheel spin occurs,

the temperature in the tires can

increase very quickly. If the tires

become damaged, a tire blow

out or tire explosion can occur.

This condition is dangerous -

you and others may be injured.

Do not attempt this procedure if

people or objects are anywhere

near the vehicle.

If you attempt to free the vehicle,

the vehicle can overheat quickly,

possibly causing an engine

compartment fire or other dam-

age. Try to avoid spinning the

wheels as much as possible to

prevent overheating of either the

tires or the engine. DO NOT

allow the vehicle to spin the

wheels above 35 mph (56 km/h).

WARNING

5-123

Driving your vehicle

Information

The ESC system must be turned OFF

before rocking the vehicle.

If you are still stuck after rocking

the vehicle a few times, have the

vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle

to avoid engine overheating, possi-

ble damage to the transmission,

and tire damage. See "Towing" in

chapter 6.

Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in

corners, especially when roads are

wet. Ideally, corners should always

be taken under gentle acceleration.

Driving at night

Night driving presents more hazards

than driving in the daylight. Here are

some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more dis-

tance between you and other vehi-

cles, as it may be more difficult to

see at night, especially in areas

where there may not be any street

lights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the

glare from other driver's head-

lamps.

• Keep your headlamps clean and

properly aimed. Dirty or improperly

aimed headlamps will make it

much more difficult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the head-

lamps of oncoming vehicles. You

could be temporarily blinded, and it

will take several seconds for your

eyes to readjust to the darkness.

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving

dangerous. Here are a few things to

consider when driving in the rain or

on slick pavement:

• Slow down and allow extra follow-

ing distance. A heavy rainfall

makes it harder to see and increas-

es the distance needed to stop

your vehicle.

• Turn OFF your Cruise Control.

• Replace your windshield wiper

blades when they show signs of

streaking or missing areas on the

windshield.

• Be sure your tires have enough

tread. If your tires do not have

enough tread, making a quick stop

on wet pavement can cause a skid

and possibly lead to an accident.

See "Tire replacement" in chap-

ter 7.

• Turn on your headlamps to make it

easier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large pud-

dles can affect your brakes. If you

must go through puddles, try to

drive through them slowly.

NOTICE

5-124

Driving your vehicle

• If you believe your brakes may be

wet, apply them lightly while driv-

ing until normal braking operation

returns.

Hydroplaning

If the road is wet enough and you are

going fast enough, your vehicle may

have little or no contact with the road

surface and actually ride on the

water. The best advice is SLOW

DOWN when the road is wet.

The risk of hydroplaning increases

as the depth of tire tread decreas-

es, refer to "Tire replacement" in

chapter 7.

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas

unless you are sure the water is no

higher than the bottom of the wheel

hub. Drive through any water slowly.

Allow adequate stopping distance

because brake performance may be

reduced.

After driving through water, dry the

brakes by gently applying them sev-

eral times while the vehicle is moving

slowly.

Highway driving

Tires

Adjust the tire inflation, as specified.

Under-inflation may overheat or

damage the tires.

Do not install worn-out or damaged

tires, which may reduce traction or

fail the braking operation.

Information

Never over-inflate your tires above the

maximum inflation pressure, as speci-

fied on your tires.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine

oil

Driving at higher speeds on the high-

way consumes more fuel and is less

efficient than driving at a slower,

more moderate speed. Maintain a

moderate speed in order to conserve

fuel when driving on the highway.

Be sure to check both the engine

coolant level and the engine oil

before driving.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may

overheat the engine.

5-125

Driving your vehicle

Reducing the risk of a rollover

Your multi-purpose passenger vehi-

cle is defined as a Sports Utility

Vehicle (SUV). SUV's have higher

ground clearance and a narrower

track to make them capable of per-

forming in a wide variety of off-road

applications. The specific design

characteristics give them a higher

center of gravity than ordinary vehi-

cles making them more likely to roll

over if you make abrupt turns. Utility

vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehi-

cles. Due to this risk, driver and pas-

sengers are strongly recommended

to buckle their seat belts. In a rollover

crash, an unbelted person is signifi-

cantly more likely to die than a per-

son wearing a seat belt.

There are steps that a driver can

make to reduce the risk of a rollover.

If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or

abrupt maneuvers, do not load your

vehicle with heavy cargo on the roof,

and never modify your vehicle in any

way.

Utility vehicles have a signifi-

cantly higher rollover rate than

other types of vehicles. To pre-

vent rollovers or loss of control:

• Take corners at slower speeds

than you would with a passen-

ger vehicle.

• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt

maneuvers.

• Do not modify your vehicle in

any way that you would raise

the center of gravity.

• Keep tires properly inflated.

• Do not carry heavy cargo on

the roof.

WARNING

In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more

likely to die than a person wear-

ing a seat belt. Make sure all

passengers are wearing their

seat belts.

WARNING

5-126

Driving your vehicle

WWIINNTTEERR DDRRIIVVIINNGG

The severe weather conditions of

winter quickly wear out tires and

cause other problems. To minimize

winter driving problems, you should

take the following suggestions:

Snow or Icy Conditions

You need to keep sufficient distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle

in front of you.

Apply the brakes gently. Speeding,

rapid acceleration, sudden brake

applications, and sharp turns are

potentially very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine

braking to the fullest extent. Sudden

brake applications on snowy or icy

roads may cause the vehicle to skid.

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it

may be necessary to use snow tires

or to install tire chains on your tires.

Always carry emergency equipment.

Some of the items you may want to

carry include tire chains, tow straps

or chains, a flashlight, emergency

flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables,

a window scraper, gloves, ground

cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

Snow tires

If you mount snow tires on your vehi-

cle, make sure to use radial tires of

the same size and load range as the

original tires. Mount snow tires on all

four wheels to balance your vehicle’s

handling in all weather conditions.

The traction provided by snow tires

on dry roads may not be as high as

your vehicle's original equipment

tires. Check with the tire dealer for

maximum speed recommendations.

Information

Do not install studded tires without

first checking local, state and munici-

pal regulations for possible restric-

tions against their use.

Tire chains

Since the sidewalls of radial tires are

thinner than other types of tires, they

may be damaged by mounting some

types of tire chains on them.

Therefore, the use of snow tires is

recommended instead of tire chains.

Do not mount tire chains on vehicles

equipped with aluminum wheels; if

unavoidable use a wire type chain. If

tire chains must be used, use gen-

uine HYUNDAI parts and install the

tire chain after reviewing the instruc-

tions provided with the tire chains.

Damage to your vehicle caused by

improper tire chain use is not cov-

ered by your vehicle manufacturer's

warranty.

Snow tires should be equivalent

in size and type to the vehicle’s

standard tires. Otherwise, the

safety and handling of your

vehicle may be adversely affect-

ed.

WARNING

OTLE058036

5-127

Driving your vehicle

Information

• Install tire chains on the front tires.

It should be noted that installing tire

chains on the tires will provide a

greater driving force, but will not

prevent side skids.

• Do not install studded tires without

first checking local, state and

municipal regulations for possible

restrictions against their use.

Chain installation

When installing tire chains, follow the

manufacturer’s instructions and

mount them as tightly possible. Drive

slowly (less than 20 mph (30 km/h))

with chains installed. If you hear the

chains contacting the body or chas-

sis, stop and tighten them. If they still

make contact, slow down until the

noise stops. Remove the tire chains

as soon as you begin driving on

cleared roads.

When mounting snow chains, park

the vehicle on level ground away

from traffic. Turn on the vehicle

Hazard Warning Flasher and place a

triangular emergency warning device

behind the vehicle (if available).

Always place the vehicle in P (Park),

apply the parking brake and turn off

the engine before installing snow

chains.

The use of tire chains may

adversely affect vehicle han-

dling:

• Drive less than 20 mph

(30 km/h) or the chain manu-

facturer's recommended speed

limit, whichever is lower.

• Drive carefully and avoid

bumps, holes, sharp turns,

and other road hazards, which

may cause the vehicle to

bounce.

• Avoid sharp turns or locked

wheel braking.

WARNING

5-128

Driving your vehicle

- When using tire chains:

• Wrong size chains or improperly

installed chains can damage

your vehicle's brake lines, sus-

pension, body and wheels.

• Use SAE "S" class or wire

chains.

• If you hear noise caused by

chains contacting the body,

retighten the chain to prevent

contact with the vehicle body.

• To prevent body damage,

retighten the chains after driving

0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).

• Do not use tire chains on vehi-

cles equipped with aluminum

wheels. If unavoidable, use a

wire type chain.

• Use wire chains less than 0.59

inch (15 mm) wide to prevent

damage to the chain’s connec-

tion.

Winter Precautions

Use high quality ethylene glycol

coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high

quality ethylene glycol coolant in the

cooling system. It is the only type of

coolant that should be used because

it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-

ing system, lubricates the water

pump and prevents freezing. Be sure

to replace or replenish your coolant

in accordance with the maintenance

schedule in chapter 7. Before winter,

have your coolant tested to assure

that its freezing point is sufficient for

the temperatures anticipated during

the winter.

Change to "winter weight" oil if

necessary

In some climates it is recommended

that a lower viscosity "winter weight"

oil be used during cold weather. See

chapter 8 for recommendations. If

you aren't sure what weight oil you

should use, consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on

the battery system. Visually inspect

the battery and cables as described

in chapter 7. The level of charge in

your battery can be checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a

service station.

NOTICE

5-129

Driving your vehicle

Check spark plugs and ignition

system

Inspect your spark plugs as

described in chapter 7 and replace

them if necessary. Also check all

ignition wiring and components to be

sure they are not cracked, worn or

damaged in any way.

Use approved window washer

anti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window

washer system from freezing, add an

approved window washer anti-freeze

solution in accordance with instruc-

tions on the container. Window wash-

er anti-freeze is available from an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer and

most auto parts outlets. Do not use

engine coolant or other types of anti-

freeze as these may damage the

paint finish.

Do not let your parking brake

freeze

Under some conditions your parking

brake can freeze in the engaged

position. This is most likely to happen

when there is an accumulation of

snow or ice around or near the rear

brakes or if the brakes are wet. If

there is a risk the parking brake may

freeze, apply it only temporarily while

you put the gear selector lever in P

and block the rear wheels so the car

cannot roll. Then release the parking

brake.

Do not let ice and snow accu-

mulate underneath

Under some conditions, snow and

ice can build up under the fenders

and interfere with the steering. When

driving in severe winter conditions

where this may happen, you should

periodically check underneath the

car to be sure the movement of the

front wheels and the steering com-

ponents is not obstructed.

Don't place foreign objects or

materials in the engine com-

partment

Placement of foreign object or mate-

rials which prevent cooling of the

engine, in the engine compartment,

may cause a failure or combustion.

The manufacturer is not responsible

for the damage caused by such

placement.

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing,

squirt an approved de-icer fluid or

glycerine into the key opening. If a

lock is covered with ice, squirt it with

an approved de-icing fluid to remove

the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,

you may be able to thaw it out by

using a heated key. Handle the heat-

ed key with care to avoid injury.

5-130

Driving your vehicle

If you are considering to tow with your

vehicle, you should first check with

your state's Department of Motor

Vehicles to determine legal require-

ments. Since laws vary from state to

state the requirements for towing

trailers, vehicles, or other types of

vehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for

further details before towing.

Remember that trailering is different

than just driving your vehicle by itself.

Trailering means changes in han-

dling, durability, and fuel economy.

Successful, safe trailering requires

correct equipment, and it has to be

used properly. Damage to your vehi-

cle caused by improper trailer towing

is not covered by your vehicle manu-

facturer’s warranty.

This section contains many time-

tested, important trailering tips and

safety rules. Many of these are

important for your safety and that of

your passengers. Please read this

section carefully before you pull a

trailer.

If you decide to pull a trailer

Here are some important points if

you decide to pull a trailer:

• Consider using a sway control. You

can ask a trailer hitch dealer about

sway control.

• Do not do any towing with your

vehicle during its first 1,200 miles

(2,000 km) in order to allow the

engine to properly break in. Failure

to heed this caution may result in

serious engine or transmission

damage.

• When towing a trailer, be sure to

consult an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer for further information on

additional requirements such as a

towing kit, etc.

• Always drive your vehicle at a mod-

erate speed (less than 60 mph

(100 km/h)) or posted towing

speed limit.

• On a long uphill grade, do not

exceed 45 mph (70 km/h) or the

posted towing speed limit,

whichever is lower.

• Carefully observe the weight and

load limits provided in the following

pages.

TTRRAAIILLEERR TTOOWWIINNGG

Take the following precautions:

• If you don't use the correct

towing equipment, or if you

drive improperly while towing,

you can lose control of the

vehicle when pulling a trailer.

For example, if the trailer is

too heavy, the braking per-

formance may be reduced.

You and your passengers

could be seriously or fatally

injured. Pull a trailer only if

you have followed all the

steps in this section.

• Before towing, make sure the

total trailer weight, GCW

(Gross Combination Weight),

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight),

GAW (Gross Axle Weight ) and

trailer tongue load are all with-

in the limits.

WARNING

5-131

Driving your vehicle

Total trailer weight

What is the maximum safe weight of

a trailer? It should never weigh more

than the maximum trailer weight with

trailer brakes. But even that can be

too heavy. It depends on how you

plan to use your trailer. For example,

speed, altitude, road grades, outside

temperature and how often your vehi-

cle is used to pull a trailer are all

important. The ideal trailer weight can

also depend on any special equip-

ment that you have on your vehicle.

Tongue load

The tongue load is an important

weight to measure because it affects

the total Gross Vehicle Weight

(GVW) of your vehicle. The trailer

tongue should weigh a maximum of

10% of the total loaded trailer weight,

within the limits of the maximum trail-

er tongue load permissible.

After you've loaded your trailer,

weigh the trailer and then the tongue,

separately, to see if the weights are

proper. If they aren’t, you may be

able to correct them simply by mov-

ing some items around in the trailer.

OLMB053047

Tongue Load

Total Trailer Weight

OLMB053048

Gross Axle Weight

Gross Vehicle Weight

Take the following precautions:

• Never load a trailer with more

weight in the rear than in the

front. The front should be

loaded with approximately

60% of the total trailer load;

the rear should be loaded with

approximately 40% of the total

trailer load.

• Never exceed the maximum

weight limits of the trailer or

trailer towing equipment.

Improper loading can result in

damage to your vehicle and/or

personal injury. Check weights

and loading at a commercial

scale or highway patrol office

equipped with scales.

WARNING

5-132

Driving your vehicle

Trailer towing equipment

Hitches

It's important to have the correct

hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large

trucks going by, and rough roads are

a few reasons why you’ll need the

right hitch. Here are some rules to

follow:

• Do you have to make any holes in

the body of your vehicle when you

install a trailer hitch? If you do, then

be sure to seal the holes later

when you remove the hitch. If you

don’t seal them, carbon monoxide

(CO) from your exhaust can get

into your vehicle, as well as dirt

and water.

• The bumpers on your vehicle are

not intended for hitches. Do not

attach rental hitches or other

bumper-type hitches to them. Use

only a frame-mounted hitch that

does not attach to the bumper.

• A HYUNDAI trailer hitch accessory

is available at an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Reference weight when towing a trailer

Item

2.0 GDI 2.4 GDI

2WD AWD 2WD AWD

A/T A/T

Maximum trailer

weight

Without brake

system

1,650 (748) 1,650 (748)

With brake

system

2,000 (907) 2,000 (907)

Maximum permissible static

vertical load on the coupling

device

220 (100) 220 (100)

lbs (kg)

5-133

Driving your vehicle

Safety chains

You should always attach chains

between your vehicle and your trail-

er. Cross the safety chains under the

tongue of the trailer so that the

tongue will not drop to the road if it

becomes separated from the hitch.

Instructions about safety chains may

be provided by the hitch manufactur-

er or trailer manufacturer. Follow the

manufacturer’s recommendation for

attaching safety chains. Always leave

just enough slack so you can turn

with your trailer. And, never allow

safety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a brak-

ing system, make sure it conforms to

federal and/or local regulations and

that it is properly installed and oper-

ating correctly.

If your trailer weighs more than the

maximum trailer weight without trail-

er brakes loaded, then it needs its

own brakes and they must be ade-

quate. Be sure to read and follow the

instructions for the trailer brakes so

you’ll be able to install, adjust and

maintain them properly. Do not tap

into your vehicle's brake system.

Trailer brakes must be applied sepa-

rately from your vehicle's brake sys-

tem.

Driving with a trailer

Towing a trailer requires a certain

amount of experience. Before setting

out for the open road, you must get

to know your trailer. Acquaint your-

self with the feel of handling and

braking with the added weight of the

trailer. And always keep in mind that

the vehicle you are driving is now

longer and not nearly as responsive

as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer

hitch and platform, safety chains,

electrical connector(s), lights, tires

and brakes.

During your trip, occasionally check

to be sure that the load is secure,

and that the lights and trailer brakes

are still working.

Do not use a trailer with its own

brakes unless you are absolute-

ly certain that you have properly

set up the brake system. Use an

experienced, competent trailer

shop for this work.

WARNING

5-134

Driving your vehicle

Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the

vehicle ahead as you would when

driving your vehicle without a trailer.

This can help you avoid situations

that require heavy braking and sud-

den turns.

Passing

You will need more passing distance

up ahead when you’re towing a trail-

er. And, because of the increased

vehicle length, you’ll need to go

much farther beyond the passed

vehicle before you can return to your

lane.

Backing up

Hold the bottom of the steering

wheel with one hand. Then, to move

the trailer to the left, move your hand

to the left. To move the trailer to the

right, move your hand to the right.

Always back up slowly and, if possi-

ble, have someone guide you.

Making turns

When you’re turning with a trailer,

make wider turns than normal. Do

this so your trailer won't strike soft

shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or

other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden

maneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn signals

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle

has to have a different turn signal

flasher and extra wiring. The green

arrows on your instrument panel will

flash whenever you signal a turn or

lane change. Properly connected,

the trailer lights will also flash to alert

other drivers you're about to turn,

change lanes, or stop.

When towing a trailer, the green

arrows on your instrument panel will

flash for turns even if the bulbs on the

trailer are burned out. Thus, you may

think drivers behind you are seeing

your signals when, in fact, they are

not. It’s important to check occasion-

ally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still

working. You must also check the

lights every time you disconnect and

then reconnect the wires.

Do not connect a trailer lighting

system directly to your vehi-

cle's lighting system. Use an

approved trailer wiring harness.

Failure to do so could result in

damage to the vehicle electrical

system and/or personal injury.

Consult an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer for assistance.

WARNING

5-135

Driving your vehicle

Driving on hills

Reduce speed and shift to a lower

gear before you start down a long or

steep downgrade. If you don't shift

down, you might have to use your

brakes so much that they would get

overheated and may not operate effi-

ciently.

On a long uphill grade, shift down

and reduce your speed to around 45

mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possibil-

ity of engine and transmission over-

heating.

If your trailer weighs more than the

maximum trailer weight without trailer

brakes, you should drive in D (Drive)

when towing a trailer. Operating your

vehicle in D (Drive) when towing a

trailer will minimize heat build-up and

extend the life of your transmission.

To prevent engine and/or trans-

mission overheating:

• When towing a trailer on steep

grades (in excess of 6%) pay

close attention to the engine

coolant temperature gauge to

ensure the engine does not

overheat. If the needle of the

coolant temperature gauge

moves towards "H" (HOT), pull

over and stop as soon as it is

safe to do so, and allow the

engine to idle until it cools

down.You may proceed once the

engine has cooled sufficiently.

• When towing a trailer, your vehi-

cle speed may be much slower

than the general flow of traffic,

especially when climbing an

uphill grade. Use the right hand

lane when towing a trailer on an

uphill grade. Choose your vehi-

cle speed according to the max-

imum posted speed limit for

vehicles with trailers, the steep-

ness of the grade, and your trail-

er weight.

Parking on hills

Generally, if you have a trailer attached

to your vehicle, you should not park

your vehicle on a hill.

However, if you ever have to park your

trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:

1. Pull the vehicle into the parking

area.

Turn the steering wheel in the

direction of the curb (right if head-

ed down hill, left if headed up hill).

2. Shift the vehicle to P (Park).

3. Set the parking brake and shut off

the vehicle.

4. Place wheel chocks under the

trailer wheels on the down hill side

of the wheels.

NOTICE

5-136

Driving your vehicle

5. Start the vehicle, apply the brakes,

shift to neutral, release the park-

ing brake and slowly release the

brakes until the trailer chocks

absorb the load.

6. Reapply the brakes and parking

brakes.

7. Move the shift lever to P (Park).

8. Shut off the vehicle and release

the vehicle brakes but leave the

parking brake set.

Driving the vehicle after it has

been parked on a hill

1. With the gear shift lever in P

(Park), apply the brakes and hold

the brake pedal down while per-

forming the following:

• Start your engine;

• Shift into gear; and

• Release the parking brake.

2. Slowly remove your foot from the

brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear

of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up

and store the chocks.

Maintenance when trailer tow-

ing

Your vehicle will need service more

often when you regularly pull a trail-

er. Important items to pay particular

attention to include engine oil, auto-

matic transmission fluid, axle lubri-

cant and cooling system fluid. Brake

condition is another important item to

frequently check. If you’re trailering,

it’s a good idea to review these items

before you start your trip. Don't forget

to also maintain your trailer and

hitch. Follow the maintenance sched-

ule that accompanied your trailer and

check it periodically. Preferably,

inspect the vehicle and trailer at the

start of each day's driving. Inspect

the hitch mounting to make sure the

hitch is properly secured to the vehi-

cle. Inspect the trailer electrical

wiring to make sure brake lights, turn

signal lights, running lights, and haz-

ard lights are working properly.

• Do not get out of the vehicle

without the parking brake

firmly set. If you have left the

engine running, the vehicle

can move suddenly. You and

others could be seriously or

fatally injured.

• Do not apply the accelerator

pedal to hold the vehicle on

an uphill.

WARNING

5-137

Driving your vehicle

To prevent vehicle damage:

• Due to higher load during trailer

usage, overheating might occur

on hot days or during uphill driv-

ing. If the coolant gauge indi-

cates over-heating, switch off

the air conditioner and stop the

vehicle in a safe area to cool

down the engine.

• When towing check the automat-

ic transmission fluid more fre-

quently.

NOTICE

5-138

Driving your vehicle

Two labels on your driver's door sill

show how much weight your vehicle

was designed to carry: the Tire and

Loading Information Label and the

Certification Label.

Before loading your vehicle, familiar-

ize yourself with the following terms

for determining your vehicle’s weight

ratings, from the vehicle's specifica-

tions and the Certification Label:

Base Curb Weight

This is the weight of the vehicle

including a full tank of fuel and all

standard equipment. It does not

include passengers, cargo, or option-

al equipment.

Vehicle Curb Weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle

when you picked it up from your deal-

er plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo Weight

This figure includes all weight added

to the Base Curb Weight, including

cargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross Axle Weight)

This is the total weight placed on

each axle (front and rear) - including

vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

This is the maximum allowable

weight that can be carried by a single

axle (front or rear). These numbers

are shown on the Certification Label.

The total load on each axle must

never exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

This is the Base Curb Weight plus

actual Cargo Weight plus passen-

gers.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating)

This is the maximum allowable

weight of the fully loaded vehicle

(including all options, equipment,

passengers and cargo). The GVWR

is shown on the Certification Label

located on the driver’s door sill.

VVEEHHIICCLLEE LLOOAADD LLIIMMIITT

5-139

Driving your vehicle

Tire Loading Information Label

OTLA058146/OTLA058273/OTLA058140

OTL058146N/OTL058273N/OTL058140N

The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your

vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

5-140

Driving your vehicle

Vehicle capacity weight

970 lbs. (440 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-

mum combined weight of occupants

and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped

with a trailer, the combined weight

includes the tongue load.

Seating capacity

Total : 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons,

Rear seat : 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum

number of occupants including a

driver, your vehicle may carry.

However, the seating capacity may

be reduced based upon the weight of

all of the occupants, and the weight

of the cargo being carried or towed.

Do not overload the vehicle as there

is a limit to the total weight, or load

limit including occupants and cargo,

the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity

Without trailer brakes

1000 lbs (454 kg)

With trailer brakes

1500 lbs (680 kg)

Towing capacity is the maximum

trailer weight including its cargo

weight that your vehicle can tow.

Cargo capacity

The cargo capacity of your vehicle

will increase or decrease depending

on the weight and the number of

occupants and the tongue load, if

your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.

Steps for determining correct

load limit

1. Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will

be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and lug-

gage load capacity. For example, if

the "XXX" amount equals 1400

lbs. and there will be five 150 lb

passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5-141

Driving your vehicle

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may

not safely exceed the available

cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-

er, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your vehi-

cle.

Do not overload the vehicle as

there is a limit to the total

weight, or load limit, including

occupants and cargo, the vehi-

cle can carry. Overloading can

shorten the life of the vehicle. If

the GVWR or the GAWR is

exceeded, parts on the vehicle

can break, and it can change the

handling of your vehicle. These

could cause you to lose control

and result in an accident.

WARNING

5-142

Driving your vehicle

Example 1

Maximum Load

(1400 lbs.)

(635 kg)

Passenger Weight

(150 lbs. × 2 = 300 lbs.)

(68 kg × 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight

(1100 lbs.)

(499 kg)

Example 2

Maximum Load

(1400 lbs.)

(635 kg)

Passenger Weight

(150 lbs. × 5 = 750 lbs.)

(68 kg × 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight

(650 lbs.)

(295 kg)

Example 3

Maximum Load

(1400 lbs.)

(635 kg)

Passenger Weight

(172 lbs. × 5 = 860 lbs.)

(78 kg × 5 = 390 kg)

Cargo Weight

(540 lbs.)

(245 kg)

≥≥

5-143

Driving your vehicle

Certification label

The certification label is located on

the driver’s door sill at the center pil-

lar and shows the maximum allow-

able weight of the fully loaded vehi-

cle. This is called the GVWR (Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR

includes the weight of the vehicle, all

occupants, fuel and cargo.

This label also tells you the maxi-

mum weight that can be supported

by the front and rear axles, called

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

The total weight of the vehicle,

including all occupants, accessories,

cargo, and trailer tongue load must

not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out

the actual loads on your front and

rear axles, you need to go to a weigh

station and weigh your vehicle. Be

sure to spread out your load equally

on both sides of the centerline.

Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would not

be covered by your warranty. Do

not overload your vehicle.

NOTICE

OBH059070

Overloading

• Never exceed the GVWR for

your vehicle, the GAWR for

either the front or rear axle

and vehicle capacity weight.

Exceeding these ratings can

affect your vehicle’s handling

and braking ability, and cause

an accident.

• Do not overload your vehicle.

Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in your

vehicle’s tires and possible

tire failure, increased stop-

ping distances and poor vehi-

cle handling-all of which may

result in a crash.

WARNING

If you carry items inside your

vehicle (e.g., suitcases, tools,

packages, or anything else),

they are moving as fast as the

vehicle. If you have to stop or

turn quickly, or if there is a

crash, the items will keep going

and can cause an injury if they

strike the driver or a passenger.

• Put items in the cargo area of

your vehicle. Try to spread the

weight evenly.

• Do not stack items, like suit-

cases, inside the vehicle

above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured

child restraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something

inside the vehicle, secure it.

WARNING

What to do in an emergency

Hazard Warning Flasher .......................................6-2

In Case of an Emergency While Driving.............6-2

If the Engine Stalls While Driving .................................6-2

If the Engine Stalls at a Crossroad or Crossing........6-2

If you Have a Flat Tire While Driving ..........................6-3

If the Engine Will Not Start..................................6-3

If the Engine Doesn't Turn Over or

Turns Over Slowly .............................................................6-3

If the Engine Turns Over Normally but

Doesn't Start ......................................................................6-3

Jump Starting..........................................................6-4

If The Engine Overheats.......................................6-6

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).........6-8

Check Tire Pressure .........................................................6-8

Tire Pressure Monitoring System.................................6-9

Low Tire Pressure Telltale ............................................6-10

Low Tire Pressure LCD Display with

Position Indicator ............................................................6-10

TPMS Malfunction Indicator ........................................6-11

Changing a Tire with TPMS..........................................6-12

If You Have a Flat Tire........................................6-14

Jack and Tools .................................................................6-14

Changing Tires.................................................................6-15

Towing ...................................................................6-21

Towing Service.................................................................6-21

Removable Towing Hook ...............................................6-22

Emergency Towing..........................................................6-23

Tie-down Hook................................................................6-25

6-2

The hazard warning flasher serves

as a warning to other drivers to exer-

cise extreme caution when approach-

ing, overtaking, or passing your vehi-

cle.

It should be used whenever emer-

gency repairs are being made or

when the vehicle is stopped near the

edge of a roadway.

To turn the hazard warning flasher

on or off, press the hazard warning

flasher button. The button is located

in the center fascia panel. Both the

left and right turn signal lights will

flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher oper-

ates whether your vehicle is run-

ning or not.

• The turn signals do not work when

the hazard flasher is on.

If the Engine Stalls While

Driving

• Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau-

tiously off the road to a safe place.

• Turn on your hazard warning flash-

er.

• Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle will not start, contact an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer or

seek other qualified assistance.

If the Engine Stalls at a

Crossroad or Crossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or

crossing, if safe to do so, move the

shift lever to the N (Neutral) position

and then push the vehicle to a safe

location.

HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG FFLLAASSHHEERR

What to do in an emergency

IINN CCAASSEE OOFF AANN EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY

WWHHIILLEE DDRRIIVVIINNGG

OTL068001N

6-3

What to do in an emergency

If you Have a Flat Tire While

Driving

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

• Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal and let the vehicle slow down

while driving straight ahead. Do not

apply the brakes immediately or

attempt to pull off the road as this

may cause loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident. When the

vehicle has slowed to such a speed

that it is safe to do so, brake care-

fully and pull off the road. Drive off

the road as far as possible and park

on firm, level ground. If you are on

a divided highway, do not park in

the median area between the two

traffic lanes.

• When the vehicle is stopped, press

the hazard warning flasher button,

move the shift lever into P(Park),

and apply the parking brake, and

place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position.

• Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle. Be sure they all get out on

the side of the vehicle that is away

from traffic.

• When changing a flat tire, follow

the instructions provided later in

this chapter.

If the Engine Doesn't Turn

Over or Turns Over Slowly

• Be sure the shift lever is in N

(Neutral) or P (Park). The engine

starts only when the shift lever is in

N (Neutral) or P (Park).

• Check the battery connections to

be sure they are clean and tight.

• Turn on the interior light. If the light

dims or goes out when you operate

the starter, the battery is drained.

Do not push or pull the vehicle to

start it. This could cause damage to

your vehicle. See instructions for

"Jump Starting" provided in this

chapter.

If the Engine Turns Over

Normally but Doesn't Start

Check the fuel level and add fuel if

necessary.

If the engine still does not start, have

your vehicle checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

IIFF TTHHEE EENNGGIINNEE WWIILLLL NNOOTT SSTTAARRTT

Push or pull starting the vehicle

may cause the catalytic con-

verter to overload which can

lead to damage to the emission

control system.

CAUTION

6-4

What to do in an emergency

Jump starting can be dangerous if

done incorrectly. Follow the jump

starting procedure in this section to

avoid serious injury or damage to

your vehicle. If in doubt about how to

properly jump start your vehicle, we

strongly recommend that you have a

service technician or towing service

do it for you.

JJUUMMPP SSTTAARRTTIINNGG

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH to you or bystanders,

always follow these precautions

when working near or handling

the battery:

Always read and follow

instructions carefully

when handling a battery.

Wear eye protection

designed to protect the

eyes from acid splashes.

Keep all flames, sparks,

or smoking materials

away from the battery.

Hydrogen is always

present in battery cells,

is highly combustible,

and may explode if ignit-

ed.

Keep batteries out of

reach of children.

WARNING

Batteries contain sulfu-

ric acid which is highly

corrosive. Do not allow

acid to contact your

eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush

your eyes with clean water for at

least 15 minutes and get imme-

diate medical attention. If acid

gets on your skin, thoroughly

wash the area. If you feel pain or

a burning sensation, get med-

ical attention immediately.

• When lifting a plastic-cased

battery, excessive pressure

on the case may cause battery

acid to leak. Lift with a battery

carrier or with your hands on

opposite corners.

• Do not attempt to jump start

your vehicle if your battery is

frozen.

• NEVER attempt to recharge

the battery when the vehicle’s

battery cables are connected

to the battery.

6-5

What to do in an emergency

Information

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to the

environment and human

health. Dispose the battery

according to your local law(s)

or regulations.

To prevent damage to your vehi-

cle:

• Only use a 12-volt power supply

(battery or jumper system) to

jump start your vehicle.

• Do not attempt to jump start

your vehicle by push-starting.

Jump starting procedure

1. Position the vehicles close enough

that the jumper cables will reach,

but do not allow the vehicles to

touch.

2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in

the engine compartment at all

times, even when the vehicles are

turned off.

3. Turn off all electrical devices such

as radios, lights, air conditioning,

etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park)

and set the parking brakes. Turn

both vehicles OFF.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the

exact sequence shown in the illus-

tration. First connect one jumper

cable to the red, positive (+)

jumper terminal of your vehicle

(1).

5. Connect the other end of the

jumper cable to the red, positive

(+) battery/jumper terminal of the

assisting vehicle (2).

6. Connect the second jumper cable

to the black, negative (-) battery/

chassis ground of the assisting

vehicle (3).

NOTICE

• The electrical ignition system

works with high voltage.

NEVER touch these compo-

nents with the engine running

or when the ignition switch is

in the ON position.

1VQA4001

6-6

IIFF TTHHEE EENNGGIINNEE OOVVEERRHHEEAATTSS

What to do in an emergency

7. Connect the other end of the sec-

ond jumper cable to the black,

negative (-) chassis ground of

your vehicle (4).

Do not allow the jumper cables to

contact anything except the cor-

rect battery or jumper terminals or

the correct ground. Do not lean

over the battery when making

connections.

8. Start the engine of the assisting

vehicle and let it run at approxi-

mately 2,000 rpm for a few min-

utes. Then start your vehicle.

If your vehicle will not start after a

few attempts, it probably requires

servicing. In this event please seek

qualified assistance. If the cause of

your battery discharging is not

apparent, have your vehicle checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Disconnect the jumper cables in the

exact reverse order you connected

them:

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from

the black, negative (-) chassis

ground of your vehicle (4).

2. Disconnect the other end of the

jumper cable from the black, neg-

ative (-) battery/chassis ground of

the assisting vehicle (3).

3. Disconnect the second jumper

cable from the red, positive (+)

battery/jumper terminal of the

assisting vehicle (2).

4. Disconnect the other end of the

jumper cable from the red, positive

(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle

(1).

If your temperature gauge indicates

overheating, you experience a loss

of power, or hear loud pinging or

knocking, the engine may be over-

heating. If this happens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon

as it is safe to do so.

2. Place the shift lever in P (Park)

and set the parking brake. If the air

conditioning is ON, turn it OFF.

3. If engine coolant is running out

under the vehicle or steam is com-

ing out from the hood, stop the

engine. Do not open the hood until

the coolant has stopped running

or the steaming has stopped. If

there is no visible loss of engine

coolant and no steam, leave the

engine running and check to be

sure the engine cooling fan is

operating. If the fan is not running,

turn the engine off.

6-7

What to do in an emergency

4. Check for coolant leaking from the

radiator, hoses or under the vehi-

cle. (If the air conditioning had

been in use, it is normal for cold

water to be draining from it when

you stop.)

5. If engine coolant is leaking out,

stop the engine immediately and

call the nearest authorized

HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

6. If you cannot find the cause of the

overheating, wait until the engine

temperature has returned to nor-

mal. Then, if coolant has been

lost, carefully add coolant to the

reservoir to bring the fluid level in

the reservoir up to the halfway

mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping

alert for further signs of overheat-

ing. If overheating happens again,

call an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er for assistance.

While the engine is

running, keep hands,

clothing and tools

away from the mov-

ing parts such as the

cooling fan and drive

belt to prevent seri-

ous injury.

WARNING

Serious loss of coolant indi-

cates a leak in the cooling sys-

tem and should be checked as

soon as possible by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

Your vehicle is

equipped with a pres-

surized coolant

reserve tank. NEVER

remove the coolant

reserve tank cap or the radiator

drain plug while the engine and

radiator are HOT. Hot coolant

and steam may blow out under

pressure, causing serious

injury.

Turn the engine off and wait

until the engine cools down.

Use extreme care when remov-

ing the coolant reserve tank

cap. Wrap a towel or thick rag

around it, and turn it counter-

clockwise slowly to release

some of the pressure from the

system. Step back while the

pressure is released.

When you are sure all the pres-

sure has been released, contin-

ue turning the cap counter-

clockwise to remove it.

WARNING

6-8

What to do in an emergency

TTIIRREE PPRREESSSSUURREE MMOONNIITTOORRIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM ((TTPPMMSS))

(1) Low Tire Pressure / TPMS

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(2) Low Tire Pressure / Tire

Pressure Monitor / TPMS

Malfunction Display (shown on

the cluster LCD display)

Check Tire Pressure

• You can check the tire pressure in

the Assist mode on the cluster.

Refer to the "LCD Display

Mode" section in chapter 3.

• Tire pressure is displayed after a

few minutes of driving after initial

engine start up.

• If tire pressure is not displayed

when the vehicle is stopped, “Drive

to display” message will appear.

After driving, check the tire pres-

sure.

• The displayed tire pressure values

may differ from those measured

with a tire pressure gauge.

• You can change the tire pressure

unit in the User Settings Mode on

the cluster.

- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to the "User

Settings Mode" section in

chapter 3).

OTLE058269

OTLE068003

OTLE058268

6-9

What to do in an emergency

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-

vided), should be checked monthly

when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehi-

cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-

ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If

your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for

those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your

vehicle has been equipped with a tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

that illuminates a low tire pressure

telltale when one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pres-

sure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-

cantly under-inflated tire causes the

tire to overheat and can lead to tire

failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-

ciency and tire tread life, and may

affect the vehicle's handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver's responsi-

bility to maintain correct tire pres-

sure, even if under-inflation has not

reached the level to trigger illumina-

tion of the TPMS low tire pressure

telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped

with a TPMS malfunction indicator to

indicate when the system is not

operating properly. The TPMS mal-

function indicator is combined with

the low tire pressure telltale. When

the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximate-

ly one minute and then remain con-

tinuously illuminated. This sequence

will continue upon subsequent vehi-

cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-

tion exists.

When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be

able to detect or signal low tire pres-

sure as intended. TPMS malfunc-

tions may occur for a variety of rea-

sons, including the installation of

replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or alter-

nate tires and wheels allow the

TPMS to continue to function proper-

ly.

Over-inflation or under-inflation

can reduce tire life, adversely

affect vehicle handling, and

lead to sudden tire failure that

may cause loss of vehicle con-

trol resulting in an accident.

WARNING

6-10

What to do in an emergency

If any of the below happens, have

the system checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

1. The Low Tire Pressure TPMS

Malfunction Indicator does not

illuminate for 3 seconds when

the ignition switch is placed to

the ON position or engine is

running.

2. The TPMS Malfunction Indicator

remains illuminated after blink-

ing for approximately 1 minute.

3. The Low Tire Pressure LCD dis-

play remains illuminated

Low Tire Pressure

Telltale

Low Tire Pressure LCD

Display with Position Indicator

When the tire pressure monitoring

system warning indicators are illumi-

nated and the warning message is

displayed on the cluster LCD display,

one or more of your tires is signifi-

cantly under-inflated. The LCD posi-

tion indicator will indicate which tire

is significantly under-inflated by illu-

minating the corresponding position

light.

If any of your tire pressures are indi-

cated as being low, immediately

reduce your speed, avoid hard cor-

nering, and anticipate increased

stopping distances. You should stop

and check your tires as soon as pos-

sible. Inflate the tires to the proper

pressure as indicated on the vehi-

cle’s placard or tire inflation pressure

label located on the driver’s side cen-

ter pillar outer panel.

If you cannot reach a service station

or if the tire cannot hold the newly

added air, replace the low pressure

tire with the spare tire.

The Low Tire Pressure LCD position

indicator will remain on and the

TPMS Malfunction Indicator may

blink for one minute and then remain

illuminated until you have the low

pressure tire repaired and replaced

on the vehicle.

The spare tire is not equipped with

a tire pressure sensor.

NOTICE

OTLE058268

6-11

What to do in an emergency

TPMS Malfunction

Indicator

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator will

illuminate after it blinks for approxi-

mately one minute when there is a

problem with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System.

Have the system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon

as possible.

If there is a malfunction with the

TPMS, the individual tire pres-

sures in the cluster LCD display

will not be available. Have the sys-

tem checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

NOTICE

During winter or cold weather,

the TPMS indicator may illumi-

nate if the tire pressures were

set when the outside tempera-

ture was warm. As the outside

air becomes colder, the pres-

sure in the tires will decrease.

Similarly, if the outside air

becomes warmer, the pressure

in the tires will increase. As you

drive your vehicle, the tempera-

ture of the tires will heat up,

therefore the tire pressures will

increase. Check and adjust your

tire pressures regularly before

driving to make sure your vehi-

cle is operating at the correct

pressures as designed.

CAUTION

Low pressure damage

Significantly low tire pressure

makes the vehicle unstable and

can contribute to loss of vehicle

control and increased braking

distances.

Continued driving on low pres-

sure tires can cause the tires to

overheat and fail.

WARNING

6-12

What to do in an emergency

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator

may illuminate after blinking for

one minute if the vehicle is near

electric power supply cables or

radio transmitters such as police

stations, government and public

offices, broadcasting stations,

military installations, airports,

transmitting towers, etc.

Additionally, the TPMS Malfunction

Indicator may illuminate if snow

chains are used or electronic

devices such as computers, charg-

ers, remote starters, navigation,

etc. This may interfere with normal

operation of the TPMS.

Changing a Tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire

Pressure and LCD position indicator

will come on. Have the flat tire

repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible or

replace the flat tire with the spare

tire.

The spare tire does not come with a

tire pressure monitoring sensor.

When the low pressure tire or the flat

tire is replaced with the spare tire,

the Low Tire Pressure LCD position

indicator will remain on. Also, the

TPMS Malfunction Indicator will illu-

minate after blinking for one minute if

the vehicle is driven at speed above

15.5 mph (25 km/h) for approximate-

ly 20 minutes.

Once the original tire equipped with

a tire pressure monitoring sensor is

reinflated to the recommended pres-

sure and reinstalled on the vehicle,

the Low Tire Pressure LCD position

indicator and TPMS Malfunction

Indicator will go off within a few min-

utes of driving.

If the indicators do not disappear

after a few minutes, please visit an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire

pressure sensor mounted inside the

tire behind the valve stem (except for

the spare tire). You must use TPMS

specific wheels. It is recommended

that you always have your tires serv-

iced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

A cold tire means the vehicle has

been sitting for 3 hours and driven for

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3

hour period.

Allow the tire to cool before measur-

ing the inflation pressure. Always be

sure the tire is cold before inflating to

the recommended pressure.

NOTICE

Never use a puncture-repairing

agent not approved by HYUNDAI

dealer to repair and/or inflate a

low pressure tire. Tire sealant

not approved by HYUNDAI deal-

er may damage the tire pressure

sensor.

CAUTION

6-13

What to do in an emergency

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

3. Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate

the equipment.

• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire dam-

age caused by external fac-

tors such as nails or road

debris.

• If you feel any vehicle instabil-

ity, immediately take your foot

off the accelerator, apply the

brakes gradually with light

force, and slowly move to a

safe position off the road.

WARNING

Tampering with, modifying, or

disabling the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)

components may interfere with

the system's ability to warn the

driver of low tire pressure con-

ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-

tions. Tampering with, modify-

ing, or disabling the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) components may void

the warranty for that portion of

the vehicle.

WARNING

6-14

What to do in an emergency

Jack and Tools

➀ Jack handle

② Jack

③ Wheel nut wrench

The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug

nut wrench are stored in the luggage

compartment under the luggage box

cover.

The jack is provided for emergency

tire changing only.

Turn the winged hold down bolt

counterclockwise to remove the

spare tire.

Store the spare tire in the same com-

partment by turning the winged hold

down bolt clockwise.

To prevent the spare tire and tools

from "rattling", store them in their

proper location.

IIFF YYOOUU HHAAVVEE AA FFLLAATT TTIIRREE

Changing a tire can be danger-

ous. Follow the instructions in

this section when changing a

tire to reduce the risk of serious

injury or death.

WARNING

OTLE068004

OTL065005

Be careful as you use the jack

handle to stay clear of the flat

end. The flat end has sharp

edges that could cause cuts.

CAUTION

6-15

What to do in an emergency

If it is hard to loosen the tire hold-

down wing bolt by hand, you can

loosen it easily using the jack handle.

1. Put the jack handle (1) inside of

the tire hold-down wing bolt.

2. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt

counterclockwise with the jack

handle.

Changing Tires

A vehicle can slip or roll off of a

jack causing serious injury or

death to you or those nearby.

Take the following safety pre-

cautions:

• Never place any portion of

your body under a vehicle that

is supported by a jack.

• NEVER attempt to change a

tire in the lane of traffic.

ALWAYS move the vehicle

completely off the road on

level, firm ground away from

traffic before trying to change

a tire. If you cannot find a

level, firm place off the road,

call a towing service for assis-

tance.

• Be sure to use the jack pro-

vided with the vehicle.

• ALWAYS place the jack on the

designated jacking positions

on the vehicle and NEVER on

the bumpers or any other part

of the vehicle for jacking sup-

port.

• Do not start or run the engine

while the vehicle is on the

jack.

• Do not allow anyone to remain

in the vehicle while it is on the

jack.

• Keep children away from the

road and the vehicle.

WARNING

OTLE065040

6-16

What to do in an emergency

Follow these steps to change your

vehicle’s tire:

1. Park on a level, firm surface.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park),

apply the parking brake, and place

the ignition switch in the LOCK/

OFF position.

3. Press the hazard warning flasher

button.

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,

jack, jack handle, and spare tire

from the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of the

tire diagonally opposite of the tire

you are changing.

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-

terclockwise one turn each in the

order shown above, but do not

remove any lug nuts until the tire

has been raised off of the ground.

OTLE068012

Block

OTLE068013

6-17

What to do in an emergency

7. Locate the jack-lifting point closest

to the flat tire that you wish to

change. The jack-lifting locations

have small brackets welded to the

frame with two notches and two

dimples just on the inner portion of

the side seal under the vehicle.

Align the jack under the jack-lifting

point.

Never apply the jack to any other

position or part of the vehicle other

than under one of the jack-lifting

points. Doing so may damage the

side seal molding or another part

of the vehicle.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack

and turn it clockwise, raising the

vehicle until the tire clears the

ground. Make sure the vehicle is

stable on the jack.

9. Continue to loosen the lug nuts

with the wheel lug nut wrench and

remove them with your fingers.

Remove the wheel from the studs

and lay it flat on the ground out of

the way. Remove any dirt or debris

from the studs, mounting sur-

faces, and wheel.

10. Install the spare tire onto the

studs of the hub.

11. Tighten the lug nuts with your fin-

gers onto the studs with the

smaller end of the lug nuts clos-

est to the wheel.

12. Lower the vehicle to the ground

by turning the jack handle coun-

terclockwise.

OTLE068014 OTLE068032

■ Front ■ Rear

6-18

What to do in an emergency

13. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to

tighten the lug nuts in the order

shown. Double-check each lug

nut until they are tight. After

changing tires, have an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer tighten the

lug nuts to their proper torque as

soon as possible. The wheel lug

nut should be tightened to

79~94 lbf·ft (11~13 kgf·m).

If you have a tire gauge, check the

tire pressure (see “Tires and Wheels”

in chapter 8 for tire pressure instruc-

tions.). If the pressure is lower or

higher than recommended, drive

slowly to the nearest service station

and adjust it to the recommended

pressure. Always reinstall the valve

cap after checking or adjusting tire

pressure. If the cap is not replaced,

air may leak from the tire. If you lose

a valve cap, buy another and install it

as soon as possible. After changing

tires, secure the flat tire and return

the jack and tools to their proper stor-

age locations.

• Check the tire pressure as soon

as possible after installing a

spare tire. Adjust it to the rec-

ommended pressure.

• For safety, check and re-tighten

the wheel lug nuts after driving

about 30 miles (50 km). Recheck

to make sure the lug nuts are

secure after about 600 miles

(1,000 km).

If any of the equipment such as the

jack, lug nuts, studs, or other equip-

ment is damaged or in poor condi-

tion, do not attempt to change the

tire and call for assistance.

NOTICE

OTL065007

■ Rear

Your vehicle has metric threads

on the studs and lug nuts. Make

certain during tire changing

that the same nuts that were

removed are reinstalled. If you

have to replace your lug nuts

make sure they have metric

threads to avoid damaging the

studs and ensure the wheel is

properly secured to the hub.

Consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

6-19

What to do in an emergency

Use of compact spare tires

Compact spare tires are designed for

emergency use only. Drive carefully

on the compact spare tire and

always follow the safety precautions.

When driving with the compact spare

tire mounted to your vehicle:

• Check the tire pressure after

installing the compact spare tire.

The compact spare tire should be

inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).

• Do not take this vehicle through an

automatic car wash while the com-

pact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use the compact spare tire

on any other vehicle because this

tire has been designed especially

for your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread life

is shorter than a regular tire.

Inspect your compact spare tire

regularly and replace worn com-

pact spare tires with the same size

and design, mounted on the same

wheel.

• Do not use more than one compact

spare tire at a time.

When the original tire and wheel

are repaired and reinstalled on the

vehicle, the lug nut torque must be

set correctly. The correct lug nut

tightening torque is 79~94 lbf·ft

(11~13 kgf·m).

NOTICE

To prevent compact spare tire

failure and loss of control pos-

sibly resulting in an accident:

• Use the compact spare tire

only in an emergency.

• NEVER operate your vehicle

over 50 mph (80 km/h).

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s

maximum load rating or the

load carrying capacity shown

on the sidewall of the com-

pact spare tire.

• Do not use the compact spare

tire continuously. Repair or

replace the original tire as

soon as possible to avoid fail-

ure of the compact spare tire.

WARNING

6-20

What to do in an emergency

Jack label

To prevent damaging the com-

pact spare tire and your vehicle:

• Drive slowly enough for the

road conditions to avoid all

hazards, such as a potholes

or debris.

• Avoid driving over obstacles.

The compact spare tire diame-

ter is smaller than the diame-

ter of a conventional tire and

reduces the ground clearance

approximately 1 inch (25 mm).

• Do not use tire chains on the

compact spare tire. Because

of the smaller size, a tire chain

will not fit properly.

• Do not use the compact spare

tire on any other wheels, nor

should standard tires, snow

tires, wheel covers or trim

rings be used with the com-

pact spare wheel.

CAUTION

The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.

■ Example

OHYK065011

1. Model Name

2. Maximum allowable load

3. When using the jack, set your

parking brake.

4. When using the jack, stop the

engine.

5. Do not get under a vehicle that is

supported by a jack.

6. The designated locations under

the frame

7. When supporting the vehicle, the

base plate of jack must be vertical

under the lifting point.

8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles

with manual transmission or move

the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion on vehicles with automatic

transmission.

9. The jack should be used on firm

level ground.

10. Jack manufacture

11. Production date

12. Representative company and

address

6-21

What to do in an emergency

Towing Service

If emergency towing is necessary,

we recommend having it done by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a

commercial tow-truck service.

Proper lifting and towing procedures

are necessary to prevent damage to

the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies

or flatbed is recommended.

On 2WD vehicle, it is acceptable to

tow the vehicle with the rear wheels

on the ground (without dollies) and

the front wheels off the ground. If any

of the loaded wheels or suspension

components are damaged or the

vehicle is being towed with the front

wheels on the ground, use a towing

dolly under the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial

tow truck and wheel dollies are not

used, the front of the vehicle should

always be lifted, not the rear.

If your vehicle is an AWD vehicle, it

must be towed with a wheel lift and

dollies or flatbed equipment with all

the wheels off the ground.

An AWD vehicle should never be

towed with the wheels on the

ground. This can cause serious

damage to the transaxle or the

AWD system.

• Do not tow the vehicle with the

front wheels on the ground as

this may cause damage to the

vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-type

equipment. Use a wheel lift or

flatbed equipment.

NOTICE

TTOOWWIINNGG

OTLE068026

dolly

OTLE068028

OTLE068027

6-22

What to do in an emergency

When towing your vehicle in an

emergency without wheel dollies:

1. Place the ignition switch in the

ACC position.

2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).

3. Release the parking brake.

Removable Towing Hook

1. Open the tailgate, and remove the

towing hook from the tool case.

If your vehicle is equipped with

a rollover sensor, place the igni-

tion switch in the LOCK/OFF or

ACC position when the vehicle

is being towed. The side impact

and curtain air bag may deploy

if the sensor detects the situa-

tion as a rollover.

WARNING

Failure to place the shift lever in

N (Neutral) when being towed

with the front wheels on the

ground can cause internal dam-

age to the transaxle.

CAUTION

OTLE068021

6-23

What to do in an emergency

2. Remove the hole cover pressing

the lower part of the cover on the

front or rear bumper.

3. Install the towing hook by turning it

clockwise into the hole until it is

fully secured.

4. Remove the towing hook and

install the cover after use.

Emergency Towing

If towing is necessary, we recom-

mend you have it done by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer or a commer-

cial tow truck service.

OTLE068022

OTLE068024

■ Front

■ Rear

OTLE068023

OTLE068031

■ Front

■ Rear

6-24

What to do in an emergency

If towing service is not available in an

emergency, your vehicle may be

temporarily towed using a cable or

chain secured to the emergency tow-

ing hook at the front (or rear) of the

vehicle.

Use extreme caution when towing

the vehicle with a cable or chain. A

driver must be in the vehicle to steer

it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done

only on hard-surfaced roads for a

short distance and at low speeds.

Also, the wheels, axles, power train,

steering and brakes must all be in

good condition.

Always follow these emergency tow-

ing precautions:

• Place the ignition switch in the

ACC position so the steering

wheel is not locked. (if equipped)

• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).

• Release the parking brake.

• Depress the brake pedal with more

force than normal since you will

have reduced braking perform-

ance.

• More steering effort will be

required because the power steer-

ing system will be disabled.

• Use a vehicle heavier than your

own to tow your vehicle.

• The drivers of both vehicles should

communicate with each other fre-

quently.

• Before emergency towing, check

that the hook is not broken or dam-

aged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chain

securely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady

and even force.

• Use a towing cable or chain less

than 16 feet (5 m) long. Attach a

white or red cloth (about 12 inch

(30 cm) wide) in the middle of the

cable or chain for easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so the towing cable

or chain remains tight during tow-

ing.

• Before towing, check the automat-

ic transmission for fluid leaks under

your vehicle. If the automatic trans-

mission fluid is leaking, flatbed

equipment or a towing dolly must

be used.

OTLE068029

6-25

What to do in an emergency

Tie-down Hook

To avoid damage to your vehicle

and vehicle components when

towing:

• Always pull straight ahead

when using the towing hooks.

Do not pull from the side or at

a vertical angle.

• Do not use the towing hooks

to pull a vehicle out of mud,

sand or other conditions from

which the vehicle cannot be

driven out under its own

power.

• Limit the vehicle speed to

10 mph (15 km/h) and drive

less than 1 mile (1.5 km) when

towing to avoid serious dam-

age to the automatic trans-

mission.

CAUTION

OLMB033091

Do not use the tie-down hook(s)

for towing purposes. If the tie-

down hook(s) are used for tow-

ing, the tie-down hook(s) or

bumper will be damaged and

this could lead to serious injury.

WARNING

Maintenance

Engine Compartment .............................................7-3

Maintenance Services ...........................................7-4

Owner's Responsibility.....................................................7-4

Owner Maintenance Precautions..................................7-4

Owner Maintenance ..............................................7-5

Owner Maintenance Schedule.......................................7-6

Scheduled Maintenance Services........................7-8

Normal Maintenance Schedule

(Nu 2.0 GDI, Theta 2.4 GDI).............................................7-9

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions

(Nu 2.0 GDI, Theta 2.4 GDI)...........................................7-12

Severe Driving Conditions.............................................7-13

Explanation Of Scheduled Maintenance

Items ......................................................................7-14

Engine Oil..............................................................7-17

Checking the Engine Oil Level .....................................7-17

Checking the Engine Oil and Filter.............................7-18

Engine Coolant .....................................................7-19

Checking the Engine Coolant Level............................7-19

Changing Engine Coolant ..............................................7-22

Brake Fluid............................................................7-23

Checking the Brake Fluid Level...................................7-23

Washer Fluid.........................................................7-24

Checking the Washer Fluid Level................................7-24

Parking Brake.......................................................7-24

Checking the Parking Brake.........................................7-24

Air Cleaner ............................................................7-25

Filter Replacement..........................................................7-25

Climate Control Air Filter....................................7-27

Filter Inspection...............................................................7-27

Wiper Blades.........................................................7-29

Blade Inspection ..............................................................7-29

Blade Replacement .........................................................7-29

Battery...................................................................7-33

For Best Battery Service ..............................................7-34

Battery Recharging ........................................................7-34

Reset Features.................................................................7-35

Tires and Wheels .................................................7-36

Tire Care............................................................................7-36

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures...........7-37

Check Tire Inflation Pressure ......................................7-38

Tire Rotation.....................................................................7-38

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............................7-39

Tire Replacement ............................................................7-40

Wheel Replacement ........................................................7-41

Tire Traction .....................................................................7-41

Tire Maintenance............................................................7-41

Tire Sidewall Labeling ....................................................7-41

Tire Terminology and Definitions................................7-45

All Season Tires...............................................................7-48

Summer Tires ...................................................................7-48

Snow Tires ........................................................................7-49

Radial-Ply Tires...............................................................7-49

Low Aspect Ratio Tires..................................................7-50

Fuses......................................................................7-51

Instrument Panel Fuse Replacement..........................7-52

Engine Compartment Panel Fuse Replacement.......7-53

Fuse/Relay Panel Description......................................7-56

Light Bulbs ............................................................7-64

Headlamp, Daytime Running Lamp, Side Marker,

Parking Lamp, Turn Signal Lamp and

Fog Lamp Replacement .................................................7-65

Side Repeater Lamp Replacement..............................7-69

Rear Combination Light Bulb Replacement ..............7-70

High Mounted Stop Lamp Replacement....................7-73

License Plate Light Bulb Replacement ......................7-73

Interior Light Bulb Replacement .................................7-73

Appearance Care..................................................7-75

Exterior Care....................................................................7-75

Interior Care .....................................................................7-80

Emission Control System ....................................7-83

Crankcase Emission Control System ..........................7-83

Evaporative Emission Control System Including

Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)............7-83

Exhaust Emission Control System ..............................7-84

California Perchlorate Notice.............................7-87

7-3

Maintenance

EENNGGIINNEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

OTLA075001/OTLE075104

■■

Nu 2.0 GDI

■■

Theta II 2.4 GDI

1. Engine coolant reservoir/Radiator cap

2. Brake fluid reservoir

3. Air cleaner

4. Engine oil dipstick

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

7. Fuse box

8. Battery terminal [+]

9. Battery terminal [-]

The actual engine compartment in the

vehicle may differ from the illustration.

7-4

Maintenance

MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE SSEERRVVIICCEESS

You should exercise the utmost care

to prevent damage to your vehicle

and injury to yourself whenever per-

forming any maintenance or inspec-

tion procedures.

We recommend you have your vehi-

cle maintained and repaired by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An

authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets

HYUNDAI's high service quality

standards and receives technical

support from HYUNDAI in order to

provide you with a high level of serv-

ice satisfaction.

Owner's Responsibility

Maintenance service and record

retention are the owner's responsibil-

ity.

You should retain documents that

show proper maintenance has been

performed on your vehicle in accor-

dance with the scheduled mainte-

nance service charts shown on the

following pages. You need this infor-

mation to establish your compliance

with the servicing and maintenance

requirements of your vehicle war-

ranties.

Detailed warranty information is pro-

vided in your Owner's Handbook &

Warranty Information booklet.

Repairs and adjustments required as

a result of improper maintenance or

a lack of required maintenance are

not covered.

Owner Maintenance

Precautions

Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-

cient servicing may result in opera-

tional problems with your vehicle that

could lead to vehicle damage, an

accident, or personal injury. This

chapter provides instructions only for

the maintenance items that are easy

to perform. Several procedures can

be done only by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer with special tools.

Your vehicle should not be modified

in any way. Such modifications may

adversely affect the performance,

safety or durability of your vehicle

and may, in addition, violate condi-

tions of the limited warranties cover-

ing the vehicle.

Certain modifications may also be in

violation of regulations established

by the U.S. Department of

Transportation and other federal or

state agencies.

Improper owner maintenance dur-

ing the warranty period may affect

warranty coverage. For details,

read the separate Owner's

Handbook & Warranty Information

booklet provided with the vehicle.

If you're unsure about any service

or maintenance procedure, have it

done by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

NOTICE

7-5

Maintenance

OOWWNNEERR MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE

The following lists are vehicle checks

and inspections that should be per-

formed by the owner or an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer at the frequen-

cies indicated to help ensure safe,

dependable operation of your vehi-

cle.

Any adverse conditions should be

brought to the attention of your deal-

er as soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance vehicle

checks are generally not covered by

warranties and you may be charged

for labor, parts and lubricants used.

Performing maintenance work

on a vehicle can be dangerous.

If you lack sufficient knowledge

and experience or the proper

tools and equipment to do the

work, have it done by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer. ALWAYS

follow these precautions for

performing maintenance work:

• Park your vehicle on level

ground, move the shift lever

into the P (Park) position,

apply the parking brake, place

the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position.

• Block the tires (front and

back) to prevent the vehicle

from moving.

Remove loose clothing or jew-

elry that can become entan-

gled in moving parts.

WARNING

• If you must run the engine

during maintenance, do so

out doors or in an area with

plenty of ventilation.

• Keep flames, sparks, or smok-

ing materials away from the

battery and fuel-related parts.

7-6

Maintenance

Owner Maintenance Schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Check the coolant level in the

engine coolant reservoir.

• Check the windshield washer fluid

level.

• Check for tire for low or under-

inflated tires.

While operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of

the exhaust or any smell of

exhaust fumes in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steering

wheel. Notice if there is any

increased steering effort or loose-

ness in the steering wheel, or

change in its straight-ahead posi-

tion.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly

turns slightly or "pulls" to one side

when traveling on smooth, level

road.

• When stopping, listen and check

for unusual sounds, pulling to one

side, increased brake pedal travel

or "hard-to-push" brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the

operation of your transmission

occurs, check the transmission

fluid level.

• Check the automatic transmission

P (Park) function.

• Check the parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your

vehicle (water dripping from the air

conditioning system during or after

use is normal).

At least monthly:

• Check coolant level in the engine

coolant reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the brake lights,

turn signals and hazard warning

flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of all

tires including the spare for tires

that are worn, show uneven wear,

or are damaged.

• Check for loose wheel lug nuts.

Be careful when checking your

engine coolant level when the

engine is hot. This may result in

coolant being blown out of the

opening and cause serious

burns and other injuries.

WARNING

7-7

Maintenance

At least twice a year:

(i.e., every Spring and Fall)

• Check radiator, heater and air con-

ditioning hoses for leaks or dam-

age.

• Check windshield washer spray

and wiper operation. Clean wiper

blades with a clean cloth damp-

ened with washer a fluid.

• Check headlamp alignment.

• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,

shields and clamps.

• Check the seat belts for wear and

function.

At least once a year:

• Clean body and door drain holes.

• Lubricate door hinges and hood

hinges.

• Lubricate door and hood locks and

latches.

• Lubricate door rubber weather

strips.

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Inspect and lubricate automatic

transmission linkage and controls.

• Clean the battery and terminals.

• Check the brake fluid level.

SSCCHHEEDDUULLEEDD MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE SSEERRVVIICCEESS

Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply.

If any of the following conditions apply, you must follow the Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions.

• Repeatedly driving short distances of less than 5 miles (8 km) in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km)

in freezing temperature

• Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread roads

• Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather

• Driving in heavy dust conditions

• Driving in heavy traffic area

• Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road

• Towing a trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack

• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing

• Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)

• Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

For additional information or assistance see your authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7-8

Maintenance

7-9

Maintenance

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R : Replace or change.

: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your

authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer per-

form the operation.

Normal Maintenance Schedule (Nu 2.0 GDI, Theta 2.4 GDI)

Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180

Miles×1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5

Km×1,000 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180

Drive belts *

At first, inspect at 60,000 miles or 72 months.

Thereafter, inspect every 15,000 miles or 24 months

Engine oil and engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R

Fuel additives *

Add fuel additives every 7,500 miles or 12 months

Air cleaner filter

I R

Spark plugs Replace every 97,500 miles

Valve clearance *

Inspect every 60,000 miles or 72 months

Rotate tires

Rotate tires every 7,500 miles

Climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R

Vacuum hose

I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

7-10

Maintenance

Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180

Miles×1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5

Km×1,000 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180

Engine coolant

At first, replace at 120,000 miles or 10 years :

Thereafter, replace every 30,000 miles or 24 months

Battery condition I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Front brake disc/pads, calipers I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Rear brake disc/pads I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Steering gear box, linkage and boots/

lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Driveshaft and boots I I I I I I I

Suspension mounting bolts I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Air conditioner refrigerant I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Air conditioner compressor I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Propeller shaft (AWD) I I I I I I I

Exhaust pipe and muffler

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R : Replace or change.

Normal Maintenance Schedule (Nu 2.0 GDI, Theta 2.4 GDI) (CONT)

7-11

Maintenance

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R : Replace or change.

: Transfer case oil and rear differential oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.

: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this mainte-

nance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of

power, hard starting problem, etc. replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180

Miles×1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5

Km×1,000 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180

Automatic transmission fluid

No check, No service required

Rear differential oil (AWD) *

I I I

Transfer case oil (AWD) *

I I I

Vapor hose, fuel filler cap and fuel tank I I I I I I I

Fuel tank air filter *

I I I I I I I

Fuel filter *

I I I I I I I

Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I I

Parking brake I I I I I I I

Brake fluid I I I I I I I

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

Normal Maintenance Schedule (Nu 2.0 GDI, Theta 2.4 GDI) (CONT)

7-12

Maintenance

Maintenance item

Maintenance

operation

Maintenance intervals Driving condition

Engine oil and filter R Every 3,750 miles or 6 months

A, B, C, D, E, F,

G, H, I, J, K

Air cleaner filter R More frequently C, E

Spark plugs R More frequently A, B, H, I, K

Automatic transmission fluid R Every 60,000 miles A, C, D, E, F, G, I

Front brake disc/pads, calipers I More frequently C, D, G, H

Rear brake disc/pads I More frequently C, D, G, H

Parking brake I More frequently C, D, G, H

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions (Nu 2.0 GDI, Theta 2.4 GDI)

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions.

Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R : Replace or change.

7-13

Maintenance

Severe Driving Conditions

A - Repeatedly driving short distances of less than 5 miles

(8 km) in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km)

in freezing temperature

B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-

tances

C- Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-

spread roads

D- Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in

very cold weather

E - Driving in sandy areas

F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)

G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road

H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack

I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle

towing

J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)

K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

Maintenance item

Maintenance

operation

Maintenance intervals Driving condition

Steering gear box, linkage & boots/

lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball

joint

I More frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I

Drive shafts and boots I More frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

Climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

R More frequently C, E

Propeller shaft (AWD) I More frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

Rear differential oil (AWD) R Every 75,000 miles C, D, E, G, H, I, J

Transfer case oil (AWD) R Every 75,000 miles C, D, E, G, H, I, J

7-14

Maintenance

EEXXPPLLAANNAATTIIOONN OOFF SSCCHHEEDDUULLEEDD MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE IITTEEMMSS

Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should be

changed at the intervals specified in

the maintenance schedule. If the car

is being driven in severe conditions,

more frequent oil and filter changes

are required.

Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of

cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil

saturation and replace if necessary.

Drive belts should be checked peri-

odically for proper tension and

adjusted as necessary.

Fuel Filter

A clogged-up fuel filter may limit the

vehicle driving speed, damage the

emission system, and cause the

hard starting. When a considerable

amount of foreign substances are

accumulated in the fuel tank, the fuel

filter should be replaced.

Upon installing a new fuel filter, oper-

ate the diesel engine for several min-

utes, and check the connections for

any leakages. Fuel filters should be

installed by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and

Connections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and

connections for leakage and dam-

age. Have an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer replace any damaged or leak-

ing parts immediately.

Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler

Cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap

should be inspected at those inter-

vals specified in the maintenance

schedule. Make sure a new vapor

hose or fuel filler cap is correctly

replaced.

Vacuum Crankcase Ventilation

Hoses (if equipped)

Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-

dence of heat and/or mechanical

damage. Hard and brittle rubber,

cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and

excessive swelling indicate deterio-

ration. Particular attention should be

paid to examine those hose surfaces

nearest to high heat sources, such

as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure

that the hoses do not come in con-

tact with any heat source, sharp

edges or moving component which

might cause heat damage or

mechanical wear. Inspect all hose

connections, such as clamps and

couplings, to make sure they are

secure, and that no leaks are pres-

ent. Hoses should be replaced

immediately if there is any evidence

of deterioration or damage.

7-15

Maintenance

Air Cleaner Filter

A genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter

is recommended when the filter is

replaced.

Spark Plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs

of the correct heat range.

Valve Clearance (if equipped)

Inspect for excessive valve noise

and/or engine vibration and adjust if

necessary. Have an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer perform the opera-

tion.

Cooling System

Check cooling system components,

such as radiator, coolant reservoir,

hoses and connections for leakage

and damage. Replace any damaged

parts.

Engine Coolant

The coolant should be changed at

the intervals specified in the mainte-

nance schedule.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Automatic transmission fluid should

not be checked under normal usage

conditions. But in severe conditions,

the fluid should be changed at an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer in

accordance to the scheduled mainte-

nance at the beginning of this chap-

ter.

Information

Automatic transmission fluid color is

basically red.

As the vehicle is driven, the automatic

transmission fluid will begin to look

darker. This is a normal condition and

you should not judge the need to

replace the fluid based upon the

changed color.

The use of a non-specified fluid

could result in transmission mal-

function and failure. Use only the

specified automatic transmission

fluid (refer to "Recommended

Lubricants and Capacities" in

chapter 8).

Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation,

chafing, cracks, deterioration and

any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-

ed or damaged parts immediately.

Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake

fluid reservoir. The level should be

between the MIN and the MAX

marks on the side of the reservoir.

Use only hydraulic brake fluid con-

forming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifi-

cation.

NOTICE

7-16

Maintenance

Parking Brake

Inspect the parking brake system

including the parking brake pedal

and cables.

Brake Discs, Pads, Calipers

and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear,

discs for run out and wear, and

calipers for fluid leakage.

Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,

muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-

rioration, or damage. Start the

engine and listen carefully for any

exhaust gas leakage. Tighten con-

nections or replace parts as neces-

sary.

Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections

for looseness or damage. Retighten

to the specified torque.

Steering Gear Box, Linkage &

Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint

With the vehicle stopped and the

engine off, check for excessive free-

play in the steering wheel. Check the

linkage for bends or damage. Check

the dust boots and ball joints for

deterioration, cracks, or damage.

Replace any damaged parts.

Drive Shafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and

clamps for cracks, deterioration, or

damage. Replace any damaged

parts and, if necessary, repack the

grease.

Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and

connections for leakage and dam-

age.

7-17

Maintenance

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL

Checking the Engine Oil Level

1. Follow all of the oil manufacturer's

precautions.

2. Be sure the vehicle is on level

ground in P (Park) with the park-

ing brake set. If possible, block the

wheels.

3. Turn the engine on and allow the

engine to reach normal operating

temperature.

4 . Turn the engine off and wait about

five minutes for the oil to return to

the oil pan.

5. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,

and re-insert it fully.

6. Pull the dipstick out again and

check the level. The level should

be between F and L.

7. If it is near or at L, add enough oil

to bring the level to F.

To prevent damage to your

engine:

• Do not overfill with engine oil.

Add oil in small quantities and

recheck level to ensure engine

is not overfilled.

• Do not spill engine oil when

adding or changing engine oil.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil

from being spilled on engine

components. Wipe off spilled oil

immediately.

NOTICE

OTLA075003

■ 2.0 GDI

ODM076059L

■ 2.4 GDI

7-18

Maintenance

Use only the specified engine oil

(refer to "Recommended

Lubricants and Capacities" in

chapter 8).

Checking the Engine Oil and

Filter

Have engine oil and filter changed by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

according to the Maintenance

Schedule at the beginning of this

chapter.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine oil contains chemicals

known to the State of California

to cause cancer, birth defects

and reproductive harm. Used

engine oil may cause irritation

or cancer of the skin if left in

contact with the skin for pro-

longed periods of time. Always

protect your skin by washing

your hands thoroughly with

soap and warm water as soon

as possible after handling used

oil.

WARNING

OTLA075006

■ 2.0 GDI

ODM076060L

■ 2.4 GDI

7-19

Maintenance

EENNGGIINNEE CCOOOOLLAANNTT

The high-pressure cooling system

has a reservoir filled with year-round

antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is

filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and

coolant level at least once a year, at

the beginning of the winter season

and before traveling to a colder cli-

mate.

Checking the Engine Coolant

Level

Check the condition and connections

of all cooling system hoses and

heater hoses.

Replace any swollen or deteriorated

hoses.

The coolant level should be filled

between the MAX and MIN marks on

the side of the coolant reservoir

when the engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough

distilled (deionized) water to bring

the level to the MAX mark, but do not

overfill. If frequent additions are

required, see an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer for a cooling sys-

tem inspection.

OTL075070

OTL078008

7-20

Maintenance

The electric motor for the cooling fan

is controlled by engine coolant tem-

perature, refrigerant pressure and

vehicle speed. As the engine coolant

temperature decreases, the electric

motor will automatically shut off. This

is a normal condition. If your vehicle

is equipped with GDI, the electric

motor for the cooling fan may begin

to operate at any time and continue

to operate until you disconnect the

negative battery cable.

Never remove the

engine coolant reser-

voir tank/radiator cap

or the drain plug

while the engine and

radiator are hot. Hot coolant

and steam may blow out under

pressure, causing serious

injury.

Turn the engine off and wait

until the engine cools down.

Use extreme care when remov-

ing the engine coolant reservoir

tank/radiator cap. Wrap a thick

towel around it, and turn it

counterclockwise slowly to the

first stop. Step back while the

pressure is released from the

cooling system. When you are

sure all the pressure has been

released, press down on the

cap, using a thick towel, and

continue turning counterclock-

wise to remove it.

WARNING

The electric motor for

the cooling fan may

continue to operate

or start up when the

engine is not running

and can cause serious injury.

Keep hands, clothing and tools

away from the rotating fan

blades of the cooling fan.

WARNING

Make sure the coolant cap is

properly closed after refilling

coolant. Otherwise the engine

could be overheated while driv-

ing.

1. Check if the coolant cap label

is straight In front.

WARNING

OTL075062

■ Engine room front view

7-21

Maintenance

Recommended engine coolant

• When adding coolant, use only dis-

tilled (deionized) water for your

vehicle and never mix hard water in

the coolant filled at the factory.

• An improper coolant mixture can

result in severe malfunction or

engine damage.

• The engine in your vehicle has alu-

minum engine parts and must be

protected by a proper mix of ethyl-

ene-glycol with phosphate based

coolant to prevent corrosion and

freezing.

• Do not use alcohol or methanol

coolant or mix them with the spec-

ified coolant.

• Do not use a solution that contains

more than 60% antifreeze or less

than 35% antifreeze, which would

reduce the effectiveness of the

solution.

For mixing percentage, refer to the

following table:

Information

If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50%

water and 50% antifreeze mix is the

easiest to mix together as it will be the

same quantity of each.

It is suitable to use for most tempera-

ture ranges of -31°F and higher.

2. Make sure that the tiny pro-

trusions inside the coolant

cap should be securely inter-

locked.

OTL078063

■ Engine room rear view

Ambient

Temperature

Mixture Percentage

(volume)

Antifreeze Water

5°F (-15°C) 35 65

-13°F (-25°C) 40 60

-31°F (-35°C) 50 50

-49°F (-45°C) 60 40

7-22

Maintenance

Changing Engine Coolant

Have coolant changed by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer according to

the Maintenance Schedule at the

beginning of this chapter.

To prevent damage to engine

parts, put a thick towel around the

coolant cap before refilling the

coolant to prevent the coolant

from overflowing into engine

parts, such as the generator.

NOTICE

Do not use engine coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

Engine coolant can severely

obscure visibility when sprayed

on the windshield and may

cause loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident.

Engine coolant may also cause

damage to paint and body trim.

WARNING

7-23

Maintenance

BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD

Checking the Brake Fluid

Level

Check the fluid level in the reservoir

periodically. The fluid level should be

between MAX and MIN marks on the

side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap

and adding brake fluid, clean the

area around the reservoir cap thor-

oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-

ination.

If the level is low, add the specified

brake fluid to the MAX level. The level

will fall with accumulated mileage.

This is a normal condition associated

with the wear of the brake linings. If

the fluid level is excessively low, have

the brake system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not allow brake fluid to con-

tact the vehicle’s body paint, as

paint damage will result.

• Brake fluid, which has been

exposed to open air for an

extended time should NEVER be

used as its quality cannot be

guaranteed. It should be dis-

posed of properly.

• Do not use the wrong kind of

brake fluid. A few drops of min-

eral based oil, such as engine

oil, in your brake system can

damage brake system parts.

Information

Use only the specified brake fluid

(refer to "Recommended Lubricants

and Capacities" in chapter 8).

NOTICE

If the brake system requires fre-

quent additions of fluid this

could indicate a leak in the

brake system. Have the vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Do not allow brake fluid to come

in contact with your eyes. If

brake fluid comes in contact

with your eyes, flush your eyes

with clean water for at least 15

minutes and get immediate

medical attention.

WARNING

OTLE078009

7-24

Maintenance

WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD

Checking the Washer Fluid

Level

Check the fluid level in the washer

fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-

sary. Plain water may be used if

washer fluid is not available.

However, use washer solvent with

antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-

mates to prevent freezing.

Checking the Parking Brake

Foot type

Check whether the stroke is within

specification when the parking brake

pedal is depressed with 44 lb (20 kg,

196 N) of force. Also, the parking

brake alone should securely hold the

vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the

stroke is more or less than specified,

have the parking brake adjusted by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Stroke : 3 notch

OTLE078105

OTL055012

To prevent serious injury or

death, take the following safety

precautions when using washer

fluid:

• Do not use engine coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

Engine coolant can severely

obscure visibility when

sprayed on the windshield

and may cause loss of vehicle

control resulting in an acci-

dent or damage to paint and

body trim.

• Do not allow sparks or flame

to contact the washer fluid or

the washer fluid reservoir.

Washer fluid may contain

alcohol and can be flamma-

ble.

• Do not drink washer fluid and

avoid contact with skin.

Washer fluid is harmful to

humans and animals.

• Keep washer fluid away from

children and animals.

WARNING

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE

7-25

Maintenance

AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR

Filter Replacement

The air cleaner filter can be cleaned

for inspection using compressed air.

Do not attempt to wash or to rinse it,

as water will damage the filter.

If soiled, the air cleaner filter must be

replaced.

Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

1. Pull down the air cleaner filter

cover.

2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.

3. Pull down the lever to the

UNLOCK position.

OTLA075013

OTL075015 OTL075016

7-26

Maintenance

4. Replace the air cleaner filter. 5. Pull up the lever (1) to the LOCK

position.

6. Rise up the cover (2) until the

hooks on the cover are securely

fastened into the latches (3).

7. Check if the cover is firmly

installed.

Information

If the vehicle is operated in extremely

dusty or sandy areas, replace the air

cleaner filter more often than the

usual recommended intervals (refer to

"Maintenance Under Severe Usage

Conditions" in this chapter).

• Do not drive with the air cleaner

filter removed. This will result in

excessive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleaner

filter, be careful that dust or dirt

does not enter the air intake, or

damage may result.

• Use HYUNDAI genuine parts,

use of non-genuine parts could

damage the air flow sensor.

NOTICE

OTL075017 OTL075018

7-27

Maintenance

CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL AAIIRR FFIILLTTEERR

Filter Inspection

The climate control air filter should

be replaced according to the

Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle

is operated in severely air-polluted

cities or on dusty rough roads for a

long period, it should be inspected

more frequently and replaced earlier.

When you replace the climate control

air filter, replace it performing the fol-

lowing procedure, and be careful to

avoid damaging other components.

1. With the glove box open, remove

the stoppers on both sides to

allow the glove box to hang freely

on the hinges.

2. Remove the support rod (1).

OTLA075020

OTLA075019

7-28

Maintenance

3. Remove the climate control air fil-

ter case while pressing the lock on

the right side of the cover.

4. Replace the climate control air fil-

ter.

5. Reassemble in the reverse order

of disassembly.

Install a new climate control air fil-

ter in the correct direction with the

arrow symbol (

↓↓

) facing down-

wards. Otherwise, the climate con-

trol effects may decrease, possi-

bly with a noise.

NOTICE

OTLE075012OTLE075011

7-29

Maintenance

WWIIPPEERR BBLLAADDEESS

Blade Inspection

Contamination of either the wind-

shield or the wiper blades with for-

eign matter can reduce the effective-

ness of the windshield wiper func-

tionality. Common sources of con-

tamination are insects, tree sap, and

hot wax treatments used by some

commercial car washes. If the blades

are not wiping properly, clean both

the window and the blades with a

clean cloth dampened with washer

fluid.

To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, arms or other compo-

nents, do not:

• Use gasoline, kerosene, paint

thinner, or other solvents on or

near them.

• Attempt to move the wipers

manually.

• Use non-specified wiper blades.

Information

Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-

matic car washes have been known to

make the windshield difficult to clean.

Blade Replacement

When the wipers no longer clean

adequately, the blades may be worn

or cracked, and require replacement.

To prevent damage to the wiper

arms or other components, do not

attempt to move the wipers manu-

ally.

The use of a non-specified wiper

blade could result in wiper mal-

function and failure.

• In order to prevent damage to

the hood and the wiper arms, the

wiper arms should only be lifted

when in the top wiping position.

• Always return the wiper arms to

the windshield before driving.

NOTICE

7-30

Maintenance

Front windshield wiper blade

replacement

Type A

1. Put the front windshield wipers

into the service position.

2. Raise the wiper arm and slightly

rotate the wiper blade assembly to

expose the plastic locking clip.

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall

against the windshield, since it

may chip or crack the windshield.

3. Press the clip (1) and slide the

blade assembly downward (2).

4. Lift it off the arm.

5. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

6. Return the wiper arm on the wind-

shield.

NOTICE

OLMB073021

OLMB073022

OLMB073020

7-31

Maintenance

Type B

1. Raise the wiper arm.

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall

against the windshield, since it

may chip or crack the windshield.

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip (1).

Then pull down the blade assem-

bly (2) and remove it.

3. Install the new blade assembly in

the reverse order of removal.

4. Return the wiper arm on the wind-

shield.

NOTICE

OLMB073098

OLMB073099

OLMB073100

Rear window wiper blade

replacement

1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out

the wiper blade assembly.

2. Install the new blade assembly by

inserting the center part into the

slot in the wiper arm until it clicks

into place.

3. Make sure the blade assembly is

installed firmly by trying to pull it

slightly.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms

or other components, have the wiper

blades replaced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

7-32

Maintenance

OTL075051

OTL075050

7-33

Maintenance

BBAATTTTEERRYY

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH to you or bystanders,

always follow these precautions

when working near or handling

the battery:

Always read and follow

instructions carefully

when handling a battery.

Wear eye protection

designed to protect the

eyes from acid splashes.

Keep all flames, sparks,

or smoking materials

away from the battery.

Hydrogen is always pres-

ent in battery cells, is

highly combustible, and

may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of

reach of children.

WARNING

Batteries contain sulfu-

ric acid which is highly

corrosive. Do not allow

acid to contact your

eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush

your eyes with clean water for at

least 15 minutes and get imme-

diate medical attention. If acid

gets on your skin, thoroughly

wash the area. If you feel pain or

a burning sensation, get med-

ical attention immediately.

• When lifting a plastic-cased

battery, excessive pressure

on the case may cause battery

acid to leak. Lift with a battery

carrier or with your hands on

opposite corners.

• Do not attempt to jump start

your vehicle if your battery is

frozen.

• NEVER attempt to recharge

the battery when the vehicle’s

battery cables are connected

to the battery.

• The electrical ignition system

works with high voltage.

NEVER touch these compo-

nents with the engine running

or when the ignition switch is

in the ON position.

7-34

Maintenance

• When you do not use the vehicle

for a long time in a low tempera-

ture area, disconnect the battery

and keep it indoors.

• Always charge the battery fully

to prevent battery case damage

in low temperature areas.

For Best Battery Service

• Keep the battery securely mount-

ed.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.

• Keep the terminals and connec-

tions clean, tight, and coated with

petroleum jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled acid from the bat-

tery immediately with a solution of

water and baking soda.

Battery Recharging

NOTICE

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, and

related accessories contain

lead and lead compounds,

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer, birth

defects and reproductive harm.

Batteries also contain other

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer.

Wash hands after handling.

WARNING

Always follow these instruc-

tions when recharging your

vehicle's battery to avoid the

risk of SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH from explosions or acid

burns:

• Before performing mainte-

nance or recharging the bat-

tery, turn off all accessories

and place the ignition switch

to the LOCK/OFF position.

• Keep all flames, sparks, or

smoking materials away from

the battery.

• Always work outdoors or in an

area with plenty of ventilation.

• Wear eye protection when

checking the battery during

charging.

• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed in

a well ventilated area.

WARNING

OTL075022

7-35

Maintenance

By jump starting

After a jump start from a good bat-

tery, drive the vehicle for 20-30 min-

utes before it is shutoff. The vehicle

may not restart if you shut it off

before the battery had a chance to

adequately recharge. See "Jump

Starting" in chapter 6 for more infor-

mation on jump starting procedures.

Information

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to

the environment and human

health. Dispose of the bat-

tery according to your local

law(s) or regulations.

Reset Features

The following items may need to be

reset after the battery has been dis-

charged or the battery has been dis-

connected. See chapter 3 or 4 for:

• Power Windows

• Trip Computer

• Climate Control System

• Clock

• Audio System

• Sunroof

• Watch the battery during

charging, and stop or reduce

the charging rate if the battery

cells begin boiling violently.

• The negative battery cable

must be removed first and

installed last when the battery

is disconnected. Disconnect

the battery charger in the fol-

lowing order:

(1) Turn off the battery charg-

er main switch.

(2) Unhook the negative

clamp from the negative

battery terminal.

(3) Unhook the positive clamp

from the positive battery

terminal.

•

Always use a genuine

HYUNDAI approved battery

when you replace the battery.

7-36

Maintenance

TTIIRREESS AANNDD WWHHEEEELLSS

Tire Care

For proper maintenance, safety, and

maximum fuel economy, you must

always maintain recommended tire

inflation pressures and stay within

the load limits and weight distribution

recommended for your vehicle.

All specifications (sizes and pres-

sures) can be found on a label

attached to the driver's side center

pillar.

• Replace tires that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are dam-

aged. Worn tires can cause

loss of braking effectiveness,

steering) control, or traction.

• ALWAYS replace tires with the

same size as each tire that

was originally supplied with

this vehicle. Using tires and

wheels other than the recom-

mended sizes could cause

unusual handling characteris-

tics, poor vehicle control, or

negatively affect your vehi-

cle's Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) resulting in a serious

accident.

Tire failure may cause loss of

vehicle control resulting in an

accident. To reduce risk of

SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH,

take the following precautions:

• Inspect your tires monthly for

proper inflation as well as

wear and damage.

• The recommended cold tire

pressure for your vehicle can

be found in this manual and on

the tire label located on the dri-

ver's side center pillar. Always

use a tire pressure gauge to

measure tire pressure. Tires

with too much or too little

pressure wear unevenly caus-

ing poor handling.

• Check the pressure of the

spare every time you check

the pressure of the other tires

on your vehicle.

WARNING

OTLE085006

7-37

Maintenance

Recommended Cold Tire

Inflation Pressures

All tire pressures (including the

spare) should be checked when the

tires are cold. "Cold tires" means the

vehicle has not been driven for at

least three hours or driven for less

than one mile (1.6 km).

Warm tires normally exceed recom-

mended cold tire pressures by 4 to 6

psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not release air

from warm tires to adjust the pres-

sure or the tires will be under-inflat-

ed. For recommended inflation pres-

sure, refer to "Tire and Wheels" in

chapter 8.

Recommended pressures must

be maintained for the best ride,

vehicle handling, and minimum

tire wear.

Over-inflation or under-inflation

can reduce tire life, adversely

affect vehicle handling, and

lead to sudden tire failure that

could result in loss of vehicle

control resulting in an accident.

Severe under-inflation can lead

to severe heat build-up, causing

blowouts, tread separation and

other tire failures that can result

in the loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident. This

risk is much higher on hot days

and when driving for long peri-

ods at high speeds.

WARNING

• Under-inflation results in

excessive wear, poor handling

and reduced fuel economy.

Wheel deformation is also

possible. Keep your tire pres-

sures at the proper levels. If a

tire frequently needs refilling,

have it checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Over-inflation produces a

harsh ride, excessive wear at

the center of the tire tread,

and a greater possibility of

damage from road hazards.

CAUTION

7-38

Maintenance

Check Tire Inflation Pressure

Check your tires, including the spare

tire, once a month or more.

How to check

Use a good quality tire pressure

gauge to check tire pressure. You

can not tell if your tires are properly

inflated simply by looking at them.

Radial tires may look properly inflat-

ed when they are under-inflated.

Remove the valve cap from the tire

valve stem. Press the tire gauge firm-

ly onto the valve to get a pressure

measurement. If the cold tire inflation

pressure matches the recommended

pressure on the tire label located on

the driver's side center pillar or in this

manual. No further adjustment is

necessary. If the pressure is low, add

air until you reach the recommended

pressure. Make sure to put the valve

caps back on the valve stems.

Without the valve cap, dirt or mois-

ture could get into the valve core and

cause air leakage. If a valve cap is

missing, install a new one as soon as

possible.

If you overfill the tire, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the

center of the tire valve. Recheck the

tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be

sure to put the valve caps back on

the valve stems. Without the valve

cap, dirt or moisture could get into

the valve core and cause air leakage.

If a valve cap is missing, install a new

one as soon as possible.

Tire Rotation

To equalize tread wear, HYUNDAI

recommends that the tires be rotated

according to the maintenance sched-

ule or sooner if irregular wear devel-

ops.

During rotation, check the tires for

correct balance.

When rotating tires, check for uneven

wear and damage. Abnormal wear is

usually caused by incorrect tire pres-

sure, improper wheel alignment, out-

of-balance wheels, severe braking or

severe cornering. Look for bumps or

bulges in the tread or side of the tire.

Replace the tire if you find any of

these conditions. Replace the tire if

fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,

be sure to bring the front and rear tire

pressures to specification and check

lug nut tightness (proper torque is

79~94 lbf·ft [11~13 kgf·m]).

7-39

Maintenance

Disc brake pads should be inspected

for wear whenever tires are rotated.

Information

Tires that are asymmetrical or direc-

tional can only be installed on the

wheel in one direction. The outside

and inside of an asymmetrical tire is

not easily distinguishable. Pay careful

attention to the markings on the side-

walls of the tires, noting the "outside"

marking and also the rotating direc-

tion before installing them on the

vehicle.

Wheel Alignment and Tire

Balance

The wheels on your vehicle were

aligned and balanced carefully at the

factory to give you the longest tire life

and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to

have your wheels aligned again.

However, if you notice unusual tire

wear or your vehicle pulling one way

or the other, the alignment may need

to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating

when driving on a smooth road, your

wheels may need to be rebalanced.

Improper wheel weights can dam-

age your vehicle’s aluminum

wheels. Use only approved wheel

weights.

NOTICE

• Do not use the compact spare

tire for tire rotation.

• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circum-

stances. This may cause

unusual handling characteris-

tics that may cause loss of

vehicle control resulting in an

accident.

WARNING

ODH073802

■ Without a spare tire

7-40

Maintenance

Tire Replacement

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear

indicator will appear as a solid band

across the tread. This shows there is

less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread

left on the tire. Replace the tire when

this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear

across the entire tread before replac-

ing the tire.

OLMB073027

Tread wear indicator

To reduce the risk of DEATH or

SERIOUS INJURY:

• Replace tires that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are

damaged. Worn tires can

cause loss of braking effec-

tiveness, steering control, and

traction.

• Always replace tires with the

same size as each tire that

was originally supplied with

this vehicle. Using tires and

wheels other than the recom-

mended sizes could cause

unusual handling characteris-

tics, poor vehicle control, or

negatively affect your vehi-

cle’s Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) resulting in a serious

accident.

WARNING

• When replacing tires (or

wheels), it is recommended to

replace the two front or two

rear tires (or wheels) as a pair.

Replacing just one tire can

seriously affect your vehicle's

handling.

• Tires degrade over time, even

when they are not being used.

Regardless of the remaining

tread, HYUNDAI recommends

that tires be replaced after six

(6) years of normal service.

• Heat caused by hot climates or

frequent high loading condi-

tions can accelerate the aging

process. Failure to follow this

warning may cause sudden

tire failure, which could lead to

a loss of vehicle control result-

ing in an accident.

7-41

Maintenance

Compact spare tire replacement

A compact spare tire has a shorter

tread life than a regular size tire.

Replace it when you can see the

tread wear indicator bars on the tire.

The replacement compact spare tire

should be the same size and design

tire as the one provided with your

new vehicle and should be mounted

on the same compact spare tire

wheel. The compact spare tire is not

designed to be mounted on a regular

size wheel, and the compact spare

tire wheel is not designed for mount-

ing a regular size tire.

Wheel Replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for

any reason, make sure the new

wheels are equivalent to the original

factory units in diameter, rim width

and offset.

Tire Traction

Tire traction can be reduced if you

drive on worn tires, tires that are

improperly inflated or on slippery

road surfaces. Tires should be

replaced when the tread depth is at

least 2/32 inch (1.6 mm). To reduce

the possibility of losing control, slow

down whenever there is rain, snow or

ice on the road.

Tire Maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct

wheel alignment helps to decrease

tire wear. If you find a tire is worn

unevenly, have your dealer check the

wheel alignment.

When you have new tires installed,

make sure they are balanced. This

will increase vehicle ride comfort and

tire life. Additionally, a tire should

always be rebalanced if it is removed

from the wheel.

Tire Sidewall Labeling

This information identifies and

describes the fundamental charac-

teristics of the tire and also provides

the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The

TIN can be used to identify the tire in

case of a recall.

The original tire should be

repaired or replaced as soon as

possible to avoid failure of the

spare and loss of vehicle con-

trol resulting in an accident.The

compact spare tire is for emer-

gency use only. Do not operate

your vehicle over 50 mph (80

km/h) when using the compact

spare tire.

WARNING

7-42

Maintenance

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

2. Tire size designation

A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire

size designation. You will need this

information when selecting replace-

ment tires for your car. The following

explains what the letters and num-

bers in the tire size designation

mean.

Example tire size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an

example only; your tire size designa-

tor could vary depending on your

vehicle.)

225/60R17 99H

225 - Tire width in millimeters.

60 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section

height as a percentage of its

width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

99 - Load Index, a numerical code

associated with the maximum

load the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the

speed rating chart in this section

for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor-

tant information that you need if you

ever have to replace one. The follow-

ing explains what the letters and

numbers in the wheel size designa-

tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:

7.0J X 17

7.0 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

OLMB073028

5,6

7-43

Maintenance

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif-

ferent speed ratings currently being

used for passenger car tires. The

speed rating is part of the tire size

designation on the sidewall of the

tire. This symbol corresponds to that

tire’s designed maximum safe oper-

ating speed.

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire

Identification Number)

Any tires that are over six years old,

based on the manufacturing date,

(including the spare tire) should be

replaced by new ones. You can find

the manufacturing date on the tire

sidewall (possibly on the inside of the

wheel), displaying the DOT Code.

The DOT Code is a series of num-

bers on a tire consisting of numbers

and English letters. The manufactur-

ing date is designated by the last four

digits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means a

plant code number, tire size and

tread pattern and the last four num-

bers indicate week and year manu-

factured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1618 represents

that the tire was produced in the 16th

week of 2018.

4. Tire ply composition and

material

The number of layers or plies of rub-

ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate the

materials in the tire, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

The letter "R" means radial ply con-

struction; the letter "D“ means diago-

nal or bias ply construction; and the

letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-

struction.

5. Maximum permissible infla-

tion pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire. Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure. Refer

to the Tire and Loading Information

label for recommended inflation

pressure.

Speed

Rating

Symbol

Maximum Speed

S 112 mph (180 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

W 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y 186 mph (300 km/h)

7-44

Maintenance

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that

can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle,

always use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall

between tread shoulder and maxi-

mum section width.

For example:

TREAD WEAR 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified govern-

ment test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one-and-a-

half times (1½) as well on the gov-

ernment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the

sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires.

The tires available as standard or

optional equipment on your vehicle

may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spec-

ified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction perform-

ance.

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accelera-

tion, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteristics.

WARNING

7-45

Maintenance

Temperature - A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B and C representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled condi-

tions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. Grade C

responds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher

levels of performance on the labora-

tory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

Tire Terminology and

Definitions

Air Pressure

The amount of air inside the tire

pressing outward on the tire. Air

pressure is expressed in pounds per

square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight

This means the combined weight of

optional accessories. Some exam-

ples of optional accessories are

automatic transmission, power

seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio

The relationship of a tire’s height to

its width.

Belt

A rubber coated layer of cords that is

located between the plies and the

tread. Cords may be made from steel

or other reinforcing materials.

Bead

The tire bead contains steel wires

wrapped by steel cords that hold the

tire onto the rim.

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

under-inflation, over-inflation,

or excessive loading, either

separately or in combination,

can cause heat build-up and

possible sudden tire failure.

This may cause loss of vehicle

control resulting in an accident.

WARNING

7-46

Maintenance

Bias Ply Tire

A pneumatic tire in which the plies

are laid at alternate angles less than

90 degrees to the centerline of the

tread.

Cold Tire Pressure

The amount of air pressure in a tire,

measured in pounds per square inch

(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire

has built up heat from driving.

Curb Weight

This means the weight of a motor

vehicle with standard and optional

equipment including the maximum

capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but

without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings

A code molded into the sidewall of a

tire signifying that the tire is in com-

pliance with the U.S. Department of

Transportation motor vehicle safety

standards. The DOT code includes

the Tire Identification Number (TIN),

an alphanumeric designator which

can also identify the tire manufactur-

er, production plant, brand and date

of production.

GVWR

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

GAWR FRT

Gross Axle Weight Rating for the

Front Axle.

GAWR RR

Gross Axle Weight Rating for the

Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall

The side of an asymmetrical tire, that

must always face outward when

mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa)

The metric unit for air pressure.

Light truck(LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufacturer

as primarily intended for use on light-

weight trucks or multipurpose pas-

senger vehicles.

Load ratings

The maximum load that a tire is rated

to carry for a given inflation pressure.

Load Index

An assigned number ranging from 1

to 279 that corresponds to the load

carrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure

The maximum air pressure to which

a cold tire may be inflated. The max-

imum air pressure is molded onto the

sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating

The load rating for a tire at the maxi-

mum permissible inflation pressure

for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle

Weight

The sum of curb weight; accessory

weight; vehicle capacity weight; and

production options weight.

7-47

Maintenance

Normal Occupant Weight

The number of occupants a vehicle

is designed to seat multiplied by 150

pounds (68 kg).

Occupant Distribution

Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall

An asymmetrical tire has a particular

side that faces outward when mount-

ed on a vehicle. The outward facing

sidewall bears white lettering or

bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same moldings on

the inner facing sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) tire

A tire used on passenger cars and

some light duty trucks and multipur-

pose vehicles.

Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel

cords

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber,

chemicals, fabric and steel or other

materials, that, when mounted on an

automotive wheel provides the trac-

tion and contains the gas or fluid that

sustains the load.

Pneumatic options weight

The combined weight of installed

regular production options weighing

over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the

standard items which they replace,

not previously considered in curb

weight or accessory weight, includ-

ing heavy duty breaks, ride levelers,

roof rack, heavy duty battery, and

special trim.

Recommended Inflation

Pressure

Vehicle manufacturer’s recommend-

ed tire inflation pressure as shown

on the tire placard.

Radial Ply Tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of

the tread.

Rim

A metal support for a tire and upon

which the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall

The portion of a tire between the

tread and the bead.

Speed Rating

An alphanumeric code assigned to a

tire indicating the maximum speed at

which a tire can operate.

Traction

The friction between the tire and the

road surface. The amount of grip pro-

vided.

7-48

Maintenance

Tread

The portion of a tire that comes into

contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators

Narrow bands, sometimes called

"wear bars", that show across the

tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch of

tread remains.

UTQGS

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards is a tire information sys-

tem that provides consumers with

ratings for a tire’s traction, tempera-

ture and treadwear. Ratings are

determined by tire manufacturers

using government testing proce-

dures. The ratings are molded into

the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle Capacity Weight

The number of designated seating

positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68

kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage

load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the

Tire

Load on an individual tire due to curb

and accessory weight plus maximum

occupant and cargo weight.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal occu-

pant weight and dividing by 2.

Vehicle Placard

A label permanently attached to a

vehicle showing the original equip-

ment tire size and recommended

inflation pressure.

All Season Tires

HYUNDAI specifies all season tires

on some models to provide good

performance for use all year round,

including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All season tires are identified

by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud

and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow

tires have better snow traction than

all season tires and may be more

appropriate in some areas.

Summer Tires

HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on

some models to provide superior

performance on dry roads. Summer

tire performance is substantially

reduced in snow and ice. Summer

tires do not have the tire traction rat-

ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire

side wall. If you plan to operate your

vehicle in snowy or icy conditions,

HYUNDAI recommends the use of

snow tires or all season tires on all

four wheels.

7-49

Maintenance

Snow Tires

If you equip your car with snow tires,

they should be the same size and

have the same load capacity as the

original tires. Snow tires should be

installed on all four wheels; other-

wise, poor handling may result. Snow

tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)

more air pressure than the pressure

recommended for the standard tires

on the tire label on the driver’s side of

the center pillar, or up to the maxi-

mum pressure shown on the tire

sidewall, whichever is less. Do not

drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h)

when your vehicle is equipped with

snow tires.

Radial-Ply Tires

Radial-ply tires provide improved

tread life, road hazard resistance and

smoother high speed ride. The radi-

al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of

belted construction, and are selected

to complement the ride and handling

characteristics of your vehicle.

Radial-ply tires have the same load

carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias

belted tires of the same size, and use

the same recommended inflation

pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires

with bias-ply or bias belted tires is

not recommended. Any combina-

tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias

belted tires when used on the same

vehicle will seriously deteriorate

vehicle handling. The best rule to fol-

low is: Identical pairs of radial-ply

tires should always be used as a set

for the front tires and a set for the

rear tires.

Longer wearing tires can be more

susceptible to irregular tread wear. It

is very important to follow the tire

rotation interval in this chapter to

achieve the tread life potential of

these tires. Cuts and punctures in

radial-ply tires are repairable only in

the tread area, because of sidewall

flexing. Consult your tire dealer for

radial-ply tire repairs.

Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circum-

stances. This may cause unusu-

al handling characteristics that

may cause loss of vehicle con-

trol resulting in an accident.

WARNING

7-50

Maintenance

Low Aspect Ratio Tires

Low aspect ratio tires, the aspect

ratio is lower than 50, are provided

for sporty looks.

Because low aspect ratio tires are

optimized for handling and braking,

their sidewall is a little stiffer than a

standard tire. Also low aspect ratio

tires tend to be wider and conse-

quently have a greater contact patch

with the road surface. In some

instances they may generate more

road noise compared with standard

tires.

Because the sidewall of a low

aspect ratio tire is shorter than

a standard tire, the rim of the

wheel and the tire itself is more

easily susceptible to damage.

Use caution when driving and

follow the guidelines below to

help minimize damage to the

wheel and tire:

- When driving on a rough road

or off road, drive cautiously

because tires and wheels may

be damaged. And after driving,

inspect tires and wheels.

- When passing over a pothole,

speed bump, manhole, or curb

stone, drive slowly so that the

tires and wheels are not dam-

aged.

- If the tire is subjected to a

severe impact, have the tire

and wheel inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

- Inspect the tire condition and

pressure every 1,800 miles

(3,000km).

CAUTION

• It is not easy to recognize tire

damage with your own eyes.

But if there is the slightest

hint of tire damage, have the

tire checked or replaced

because the tire damage may

cause air leakage from the

tire.

• If the tire is damaged by driv-

ing on a rough road, off road,

pothole, manhole, or curb

stone, it will not be covered by

the warranty.

CAUTION

7-51

Maintenance

FFUUSSEESS

A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-

tected from electrical overload dam-

age by fuses.

This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,

one located in the driver’s side panel

bolster, the other in the engine com-

partment near the battery.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-

sories, or controls do not work, check

the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse

has blown, the element inside the

fuse will be melted or broken.

If the electrical system does not

work, first check the driver’s side

fuse panel. Before replacing a blown

fuse, turn the engine and all switches

off, and then disconnect the negative

battery cable. Always replace a

blown fuse with one of the same rat-

ing.

If the replacement fuse blows, this

indicates an electrical problem. Avoid

using the system involved and imme-

diately consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Information

Four kinds of fuses are used : blade

type For lower amperage rating, car-

tridge type/Multi fuse/Battery fuse

terminal for higher amperage ratings.

Do not use a screwdriver or any

other metal object to remove

fuses because it may cause a

short circuit and damage the sys-

tem.

NOTICE

NEVER replace a fuse with any-

thing but another fuse of the

same rating.

• A higher capacity fuse could

cause damage and possibly

cause a fire.

• Do not install a wire or alu-

minum foil instead of the

proper fuse - even as a tem-

porary repair. It may cause

extensive wiring damage and

possibly a fire.

WARNING

■ Blade type

Normal

■ Cartridge type

Blown

Normal

Blown

■ Multi fuse

Normal

Blown

■ Battery fuse terminal

Normal

Blown

OLF074075

7-52

Maintenance

Instrument Panel Fuse

Replacement

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Turn all other switches OFF.

3. Open the fuse panel cover.

4. Refer to the label on the inside of

the fuse panel cover to locate the

suspected fuse location.

5. Pull the suspected fuse straight

out. Use the removal tool provided

in the engine compartment fuses

panel.

6. Check the removed fuse; replace

it if it is blown. Spare fuses are

provided in the instrument panel

fuse panels (or in the engine com-

partment fuse panel).

7. Push in a new fuse of the same

rating, and make sure it fits tightly

in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

In an emergency, if you do not have

a spare fuse, use a fuse of the same

rating from a circuit you may not

need for operating the vehicle, such

as the cigarette lighter fuse.

If the headlamps or other electrical

components do not work and the

fuses are OK, check the fuse panel

in the engine compartment. If a fuse

is blown, it must be replaced with the

same rating.

OTLE078026

OTLE078023

7-53

Maintenance

Fuse switch

Always, place the fuse switch to the

ON position.

If you move the switch to the OFF

position, some items such as the

audio system and digital clock must

be reset and the smart key may not

work properly.

Information

If the fuse switch is OFF, the above

message will appear.

• Always place the fuse switch in

the ON position while driving the

vehicle.

• Do not move the fuse switch

repeatedly. The fuse switch may

be damaged.

Engine Compartment Panel

Fuse Replacement

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Turn all other switches OFF.

3. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tap and pulling up.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace

it if it is blown. To remove or insert

the fuse, use the fuse puller in the

engine compartment fuse panel.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same

rating, and make sure it fits tightly

in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

OIK057165L

OTLE078025

OTLE078024

7-54

Maintenance

Main fuse

If the main fuse is blown, it must be

removed as follows:

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tab and pulling it up.

4. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-

ture above.

5. Replace the fuse with a new one

of the same rating.

6. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

Information

If the main fuse is blown, consult an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

After checking the fuse box in

the engine compartment

securely close the fuse box

cover inside the engine com-

partment, until it clicks.

If the fuse box is not closed

properly, water may leak in side,

possibly causing a malfunction

with the electrical system.

CAUTION

OTLA075027

7-55

Maintenance

Multi fuse

If the multi fuse is blown, it must be

removed as follows:

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tab and pulling it up.

4. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-

ture above.

5. Replace the fuse with a new one

of the same rating.

6. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

Information

If the multi fuse is blown, consult an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OTLE078028

7-56

Maintenance

Fuse/Relay Panel Description

Instrument panel fuse panel

Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you

can find the fuse/relay label describ-

ing fuse/relay name and capacity.

Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this

manual may be applicable to your

vehicle; the information is accurate at

the time of printing. When you inspect

the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to

the fuse box label.

OTLE078067

OTL078031N

Maintenance

Instrument panel fuse panel

Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected

A/CON1 7.5A A/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer (Auto A/C), E/R Junction Block (Blower Relay)

WIPER RR 15A ICM Relay Box (Rear Wiper Relay), Rear Wiper Motor

MODULE6 10A BCM, Smart Key Control Module

WASHER 15A Multifunction Switch (Washer Switch)

MODULE5 7.5A

Crash Pad Switch, Parking Distance Warning Buzzer, BCM, ATM Shift Lever, 4WD ECM,

Console Switch, Blind-Spot Collision Warning Unit LH/RH, Lane Keeping Assist Unit,

Forward Collision Avoidance Assist Unit

AIR BAG 15A SRS Control Module, Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor

MODULE1 10A

BCM, Smart Key Control Module, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, AMP, Power Outside Mirror

Switch, PCB Block (Power Outlet Relay), Wireless Charger, Surround View Monitor, Rear USB Charger

START 10A ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Relay), Transaxle Range Switch

MODULE7 7.5A

Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Rear Seat Warmer,

Surround View Monitor

HEATED STEERING 15A BCM

MODULE8 7.5A Center Facia Switch, Key Solenoid, Forward Collision Avoidance Assist Unit, Data Link Connector

MODULE4 7.5A

Multipurpose Check Connector, A/C Control Module, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit,

Electro Chromic Mirror, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, ATM Shift Lever ILL.,

Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Rear Seat Warmer

A/BAG IND 7.5A Instrument Cluster, Center Facia Switch

MODULE3 10A BCM, ATM Shift Lever, Stop Lamp Switch

SMART KEY1 15A Smart Key Control Module

MODULE9 10A BCM, Security Indicator, Rain Sensor

4WD 20A 4WD ECM

7-57

7-58

Maintenance

Instrument panel fuse panel

Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected

TAILGATE OPEN 10A Tail Gate Open Relay

S/HEATER RR 15A Rear Seat Warmer

MDPS 7.5A MDPS Unit

SMART KEY3 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module

CLUSTER 7.5A Instrument Cluster (IG1 Power)

SMART KEY2 10A Smart Key Control Module, Start/Stop Button Switch, Immobilizer Module

MULTIMEDIA 15A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit

INTERIOR LAMP 10A

Ignition Key Ill. & Door Warning Switch, Luggage Lamp, Glove Box Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp,

Front Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Room Lamp, Rear Personal Lamp LH/RH, Wireless Charger

DOOR LOCK 20A Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay, ICM Relay Box (Two Turn Unlock Relay)

SUNROOF2 20A Panorama Sunroof

POWER OUTLET 20A

[W/O Wireless Charging] Front Power Outlet & Cigarette Lighter,

[With Wireless Charging] Cigarette Lighter

BRAKE SWITCH 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch

MEMORY2 10A Instrument Cluster, A/C Control Module, Electro Chromic Mirror

P/SEAT (PASS) 30A Passenger Seat Manual Switch

S/HEATER FRT 20A Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, Front Seat Warmer Control Module

MODULE2 20A PCB Block (Fuse - ABS3, ECU6, TCU2)

SUNROOF1 20A Panorama Sunroof

A/CON2 7.5A A/C Control Module

HEATED MIRROR 10A Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module, ECM (G4FJ)

P/SEAT (DRV) 30A Driver Seat Manual Switch

7-59

Maintenance

Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected

SAFETY P/WINDOW

DRV

25A Driver Safety Power Window Module

P/WINDOW RH 25A Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch

P/WINDOW LH 25A Power Window Main Switch

AMP 25A AMP

Instrument panel fuse panel

7-60

Maintenance

Engine compartment fuse panel

Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you

can find the fuse/relay label describ-

ing fuse/relay name and capacity.

Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this

manual may be applicable to your

vehicle; the information is accurate at

the time of printing. When you inspect

the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to

the fuse panel label.

OTLE078029

OTL078030N

Maintenance

Engine compartment main fuse panel

Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected

MULTI

FUSE-1

MDPS 80A MDPS Unit

B+1 60A Smart Junction Block (ARISU-LT IPS 1, IPS 2, IPS 3, IPS 4, Fuse - AMP)

B+2 60A

Smart Junction Block (ARISU-LT IPS 5, IPS 6, IPS 7, IPS 8, Fuse - SMART KEY1,

SMART KEY2, BRAKE SWITCH, MODULE9)

B+3 50A

Smart Junction Block (Fuse - SUNROOF1, SUNROOF2, S/HEATER FRT, S/HEATER RR,

SAFETY P/WINDOW DRV),

Power Window Relay (Fuse - P/WINDOW LH, P/WINDOW RH)

ABS1 40A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector

ABS2 40A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector

IG1 40A

Ignition Switch (W/O Smart Key),

PCB Block (PDM (IG1)/PDM (ACC) Relay - With Smart Key)

IG2 30A

Start Relay, Ignition Switch (W/O Smart Key),

PCB Block (PDM (IG2) Relay - With Smart Key)

MULTI

FUSE-2

PTC HEATER 1 50A PTC 1 Relay

PTC HEATER 2 50A PTC 2 Relay

FUSE

B+4 50A

Smart Junction Block (Fuse - MODULE8, 4WD, P/SEAT (DRV), P/SEAT (PASS),

TAILGATE OPEN, DOOR LOCK,

Leak Current Autocut Device - Fuse Switch, INTERIOR LAMP, MULTIMEDIA, MEMORY2)

COOLING FAN1

40A [G4NC/G4KJ] Cooling Fan High Relay

50A [G4FJ] Cooling Fan High Relay

TCU3 40A [G4FJ - 7DCT] TCM

TCU4 40A [G4FJ - 7DCT] TCM

BLOWER 40A Blower Relay

POWER TAILGATE 40A Power Tail Gate Module

REAR HEATED 40A Rear Defogger Relay

7-61

7-62

Maintenance

Engine compartment main fuse panel

Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected

WIPER FRT2 10A BCW

E-CVVT2 20A [G4KJ] PCM

E-CVVT1 20A [G4KJ] PCM

WIPER FRT1 25A Ignition Switch (W/O Smart Key), PDM (IG2) Relay (With Smart Key)

TCU1 15A [G4FJ] TCM (7DCT), [G4KJ] PCM

A/C 10A E/R Junction Block (A/C Relay)

ECU3 20A PCM (G4NC/G4KJ) / ECM (G4FJ)

HORN 15A Horn Relay

BATTERY

MANAGEMENT

10A Not Used

SENSOR2 10A

[G4NC] Oil Control Valve #1/#2, Camshaft Position Sensor #1/#2, Purge Control Solenoid Valve,

Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, Canister Close Valve, E/R Junction Block (A/C Relay,

Cooling Fan High Relay)

[G4FJ] Oil Control Valve #1/#2, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Canister Close Valve,

RCV Control Solenoid Valve, E/R Junction Block (A/C Relay, Cooling Fan High Relay)

[G4KJ] Canister Close Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve,

E/R Junction Block (A/C Relay, Cooling Fan High Relay)

SENSOR1 15A Oxygen Sensor (Up)/(Down)

ECU2 20A IGNITION COIL #1/#2/#3/#4, Condenser (G4NC)

ECU5 15A PCM (G4NC) / ECM (G4FJ)

ECU4 15A PCM (G4NC/G4KJ) / ECM (G4FJ)

SENSOR3 10A

[G4NC] PCM

[G4FJ] ECM

[G4KJ] Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Oil Control Valve

7-63

Maintenance

Engine compartment main fuse panel

Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected

MODULE3 10A E/R Junction Block (Fuel Pump Relay)

DEICER 15A E/R Junction Block (Deicer Relay)

FUEL PUMP 20A E/R Junction Block (Fuel Pump Relay)

B/ALARM HORN 15A E/R Junction Block (B/Alarm Horn Relay)

ABS3 10A ESC Module

MODULE2 10A Not Used

POWER

OUTLER FRT

20A

Front Power Outlet & Cigarette Lighter (W/O Wireless Charging),

Front Power Outlet (With Wireless Charging)

ECU6 10A PCM (G4NC/G4KJ) / ECM (G4FJ)

TCU2 15A Transaxle Range Switch, TCM (G4FJ - 7DCT)

B/UP LAMP 10A TCM (G4FJ), Transaxle Range Switch, Electro Chromic Mirror, Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH

POWER

OUTLER REAR

20A Rear Power Outlet

ECU1 30A Engine Control Relay

[G4NC] : NU 2.0 GDI

[G4KJ] : Theta 2.4 GDI

7-64

Maintenance

LLIIGGHHTT BBUULLBBSS

Consult an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer to replace most vehicle light

bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle

light bulbs because other parts of the

vehicle must be removed before you

can get to the bulb. This is especially

true for removing the headlamp

assembly to get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing the headlamp

assembly can result in damage to

the vehicle.

Information

After heavy driving, rain or washing,

headlamp and liftgate lenses could

appear frosty. This condition is caused

by the temperature difference

between the lamp inside and the out-

side temperature. This is similar to the

condensation on your windows inside

your vehicle during the rain and does-

n't indicate a problem with your vehi-

cle. If the water leaks into the lamp

bulb circuitry, have your vehicle

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Information

- Desiccant

(if equipped)

This vehicle is equipped with desic-

cant to reduce fogging inside the head-

lamp due to moisture.

The desiccant is consumable and its

performance may change based on the

used period or environment.

If fogging inside the headlamp due to

moisture continues for a long time,

have your vehicle checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Prior to replacing a lamp,

depress the brake pedal,

move the shift lever into P

(Park) apply the parking

brake, place the igntion

switch to the LOCK/OFF posi-

tion, and take the key with you

when leaving the vehicle to

avoid sudden movement of

the vehicle and to prevent

possible electric shock.

• Be aware the bulbs may be

hot and may burn your fin-

gers.

WARNING

7-65

Maintenance

Headlamp, Daytime Running

Lamp, Side Marker, Parking

Lamp, Turn Signal Lamp and

Fog Lamp Replacement

Type A

(1) Headlamp (Low)

(2) Headlamp (High)

(3) Turn signal lamp/Parking lamp

(4) Side Marker

(5) Fog lamp*

(6) Daytime running lamp*

* : if equipped

Type B

(1) Headlamp (Low)

(2) Headlamp (High)

(3) Turn signal lamp

OTL078064N

OTLE078106

OTL078065N

OTL078016N

7-66

Maintenance

(4) Parking lamp

(5) Side Marker

(6) Fog lamp*

(7) Daytime running lamp*

* : if equipped

Headlamp (Halogen bulb)

• Always handle them carefully, and

avoid scratches and abrasions. If

the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with

liquids.

• Never touch the glass with bare

hands. Residual oil may cause the

bulb to overheat and burst when lit.

• A bulb should be operated only

when installed in a headlamp.

• If a bulb becomes damaged or

cracked, replace it immediately

and carefully dispose of it.

OLMB073042L

• Handle halogen bulbs with

care. Halogen bulbs contain

pressurized gas that will pro-

duce flying pieces of glass

that could cause injuries if

broken.

• Wear eye protection when

changing a bulb. Allow the

bulb to cool down before han-

dling it.

WARNING

7-67

Maintenance

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover

by turning it counterclockwise.

4. Disconnect the headlamp bulb

socket-connector.

5. Unsnap the headlamp bulb retain-

ing wire by pressing the end and

pushing it upward.

6. Remove the bulb from the head-

lamp assembly.

7. Install a new headlamp bulb and

snap the headlamp bulb retaining

wire into position by aligning the

wire with the groove on the bulb.

8. Connect the headlamp bulb sock-

et-connector.

9. Install the headlamp bulb cover by

turning it clockwise.

Information

The headlamp aiming should be

adjusted after an accident or after the

headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Turn signal lamp/Parking lamp

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pressing it in and rotating it

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the bulb align with the slots in the

socket. Pull the bulb out of the

socket.

OTLE078013

■ High/Low beam

Low

High

OTLE078019

7-68

Maintenance

5. Install a new bulb by inserting it

into the socket and rotating it until

it locks into place.

6. Install the socket in the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket

with the slots in the assembly.

7. Push the socket into the assembly

and turn the socket clockwise.

Daytime running light (DRL),

Parking lamp and Side marker

(LED type, if equipped)

If the LED lamp does not operate,

have the system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The LED lamps cannot be replaced

as a single unit because it is an inte-

grated unit. The LED lamps has to be

replaced with the unit.

A skilled technician should check or

repair the LED lamp, for it may dam-

age related parts of the vehicle.

Front fog lamp (if equipped)

If the light bulb does not operate,

have the vehicle checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Type C

(1) Headlamp (Low)

(2) Headlamp (High)

(3) Turn signal lamp

OTL078032N

OTL078016N

7-69

Maintenance

(4) Parking lamp

(5) Side Marker

(6) Fog lamp

(7) Daytime running lamp

Headlamp, Turn signal lamp,

Parking lamp, Daytime running

light and Side marker (LED type)

If the LED lamp does not operate,

have the system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The LED lamps cannot be replaced

as a single unit because it is an inte-

grated unit. The LED lamps has to be

replaced with the unit.

A skilled technician should check or

repair the LED lamp, for it may dam-

age related parts of the vehicle.

Front fog lamp

If the light bulb does not operate,

have the vehicle checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Side Repeater Lamp

Replacement

If the LED lamp (1) does not operate,

have the system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The LED lamps cannot be replaced

as a single unit because it is an inte-

grated unit. The LED lamps has to be

replaced with the unit.

A skilled technician should check or

repair the LED lamp, for it may dam-

age related parts of the vehicle.

OTL075066

7-70

Maintenance

Type A

(1) Tail/Stop lamp

(2) Turn signal lamp

(3) Tail lamp

(4) Back-up lamp

(5) Side Marker

Type B

(1) Tail/Stop lamp, Tail lamp

(2) Turn signal lamp

(3 Tail/Stop lamp, Tail lamp

(4) Back-up lamp

(5) Side Marker

Outside lamp

Stop/tail Lamp, Turn signal Lamp

and Side marker lamp

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the liftgate.

3. Remove the cover using a flat-

blade screwdriver.

OTL078034N OTL078109N

Rear Combination Light Bulb Replacement

7-71

Maintenance

4. Loosen the lamp assembly retain-

ing screws with a cross-tip screw-

driver.

5. Remove the rear combination

lamp assembly from the body of

the vehicle.

[A] : Tail/Stop lamp, [B] : Turn signal lamp,

[C] : Side marker

6. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

7. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pressing it in and rotating it

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the bulb align with the slots in the

socket. Pull the bulb out of the

socket.

8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it

into the socket and rotating it until

it locks into place.

9. Install the socket in the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket

with the slots in the assembly.

Push the socket into the assembly

and turn the socket clockwise.

10. Reinstall the lamp assembly to

the body of the vehicle.

Tail lamp, Tail/Stop lamp and Side

marker

If the LED lamp does not operate,

have the system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The LED lamps cannot replaced as a

single unit because it is an integrated

unit. The LED lamps has to be

replaced with the unit.

A skilled technician should check or

repair the LED lamp, for it may dam-

age related parts of the vehicle.

OTL078037N

OTL075035

OTL075036

7-72

Maintenance

Inside lamp

Tail lamp/Back-up lamp

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the liftgate.

3. Remove the service cover using a

flat-blade screwdriver.

4. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

5. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

6. Insert a new bulb by pushing it in

into the socket.

7. Install the socket into the assem-

bly by aligning the tabs on the

socket with the slots on the

assembly and turning the socket

clockwise.

8. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

Tail lamp, Tail/Stop lamp and Side

marker

If the LED lamp does not operate,

have the system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The LED lamps cannot replaced as a

single unit because it is an integrated

unit. The LED lamps has to be

replaced with the unit.

A skilled technician should check or

repair the LED lamp, for it may dam-

age related parts of the vehicle.

OTLE075016

OTL078039

Tail lamp

Back-up lamp

7-73

Maintenance

High Mounted Stop Lamp

Replacement

If the LED lamp (1) does not operate,

have the system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The LED lamps cannot be replaced

as a single unit because it is an inte-

grated unit. The LED lamps has to be

replaced with the unit.

A skilled technician should check or

repair the LED lamp, for it may dam-

age related parts of the vehicle.

License Plate Light Bulb

Replacement

1. Loosen the lens retaining screws

with a screwdriver.

2. Remove the lens.

3. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out.

4. Install a new bulb.

5. Reinstall the lens securely with

the lens retaining screws.

Interior Light Bulb Replacement

Map lamp and Room lamp

(LED type)

If the LED lamp does not operate,

have the vehicle checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OTLE078040

OTLE078041

OTLE075017

OTL075044

■ Room lamp

■ Map lamp

7-74

Maintenance

1. Using a flat-head screwdriver,

gently pry the lens from the interi-

or light housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.

4. Align the lens tabs with the interi-

or light housing notches and snap

the lens into place.

If the lamps do not operating, have

the vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Use care not to dirty or damage

lenses, lens tabs, and plastic

housings.

NOTICE

Map lamp, Room lamp, Vanity mirror lamp, Tailgate room lamp and Glove box lamp (Bulb type)

■ Map lamp

OTLE075018

OLFH074029

■ Vanity mirror lamp

■ Tailgate room lamp

OTL075043

OTL075045

■ Room lamp

OTLE078046

■ Glove box lamp

7-75

Maintenance

AAPPPPEEAARRAANNCCEE CCAARREE

Exterior Care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label

directions when using any chemical

cleaner or polish. Read all warning

and caution statements that appear

on the label.

Protecting your vehicle’s finish

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish

from rust and deterioration, wash it

thoroughly and frequently at least

once a month with lukewarm or cold

water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road

driving, you should wash it after each

off-road trip. Pay special attention to

the removal of any accumulation of

salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign

materials. Make sure the drain holes

in the lower edges of the doors and

rocker panels are kept clear and

clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,

industrial pollution and similar

deposits can damage your vehicle’s

finish if not removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain

water may not completely remove all

these deposits. A mild soap, safe for

use on painted surfaces, should be

used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-

oughly with lukewarm or cold water.

Do not allow soap to dry on the fin-

ish.

• Do not use strong soap, chemi-

cal detergents or hot water, and

do not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or when the body of the

vehicle is warm.

• Be careful when washing the

side windows of your vehicle.

Especially, with high-pressure

water, water may leak through

the windows and wet the interi-

or.

• To prevent damage to the plastic

parts, do not clean with chemi-

cal solvents or strong deter-

gents.

NOTICE

After washing the vehicle, test

the brakes while driving slowly

to see if they have been affected

by water before getting on the

road. If braking performance is

impaired, dry the brakes by

applying them lightly while main-

taining a slow forward speed.

WARNING

7-76

Maintenance

High-pressure washing

• When using high-pressure wash-

ers, make sure to maintain suffi-

cient distance from the vehicle.

Insufficient clearance or excessive

pressure can lead to component

damage or water penetration.

• Do not spray the camera, sensors

or its surrounding area directly with

a high pressure washer. Shock

applied from high pressure water

may cause the device to not oper-

ate normally.

• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to

boots (rubber or plastic covers)or

connectors as they may be dam-

aged if they come into contact with

high pressure water.

• Do not use any high-pressure noz-

zles, which induce either one-direct

water stream or water swirling.

• Water washing in the engine

compartment including high

pressure water washing may

cause the failure of electrical cir-

cuits located in the engine com-

partment.

• Never allow water or other liq-

uids to come in contact with

electrical/electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this

may damage them.

Waxing

A good coat of wax provides a barri-

er between your paint and environ-

mental contamination.

Keeping a good coat of wax on your

vehicle will help protect it.

Wax the vehicle when water will no

longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle

before waxing. Use a good quality

liquid or paste wax, and follow the

manufacturer's instructions. Wax all

metal trim to protect it and to main-

tain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-

als with a spot remover will usually

strip the wax from the finish. Be sure

to re-wax these areas even if the rest

of the vehicle does not yet need wax-

ing.

NOTICE

OTL078049

7-77

Maintenance

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body

with a dry cloth will scratch the

finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasive

cleaners, or strong detergents

containing highly alkaline or

caustic agents on chrome-plat-

ed or anodized aluminum parts.

This may result in damage to the

protective coating and cause

discoloration or paint deteriora-

tion.

Repairing your vehicle’s finish

Deep scratches or stone chips in the

painted surface must be repaired

promptly. Exposed metal will quickly

rust and may develop into a major

repair expense.

If your vehicle is damaged and

requires any metal repair or

replacement, be sure the body

shop applies anti-corrosion mate-

rials to the parts repaired or

replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects,

use a tar remover, not a scraper or

other sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-

metal parts from corrosion, apply a

coating of wax or chrome preser-

vative and rub to a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastal

areas, cover the bright metal parts

with a heavier coating of wax or

preservative. If necessary, coat the

parts with non-corrosive petroleum

jelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and

snow removal and dust control may

collect on the underbody. If these

materials are not removed, acceler-

ated rusting can occur on underbody

parts such as the fuel lines, frame,

floor pan and exhaust system, even

though they have been treated with

rust protection.

NOTICE

7-78

Maintenance

Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-

body and wheel openings with luke-

warm or cold water once a month,

after off-road driving and at the end

of each winter. Pay special attention

to these areas because it is difficult

to see all the mud and dirt. It will do

more harm than good to wet down

the road grime without removing it.

The lower edges of doors, rocker

panels, and frame members have

drain holes that should not be

allowed to clog with dirt; trapped

water in these areas can cause rust-

ing.

Aluminum wheel maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated

with a clear protective finish.

• Do not use abrasive cleaner, pol-

ishing compound, solvent, or

wire brushes on aluminum

wheels.

• Clean the wheel when it has

cooled.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral

detergent, and rinse thoroughly

with water. Also, clean the

wheels after driving on salted

roads.

• Do not wash the wheels with

high-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any cleaners con-

taining acid or alkaline deter-

gents.

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corro-

sion

By using the most advanced design

and construction practices to combat

corrosion, HYUNDAI produces vehi-

cles of the highest quality. However,

this is only part of the job. To achieve

the long-term corrosion resistance

your vehicle can deliver, the owner’s

cooperation and assistance is also

required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corro-

sion on your vehicle are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneath

the vehicle.

• Removal of paint or protective

coatings by stones, gravel, abra-

sion or minor scrapes and dents

which leave unprotected metal

exposed to corrosion.

NOTICE

After washing the vehicle, test

the brakes while driving slowly

to see if they have been affected

by water. If braking performance

is impaired, dry the brakes by

applying them lightly while

maintaining a slow forward

speed.

WARNING

7-79

Maintenance

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehi-

cle is regularly exposed to corrosive

materials, corrosion protection is

particularly important. Some of the

common causes of accelerated cor-

rosion are road salts, dust control

chemicals, ocean air and industrial

pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in

which corrosion is most likely to

occur. For example, corrosion is

accelerated by high humidity, partic-

ularly when temperatures are just

above freezing. In such conditions,

the corrosive material is kept in con-

tact with the car surfaces by moisture

that is slow to evaporate.

Mud is particularly corrosive

because it is slow to dry and holds

moisture in contact with the vehicle.

Although the mud appears to be dry,

it can still retain the moisture and

promote corrosion.

High temperatures can also acceler-

ate corrosion of parts that are not

properly ventilated so the moisture

can be dispersed. For all these rea-

sons, it is particularly important to

keep your vehicle clean and free of

mud or accumulations of other mate-

rials. This applies not only to the vis-

ible surfaces but particularly to the

underside of the vehicle.

To help prevent corrosion

Keep your car clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is

to keep your vehicle clean and free

of corrosive materials. Attention to

the underside of the vehicle is partic-

ularly important.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area

— where road salts are used, near

the ocean, areas with industrial

pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you

should take extra care to prevent

corrosion. In winter, hose off the

underside of your vehicle at least

once a month and be sure to clean

the underside thoroughly when

winter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the

vehicle, pay particular attention to

the components under the fenders

and other areas that are hidden

from view. Do a thorough job; just

dampening the accumulated mud

rather than washing it away will

accelerate corrosion rather than

prevent it. Water under high pres-

sure and steam are particularly

effective in removing accumulated

mud and corrosive materials.

7-80

Maintenance

• When cleaning lower door panels,

rocker panels and frame members,

be sure that drain holes are kept

open so that moisture can escape

and not be trapped inside to accel-

erate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your vehicle in a damp,

poorly ventilated garage. This cre-

ates a favorable environment for cor-

rosion. This is particularly true if you

wash your vehicle in the garage or

drive it into the garage when it is still

wet or covered with snow, ice or

mud. Even a heated garage can con-

tribute to corrosion unless it is well

ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish

should be covered with "touch-up"

paint as soon as possible to reduce

the possibility of corrosion. If bare

metal is showing through, the atten-

tion of a qualified body and paint

shop is recommended.

Bird droppings are highly corrosive

and may damage painted surfaces in

just a few hours. Always remove bird

droppings as soon as possible.

Interior Care

Interior general precautions

Prevent caustic solutions such as

perfume and cosmetic oil, from con-

tacting the interior parts because

they may cause damage or discol-

oration. If they do contact the interior

parts, wipe them off immediately.

See the instructions for the proper

way to clean vinyl.

• Never allow water or other liq-

uids to come in contact with

electrical/electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this

may damage them.

• When cleaning leather products

(steering wheel, seats etc.), use

neutral detergents or low alco-

hol content solutions. If you use

high alcohol content solutions

or acid/alkaline detergents, the

color of the leather may fade or

the surface may get stripped off.

NOTICE

7-81

Maintenance

Cleaning the upholstery and

interior trim

Vinyl (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from

vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum

cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a

vinyl cleaner.

Fabric (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-

ric with a whisk broom or vacuum

cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-

tion recommended for upholstery or

carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-

diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If

fresh spots do not receive immediate

attention, the fabric can be stained

and its color can be affected. Also, its

fire-resistant properties can be

reduced if the material is not proper-

ly maintained.

Using anything but recommended

cleaners and procedures may

affect the fabric’s appearance and

fire-resistant properties.

Leather (if equipped)

• Feature of Seat Leather

- Leather is made from the outer

skin of an animal, which goes

through a special process to be

available for use. Since it is a nat-

ural object, each part differs in

thickness or density. Wrinkles

may appear as a natural result of

stretching and shrinking depend-

ing on the temperature and

humidity.

- The seat is made of stretchable

fabric to improve comfort.

- The parts contacting the body are

curved and the side supporting

area is high which provides driv-

ing comfort and stability.

- Wrinkles may appear naturally

from usage. It is not a fault of the

product.

NOTICE

• Wrinkles or abrasions which

appear naturally from usage

are not covered by warranty.

• Belts with metallic acces-

sories, zippers or keys inside

the back pocket may damage

the seat fabric.

• Make sure not to wet the seat.

It may change the nature of

natural leather.

• Jeans or clothes which could

bleach may contaminate the

surface of the seat covering

fabric.

CAUTION

7-82

Maintenance

• Caring for the leather seats

- Vacuum the seat periodically to

remove dust and sand on the

seat. It will prevent abrasion or

damage of the leather and main-

tain its quality.

- Wipe the natural leather seat

cover often with dry or soft cloth.

- Use of a proper leather protective

may prevent abrasion of the

cover and helps maintain the

color. Be sure to read the instruc-

tions and consult a specialist

when using leather coating or

protective agents.

- Light colored (beige, cream

beige) leather is easily contami-

nated and the stain is noticeable.

Clean the seats frequently.

- Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It may

cause the surface to crack.

• Cleaning the leather seats

- Remove all contaminations

instantly. Refer to instructions

below for removal of each con-

taminant.

- Cosmetic products (sunscreen,

foundation, etc.)

Apply cleansing cream on a cloth

and wipe the contaminated spot.

Wipe off the cream with a wet

cloth and remove water with a dry

cloth.

- Beverages(coffee, soft drink, etc.)

Apply a small amount of neutral

detergent and wipe until contami-

nations do not smear.

- Oil

Remove oil instantly with

absorbable cloth and wipe with

stain remover used only for natu-

ral leather.

- Chewing gum

Harden the gum with ice and

remove gradually.

Cleaning the seat belt webbing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild

soap solution recommended for

cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow

the instructions provided with the

soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the

webbing because this may weaken

the seat belt.

Cleaning the interior window

glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the

vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-

ered with an oily, greasy or waxy

film), they should be cleaned with

glass cleaner. Follow the directions

on the glass cleaner container.

Do not scrape or scratch the

inside of the rear window. This

may result in damage to the rear

window defroster grid.

NOTICE

7-83

Maintenance

EEMMIISSSSIIOONN CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM

The emission control system of your

vehicle is covered by a written limited

warranty. Please see the warranty

information contained in the Owner’s

Handbook & Warranty Information

booklet in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an

emission control system to meet all

applicable emission regulations.

There are three emission control

systems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control sys-

tem

(2) Evaporative emission control sys-

tem

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function

of the emission control systems, it is

recommended that you have your

vehicle inspected and maintained by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in

accordance with the maintenance

schedule in this manual.

For the Inspection and

Maintenance Test (With Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from mis-

firing during dynamometer test-

ing, turn the Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system off by

pressing the ESC switch (ESC

OFF light illuminated).

• After dynamometer testing is

completed, turn the ESC system

back on by pressing the ESC

switch again.

1. Crankcase Emission Control

System

The positive crankcase ventilation

system is employed to prevent air

pollution caused by blow-by gases

being emitted from the crankcase.

This system supplies fresh filtered air

to the crankcase through the air

intake hose. Inside the crankcase,

the fresh air mixes with blow-by

gases, which then pass through the

PCV valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative Emission Control

System Including Onboard

Refueling Vapor Recovery

(ORVR)

The Evaporative Emission Control

System is designed to prevent fuel

vapors from escaping into the atmos-

phere. The ORVR system is

designed to allow the vapors from

the fuel tank to be loaded into a can-

ister while refueling at the gas sta-

tion, preventing the escape of fuel

vapors into the atmosphere.

NOTICE

7-84

Maintenance

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel

tank are absorbed and stored in the

onboard canister. When the engine is

running, the fuel vapors absorbed in

the canister are drawn into the surge

tank through the purge control sole-

noid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve

(PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is

controlled by the Engine Control

Module (ECM); when the engine

coolant temperature is low during

idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-

orated fuel is not taken into the

engine. After the engine warms-up

during ordinary driving, the PCSV

opens to introduce evaporated fuel to

the engine.

3. Exhaust Emission Control

System

The Exhaust Emission Control

System is a highly effective system

which controls exhaust emissions

while maintaining good vehicle per-

formance.

When the engine starts or fails to

start, excessive attempts to restart

the engine may cause damage to the

emission system.

Vehicle modifications

• This vehicle should not be modi-

fied. Modification of your vehicle

could affect its performance, safety

or durability and may even violate

governmental safety and emis-

sions regulations.

In addition, damage or performance

problems resulting from any modifi-

cation may not be covered under

warranty.

• If you use unauthorized electronic

devices, it may cause the vehicle to

operate abnormally, wire damage,

battery discharge and fire. For your

safety, do not use unauthorized

electronic devices.

Engine exhaust (carbon monox-

ide) precautions

• Carbon monoxide can be present

with other exhaust fumes. If you

smell exhaust fumes of any kind in

your vehicle, drive with all the win-

dows fully open. Have your vehicle

checked and repaired immediately.

Engine exhaust gases contain

carbon monoxide (CO). Though

colorless and odorless, it is

dangerous and could be lethal if

inhaled. Follow the instructions

on this page to avoid CO poi-

soning.

WARNING

7-85

Maintenance

• Do not operate the engine in con-

fined or closed areas (such as

garages) any more than what is

necessary to move the vehicle in or

out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in an

open area for more than a short

time with the engine running,

adjust the ventilation system (as

needed) to draw outside air into the

vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped

vehicle for any extended time with

the engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to

start, excessive attempts to restart

the engine may cause damage to

the emission control system.

Operating precautions for cat-

alytic converters (if equipped)

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide vari-

ety of automobile components

and parts, including compo-

nents found in the interior fur-

nishings in a vehicle, contain or

emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause can-

cer and birth defects and repro-

ductive harm. In addition, cer-

tain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of compo-

nent wear contain or emit chem-

icals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproduc-

tive harm.

WARNING

The exhaust system and cat-

alytic converter are very hot

during and immediately after

the engine has been running. To

avoid SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH:

• Do not park, idle, or drive the

vehicle over or near flamma-

ble objects, such as grass,

vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.

A hot exhaust system can

ignite flammable items under

your vehicle.

• Keep away from the exhaust

system and catalytic convert-

er or you may get burned.

Also, Do not remove the heat

sink around the exhaust sys-

tem, do not seal the bottom of

the vehicle, and do not coat

the vehicle for corrosion con-

trol. It may present a fire risk

under certain conditions.

WARNING

7-86

Maintenance

Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-

alytic converter emission control

device. To prevent damage to the

catalytic converter and to your vehi-

cle, take the following precautions:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for

gasoline engines.

• Do not operate the vehicle when

there are signs of engine malfunc-

tion, such as misfire or a noticeable

loss of performance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the

engine. Examples of misuse are

coasting with the engine off and

descending steep grades in gear

with the engine off.

• Do not operate the engine at high

idle speed for extended periods (5

minutes or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any

part of the engine or emission con-

trol system. All inspections and

adjustments must be made by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Avoid driving with extremely low

fuel level. If you run out of gasoline,

it could cause the engine to misfire

and result in excessive loading of

the catalytic converter.

7-87

Maintenance

CCAALLIIFFOORRNNIIAA PPEERRCCHHLLOORRAATTEE NNOOTTIICCEE

Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:

Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry batteries,

must be disposed of according to Title 22 California Code of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Dimensions..............................................................8-2

Engine......................................................................8-2

Gross Vehicle Weight ............................................8-3

Luggage Volume.....................................................8-3

Bulb Wattage ..........................................................8-4

Tires and Wheels ...................................................8-6

Air Conditioning System........................................8-7

Recommended Lubricants and Capacities..........8-8

Recommended SAE Viscosity Number.......................8-10

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................8-11

Vehicle Certification Label .................................8-11

Tire Specification and Pressure Label .............8-12

Engine Number.....................................................8-12

Refrigerant Label.................................................8-12

Consumer Information.........................................8-13

Reporting Safety Defects ...................................8-14

DDIIMMEENNSSIIOONNSS

8-2

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

EENNGGIINNEE

Items in (mm)

Overall length 176.38 (4,480)

Overall width 72.83 (1,850)

Overall height

64.76 (1,645) / 66.34 (1,650) *

Front tread

225/60 R17

63.31 (1,608)

225/55 R18

245/45 R19 63.15 (1,604)

Rear tread

225/60 R17

63.78 (1,620)

225/55 R18

245/45 R19 63.58 (1,615)

Wheelbase 105.12 (2,670)

Items Nu 2.0 GDI Theta 2.4 GDI

Displacement

cu. in (cc)

121.99 (1,999) 143.96 (2,359)

Bore x Stroke

in. (mm)

3.19X3.81 (81X97) 3.46X3.81 (88X97)

Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2

No. of cylinders 4, In-line 4, In-line

: with roof rack

GGRROOSSSS VVEEHHIICCLLEE WWEEIIGGHHTT

8-3

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

LLUUGGGGAAGGEE VVOOLLUUMMEE

Item

Nu 2.0 GDI Theta 2.4 GDI

2WD AWD 2WD AWD

Automatic transmission Automatic transmission

5-passenger 4,586 (2,080) 4,740 (2,150) 4,718 (2,140) 4,850 (2,200)

Item

5-passenger

When the rear cargo adjustable

shelf is installed in the upper

position:

When the rear cargo adjustable

shelf is installed in the lower

position:

SAE*

Front row

57 cu ft (1,614 l) 61.94 cu ft (1,754 l)

Second row

28.11 cu ft (796 l) 30.97 cu ft (877 l)

lbs (kg)

* : Society of Automotive Engineers

8-4

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

BBUULLBB WWAATTTTAAGGEE

Light Bulb Bulb type Wattage

Front

Type A

Headlamp

Low H7 55

High HB3 60

Turn Signal lamp/Parking lamp PY28/8W 28/8

Side Marker LED LED

Type B

Headlamp

Low H7 55

High HB3 60

Turn Signal lamp PY28/8W 28/8

Parking lamp LED LED

Side Marker LED LED

Type C

Headlamp

Low LED LED

High LED LED

Turn signal lamp LED LED

Parking lamp LED LED

Side Marker LED LED

Daytime running lamp (DRL) LED LED

Fog lamp H8 35

Side Repeater lamp (Outside mirror) LED LED

8-5

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Light Bulb Bulb type Wattage

Rear

combination

lamp

Type A

Tail/Stop P28/8W 28/8

Tail W5W 5

Turn signal P28/8W 28/8

Back up W16W 16

Side Marker W5W 5

Type B

Tail/Stop LED LED

Tail LED LED

Turn signal P28/8W 28/8

Back up W16W 16

Side Marker LED LED

High mounted stop lamp LED LED

License plate lamp W5W 5

Interior

Map lamp

Type A W10W 10

Type B LED LED

Room lamp

Type A FESTOON 10

Type B LED LED

Vanity mirror lamp FESTOON 5

Tailgate room lamp FESTOON 10

Glove box lamp W5W 5

8-6

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

TTIIRREESS AANNDD WWHHEEEELLSS

When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.

Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or not work properly.

CAUTION

Items Tire Size Wheel Size

Inflation pressure

kPa (psi)

Wheel lug nut

torque kgf·m

(lbf·ft, N·m)

Normal Load Maximum Load

Front Rear Front Rear

Full size tire

225/60 R17 7.0J X 17

240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35)

11~13

(79~94,

107~127)

225/55 R18 7.0J X 18

245/45 R19 7.5J X 19

Compact spare tire

T155/90 D16 4.0T X 16

420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)

T135/90 D17 4.0T X 17

• It is permissible to add 3 psi (20 kPa) to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are

expected soon. Tires typically loose 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) temperature drop. If extreme temper-

ature variations are expected, recheck your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.

• An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level. Thus, if you

plan to drive a high-altitude area, check the tire pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a prop-

er level (Air inflation per altitude: +2.4 psi/1 mile (+10 kPa/1 km).

NOTICE

8-7

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for more details.

Items Weight of Volume Classification

Refrigerant

oz. (g)

19.4±0.88 (550±25) R-1234yf

Compressor lubricant

oz. (cc)

4.23±0.35 (120±10) PAG 30

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.

The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

RREECCOOMMMMEENNDDEEDD LLUUBBRRIICCAANNTTSS AANNDD CCAAPPAACCIITTIIEESS

Lubricant Volume Classification

Engine oil *

(drain and

refill)

Recommends

2.0 GDI

4.23 US qt. (4.0 l)

SAE 5W-20/API Latest (ILSAC Latest)

2.4 GDI

5.07 US qt. (4.8 l)

Automatic transmission fluid

2.0 GDI

2WD

7.71 US qt. (7.3 l)

MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV,

NOCA ATF SP-IV, HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV or

other brands meeting the above specification

approved by HYUNDAI Motor Co.

AWD

7.5 US qt. (7.1 l)

2.4 GDI

2WD

7.5 US qt. (7.1 l)

AWD

7.5 US qt. (7.1 l)

Engine Coolant

2.0 GDI

7.93 US qt. (7.5 l)

Mixture of antifreeze and water

(Phosphate-based Ethylene glycol coolant for alu-

minum radiator)

2.4 GDI

8.14 US qt. (7.7 l)

8-8

8-9

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

: Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

: Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econ-

omy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure

in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

Lubricant Volume Classification

Brake fluid

0.74~0.85 US qt.

(0.7~0.8 l)

FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Rear differential oil (AWD)

0.56~0.67 US qt.

(0.53~0.63 l)

HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE75W/85

(SK HCT-5 GEAR OIL 75W/85 or equivalent)

Transfer case oil (AWD)

2.0 GDI

0.45~0.5 US qt.

(0.43~0.47 l)

HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE75W/85

(SK HCT-5 GEAR OIL 75W/85 or equivalent)

2.4 GDI

Fuel

16.38 US gal. (62 l)

Refer to "Fuel requirements" in foreword section

8-10

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Recommended SAE Viscosity

Number

Always be sure to clean the area

around any filler plug, drain

plug, or dipstick before check-

ing or draining any lubricant.

This is especially important in

dusty or sandy areas and when

the vehicle is used on unpaved

roads. Cleaning the plug and

dipstick areas will prevent dirt

and grit from entering the

engine and other mechanisms

that could be damaged.

CAUTION

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold

weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity

engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance,

however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication

in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended

could result in engine damage. When choosing an oil, consider the range of

temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change.

Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

Engine Oil *

10W-30

5W-20, 5W-30

°C

(°F)

: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil

of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20/API Latest (ILSAC Latest).

However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select

the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

8-11

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

VVEEHHIICCLLEE CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN

LLAABBEELL

The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the number used in register-

ing your car and in all legal matters

pertaining to its ownership, etc.

The number is punched on the floor

under the passenger seat. To check

the number, open the cover.

The VIN is also on a plate attached

to the top of the dashboard. The

number on the plate can easily be

seen through the windshield from

outside.

The vehicle certification label attached

on the driver’s side center pillar gives

the Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN).

VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR ((VVIINN))

OTLE088005

■ VIN label (if equipped)

OTL085002

OTL085001

■ Frame number

8-12

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

The tires supplied on your new vehi-

cle are chosen to provide the best

performance for normal driving.

The tire label located on the driver’s

side center pillar gives the tire pres-

sures recommended for your car.

The engine number is stamped on

the engine block as shown in the

drawing.

The refrigerant label provides infor-

mation such as refrigerant type and

amount.

The label is located on the underside

of the hood.

EENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERRTTIIRREE SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN AANNDD

PPRREESSSSUURREE LLAABBEELL

OTLE085006

OTLA085003

■ 2.0 GDI

OLF084004L

■ 2.4 GDI

RREEFFRRIIGGEERRAANNTT LLAABBEELL

((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

OTLE088009

8-13

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Eastern Region:

Connecticut, Delaware,

Maine, Massachusetts, New

Hampshire, New Jersey, New York,

Pennsylvania, Rhode Island,

Vermont.

Eastern Region

1122 Cranbury South River Road

Jamesburg, NJ 08831

(800) 633-5151

Southern Region:

Florida, Georgia, Maryland, North

Carolina, South Carolina, Virginia,

West Virginia.

Southern Region

3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway

Suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066

(800) 633-5151

South Central Region:

Alabama, Arkansas, Louisiana,

Mississippi, New Mexico, Oklahoma,

Tennessee, Texas.

South Central Region

1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400

Coppell, TX 75019

(800) 633-5151

Central Region:

Illinois, Indiana, lowa, Kentucky,

Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska,

North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio,

Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.

Central Region

2 Trans Am Plaza Dr #500 Oakbrook

Terrace, IL 60181

(800) 633-5151

Western Region:

Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, California,

Colorado, Idaho, Montana, Nevada,

Oregon, Utah, Washington,

Wyoming.

Western Region

10550 Talbert Avenue P.O.Box

20850 Fountain Valley, California

92728-0850

(800) 633-5151

CCOONNSSUUMMEERR IINNFFOORRMMAATTIIOONN

This consumer information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.Your HYUNDAI dealer will help answer any questions you

may have as you read this information.

HYUNDAI motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owner’s Manual, particularly the

information under the headings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARNING".

If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, please contact your nearest

HYUNDAI Motor America Regional Office as listed in the following:

8-14

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying HYUNDAI

MOTOR AMERICA.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to http://www.safercar.gov;

download the SaferCar mobile application;

or write to: Administrator, NHTSA

1200 New Jersey Ave, SE,

West Building Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group

of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual prob-

lems between you, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.

RREEPPOORRTTIINNGG SSAAFFEETTYY DDEEFFEECCTTSS

Index

I-2

Accessing Your Vehicle ....................................................3-4

Immobilizer System ...................................................3-13

Remote Key..................................................................3-4

Smart Key.....................................................................3-8

Air Bag - Advanced Supplemental Restraint System.....2-48

Additional Safety Precautions....................................2-72

Air Bag Warning Labels.............................................2-73

Curtain air bags ..........................................................2-53

Driver's front air bag ..................................................2-50

How Does the Air Bag System Operate?...................2-54

Occupant Classification System (OCS) .....................2-59

Passenger's front air bag.............................................2-50

Side air bags ...............................................................2-51

SRS Care ....................................................................2-71

What to Expect After an Air Bag Inflates..................2-58

Where Are the Air Bags? ...........................................2-50

Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision?........2-65

Air Cleaner......................................................................7-25

Filter Replacement .....................................................7-25

Air Conditioning System ..................................................8-7

All Wheel Drive (AWD).................................................5-43

AWD operation...........................................................5-45

Emergency precautions ..............................................5-49

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ......................................5-33

Appearance Care.............................................................7-75

Exterior Care ..............................................................7-75

Interior Care ...............................................................7-80

Auto Hold .......................................................................5-30

Automatic Climate Control System..............................3-137

Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning ................3-138

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning.....................3-139

System Maintenance ................................................3-148

System Operation .....................................................3-146

Automatic Transmission .................................................5-14

Automatic transmission operation..............................5-14

Good Driving Practices ..............................................5-19

Battery.............................................................................7-33

Battery Recharging.....................................................7-34

For Best Battery Service ............................................7-34

Reset Features ............................................................7-35

Before Driving ..................................................................5-4

Before Entering the Vehicle .........................................5-4

Before Starting .............................................................5-4

Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW) System...............5-52

BCW (Blind-Spot Collision Warning) .......................5-53

Blind-Spot Collision Warning - Sensor Location ......5-57

Limitations of the System ..........................................5-58

RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning) ........5-55

Index

I-3

Brake Fluid .....................................................................7-23

Checking the Brake Fluid Level ................................7-23

Braking System...............................................................5-21

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)..................................5-33

Auto Hold...................................................................5-30

Disc Brakes Wear Indicator........................................5-22

Downhill Brake Control (DBC).................................5-40

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) ................................5-24

Electronic Stability Control (ESC).............................5-35

Good Braking Practices..............................................5-42

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC).................................5-40

Parking Brake.............................................................5-22

Power Brakes..............................................................5-21

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM) .......................5-39

Bulb Wattage.....................................................................8-4

California Perchlorate Notice .........................................7-87

Cargo Net Holder..........................................................3-167

Cargo Security Screen ..................................................3-167

Center Console Storage ................................................3-157

Child Restraint System (CRS)........................................2-38

Children Always in the Rear ......................................2-38

Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS) ................2-41

Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS).................2-39

Climate Control Additional Features............................3-156

Automatic Ventilation...............................................3-156

Cluster ionizer ..........................................................3-156

Sunroof Inside Air Recirculation .............................3-156

Climate Control Air Filter...............................................7-27

Filter Inspection..........................................................7-27

Clock .............................................................................3-165

Clothes Hanger .............................................................3-165

Consumer Information....................................................8-13

Cruise Control...............................................................5-100

Cruise Control operation ..........................................5-100

Cup Holder....................................................................3-159

Curtain air bags...............................................................2-53

Dimensions .......................................................................8-2

Disc Brakes Wear Indicator ............................................5-22

Door Locks .....................................................................3-15

Automatic Door Lock and Unlock Features ..............3-18

Child-Protector Rear Door locks................................3-19

Operating Door Locks from Inside the Vehicle .........3-16

Operating Door Locks from Outside the Vehicle ......3-15

Downhill Brake Control (DBC) .....................................5-40

Drive Mode Integrated Control System .........................5-51

Driver Assist System.....................................................3-124

Rear View Monitor...................................................3-124

Surround View Monitor ...........................................3-125

Index

I-4

Driver Attention Warning (DAW) System......................5-96

Resetting the System ..................................................5-97

System Malfunction ...................................................5-98

System Setting and Activation ...................................5-96

System Standby ..........................................................5-98

Driver's front air bag.......................................................2-50

Electric Power Steering (EPS)........................................3-21

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB).....................................5-24

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................................5-35

Emission Control System ...............................................7-83

Crankcase Emission Control System .........................7-83

Evaporative Emission Control System Including

Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) ........7-83

Exhaust Emission Control System.............................7-84

Engine ...............................................................................8-2

Engine compartment..................................................1-6, 7-3

Engine Coolant ...............................................................7-19

Changing Engine Coolant ..........................................7-22

Checking the Engine Coolant Level ..........................7-19

Engine Number ...............................................................8-12

Engine Oil .......................................................................7-17

Checking the Engine Oil and Filter ...........................7-18

Checking the Engine Oil Level..................................7-17

Explanation Of Scheduled Maintenance Items ..............7-14

Exterior Features .................................................3-47, 3-171

Fuel Filler Door..........................................................3-48

Hood ...........................................................................3-47

Roof Rack.................................................................3-171

Exterior Lights ..............................................................3-107

AUTO headlamp position ........................................3-108

Battery saver function ..............................................3-114

Daytime running light (DRL) ..................................3-107

Front fog lamp ..........................................................3-114

Headlamp delay function..........................................3-115

Headlamp position....................................................3-109

High Beam Assist (HBA).........................................3-110

High beam operation ................................................3-109

Lane change signals..................................................3-113

Parking lamp position ..............................................3-108

Turn signals ..............................................................3-113

Exterior overview .............................................................1-2

Floor Mat Anchor(s) .....................................................3-166

Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) System

- Camera Type .............................................................5-60

FCA Sensor ................................................................5-65

FCA Warning Message and System Control..............5-63

Limitations of the System ..........................................5-68

System Not Operating ................................................5-67

System Setting and Activation ...................................5-60

Index

I-5

Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) System

- Sensor Fusion Type (Front Radar + Front Camera) ...5-73

FCA Sensor ................................................................5-78

FCA Warning Message and System Control..............5-76

Limitations of the System ..........................................5-81

System Not Operating ................................................5-80

System Setting and Activation ...................................5-73

Front Seat Heaters...........................................................2-20

Front Seats ........................................................................2-6

Front Ventilated Seats .....................................................2-21

Front Windshield Washers ............................................3-122

Fuel Filler Door ..............................................................3-48

Fuses ...............................................................................7-51

Engine Compartment Panel Fuse Replacement .........7-53

Fuse/Relay Panel Description ....................................7-56

Instrument Panel Fuse Replacement ..........................7-52

Glove Box .....................................................................3-157

Gross Vehicle Weight........................................................8-3

Hazard Warning Flasher ...................................................6-2

Head restraints ................................................................2-15

Heated Seats and Ventilated Seats ..................................2-20

Heated Steering Wheel ...................................................3-23

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) .....................................5-40

Hood................................................................................3-47

Horn ................................................................................3-23

If The Engine Overheats...................................................6-6

If the Engine Will Not Start..............................................6-3

If the Engine Doesn't Turn Over or

Turns Over Slowly ....................................................6-3

If the Engine Turns Over Normally but

Doesn't Start ..............................................................6-3

If You Have a Flat Tire ...................................................6-14

Changing Tires ...........................................................6-15

Jack and Tools ............................................................6-14

Ignition Switch..................................................................5-6

Engine Start/Stop Button..............................................5-9

Key Ignition Switch .....................................................5-6

Immobilizer System........................................................3-13

Index

I-6

Important Safety Precautions............................................2-2

Air Bag Hazards...........................................................2-2

Always Wear Your Seat Belt........................................2-2

Control Your Speed ......................................................2-3

Driver Distraction.........................................................2-2

Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition ..........................2-3

Restrain All Children....................................................2-2

In Case of an Emergency While Driving .........................6-2

If the Engine Stalls at a Crossroad or Crossing ...........6-2

If the Engine Stalls While Driving...............................6-2

If you Have a Flat Tire While Driving.........................6-3

Inside Rearview Mirror...................................................3-24

Instrument Cluster...........................................................3-65

Gauges and Meters.....................................................3-67

Icy Road Warning Light.............................................3-70

Instrument Cluster Control.........................................3-66

LCD Display Messages..............................................3-84

Warning and Indicator Lights.....................................3-72

Instrument panel overview ...............................................1-5

Interior Features............................................................3-159

Cargo Net Holder .....................................................3-167

Cargo Security Screen..............................................3-167

Clock ........................................................................3-165

Clothes Hanger.........................................................3-165

Cup Holder ...............................................................3-159

Floor Mat Anchor(s).................................................3-166

Luggage Tray............................................................3-170

Plastic Bag Hook......................................................3-166

Power Outlet.............................................................3-161

Sunvisor....................................................................3-160

USB Charger ............................................................3-162

Wireless Cellular Phone Charging System ..............3-162

Interior Lights ...............................................................3-116

Front Door Lamp......................................................3-118

Front Map Lamp.......................................................3-117

Front Room Lamp ....................................................3-117

Glove box lamp ........................................................3-119

Interior lamp AUTO cut ...........................................3-117

Liftgate room lamp...................................................3-119

Rear lamp..................................................................3-118

Vanity mirror lamp ...................................................3-119

Interior overview...............................................................1-4

Jump Starting ....................................................................6-4

Index

I-7

Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) System ..............................5-87

Limitations of the System ..........................................5-93

LKA System Function Change ..................................5-95

LKA System Operation ..............................................5-89

Warning Light and Message.......................................5-91

LCD Display ...................................................................3-91

LCD Display Control .................................................3-91

LCD Display Modes ..................................................3-92

Liftgate............................................................................3-52

Non-Powered liftgate .................................................3-52

Power Liftgate ............................................................3-54

Smart Liftgate.............................................................3-61

Light..............................................................................3-107

Exterior Lights..........................................................3-107

Interior Lights...........................................................3-116

Welcome System ......................................................3-115

Light Bulbs .....................................................................7-64

Daytime Running Lamp Replacement.......................7-65

Fog Lamp Replacement .............................................7-65

Headlamp Replacement..............................................7-65

High Mounted Stop Lamp Replacement....................7-73

Interior Light Bulb Replacement ...............................7-73

License Plate Light Bulb Replacement......................7-73

Parking Lamp Replacement .......................................7-65

Rear Combination Light Bulb Replacement..............7-70

Side Marker Replacement ..........................................7-65

Side Repeater Lamp Replacement .............................7-69

Turn Signal Lamp Replacement.................................7-65

Luggage Tray ................................................................3-170

Luggage Volume ...............................................................8-3

Maintenance Services .......................................................7-4

Owner Maintenance Precautions..................................7-4

Owner's Responsibility.................................................7-4

Manual Climate Control System ..................................3-127

Heating and Air Conditioning ..................................3-128

System Maintenance ................................................3-135

System Operation .....................................................3-133

Mirrors ............................................................................3-24

Inside Rearview Mirror ..............................................3-24

Side View Mirrors ......................................................3-36

Multimedia System ...........................................................4-3

Antenna ........................................................................4-2

Audio / Video / Navigation System (AVN) .................4-4

AUX, USB and iPod

Port ..........................................4-2

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Hands-Free..............4-4

Steering Wheel Audio Control .....................................4-3

Index

I-8

Non-Powered liftgate......................................................3-52

Owner Maintenance..........................................................7-5

Owner Maintenance Schedule......................................7-6

Panoramic Sunroof .........................................................3-43

Closing the Sunroof....................................................3-45

Sliding the Sunroof ....................................................3-44

Sunshade.....................................................................3-44

Tilting the Sunroof .....................................................3-45

To Reset the Sunroof..................................................3-46

Parking Brake ........................................................5-22, 7-24

Checking the Parking Brake ......................................7-24

Passenger's front air bag .................................................2-50

Plastic Bag Hook ..........................................................3-166

Power Brakes ..................................................................5-21

Power Liftgate.................................................................3-54

Power Outlet .................................................................3-161

Rear Seat Heaters............................................................2-23

Rear Seats .......................................................................2-12

Rear View Monitor .......................................................3-124

Rear Window Wiper and Washer Switch .....................3-123

Recommended Lubricants and Capacities........................8-8

Recommended SAE Viscosity Number .....................8-10

Refrigerant Label ............................................................8-12

Remote Key ......................................................................3-4

Reporting Safety Defects................................................8-14

Roof Rack .....................................................................3-171

Scheduled Maintenance Services .....................................7-8

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions

(Nu 2.0 GDI, Theta 2.4 GDI) .................................7-12

Normal Maintenance Schedule

(Nu 2.0 GDI, Theta 2.4 GDI) ...................................7-9

Severe Driving Conditions.........................................7-13

Seat Belts ........................................................................2-24

Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions ....................2-34

Care of Seat Belts.......................................................2-37

Seat Belt Restraint System.........................................2-26

Seat Belt Safety Precautions ......................................2-24

Seat Belt Warning Light.............................................2-25

Index

I-9

Seats ..................................................................................2-4

Front Seat Heaters ......................................................2-20

Front Seats....................................................................2-6

Front Ventilated Seats.................................................2-21

Head restraints............................................................2-15

Heated Seats and Ventilated Seats .............................2-20

Rear Seat Heaters .......................................................2-23

Rear Seats...................................................................2-12

Safety Precautions ........................................................2-5

Side air bags....................................................................2-51

Side View Mirrors...........................................................3-36

Smart Cruise Control With Stop & Go System............5-105

Conventional Cruise Control Mode .........................5-116

Limitations of the System ........................................5-117

Smart Cruise Control Radar Sensor .........................5-114

Smart Cruise Control Speed.....................................5-106

Smart Cruise Control Switch ...................................5-105

Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance..5-110

To Adjust the Sensitivity of Smart Cruise Control ..5-115

Smart Key .........................................................................3-8

Smart Liftgate .................................................................3-61

Special Driving Conditions...........................................5-122

Driving at night ........................................................5-123

Driving in flooded areas...........................................5-124

Driving in the rain ....................................................5-123

Hazardous driving conditions ..................................5-122

Highway driving.......................................................5-124

Reducing the risk of a rollover.................................5-125

Rocking the vehicle..................................................5-122

Smooth cornering .....................................................5-123

Steering Wheel................................................................3-21

Electric Power Steering (EPS) ...................................3-21

Heated Steering Wheel ...............................................3-23

Horn............................................................................3-23

Tilt Steering/Telescope Steering.................................3-22

Storage Compartment ...................................................3-157

Center Console Storage............................................3-157

Glove Box ................................................................3-157

Sunglass Holder........................................................3-158

Sunglass Holder ............................................................3-158

Sunvisor ........................................................................3-160

Surround View Monitor ................................................3-125

Index

I-10

Theft-Alarm System .......................................................3-20

Tilt Steering/Telescope Steering .....................................3-22

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .......................6-8

Changing a Tire with TPMS ......................................6-12

Check Tire Pressure......................................................6-8

Low Tire Pressure LCD Display with

Position Indicator ....................................................6-10

Low Tire Pressure Telltale..........................................6-10

Tire Pressure Monitoring System.................................6-9

TPMS Malfunction Indicator .....................................6-11

Tire Specification and Pressure Label ............................8-12

Tires and Wheels .....................................................7-36, 8-6

All Season Tires .........................................................7-48

Check Tire Inflation Pressure.....................................7-38

Low Aspect Ratio Tires..............................................7-50

Radial-Ply Tires..........................................................7-49

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures.............7-37

Snow Tires..................................................................7-49

Summer Tires .............................................................7-48

Tire Care.....................................................................7-36

Tire Maintenance........................................................7-41

Tire Replacement........................................................7-40

Tire Rotation...............................................................7-38

Tire Sidewall Labeling ...............................................7-41

Tire Terminology and Definitions..............................7-45

Tire Traction ...............................................................7-41

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ...........................7-39

Wheel Replacement....................................................7-41

Towing ............................................................................6-21

Emergency Towing.....................................................6-23

Removable Towing Hook...........................................6-22

Tie-down Hook...........................................................6-25

Towing Service...........................................................6-21

Trailer Towing...............................................................5-130

Driving with a trailer................................................5-133

If you decide to pull a trailer....................................5-130

Maintenance when trailer towing.............................5-136

Trailer towing equipment .........................................5-132

Trip Computer...............................................................3-103

USB Charger.................................................................3-162

Vehicle Certification Label .............................................8-11

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).............................8-11

Vehicle Load Limit .......................................................5-138

Tire Loading Information Label...............................5-139

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM)............................5-39

Index

I-11

Washer Fluid ...................................................................7-24

Checking the Washer Fluid Level ..............................7-24

Welcome System...........................................................3-115

Windows .........................................................................3-39

Power Windows..........................................................3-40

Windshield Defrosting And Defogging ........................3-150

Auto Defogging System...........................................3-153

Automatic Climate Control System .........................3-151

Defogging logic........................................................3-152

Manual Climate Control System..............................3-150

Rear Window Defroster............................................3-154

Windshield Wipers........................................................3-120

Winter Driving ..............................................................5-126

Snow or Icy Conditions............................................5-126

Winter Precautions ...................................................5-128

Wiper Blades...................................................................7-29

Blade Inspection.........................................................7-29

Blade Replacement.....................................................7-29

Wipers and Washers......................................................3-120

Front Windshield Washers........................................3-122

Rear Window Wiper and Washer Switch .................3-123

Windshield Wipers ...................................................3-120

Wireless Cellular Phone Charging System...................3-162

Index

Hyundai 2019 Tucson

Product's Documents

Owner's Manual

Specifications

Hyundai 2019 HYUNDAI TUCSON Questions and Answers

Related Products

Vevor L17040C101&L17040T101 Truck Cargo Mat & Backrest Mat TPE Custom Fit for Hyundai Palisade 2020-2024

Hyundai HYSW1500E 1500W 32cm Electric Artificial Grass Sweeper and Lawn Brush

Vevor HP121 High Pressure Fuel Pump for Kia Hyundai Santa 35320-2G720 35320-2G740

Vevor HP156 High Pressure Fuel Pump for Hyundai Accent/Sonata Tucson Veloster Kia Rio

Pyle PHYELANT16 2016 Hyundai Elantra Replacement Stereo

Hyundai HY-T26 True Wireless Earphones